PDF Toshiba Perception E & EX Manual
Perception E & EX Manual Perception E & EX Manual
User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 368
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Perceptions & ex DiGITAL PBX INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS, INC. Telecommunication Systems Division TOSHIBAPUBLICATIONS SECTION200-255-000 FEBRUARY 1992 TOSHIBASYSTEMPRACTICES DIGITALPBX Perception& a ex DIGITALPBX INSTALLATIONAND MAINTENANCE MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 200-255-200 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-300 FAULT FINDING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-500 TECHNICAL BULLETINS SECTION 200-255-600 TOSHIBASYSTEM PRACTICES DIGITAL PBX Perception& INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTlON200-255-200 FEBRUARY1992 65ex DIGITALPBX INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 200-255-200 FEBRUARY 1992 PERCEPTION,&, INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS PARAGRAPH SUBJECT PAGE CHAPTER1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 5.00 5.10 5.20 INTRODUCTION .. .. ... .. .. . .. . . . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . ... . . ... .. .... .... . .. .. . ... ...*... PURPOSE .. .... .. .. .. .. . ... ... .. . . . .. . . .. . . ... . ... . . ... .. . ... . ... . .. ... .. . ... . .. . .. .. . ... .. .. ..... .. . ... . . ... . .... . . ORGANIZATION .. ... .. .. ... . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . ... .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. ... . . ... . .. .. . . ... ..... ... .. . .. . .. ... . .... . REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION . . ... . ... .. . ... . .. .. .. ... . .. ... .. .. . ... . . ... .. .... .... . .. .. . ... . . ... . . SYSTEM MNEMONICS . .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... .. .. . ... . ... . ... . .. ... .. .... ... . ... . . ... .. ... . . INSPECTION, PACKING AND STORAGE .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . ... . . ... .. ..... ... . . ... . ... . . ... . . Inspection .... .. .. . .. ... ... .. . .. . . .. . . .. . .. .. . ... . .. .. .. ... . . ... . ... .. .. .. . . ... . . ... . ... .. .... . .... . ... . .... . .... . Packing and Storage .. .. .. . . . .. . . . ... . ... . .. ... . .. .. .. .. . ... .. .. .. .. . . .. . ... . .. ... . .... ... .. .. .. . ... . .... . . Required Tools ... ... .. .. .. . .. . . . . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. ... . ... . .. .. .. . ... . ... . . .. . .. ... . ..... ... . .. .. . ... . .... . . 1-l 1-l 1-l 1-l 1-l l-2 1-2 l-2 l-2 CHAPTER2 1. 1.00 1.10 1.20 2. 2.00 2.10 2.20 3. 4. 5. 6. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................................................................... PERCEPTIONe .................................................................................................. Basic Equipment Cabinet ................................................................................ Expansion Cabinet .......................................................................................... Power Supply .................................................................................................. PERCEPTIONex ................................................................................................. Basic Equipment Cabinet ................................................................................ Expansion Cabinet .......................................................................................... Power Supply .................................................................................................. PEAK LOAD BATTERY ...................................................................................... EXTENDED RESERVE POWER ........................................................................ POWER FAILURE/EMERGENCY TRANSFER .................................................. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD DESCRIPTION.. .................................................... NFDU (Floppy Disk Drive Unit). ....................................................................... LCCU (Central Control Unit) ............................................................................ NTWU (Time Switch Unit) ............................................................................... NPRU (Paging and Music-on-Hold Unit) ......................................................... NRCU (Receiver Unit) ..................................................................................... NEKU (Electronic Telephone Unit) .................................................................. NDKU (Digital Telephone Unit). ....................................................................... NSTU (Standard Telephone Unit) ................................................................... NDSU (DSS Console Controller Unit) ............................................................. NDCU (Data Control Unit) ............................................................................... NMDU (Modem Pooling Unit) .......................................................................... NCOU (Central Office Trunk Unit) ................................................................... NEMU (E & M TIE Trunk Unit). ........................................................................ NLSU (DID Trunk Interface Unit). .................................................................... NDTU (Tl Interface) ........................................................................................ NOCU (Off-hook Call Announce Interface Unit) .............................................. HVSUHVSI (Off-hook Call Announce PCBs) ................................................. DVSI (Digital Off-hook Call Announce PCB) ................................................... 2-l 2-l 2-1 2-l 2-l 2-l 2-l 2-l 2-2 2-2 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-200 FEBRUARY 1992 PARAGRAPH 7. a. a.00 a.10 a.20 a.30 a.40 a.50 8.60 a.70 8.80 a.90 CHAPTER 3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CHAPTER 4 1. 1 .oo 1.10 2. 2.00 2.10 2.20 3. 3.00 3.10 3.20 3.30 3.40 3.50 3.60 SUBJECT PAGE 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 NPRU ............................................................................. ................................. 2-7 NCOU/NEMU/NLSU........................................................ ................................ 2-7 NDTU...................................................................... .... ..................................... 2-7 NEKU/NSTU/NOCU/NDKU........................................ ................................. .... 2-a NDSU ..................................................................... .... .................... .... ..... ........ 2-a NDCU ................................................................................................. ..... ........ 2-a NMDU .............................................................................................................. 2-a NPSA-M/LPSA-M............................................................................................ 2-a N PSA-S ........................................................................................................... 2-a PERIPHERALEQUIPMENT...............................................................................2-a Electronicand Digital Telephone.....................................................................2-a Headset Upgrade (HHEU)...............................................................................2-9 Attendant Console ........................................................................................... 2-9 DSS Console ................................................................................................... 2-9 StandardTelephone........................................................................................ 2-9 DDIU/PDIU...................................................................................................... 2-9 Paging Equipment........................................................................................... 2-9 Music-on-Hold................................................................................................. 2-9 Universal Night Answer ...................................................................................2-9 Station Message Detail Recording ..................................................................2-9 SYSTEM INDICATORS AND CONTROLS . . ... . .. .. .. .. . . ... . . .. . . . .. . ...... .. .. . ... . . ... .... . ... . NFDU . ... .. .. . ... . . ... . .. .. . .. .. . . .. . . ... . . ... .. . .. ... .. . .. . .. .. .. ... . . ... . ... . . ... . ... . . .... ..... ... . . .... . ... . . ... LCCU . ... . ... . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. . . .. .. . ... . .. .. ... .. . ... .. .. . .... . .. .. . ... . . ... . .... . .... ..... ... . . .... . ... . .. .. NTWU ... . ... . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. . ... . .. ... . ... . .. .. . .. .. ... . . ... . . .. . . ... . .... . .... .... . .. .. . ... . . ... . .... INSTALLATION SITE REQUIREMENTS . .. .. ... . . ... . . ... . .... . ... . .... . .... .. ... . .. .. . ... . .... . .. COMMERCIALPOWER . . .. . ... . .. . .. ... . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . . .. . . .. . . ... . . .. .. ..... . ... . ... . . ... . ... . . .. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . . ... . ... . ... . . ... . .... . .... . ... . . ... . .... ... EQUIPMENT ROOM RECOMMENDATIONS . .. . ... . . .. . . ... . ... . . ... .. ... . .... . ... . . ... . ... . .. . CABLING CONSIDERATIONS .. . .. ... . .. .. . .. . ... . . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . . .. . .... . ... . .... .. ... . .... ... . . . .. . . .. GROUNDING................................................ ................... ................................ ... 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION ..................................................................................4-1 PERCEPTlONe .................................................................................................. 4-1 Power Supply Installation................................................................................4-1 ExpansionCabinet Installation........................................................................4-3 PERCEPTIONex................................................................................................. 4-4 Power Supply Installation................................................................................4-4 First ExpansionCabinet Installation................................................................4-6 Second ExpansionCabinet Installation........................................................... 4-a PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION.. ................................................... 4-9 NFDU ............................................................................................................... 4-9 4-10 LCCU ............................................................................................................... NTWU .............................................................................................................. 4-10 NPRU .............................................................................................................. 4-10 NEKU, NDKU, and NOCU ...............................................................................4-10 4-12 NSTU ............................................................................................................... 4-12 NDSU .............................................................................................................. ‘. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-200 FEBRUARY 1992 PARAGRAPH 3.70 3.80 3.90 4. 5. 5.00 5.10 5.20 5.30 5.40 5.50 5.60 5.70 5.80 5.90 6. 6.00 6.10 6.20 6.30 6.40 6.50 6.60 6.70 6.80 6.90 6.100 6.110 6.120 6.130 6.140 6.150 6.160 6.170 6.180 7. 7.00 8.00 9. 9.00 9.10 9.20 9.30 9.40 9.50 9.60 9.80 SUBJECT PAGE NEMU, NCOU, and NLSU ............................................................................... 4-13 NDTU ............................................................................................................... 4-15 NMDU and NDCU ........................................................................................... 4-18 CABLE CONNECTIONS..................................................................................... 4-19 ELECTRONICTELEPHONESTATION EQUIPMENTINSTALLATION............. 4-20 ElectronicTelephoneConnections..................................................................4-20 ElectronicTelephoneWall Mounting...............................................................4-20 Off-hook Call Announce .................................................................................. 4-20 Carbon HandsetTransmitter Installation.........................................................4-23 HHEU Installation............................................................................................ 4-23 Attendant Console Connection........................................................................4-25 DSS Console Connections.............................................................................. 4-26 Digital Data InterfaceUnit Connections(DDIU) .............................................. 4-26 DDIU-MAT....................................................................................................... 4-28 DDIU-MA ......................................................................................................... 4-30 DIGITAL TELEPHONESTATION EQUIPMENTINSTALLATION...................... 4-32 Digital Telephone Connections........................................................................4-32 Digital TelephoneWall Mounting.....................................................................4-32 Off-hook Call Announce .................................................................................. 4-34 Carbon HandsetTransmitter Installation.........................................................4-35 Beep Strap Removal ....................................................................................... 4-36 Microphone/SpeakerThreshold Adjustment (Speakerphoneonly) ................. 4-36 4-36 HHEU Installation............................................................................................ Attendant Console Connection........................................................................4-37 DSS Console Connections..............................................................................4-37 Digital Data Inter-faceUnit Installation(PDIU) ................................................. 4-37 Common DIU Connections..............................................................................4-39 EIA InterfaceLeads (Signals)..........................................................................4-39 DIP Switch Options.......................................................................................... 4-46 PDIU-DI Installation......................................................................................... 4-46 PDIU-DI to PersonalComputer (PC) Installation............................................. 4-47 PDIU-DSto Printer Installation........................................................................4-47 PDIU-DSto Modem Installation.......................................................................4-51 PDIU-DS Disassemblyand Assembly.............................................................4-52 PDIU-DVPDIU-DSInstallationTests ...............................................................4-52 STANDARDTELEPHONEEQUIPMENT INSTALLATION................................. 4-58 Standard Telephone Connections...................................................................4-58 TRUNK CONNECTIONS....................................................................................4-58 PERIPHERALEQUIPMENTINSTALLATION..................................................... 4-58 Modem Pooling Connections(DDIU-MAonly) ................................................ 4-58 Power Failure/EmergencyTransfer.. ...............................................................4-58 Reserve Power ................................................................................................ 4-60 Paging Equipment...........................................................................................4-61 Music-on-Hold................................................................................................. 4-62 Universal Night Answer ...................................................................................4-62 Station Message Detail Recording ..................................................................4-63 Lodging/HealthCare Data Audit.. ....................................................................4-67 ... -Ill- INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-200 FEBRUARY1992 PARAGRAPH IO. SUBJECT PAGE 10.00 SYSTEM POWER UP .. . .. . .. .. . . ... ... ... .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . ... ... ..... .. ... . ... . . ... .. .. . ... General . .. .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. ... .. ... .. .. .. . .. . . . .. .. . . . . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . ... ........ ... . .. .. . ... . . ... . ... 4-67 4-67 CHAPTER 5 MDF ARRANGEMENT .. . .. .. . .. . .. .... ... . ... . .. . .. .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . ... . .. .. . ... ... .. .. ... .. .. .. . . ... . ... . . .. 5-I TABLE LIST TABLE 5-I 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-1 I 5-12 5-13 S-14 s-15 SUBJECT CARD SLOT/CABLE CONNECTOR MATRIX ........................................................ LIST OF CONNECTOR CABLES ........................................................................... ATTENDANT CONSOLE #0 & #1 ........................................................................... PAGING, MUSIC & UNA RINGING ........................................................................ NDSU/NDKU (DSS CONSOLE) “C” SLOT ............................................................. NDSU/NEKU/NDKU/NSTU/NDCU/NMDU/NOCU (LOO- L03/L15 - L18). ............. NDSU/NEKU/NDKU/NSTU/NDCU/NMDU/NOCU (LO4 - Ll l/L1 9 - L26) or NCOU/NLSU/NEMU (TO7 - TOO/-T15 - T08) .......................................................... CENTRAL OFFICE LINE CONNECTION & PFT CONTROL Jl ............................. STATION LINE CONNECTION J2 .......................................................................... ATTENDANT CONSOLE #O & #l ........................................................................... PAGING, MUSIC & UNA RINGING ........................................................................ NCOU/NEMU/NLSU/NDTU (TOOw 115) ................................................................. NDSU/NEKU/NDKU/NSTU/NDCU/NMDU/NOCU (UOO- U31) or NCOU/NEMU/NLSU (T16 u T31) ............................................................................ CENTRAL OFFICE LINE CONNECTION & PFT CONTROL Jl ............................. STATION LINE CONNECTION J2.. ........................................................................ PAGE 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 FIGURE LIST FIGURE 2-I 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 3-I 3-2 3-3 4-I 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 SUBJECT PERCEPTION, BASIC CABINET ........................................................................... PERCEPTION, EXPANSION CABINET ................................................................ PERCEPTION,, BASIC CABINET ......................................................................... PERCEPTION,, WITH EXPANSION CABINETS .................................................. PERCEPTION,, MAIN POWER SUPPLY.. ............................................................ DPFT FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM ............................................................................. PERCEPTlONe PCB INSTALLATION .................................................................... PERCEPTION,, PCB INSTALLATION .................................................................. PERCEPTION, MINIMUM FLOOR SPACE ........................................................... PERCEPTION,, MINIMUM FLOOR SPACE.. ........................................................ UL GROUNDING DIAGRAM ................................................................................... PERCEPTION, BASIC CABINET REAR COVER .................................................. PERCEPTION, CABLE CONNECTIONS.. ............................................................. PERCEPTlONe VOLTAGE CHECKS ..................................................................... PEAK LOAD BATTERY .......................................................................................... PERCEPTION, POWER SUPPLY CONTROLS AND INDICATORS .................... -iv- PAGE 2-l 2-I 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 3-I 3-I 3-2 4-I 4-I 4-2 4-3 4-3 . INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-200 FEBRUARY 1992 FIGURE 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-l 1 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-32 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-36 4-37 4-38 4-39 4-40 4-41 4-42 4-43 4-44 4-45 4-46 4-47 4-48 4-49 4-50 SUBJECT PAGE PERCEPTION, EXPANSIONCABINET INSTALLATION...................................... 4-3 PERCEPTION,, BASIC CABINET REAR COVER ................................................ PERCEPTION,, CABLE CONNECTIONS ............................................................. PERCEPTION,, VOLTAGE CHECKS ................................................................... PERCEPTION,, POWER SUPPLY CONTROLS AND INDICATORS.. ................. PERCEPTION,, EXPANSION CABINET INSTALLATION .................................... NFDU STRAPPING.. ............................................................................................... LCCU STRAPPING ................................................................................................. NTWU STRAPPING ................................................................................................ NPRU STRAPPING ................................................................................................ NRCU MOUNTING ................................................................................................. NDKU SWITCH OPTIONS.. .................................................................................... NEMU STRAPPING ................................................................................................ NCOU STRAPPING ................................................................................................ NLSU STRAPPING ................................................................................................. NDTU STRAPPING.. ............................................................................................... NMDU STRAPPING ................................................................................................ ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE CONNECTION ......................................................... REMOVAL OF ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE BASE ............................................... REMOVAL OF HANDSET HANGER ...................................................................... INSTALLATION OF MOUNTING BASE FOR WALL-MOUNT INSTALLATION ..... HVSI/HVSU INSTALLATION .................................................................................. ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE PCB CONNECTIONS .............................................. OFF-HOOK CALL ANNOUNCE CONNECTION (NOCU) ....................................... LOCATION OF CARBON STRAPS ........................................................................ REMOVAL OF HHEU MODULAR CONNECTOR ACCESS TAB.. ......................... INSTALLATION OF HHEU UPGRADE OPTION .................................................... ATTENDANT CONSOLE #0 CONNECTION .......................................................... ATTENDANT CONSOLE #I CONNECTION .......................................................... DSS CONSOLE CONNECTION FOR PERCEPTION, “C” SLOT.. ........................ DSS CONSOLE CONNECTION FOR PERCEPTION,, “U” SLOTS AND PERCEPTION, ‘I” SLOTS.. ................................................................................... DIGITAL DATA INTERFACE UNIT CONNECTION (DDIU-MA and DDIU-MAT) ... INSTALLING DDIU-MAT.. ....................................................................................... DDIU-MAT DIP SWITCHES.. .................................................................................. DDIU-MA DIUA PCB ............................................................................................... DIUB PCB ............................................................................................................... DIGITAL TELEPHONE CONNECTION .................................................................. REMOVAL OF DIGITAL TELEPHONE BASE ........................................................ REMOVAL OF HANDSET HANGER ...................................................................... INSTALLATION OF MOUNTING BASE FOR WALL-MOUNT INSTALLATION ..... DVSU INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ TELEPHONE PCB CONNECTIONS AND STRAPS.. ............................................. HHEU INSTALLATION FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONE ............................................. DIGITAL DSS CONSOLE CONNECTION FOR PERCEPTION, “C” SLOT ........... DIGITAL DSS CONSOLE CONNECTION FOR PERCEPTION,, “U” SLOTS AND PERCEPTION, “L” SLOTS ............................................................................ -V- 4-5 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-10 4-10 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-12 4-14 4-14 4-16 4-16 4-19 4-21 4-22 4-22 4-22 4-23 4-23 4-24 4-24 4-24 4-25 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-29 4-31 4-31 4-33 4-34 4-34 4-34 4-35 4-35 4-36 4-38 4-38 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-200 FEBRUARY1992 FIGURE 4-51 4-52 4-53 4-54 4-55 4-56 4-57 4-58 4-59 4-60 4-61 4-62 4-63 4-64 4-65 4-66 4-67 4-68 4-69 4-70 4-71 4-72 4-73 4-74 4-75 4-76 5-l 5-2 5-3 SUBJECT PERCEPTION DATA INSTALLATION EXAMPLE BLOCK DIAGRAM.. ................. PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS MODULAR CABLURJ-45 ADAPTER CONNECTIONS ........... PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS MODULAR CORDS AND RJ-45/RS-232 ADAPTER PIN CONNECTIONS.. .................................................................................................... PDIU-DS JUMPER PLUG OPTIONS/RS-232 CONNECTOR INFORMATION ...... PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS SW1 DIP SWITCH INFORMATION .......................................... PDIU-DI PCBIDIGITAL TELEPHONE INSTALLATION .......................................... PDIU-DS TO TOSHIBA PRINTER, RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................... PDIU-DI TO IBM XT-TYPE COMPUTER, RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................... PDIU-DI TO IBM AT-TYPE COMPUTER, RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS .................. .................................................................................... PDIU-DS TO HAYES-TYPE SMART MODEM, RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS.. .................................................................................................... PDIU-DS DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM ................................................. PC TO PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS.. ................................................. PC TO PRINTER TEST CALL USING MANUAL DIALING.. ................................... INTERNAL PC TO EXTERNAL PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS.. .......... EXTERNAL PC TO INTERNAL PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS.. .......... STANDARD TELEPHONE CONNECTION.. ........................................................... MODEM POOLING CONNECTION (DDIU-MA ONLY) .......................................... RESERVE POWER INSTALLATION ...................................................................... PAGING WITH MUSIC OVER EXTERNAL SPEAKER FROM SAME AMPLIFIER PAGING WITH ONE AMPLIFIER ........................................................................... PAGING WITH MULTIPLE AMPLIFIERS ............................................................... LCCU SWITCHES ................................................................................................... EXAMPLE: SMDR CALL RECORD ........................................................................ EXAMPLE: AUDIT PRINTOUT (LODGING/HEALTH CARE) ................................. INSERTING DISK (PERCEPTION, ONLY) .......................................................... INSERTING DISK (PERCEPTION, ONLY) ............................................................ CONNECTOR LOCKING BAR.. .............................................................................. MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME LAYOUT ................................................................ SECONDARY PROTECTOR DIAGRAM ................................................................ -vi- PAGE 4-40 4-41 4-42 4-43 4-44 4-46 4-48 4-49 4-50 4-53 4-54 4-55 4-55 4-55 4-56 4-59 4-60 4-61 4-62 4-63 4-64 4-65 4-66 4-68 4-69 4-69 5-I 5-2 5-3 ” INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-201 FEBRUARY 1992 CHAPTER 1 DDIU-MA-Digital Data InterfaceUnit (Stand-alone) INTRODUCTION DDIU-MAT-Digital Data Interface Unit (Electronic Telephone) 1. PURPOSE DDSS-Digital Direct Station Selection Console 1 .OO This section describes the installation procedures necessary to ensure proper operation of the PERCEPTIONeLex system. DKT-Digital Telephone DPFT-Power Failure/Emergency Transfer Unit 2. ORGANIZATION DSS-Direct Station Selection Console (Electronic Telephone) 2.00 The organization of this manual is as follows: DVSU-PCB for Off-hook Call Announce (installed inside the digital telephone) 1. INTRODUCTION 2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EKT-Electronic Telephone 3. INSTALLATION SITE REQUIREMENTS FDDO-Floppy Disk Drive 0 4. SYSTEM INSTALLATION FDDl-Floppy 5. MDF ARRANGEMENTS Disk Drive 1 GND-Ground 3. REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION HHEU-Optional Headset Module 3.00 The PERCEPTIONeslex system is supported by a complete set of documentation. A list of the reference documentation associated with the PERCEPTIONe&ex system is provided below: HVSI-PCB for Off-hook Call Announce (installed inside the electronic telephone) Document Fault Finding General Description Operating Procedures Programming System Record HVSU-PCB for Off-hook Call Announce (installed inside the electronic telephone) Section Number 200-255-500 LCCU-Central Control Unit 200-255-400 200-255-300 LCD-Liquid Crystal Display LCEC-M-PERCEPTIONex Basic Cabinet 4. SYSTEM MNEMONICS LCEC-S-PERCEPTIONex Expansion Cabinet 4.00 The system is provided with a complete set of mnemonics that relate directly to its operation and features. The following alphabetical list describes the mnemonics used in this manual. LPSA-M-PERCEPTlONe, Main Power Supply DATT-Attendant MDF-Main Distribution Frame NCEC-M-PERCEPTlONe Basic Cabinet NCEC-S-PERCEPTlONe Expansion Cabinet Console DDIU-Digital Data Interface Unit PC6 (Electronic Telephone) NCOU-Central Office Trunk Unit l-l INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-201 FEBRUARY1992 NDCU-Data TTY-Teletypewriter Control Unit NDKU-Digital Telephone, Digital DSS, PDIU-DI, PDIU-DS Unit UNA-Universal Night Answer 5. INSPECTION, PACKING and STORAGE NDSU-DSS Telephone) Console Controller Unit (Electronic 5.00 Inspection 5.01 When the system is received, examine all packages and make careful note of any visible damage. If any damage is found, bring it to the attention of the delivery carrier and make the proper claims. NDTU-Digital Trunk Unit NEKU-Electronic NEMU-E Telephone Unit & M TIE Trunk Unit NFDU-Floppy NLSU-DID 5.02 Check the system against the purchase order and packing slip. If it is determined that equipment is missing, contact your supplier immediately. Disk Drive Unit Trunk Interface Unit NMDU-Modem Pooling Unit 5.03 After unpacking (and before installing), inspect all equipment for damage. If any is detected, contact your supplier immediately. NOCU-Off-hook Call Announce Interface Unit NPRU-Paging CAUTION! When handling (installing, removing, examining, etc.)prin ted circuit boards (PCBs), do not touch the back (soldered) side or edge connector. Always hold the PCB by its edge whenever handling it. and Music-on-Hold Unit NPSA-M-PERCEPTlONe Main Power Supply NPSA-S-PERCEPTIONehex SUPPlY Expansion Power NRCU--Receiver Unit 5.10 Packing and Storage NSTU-Standard Telephone Unit NTWU-Time Switch Unit 5.11 When storing or shipping PCBs, be sure they are packed in their original antistatic bags for protection against static discharge. PCB-Printed Circuit Board 5.20 Required Tools PDIU-DI-Integrated Telephone) PDIU-DB-Stand-alone board Dial) PFT-Power 5.21 Installationof the PERCEPTIONeLe, systems requires standard telephony tools. A 13mm socket wrench and extension is recommended for ease of expansion cabinet installation. Data Interface Unit (Digital Data Interface Unit (Key- Fail Transfer SMDR-Station Message Detail Recording 1-2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-202 FEBRUARY 1992 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION TOSHISA Perception, 1. PERCEPTION, 1.00 Basic Equipment Cabinet 1.Ol The basic equipment cabinet (NCEC-M) consists of a single, free-standing cabinet mounted on casters for easy movement. Once system installation has been completed and the cabinet has been positioned, the casters can be locked to prevent movement. The interior of the cabinet houses two shelves for printed circuit card installation. A separate area is provided for installation of the power supply and peak load battery. MDF connections are facilitated by amphenol connectors located on the rear of the cabinet (Figure 2-l). FIGURE P-2-PERCEPTION, EXPAWIUN LABINtI supply, this chassis contains the system ring generator and a charger/inverter for Reserve Power. Located on the front of the chassis are a circuit breaker and LED indicator for each power supply output, and an AC power indicator, and the system power switch. The battery switch is also on the front of the NPSA-M. 2. PERCEPTIONex FIGURE 2-I-PERCEPTION,BASICCABINET 2.00 Basic Equipment Cabinet 1.I0 Expansion Cabinet 1.I 1 The expansion cabinet (NCEC-S) is a single cabinet that mounts on top of the basic cabinet and is secured in place with four bolts. The cabinet houses two shelves for printed circuit card installation. MDF connections are facilitated by amphenol connectors located on the rear of the cabinet (Figure 2-2). 2.01 The basic equipment cabinet (LCEC-M) is a single free-standing cabinet mounted on casters for easy movement. The cabinet contains three shelves for printed circuit card installation. A separate area is provided for power supply and peak load battery installation. MDF connections are facilitated by amphenol connectors located on the rear of the cabinet (Figure 2-3). 1.20 Power Supply 2.10 Expansion Cabinet 1.21 The Main Power Supply (NPSA-M) consists 2.11 The expansion cabinet (LCEC-S) is a single of a single metal chassis. In addition to the power cabinet that houses a single printed circuit card 2-1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-202 FEBRUARY1992 FIGUREP-4-PERCEP FIGURE P-3-PERCEPTION, BASICCABINET shelf. MDF connections are facilitated by amphenol connectors located on the rear of the cabinet (FigureZ-4). Up to two expansioncabinets may be added to the PERCEPTlONe, basic equipment cabinet. 2.20 Power Supply 2.21 The Main Power Supply (LPSA-M) consists of a single metal chassiswhich containsthe system ring generatorand charger/inver&er for the Reserve Power.A circuit breakerswitch,LED indicators,AC power indicator and system power switch are located on the front of the chassis. For ease in installationa handle is locatedat the top front of the power supply (Figure 2-5). 3. PEAK LOAD BAl-rERY 3.00 The peak load battery will maintaincall processing for a maximum of two minutes in the event the PERCEPTlONe or PERCEPTlONe, experiences a power failure. Additionally,when the system is under heavy usagethe peak load batterywill -.-..-m - - -a-----.-.. HtiUHE 24+PtRCtP I IUNeX MAIN POWERSUPPLY 2-2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-202 FEBRUARY1992 avoid power degradation by supplementing the -24 volts, maintaining a constant power level. 5. POWER FAILURE/EMERGENCY TRANSFER 5.00 The function of the Power Failure/Emergency Transfer Unit (DPFT) is to automatically connect selected trunks to selected standard telephones in the event of system failure while permitting normal operation when the system is in service (maximum of 1 per cabinet). 4. EXTENDED RESERVE POWER 4.00 The power supply is equipped, as a standard feature, with an internal battery chargemnverter. Full reserve power can be provided for any system by connecting an appropriate, customer-supplied 24-volt battery pack. During normal operation, the power supply chargemnverter will maintain the proper charge in the battery pack. In the event of an AC power failure, switchover to battery power will be automatic. There will be no loss of system operation as a result of power switchover. When AC power is restored, switchback to the power supply will be automatic. 5.01 The DPFT is a self-contained module that mounts externally to the basic cabinet, typically on the MDF. Connections to the trunks, stations and basic cabinet are made via two 50-pin amphenoltype connectors (Jl and J2) on the DPFT (see functional diagram in Figure 2-6). 5.02 The module consists of eight relays that are normally operated, connecting the telephones to NSTU circuits and the trunks to NCOU circuits. If a power failure (or other emergency) occurs, the relays release, connecting the telephones directly to the trunks. Calls can then be placed from the telephones over the CO trunks, bypassing the system (which is out of service). 4.01 Battery selection and size will depend on system size and desired reserve operating time. The maximum power consumption of the basic cabinet is 11.5 amps at -24 VDC. For both a basic and expansion cabinet configuration, the maximum will be 19 amps at -24 VDC. The selected batteries must be compatible with the system’s charger float voltage of 27.3 VDC. 5.03 Power Fail Transfer (PFT) telephones con- I J2 I I CO LINE NCOU TELEPHONE C INDICATING WER ON Notes: 1. One of eight DPFT circuits. 2. Conditions of AC power on. FIGUREZ-6-DPFT FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM 2-3 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-202 FEBRUARY 1992 netted to ground-start trunks must have ground taps (tap buttons) in order to make outgoing calls during power fail transfer conditions. 5.04 A transfer can be caused by a loss of power or triggered manually by either of two buttons, one of which is located on the underside of the attendant console and the other on the front of the NPRU PCB. A transfer that is caused by a power failure will be reset automatically when power is restored; a manual transfer must be reset manually. STATION, DATA, TRUNK, DSS, OR OCA CARDS ONLY 5.05 When the DPFT is reset after a transfer, existing PFT conversations will be protected. Individual circuits will be restored only when they become idle. 6. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD DESCRIPTION 6.00 Sixteen different types of PCBs are available for use in both PERCEPTION systems (Figures 27 & 2-8). The universal port architecture enables multiple installation of trunk cards. The PERCEPTlONe can support a maximum of 16 trunk cards; 8 in the basic cabinet, and 8 in the expansion cabinet. The PERCEPTIONex can support a maximum of 32 trunk cards; 24 in the basic cabinet, and 8 in each expansion cabinet. STATION, DATA, TRUNK, DSS, OR OCA CARDS ONLY NFDU (Floppy Disk Drive Unit)-One or two per system: This card houses a 3.5 inch, 1.2 Mbyte disk drive. One disk contains system program and customer data. The second disk stores the Maintenance and Administration programs. (Two NFDUs are required in D.02 and later version software using Remote Maintenance.) FIGURE P-7sPERCEPTION, PC6 INSTALLATION LCCU (Central Control Unit)-One per system: The LCCU card contains the circuitry which, under the direction of the system program, provides centralized control for the entire system. Additionally, the LCCU performs data transmission and receiving functions between the central control and all peripheral equipment, including: l Station PCBs l Trunk PCBs 0 TTY interface l SMDR interface l Lodging/Health Care audit interface l Modem interface This circuitry consists of a 16-bit 8OC88 main processor, an 8-bit Z-80 secondary processor, and 1 Mbyte of memory. NTWU (Time Switch Unit)-One per system: This card performs the time slot interchange function for call processing and the conference features, provides the digital speech paths with digital padding, timing and control for time slot switching and generates system tones. 2-4 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-202 JANUARY1993 l Digitized voice messagefor Automatic Wakeup (optional) NRCU (Receiver Unit)-Two per NPRU (4 per system maximum): This card provides DTMF receivers, which are required for receiving tone dialing from standard telephone ports (including voice mail ports) and some incoming trunk (DID, TIE and CCSA) types. It also provides the capability for remote access to service. It mounts piggy-back on the NPRU PCB, where there is available space for two NRCUs. Each NRCU provides four DTMF receiver circuits, with a system maximum of 16. NOTE: When using the Call Forward-No Answer to Trunk feature, an NRCU MUSTbe installed in the system. NEKU (Electronic Telephone Unit)-One per eight electronic telephones: Interfaces electronic telephone to the system. It also serves as an attendant console interface. Each attendant console requires one electronic telephone circuit. PERCEPTION, ATT #O-PCB position LOOcircuit #1 ATT #1 -PCB position L15 circuit #l A maximum of 12 NEKU/NDKU PCBs may be installed in each cabinet (24 NEKU/NDKU PCBs maximum per system). PERCEPTION, ATT #O-PCB position UOOcircuit #1 AIT #l -PCB position UOl circuit #l A maximum of 16 NEKU/NDKU PCBs can be installed in the PERCEPTIONex basic cabinet, and eight in each expansion cabinet. w.iu~t Z-I+PERCEPTION, PCBINSTALLATION NPRU (Paging and Music-on-hold Unit)-Houses program load and initialization control switches and performs several miscellaneous functions (up to two per system): l Paging interface and control l Music-on-hold interface l UNA control l Interface for the NRCU * Attendant Console Functions l Power Failure/Emergency transfer control NDKU (Digital Telephone Unit)-A 2B+D architecture is used to interface up to 8 or 16 circuits for the Digital Telephone and Integrated Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DI), Stand-alone Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DS), or Digital Direct Station Selection Console. Digital telephones and digital DSS consoles cannot be interfaced to the same NDKU PCB. Four configuration options are switch-selectable as follows: 1) Option 1: Eight digital telephones only. 2-5 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-202 JANUARY1993 PCBs totaling four per cabinet for PERCEPTlONe and four per she/f for PERCEPTION,, . 2) Option 2: Eight digital telephones with integrated Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DI) or Off-hook Call Announce. This position also supports Stand-alone Data Interface Units (PDIU-DS). NCOU (Central Office Trunk Unit)-One per four CO trunks: Provides the signaling supervisory functions on loop- and ground-start trunks. Interfaces four CO trunks to the system. These trunks can be incoming, outgoing, or both way CO trunks; WATS trunks, or Foreign Exchange (FX) trunks. 3) Option 3: Four digital DSS consoles. In PERCEPTION, COOand CO1 may be used for this option only. 4) Option 4: Eight digital DSS consoles. NOTE: When using Option 2 or 4, the next highest number adjacent card slot cannot be used. For example: If an NDKU is installed in LO1or UO7, the card slot LO2 or UOZ respective/y, must be left vacant. NEMU (E & M TIE Trunk Unit)-One per four E & M TIE trunks: Each TIE trunk can be individually strapped for Type I or II operation with either 2wire or 4-wire connection. NLSU (DID Trunk Interface Unit)-One per four DID trunks: Each NLSU connects four Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks to the system. NSTU (Standard Telephone Unit)-Interfaces eight standard telephones (DTMF or rotary dial) to the system. NDTU (Tl Interface)-Maximum of two per system (one in the main cabinet, one in the expansion cabinet): Each NDTU provides a’maximum of 24 trunk lines. The Digital Trunk printed circuit card enables the PERCEPTIONehex systems to use DSl signaling to connect directly to either Tl span lines which connect to the telco (through a Channel Service Unit), or to a private network. NDSU(DSS Console Controller Unit)-Interfaces four DSS consoles to the system. The NDSU is installed in the COOor COI, or any line slot for PERCEPTION,; or in any universal slot for PERCEPTIONex. A maximum of two NDSU PCBs are allowed per system, and both can be installed in the same cabinet. NDCU (Data Control Unit)-Interfaces eight Digi- NOCU(Off-hook Call Announce interface Unit)- tal Data Interface Units (DDIUs) to the system. The NDCU controls data transmission between the DDIU and the cabinet. A maximum of four NDCU PCBs may be installed in each PERCEPTlONe cabinet. In the PERCEPTIONex, four PCBs per shelf can be installed. One per eight electronictelephones. Each NOCU provides eight Off-hook Call Announce circuits for up to eight electronic telephones. Each NOCU takes a station PCB location in the cabinet. HVSUP(Off-hookCall Announce PCBs)--Install 1 inside the electronic telephone. One unit per electronic telephone is required to receive offhook call announce. NMDU (Modem Pooling Unit)-Interfaces up to four modems and their associated DDIU-MAs. Any of the four DDIU circuits not required by a modem can be used with a standard DDIU (-MA or -MAT). A maximum of four NMDU PCBs may be installed in each PERCEPTlONe cabinet. In the PERCEPTIONex, four PCBscan be installed per shelf. DVSU (Digital Off-hook Call Announce PCB)Installs inside the digital telephone. One unit per digital telephone is required to receive off-hook call announce. NOTE: The system maximum of NDCU or NMDU PCBs consists of any combination of the two 2-6 1 lNSTALLATlONlNSTRUCTlONS SECTION200-255-202 FEBRUARY1992 emergency conditions to reset system logic. All existing calls will be dropped when this switch is pushed. PFT switch-A locking switch used to manually activate a transfer with the DPFT unit. A transfer activated by this switch can only be reset by this switch. MDM LED-Not currently used. PFT LED-LED is ON whenever a power fail transfer condition has been manually initiated. NRCU FALT LEDs 1, 2, 3 & 4-Used to indicate software-detected faults or a disabled state caused by an input command from the maintenance terminal (TPER Program). Each LED indicates two of the four circuits on each of the two NRCUs that can mount on the NPRU. FALT #l = Circuits 1 & 2, NRCU2 1 FALT #2 = Circuits 3 & 4, NRCU2 1 FALT #3 = Circuits 1 & 2, NRCU2 2 FALT #4 = Circuits 3 & 4, NRCU2 2 7. SYSTEM INDICATORS AND CONTROLS 7.00 Several system indicators and controls are located on the various PCBs and assemblies. The locations and functions are: NFDU l Disk Drive LED-Will light to indicate when the disk is being accessed. l PUSH Button-Used to eject the diskette from the drive. LCCU MAJ LED-Lights when a MAJOR alarm exists in the system. MDR LED-Lights when the DTRsignalfrom the SMDR device is not present. An MDR alarm on the attendant console lights simultaneously if enabled in programming. AUX LED-Lights when the DTR signal from the MIS system is not present. TTY switch-Slide switch used to select 300 or 1,200 bps speed for TTY port. This port is used for either programming and maintenance and/or the Lodging/Health Care Audit. MDR switch-Slide switch used to select 300 or 1,200 bps speed for the SMDR port. This port is used for SMDR and/or the Lodging/ Health Care Audit. AUX switch-This switch is used with MIS system. Must be set at 1200 bps. NCOU/NEMU/NLSU l FALT LEDs 1 & 2-Indicate software-detected faults or a disabled state caused by an input command from the maintenance terminal (TPER Program) or while ports are programmed. Each LED indicates two of the four circuits on the NCOU, NEMU or NLSU: FALT #l = Circuits 1 & 2 FALT #2 = Circuits 3 & 4 . BSY LEDs 1 w 4-Indicate the busy/idle status of each of the four circuits on the NCOU, NEMU or NLSU. LED is ON when circuit is busy. NTWU l CLOCK LED-Flashes contjnuously when the system is functioning as usual. NPRU l FALT LED-Indicates software-detected faults concerning MOH or Paging circuits. . BSYLED1&2 #l lights when any page is in progress. #2 indicates when MOH is in use (a call is on hold or camp-on). l MOH volume control-Adjust, Music-on-hold volume level. l LOAD switch-A momentary switch used in an emergency condition to reload system program and data from disk. All existing calls will be dropped when this switch is pushed. l INT switch-A momentary switch used in NDTU l l l 2-7 FALT LED-Indicates software-detected faults or a disabled state caused by an input command from the maintenance terminal (TPER Program) or while ports are programmed. LED indicates fault occuring in more than one channel. BSY LED-Indicates the busy/idle status of the 24 channels on the NDTU. LED is ON when more than one channel is busy. FALM LED-Indicates NDTU has not achieved Synchronization. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTlON200-255-202 FEBRUARY1992 l l l l MFALM LED-indicates NDTU has not achieved Frame Synchronization. YALM LED-Indicates a Yellow Alarm is detected by the NDTU. BALM LED-Indicates a Blue Alarm is detected by the NDTU. Signaling Type Selection Switches S4 w Sl l-Six-element DIP switches used to select one of four available signaling modes, on a per channel basis, for each of the 24 NDTU channels. Available signaling modes are: CO (Loop Start) mode CO (Ground Start) mode DID (2-wire signaling) TIE Line mode (4-wire E&M) NMDU l FALT LEDs 1 & 2-Indicate software-detected faults or a disabled state caused by an input command from the maintenance terminal (TPER Program) and while ports are programmed: FALT #l = DIU Circuits 1 w 4 FALT #2 = Modem Circuits 1 w 4 l NOT READY LEDs DIU 1 w 4-Indicate the DDIU’s (-MA or -MAT) power switch is not in the ON position or tip and ring line polarity is reversed. l BSY LEDs (Modem) 1 Y 4-Indicate the busy/idle status of each of the four modem circuits (the LED is ON when the circuit is busy). NEKWNSTWNOCWNDKU l FALT LEDs 1 & 2-Indicate software-detected faults or a disabled state caused by an input command from the maintenance terminal (TPER Program) or while ports are programmed. Each LED indicates four of the eight circuits on the NEKU, NSTU, NOCU, or NDKU: FALT #l = Circuits 1 w 4 FALT #2 = Circuits 5 w 8 NPSA-M/LPSA-M l LEDs indicate the presence of: Ringer and -48, -24, -12, +12, -5, +5 voltages. l AC Power LED-Indicates the presence of AC power to the NPSA-M. NPSA-S l LEDs indicate the presence of: -48 and -24 voltages. NDSU l FALT LEDs 1 & 2-Indicate software-detected faults or a disabled state caused by an input command from the maintenance terminal (TPER Program) or while ports are programmed. Each LED represents two of the four ports on the NDSU: FALT #1 = Circuits 1 & 2 FALT #2 = Circuits 3 & 4 8. PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 8.00 Electronic and Digital Telephone 8.01 Four different electronic telephones and two different digital telephones may be used in the system. 8.02 All electronic telephones share the same dimensions: Height: 3.7 in. (94mm) Width: 7.1 in. (180mm) Depth: 9.5 in. (241mm) NDCU l FALT LEDs 1 & 2-Indicate software-detected faults or a disabled state caused by an input command from the maintenance terminal (TPER Program) and while ports are programmed. Each LED indicates four of the eight circuits on the NDCU: FALT #l = Circuits 1 w 4 FALT #2 = Circuits 5 m 8 l NOT READY LEDs DIU l* 4and DIU 5 u 8Indicate the DDIU’s (-MA or -MAT) power switch is not in the ON position or tip and ring line polarity is reversed. 8.03 All digital telephones share the same dimensions: Height: 3.6 in. (92mm) Width: 7.3 in. (184mm) Depth: 9.0 in. (229mm) 8.04 Both electronic and digital telephones feature modular handset cords. Electronic telephones are connected to the system via 4-conductor modular 2-8 INSTALLATlONlNSTRUCTlONS SECTlON200-255-202 FEBRUARY1992 line cords. Digital telephones are connected to the system via 2-conductor modular line cords. In addition, all models may be used at any or all stations. RS-232C connector and operation switches. Both the DDIU-MAT and DDIU-MA are equipped with a power supply that connects to the DDlUs via a 6’ cord, and plugs into astandard 117 VAC wall outlet. 8.10 Headset Upgrade (HHEU) 8.60 Paging Equipment 8.11 Each electronic/digital telephone may also be upgraded to provide a modular headset jack by installing a headset upgrade assembly. The assembly consists of a small PCB (HHEU) which installs on the main PCB, inside the electronic or digital telephone, with a plug-in connector. Most standard headsets are compatible with the HHEU jack. 8.61 A customer-supplied paging amplifier can work in conjunction with the system’s paging interface and speaker zone switching to provide a system paging capability. 8.70 Music-on-Hold 8.71 A standard interface enables a customerprovided music source to be connected to the system. This music is connected to all calls placed in the hold, camp-on or call waiting condition by a station or the attendant. The same music source can also be used by the Automatic Wake-up feature for wake-up calls. 8.20 Attendant Console 8.21 The Attendant Console is available with faceplates for the Business and Lodging/Health Care applications. The console consists of a plastic housing with handset/headset modular jacks. Two horizontal rows of non-locking buttons, LEDs and a 12-button dialpad enable call processing. 8.80 Universal Night Answer 8.81 Incoming calls, when the system is in night operation, can be programmed to go either to a night answer station or to a Universal Night Answer device such as a bell or loud ringer. Any station user can pick up a UNA call by either pressing a m button on the telephone or by dialing an access code. Up to two UNA zones can be programmed per system, when the system is in tenant service. 8.30 DSS Console 8.31 As an option both electronic and digital Direct Station Selection (DSS) consoles can be used with systems that do not require attendant consoles, or require distributed call-handling positions. Two DSS consoles per electronic/digital telephone, up to a system maximum of eight DSS consoles, can be installed. 8.90 Station Message Detail Recording 8.40 Standard Telephone 8.91 PERCEPTIONeLex automatically record call data (such as call duration, digits dialed, originating station and account codes) of calls made to and from the system. Lodging/Health Care feature activation (Automatic Wake-up, Message Registration, etc.) is also recorded. This data can then output to a printer, recording device or call accounting system. The Lodging/Health Care feature audit can be combined with SMDR or can be output separately. SMDR helps the user reduce telephone costs and monitor employee telephone usage. 8.41 Standard telephones can be mixed with electronic telephones as required by the user’s application, Standard telephones can access all telephone features using dial code access. 8.50 DDIWPDIU 8.51 There are four types of Digital Data Interface Units(DDIUs/PDIUs), DDIU-MAT, DDIU-MA, PDIUDI, and PDIU-DS. The DDIU-MAT is a built-in unit that attaches directly to the bottom of a lo- or 20-button electronic telephone (replacing the base). The PDIU-DI is a built-in unit that attaches directly to the bottom of both digital telephones (replacing the base). The DDIU-MA and PDIU-DS are standalone units. Each unit is equipped with a female 2-9 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-203 FEBRUARY 1992 CHAPTER 3 I I I I INSTALLATION SITE REQUIREMENTS REAR WALL t 6” AIR SPACE THREE f A 1. COMMERCIAL POWER I 22” 1 .OO The system requires a power source of 100 m 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz. The AC outlet must be dedicatedto system use, grounded and fused. To avoid accidental power turn-off, it is recommended that an ON/OFF wall switch not be used on this dedicated AC circuit. 12” TOP VIEW LCEC-M UNIT I I I I 1 .Ol If reserve power is to be installed, the battery pack requires a well-ventilated location adjacent to the equipment cabinet. FRONT WORK SPACE APPROXIMATELY 36” f FIGURE3-P-PERCEPTION, MINIMUMFLOORSPACE 2. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ered when selecting a location for the equipment cabinet: The location MUST BE: l Dry and clean. l Well ventilated. l Well lit. l Easily accessible. 2.00 Humidity at the equipment cabinet should be within 20 - 80% (non-condensing), and the temperature should be relatively constant within 32 w 104°F (0 w 40°C). Exposure to dust and airborne chemicals should be avoided. 3. EQUIPMENT ROOM RECOMMENDATIONS The location MUST NOT BE: l Subject to extreme heat or cold. l Subject to corrosive fumes. l Next to a reproducing or copying machine. 3.00 The minimum floor and maintenance space required for installation of each of the two equipment cabinets is shown in Figures 3-l and 3-2. I I 4 I I I t Y I I II 1 I I I 8 I I II II II II II II I I I REAR WALL I I t 6” AIR SPACE’THREE SIDES i I c I 1 1 17 314” I I I I lb 1 2” I I I I TOP VIEW I I NCEC202-M UNIT I I I w I c I 4 FRONT WORK SPACE APPROXIMATELY 36” ; I + I I I 4. CABLING CONSIDERATIONS 4.00 The equipment cabinet must be located close to the facility Main Distribution Frame (MDF). Maximum house cable run distances for station and peripheral equipment must also be considered when choosing the location of the equipment cabinet. The limit for each type of equipment is: l Electronic/Digital Telephone - 1,000 cable feet (305 M), 24 AWG l Standard Telephone - 500-ohms (including telephone) l Stand-alone DDIU-MA/PDIU-DS - 3, 280 cable feet (1,000 M), 24 AWG l Attendant Console - 1,000 cable feet (305 M), 24 AWG l Electronic DSS - 500 cable feet, 24 AWG FIGURE3-I-PERCEPTION, MINIMUMFLOORSPACE 3.01 The following requirements must be consid- 3-1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-203 FEBRUARY 1992 l Digital DSS - 1,000 cable feet (305 M), 24 AWG GROUND 1; 4.01 Acceptablecable for all telephonesis 22 or 24 AWG twisted pair inside telephone station cable (jacketedbut not shielded).Two twisted pairs are requiredfor the electronictelephone,one pair for a standard telephone, and one twisted pair for the digital telephone, even if equippedwith a PDIU-DI. Three twisted pairs are required for an electronic telephoneequippedwith a DDIU-MAT.The standalone DDIU-MA/PDIU-DS requires one twisted pair. 2. 3. 4. Perception 3EDICATED 4C OUTLET NITH THIRD NIRE GROUND -0 GROUND 4.02 A 25-pair cable is requiredfor the attendant console. The console is equippedwith a male 50pin amphenol-typeconnector. 1. THIRD WIRE GROUND TO AC POWER CORD ;YSTEM GROUND EXTERNAL GROUND SCREW ON PERCEPTION CABINET WARNING! Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations, unless the jacks are specifically designed for wet locations. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the interface. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. GROUND 2; PER GENERAL RULES OF ARTICLE 250 OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, NFPA70 FIGURE 3-3-UL GROUNDING DIAGRAM insulated grounding conductor is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the system, and it is to be connectedto ground at the service equipment. 5. GROUNDING 5.00 The following grounding directions are required in order to comply with the Underwriters’ Laboratories’Standard 1459 2nd edition: 1) Redundant and independent equipment grounding conductors are to be installed between the product and the wiring system ground. 2) One of the equipment grounding conductors (ground 1) shall be an insulated grounding conductor. Its size shall not be smaller than the size of the grounded and ungrounded branch-circuitsupply conductors.It shall also have their equivalent insulation material and thickness, except that it is green with, or wilthout, one or more yellow stripes. This 3-2 3) The other conductor (ground 2) shall comply with the general rulesfor groundingcontained in Article 250 of the National ElectricalCode, NFPA70, but shall not dependon the cord and plug of the product. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 200-255-204 FEBRUARY 1992 CHAPTER 4 6) Check the 15amp fuse (Fl) located at the top of the power supply to verify that it is in working order. SYSTEM INSTALLATION 7) Remove plastic cover from AC connection terminal TBl by removing two screws. 1. PERCEPTION, 1.OOPower Supply installation 8) Connect the white and black leads to the AC terminal (black to L and white to N) and the green lead (ground) to the GND screw on the main power supply (Figure 4-2). Replace the plastic cover and secure with two screws. 1 .Ol Install the main power supply- as follows: 1) Remove the two screws securing the basic cabinetfront cover. Lift the cover off the cabinet. 2) Loosen two screws, remove and retain four screws securing the basic cabinet rear cover plate, and remove the rear cover plate (Figure 4-l). Ir 5515 - J509 0 /f \ LOOSEN 2 SCREWS - REMOVE 4 SCREWS -)( i- GROUND STRAP FIGURE 4-l-PERCEPTION@ BASICCABINET REARCOVER 3) Unpack the main power supply and inspect it carefully for any visible damage. Verify that all connectors are securely attached. 4) Remove and retain the three corner screws from the back of the main power supply. 5) Slide the main power supply into the basic cabinet from the front and secure in place with three screws at the rear. FIGURE 4sP-PERCEPTION, CABLECONNECTIONS 4-1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 9) With the main power supply turned OFF, plug the AC power cord into the AC outlet. 10) Momentarily press each circuit breaker to verify that it is not tripped. 11) Place the main power supply power switch in the ON position. WARNING! Hazardous voltage that may cause death or injury is exposed at the power supply AC terminal. EXPANSION CABINET RN;lic] $fi; 12) Verify that all main power supply power indicator LEDs are on (RINGER LED should be pulsating rapidly). If any of the LEDs are not on, replace the main power supply. rG1 BASIC CABINET 13) Using a multimeter (set to the appropriate ranges), check the pins on connectors5201, J202,5203 and J703 for the voltages shown in Figure4-3. (The connectorsare on the rear of the power supply chassis.) Measure between the voltage pin and a ground pin, (Ail ground leads are tied to a single point, so any can be used.) Figure 4-3 also shows the acceptablerangefor each output voltage. If a measuredvoltage falls outside of the acceptable range, replace the main power supply. J201 J202 D SIG2 q q RNG CK 0 -48V q El J703 SIG1 G J203 14) Turn the power supply OFF and then connect J201, J202 and J203, respectively,as shown in Figure 4-2. 15) Remove and retain the two screws securing the peak load battery mounting bracket and slide the bracket out the front of the basic cabinet. FPSA ACCEPTABLEVOLTAGERANGES 16) Install the peak load battery as shown in Figure 4-4. Securethe battery to the mounting bracket with the retaining strap and a single screw. WARNING! Hazardous voltage that may cause death or injury is exposed at the peak load battery cables. DO NOT touch wires together. NOMINAL(VDC) -48 -24 +12 -12 +5 -5 17) Connect the peak load battery cables to TB2 on the rear of the basic power supply (see Figure 4-2). Ensurethat the correct polarity is observed as follows: blue to positive (+) yellow to negative (-) RANGE(VDC) -47.52 ..a-48.96 -26.75 - -28.12 +11.76 - +12.48 -11.76 - -12.48 +5.0 - +5.4 -5.0 - -5.4 FIGURE 4-3-PERCEPTlONe VOLTAGE CHECKS 4-2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 NPSA2-M ON El EiEF OFF -48” 0 RINGER 0 AC POWER 0 FIGURE 4-4-PEAK LOADBATTERY POWER ON 18) Slide the mounting bracket/battery assembly in place and secure with two screws. OFF 19) Set the BATTERY BACKUP switch to ON (Figure 4-5). 1.10 Expansion Cabinet Installation FIGURE 4-5-PERCEPTION, POWER SUPPLYCONTROLS ANDINDICATORS WARNING! Hazardous voltage that may cause death or injury is present in the system during operation. Ensure that AC power to both cabinets is turned off prior to performing this procedure. L NOTE: A 13mm socket wrench and extension is recommended for ease of expansion cabinet ins talla tion. d 1) Remove and retain the four screws securing the basic cabinet top cover and lift the cover off the cabinet (Figure 4-6). 2) Remove and retain the two screws securing each of the expansion cabinet side panels. Pull the side panels off. 3) Place the four casters on the basic cabinet in the lock position to ensure cabinet stability during the expansion cabinet installation. 4) On both the basic and expansion cabinets, remove and retain two screws securing the cabinet doors. Remove and retain the six screws securing the rear panel on each cabinet. FIGURE 4-6-PERCEPTION, EXPANSION CABINET INSTALLATION 4-3 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 5) Place the expansion cabinet on top of the and J702 on the secondarypower supply for the voltages shown in Figure 4-3. (The connectors are on the rear of the power supply chassis.) Measure between the voltage pin and a ground pin. (All ground leads are tied to a single point, so any can be used.) Figure43 also shows the acceptable range for each output voltage. If a measured voltage falls outside of the acceptablerange, replace the secondary power supply. basic cabinet, ensuring proper alignment of the four mountingholes. Secure in place with four metric bolts, flat washers and lockwashers. 6) Reinstallthe two side coverson the expansion cabinet and secure in place using four screws (two per side). 7) Install the top cover on the expansioncabinet and secure with four screws. 17) Turn the power supply OFF. 8) Connectthe intercabinetgroundwire in accor- ‘8) dance with Figure 4-2. Plug in connectorsJ701 and J702. 19) Route cable J703 into the basic cabinet and 9) Route the expansion cabinet ribbon cable plug it into connectorJ703. from J402 in the expansion cabinet through the opening provided in the cabinet bottom and connectto the basic cabinet backplaneat 20) Reinstall the rear panels and doors on both cabinets and secure in place with screws. J401. 2. PERCEPTION, 10) Remove three screws from the secondary power supply. Fromthe front of the expansion cabinet slide the power supply into the rack and secure in placewith the three rear screws. 2.00 Power Supply Installation 2.01 Install the main power supply as follows: 1) Remove the two screws securing the basic NOTE: Prior to routing intercabinet cabling, check the 15-amp fuse (F2) located at the top of the main power supply to verify that it is in working order, cabinet front cover. Lift the cover off the cabinet. 2) Remove and retain six screws securing the basic cabinet rear cover plate and removethe rear cover plate (Figure 4-7). 11) Route the power supply cabling through the hole in the expansion cabinet and connect both power supplies at the Pl, P2 and P3 receptacles. 3) Unpackthe main power supply and inspectit carefullyfor any visibledamage. Verifythat all connectorsare securely attached. 12) With the main power supply turned OFF, plug 4) Remove and retain the three corner screws from the back of the main power supply. the AC power cord into the AC outlet. 13) Momentarily press each secondary power supply circuit breaker to verify that it is not tripped. 5) Slide the main power supply into the basic cabinetfrom the front and secure in placewith three screws at the rear. 14) Place the main power supply power switch in the ON position. 6) Check the two 30-amp fuses (Fl and F2) located at the top of the power supplyto verify that they are in working order. 15) Verify that all secondarypower supply power indicator LEDs are on. If any of the LEDs are not on, replace the NPSA-S (RINGER LED should be pulsating rapidly). 7) Remove plastic cover from AC connection terminal TBl by removing two screws. 16) Using a multimeter (set to the appropriate 8) Connect the white and black leads to the AC ranges), check the pins on connectors J701 terminal (black to L and white to N) and the 4-4 - J30 B J29 !Qi--1 J509 !op_ J524 J523 J522 ~521 J26 M J508 I- J520 -1 J25 J507 J506 J505 J504 J503 J502 J501 !Q,!Q’;R D [n FZZ%l EZSI J519 J516 J517 J516 J515 J514 J513 -1 loi-a !opI ETBl !Qb IZTZij Jf,,? J28 !Ob J27 w J24 -1 J23 -1 J22 m J21 D 0 6L w-;- J511 IJ510~ J20 -“;101 J,CJ w ID m -1 B h 0 6L J30 w J29 [@ZZSl J’&3 w //0 ek. J27 -1 J26 -1 J25 -1 J24 W J23 !81 J22 !()b J21 n J20 D J19 k?iEZZd J16 w J17w Jl6IpEzzq J15iGZZSj J14lZSS%l Jl3m J17m1 Jil n JlO 1-1 J9 !Orl Jt3 m J7 E===Zd J6l!jEsa J5 1-1 J4 L-1 ~520 M J519m1 J516wI J517D J516k%zzm J515w1 J514n,I J513m1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY 1992 12) Verify that all main power supply power indicator LEDs are on (RINGER LED should be pulsating rapidly). If any of the LEDs are not on, replace the main power supply. 13) Using a multimeter (set to the appropriate ranges), check the pins on connectors J201, J202, J203, J703 and J803 for the voltages shown in Figure 4-9. (The connectors are on the rear of the power supply chassis.) Measure between the voltage pin and a ground pin. (All ground leads are tied to a single point, so any can be used.) Figure 4-9 also shows the acceptable range for each output voltage. If a measured voltage falls outside of the acceptable range, replace the main power supply. EXPANSIONCABINET 5702 5701 RN;;i?$Gi $i# EXPANSIONCABINET J701 J702 RNfj?$$ $$ zG1 BASIC CABINET 14) Turn the power supply OFF and then connect J201, J202 and J203, respectively, as shown in Figure 4-9. J201 J202 G RNGCK 15) Remove and retain the two screws securing the peak load battery mounting bracket and slide the bracket out the front of the basic cabinet. G G -48V -48V D q q q q q q U G El SIG1 SIG 2 SIG 1 SIG 2 q q q q G J803 16) Install the peak load battery as shown in Figure 4-4. Secure the battery to the mounting bracket with the retaining strap and a single screw. -5v q 0 q +5V +5V q q -5V J203 WARNING! Hazardous voltage that may cause death or injury is exposed at the peak load battery cables. DO NOT touch wires together. 2; +5V +5V +5v +5V +5V -5V -5V 17) Connect the peak load battery cables to TB2 on the rear of the basic power supply (see Figure 4-4). Ensure that the correct polarity is observed as follows: blue to positive (+) yellow to negative (-) D : q q q q q q q : q q q q q q q 2 G G 0 D G 17 G G J703 G G G G FPSA ACCEPTABLEVOLTAGE RANGES NOMINAL (VDC) 18) Slide the mounting bracket/battery assembly in place and secure with two screws. -48 -24 +12 19) Set the BATTERY BACKUP switch to OFF Figure 4-l 0. -12 +5 -5 RANGE (VDC) -47.52 - -48.96 -26.75 - -28.12 +l 1.76 -11.76 +5.0 -5.0 - +12.48 -12.48 +5.4 -5.4 2.10 First Expansion Cabinet Installation WARNlNG! Hazardous voltage that may cause death or injury is present in the system during FIGURE 4-9-PERCEPTION,VOLTAGE CHECKS 4-6 INSTALLATiONlNSTRUCTlONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 operation. Ensure that AC power to both cabinets is turned off prior to performing this procedure. NOTE: A 13mm socket wrench and extension is recommended for ease of expansion cabinet installation. Two expansion cabinets can be installed. -48” 0 RINGER 0 1) Remove and retain the four screws securing the basic cabinet top cover and lift the cover off the cabinet (Figure 4-l 1). I 2) Remove and retain the two screws securing each of the expansion cabinet side panels. Pull the side panels off. 1 3) Place the four casters on the basic cabinet in the lock position to ensure cabinet stability during the expansion cabinet installation. ON BA-ITERY El BACK UP OFF 4) On both the basic and expansion cabinets, remove and retain two screws securing the cabinets doors. Remove and retain the six screws securing the rear panel on each cabinet. 5) Place the expansion cabinet on top of the basic cabinet, ensuring proper alignment of the four mounting holes. Secure in place with four metric bolts, flat washers and lockwashers. -48” 0 RINGER 0 6) Reinstall the two side covers on the expansion cabinet and secure in place using four screws (two per side). 7) Install the top cover on the expansion cabinet and secure with four screws. +5v-0-0 -0-o 8) Connect the intercabinet ground wire in accordance with Figure 4-8. AC POWER 9) Route the expansion cabinet ribbon cable from J405 in the expansion cabinet through the opening provided in the cabinet bottom and connect to the basic cabinet backplane at 5402. IO) Remove three screws from the secondary power supply. From the front of the expansion FIGURE4-lo-PERCEPTION,, cabinet, slide the power supply into the rack POWERSUPPLYCONTROLSANDINDICATORS and secure in place with the three rear screws. 4-7 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY 1992 both power suppliesto the lower connectors at the Pl , P2 and P3 receptacles. 12) With the main powersupplyturned OFF, plug the AC power cord into the AC outlet. 13) Momentarily press each secondary power supply circuit breaker to verify that it is not tripped. 14) Place the main power supply power switch in the ON position. 15) Verify that all secondarypower supply power indicator LEDs are on. If any of the LEDs are not on, replace the NPSA-S (RINGER LED should be pulsatingrapidly). 16) Using a multimeter (set to the appropriate ranges), check the pins on connectors5701 and 5702 on the secondarypower supply for the voltages shown in Figure 4-9. (The connectors are on the rear of the power supply chassis.) Measure between the voltage pin and a ground pin. (All ground leads are tied to a single point, so any can be used.) Figure 49 also shows the acceptable range for each output voltage. If a measured voltage falls outside of the acceptable range, replacethe secondary power supply. 17) Turn the power supply OFF. 18) Plug in connectorsJ701 and J702. 19) Route cable J703 into the basic cabinet and plug it into connector5703. 20) Reinstall the rear panels and doors on both cabinets and secure in place with screws. FIGURE 4-ll-PERCEPTION, EXPANSION CABINET INSTALLATION NOTE: Prior to routingintercabinetcabling, check the 15amp fuse (F2) locatedat the top of the main power supply to verify that it is in working order. 11) Route the power supply cabling through the hole in the expansion cabinet and connect 2.20 Second Expansion Cabinet Installation WARNING! Hazardous voltage that may cause death or injury is present in the system during operation. Ensure that AC power to both cabinets is turned off prior to performing this procedure. NOTE: A 13mmsocket wrench and extensionis recommended for ease of expansion cabinet INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 JUNE1992 11) Route the installation. Two expansion cabinets can be installed. power supply cabling through the hole in the expansion cabinet and connect both power supplies to the upper connectors at the Pl, P2 and P3 receptacles. 1) Remove and retain the four screws securing the basic cabinet top cover and lift the cover off the cabinet (Figure 4-l 1). 12) With the main power supply turned OFF, plug the AC power cord into the AC outlet. 2) Remove and retain the two screws securing each of the expansion cabinet side panels. Pull the side panels off. 13) Momentarily press each secondary power supply circuit breaker to verify that it is not tripped. 3) Place the four casters on the basic cabinet in the lock position to ensure cabinet stability during the expansion cabinet installation. 14) Place the main power supply power switch in the ON position. 4) On both the basic and expansion cabinets, remove and retain two screws securing the cabinets’ doors. Remove and retain the six screws securing the rear panel on each cabinet. 15) Verify that all secondary power supply power indicator LEDs are on. If any of the LEDs are not on, replace the NPSA-S (RINGER LED should be pulsating rapidly). 16) Using a multimeter (set to the appropriate 5) Place the expansion cabinet on top of the basic cabinet, ensuring proper alignment of the four mounting holes. Secure in place with four metric bolts, flat washers and lockwashers. ranges), check the pins on connectors 5701 and J702 on the secondary power supply for the voltages shown in Figure 4-9. (The connectors are on the rear of the power supply chassis.) Measure between the voltage pin and a ground pin. (All ground leads are tied to a single point, so any can be used.) Figure 49 also shows the acceptable range for each output voltage. If a measured voltage falls outside of the acceptable range, replace the secondary power supply. 6) Reinstall the two side covers on the expansion cabinet and secure in place using four screws (two per side). 7) Install the top cover on the expansion cabinet and secure with four screws. 8) Connect the intercabinet ground wire in accordance with Figure 4-8. 17) Turn the power supply OFF. 9) Route the expansion cabinet ribbon cable from J406 in the expansion cabinet through the opening provided in the cabinet bottom and connect to the basic cabinet backplane at J403. 19) Route cable J703 18) Plug in connectors J701 and J702. into the basic cabinet and plug it into connector J803. 20) Reinstall the rear panels and doors on both cabinets and secure in place with screws. 10) Remove three screws from the secondary power supply. From the front of the expansion cabinet, slide the power supply into the rack and secure in place with the three rear screws. 3. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION 3.00 NFDU 3.01 Install an NFDU in the FDDO slot in the basic cabinet. If the system uses 0.02 or later version softwareand Remote Maintenance, asecond NFDU must be installed in the FDDI slot in the basic cabinet. There are different strap selections on the various NFDUs, depending on the slot in which the NOTE: Prior to routing intercabinet cabling, check the 15-amp fuse (F2) located at the top of the main power supply to verify that it is in working order. 4-9 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 JUNE1992 PCB is installed or the type of NFDU that you are working with. Check the identification number on the NFDU and refer to the corresponding diagrams in Figure 4-l 2 which show how the jumper block on the rear of the NFDU must be set. SHIPPING SETTING DEFAULT FDDO SLOT NUMBER: FDDO 3.10 LCCU o FG INSTALLER SElTlNG FDDl 3.11 Install the LCCU in the CCU slot of the basic cabinet. There are no straps on this PCB; however, there is a plug (P5). Verify that the connection plug is in place in accordance with Figure 4-13. SLOT NUMBER FFDI NEC (FD-235GF-121-U) SHIPPING SElTlNG IEFAULT FDDO SLOT NUMBER: FDDO NSTALLER SETTING =DDl SLOT NUMBER FFDl D2 m D3 FIGURE4-13-LCCU STRAPPING 3.20 NTWU 3.21 The NTWU has one strap that must be verified before installation (Figure 4-14). Install the NTWU in the TWU slot of the basic cabinet. Ensure that the strap is as follows: TBC5: pins 1 & 2 must be strapped jHlPPlNG SETTING IEFAULT FDDO iLOT NUMBER: FDDC FG ISG D E D C B A 3.30 NPRU 1 1234 3.31 The NPRU has one strap that requires verification before installation (Figure 4-15). If Automatic Wake-up is required, verify that the DROM is installed in the IC15 socket. Install the NPRU in the PO0 slot. (An NPRU must be installed in the PO0 card slot.) If a second NPRU PCB is used, install it in the PO1 slot in the PERCEPTION, expansion cabinet. In PERCEPTlONe,, both NPRUs are installed in the basic cabinet. Verify that TBl is strapped as follows: TBI : pins 1 and 2 must be strapped. USTALLER SElTlNG ‘DDl #LOT NUMBER FFDl FG EIG D E D C B A 123 4 FDD TEAC (FD-235GF-3121-U) FIGURE4-12-NFDU STRAPPING 4-10 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 JUNE1992 -Tl 0 FIGURE4-16-NRCU MOUNTING NTWU3 3.42 For PERCEPTlONe,, install the NEKU in any designated slot UOON U31. To utilize attendant consoles, install NEKUs in the following slots: AlT#O-PCB position UOOCircuit #l ATT#l -PCB position UOl Circuit #l FIGURE4-14-NTWU STRAPPING NOTE: DROM on/y required for digitized voice on automated wake-up calls. 3.32 If NRCUs are to be installed, mount them on the NPRU. The first NRCU mounts on connector J3, the second on J4 (see Figure 4-16). 3.40 NEKU, NDKU, and NOCU 3.41 Install the NEKU in any of the line designated slots LOON Lll or L15 m L26 in PERCEPTlONe. If an attendant console is used, an NEKU must be installed in slot LOO.If a second attendant console is installed, a second NEKU must be installed in slot L15. Attendant consoles must be installed on circuit 1 in both slots. 3.43 There are no straps on the NEKU PCB for either system. 3.44 Install the NDKU in any of the line designated slots LOO m Lll orL15 w L26 in PERCEPTlONe. For PERCEPTlONe,, install the NDKU in any designated slots UOOW U31. Some options require adjacent PCB slots be left vacant. 3.45 The NDKU employs a 2B+D architecture for each circuit that must be configured for one of four different operating options using the dip switch Sl (Figure 4-l 7) as follows: I 1I IPTION S-l POSITION 1 DIP switches 1 - 4: ON OPERATION DKT only 2 DIP switches 2 - 4: ON DIP switch 1: OFF DKT with DIL or OCA 3 DIP switchesl, 3, and 4: ON DIP switch 2: OFF 4 DSS only 4 DIP switches 1 and 2:OFF DIP switches 3 and 4: ON 8 DSS only 1) OPTION 1: Eight digital telephones only: this option uses one of the two B channels for each circuit to interface up to eight lOOO-series digital telephones. FIGURE4-15-NPRU STRAPPING 4-11 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 JUNE1992 SWITCH POSITIONS NDKU2 n Blackshadingindicates switchposition FIGURE 4-Ii’-NDKU SWITCHOPTIONS 2) OPTION 2: Eight digital telephones with DIU or OCA: this option uses bdth 6 channels for each circuit to interface up to eight lOOOseries digital telephones; plus each telephone may have an integrated Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DI) or Off-hook Call Announce PCB (DVSU) installed. In addition, this option supportsthe stand-aloneData InterfaceUnit (PDIUDS). One B channel for each circuit interfaces a single PDIU-DS. The other B channel of this circuit cannot be used. A single PDIU-DS only may be installed per each circuit. 1 3) OPTION 3: Four digital DSS consoles only: this option uses one of the B channels for each of the two circuits to interface up to four lOOOseries digital DSS consoles. 1 4) OPTION 4: Eight digital DSS consoles only: this option uses both B channels for each of the two circuits to interface up to eight lOOO-series digital DSS consoles. NOTE: 1. When using option 2 or 4, the next highest numberadjacentPCBs/otcannotbeused. For example, if an NDKU is installed in LO1 or UOl, the PCB slot LO2 or UO2 respectively, must be left vacant. 2. When using option 4, program the first four DDSSs on circuits 7, 3, 5 and 7 on the NDKU PCB. Program the second four DDSSs on cirucits 1, 3, 5 and 7 on the adjacent slot next to the NDKU PCB. 3. When using option 4, wire the first four DDSSs to circuits 1,2,3 and 4 on the NDKU PCB(thesearetheNDKUassignedDDSSs) and the second four DDSSs to circuits 5, 6, 7 and 8 (these are the DDSSs assigned to the adjacent slot) on the NDKU PCB. 3.46 The NOCU PCB is installed at a rate of one PCB for each group of eight electronic telephones. There are no strapping options on this PCB. The NOCU is installed in any of the line designated slots LOOmLll and/or L15 mL26 in PERCEPTION,, and in any designated slots UOOm U31 in PERCEPTION,,. If any of the eight circuits is not used for Off-hook Call Announce, the remaining circuits CANNOT be used for other electronic telephone assignments. 3.50 NSTU 3.51 Install the NSTU in any of the line designated slots LOOw Lll or L15 w L26 in the PERCEPTION, system. The designated slots in PERCEPTION,, 4-12 INSTALLATIONINSTRUCTIONS SECTlON200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 are UOOM U31. There are no straps on the PCB for either system. 3) For 600-/900-ohm operation: CIRCUIT 3.60 NDSU 3.61 Install the NDSU PCB either in the COOor CO1 slots or in any of slots LOO- Ll 1 or L15 - L26 in the PERCEPTION, system. Two NDSUs can be installed in the same cabinet. There are no straps on this PCB. There are no C slots resident within the PERCEPTION,, system so NDSU PCB installation will be in any U slot . I- 3.70 NEMU, NCOU, and NLSU 4I STRAPS TB 104 1 TB105 OPERATION 6000hm 1 900 ohm I 1 I 3.73 The NCOU PCBs have Ground-/Loop-start, 600/900-ohm termination, and 2dB pad strap selections that must be made before they are installed (Figure 4-19). 3.71 Trunk PCBs (NEMU, NCOU, and NLSU) may be installed in any T slot. Additionally, up to 16 U slots may also be used for trunk PCBs. 1) Each NCOU circuit is individually strapped for either Ground Start or Loop Start operation. The strapping location and options for each circuit are shown as follows: 3.72 There are four circuits on the NEMU PCB, and each circuit has its own set of straps (Figure 418). On a circuit-by-circuit basis, strap the PCB as follows: CIRCUIT 1) For Type VII operation: STRAPS OPERATION LP ST GND ST Extend CIRCUIT 1 2 3 4 STRAPS TB 101 TB 102 TB 106 TB 201 TB 202 TB 206 TB 301 TB 302 TB 306 TB 401 TB 402 TB 406 1 2 3 4 OPERATION TYPEI 1 TYPEII I l-2 STRAPS TB 103 TB TB TB TB 104 204 304 404 $ind B-CD-E Normal Reverse C-DA-B NOTES: 1. The GROUNDSTART “EXTEND/NOEXTEND”options refer to “loop extenders” on long trunk loops. If a battery boost is used on the trunk, select EXTEND,otherwise NO EXTEND should be selected. 2. The LOOP START “NORMAL/REVERSE” options refer to the system’s ability to detect a pre-ring supervisionsignal in the form of a battery polarity reversal on the CO TIP and RING. l lf NORMALis selected,the systemwill not be sensitive to CO trunk polarity. l If REVERSE is selected, the CO circuit will be “madebusy”when the CO reversespolarity prior to ringing on an incoming call. 2-3 2) For 2-wire/4-wire connection: CIRCUIT I CONNECTION 2-WIRE 1 4-WIRE I 4-13 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 0 o@l(@ o@ TB407 TB405 TB404m 0,s TB304 mmm ABC ojs, TE307 TB305 TM03 oej TBZO4 TB207 TB205 pJ?JpzlqzJ ABC ABC TB203 fpiii$-~ oe, TB104 TB107 TB105 mmjzJtJ ABC FIGURE 4-18-NEMU STRAPPING ABCDE ygEl ABCDE ABCDE YE? YEi? TB303 A n - B A El. . B TB302 l-B403 Am-B Am=13 El TM02 6001900 ABC I: ABCDE rqqq TB104 TB203 AmmB Al=B R TB202 600/900 ABC 600/900 ABC cl GE e EY NCOU2 r,a,,w..-I -r~bunt ..-a.. --- ------- 4-lY-NWU 4-14 Sl~RAPPlNG TB103 A”B Am=8 E ; INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTlON200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 2) Determine the proper impedance for each trunk and then strap its NCOU circuit for either 600- or 900-ohm operation. Install the shorting bar across the center pin and the outer pin labeled either 600 or 900 at each strapping location (Figure 4-19). Each circuits strapping location is shown as follows: 2) When the CO distance exceeds 2,000-ohm loop resistance, Battery-to-Ground Dial Pulsing should be used. Foradistance of less than 2,000-ohm loop resistance, use Loop Dial Pulsing. Strap each circuit as follows: CIRCUIT OPERATION STRAPS BAT-GND DP( r CIRCUIT STRAPS 1 TB101 2 3 TB201 4 TB401 LOOP DP OPERATION 900 ohm 600 ohm B-C A-B TB301 3) In some installations, particularly those near the serving Central Office, noise may be introduced over the CO trunk that will appear as sidetone at the telephone. In such situations, a 2dB pad can be inserted into the line to reduce thesidetone. The following table shows the strapping position for each circuit to either insert or remove the 2dB pad. 3) Each NLSU circuit must be adjusted for CO trunk loop resistance to ensure proper detection of incoming digits. Each circuit adjustment is made by strapping as follows: CIRCUIT STRAPS 1 2 3 4 TB102 - TB202 TB 302 OPERATION LEAST c-d MID MOST bwc awb _ TB402 NOTE: This strapping should be made only after the appropriate CO distance strapping (step 2) has been made. The CO trunk loop resistance values are arbitrary and are used as an initial strapping guide. If the incoming digits are not being detectedproperly, move the strap to the next most sensitive position and test again for proper operation. 3.80 NDTU 3.74 Three separate strappings must be made for each of the four circuits on the NLSU PCB (Figure 4-20). 1) Determine the proper impedance for the trunk line to be used, and then set the 600-ohm/900ohm loop termination for each circuit as follows: CIRCUIT 1 2 3 4 OPERATION 6000hm 1 900ohm STRAPS 1 TBlOl TB201 TB301 TB401 1 I I A-B B-C 3.81 A maximum of two NDTU PCBs (Figure 4-21) may be installed. The system must be equipped with an NTWU-3 to ensure proper operation of the NDTU. The NDTU is connected to the telco through a customer-supplied Channel Service Unit (CSU). A separate CSU is required for each NDTU. Each NDTU has 11 DIP switches and 8 strapping options, which must be verified before installation. NOTE: The factory-default switch settings and strapping options are indicated by an asterisk (*). 1) Select thedesired operating mode using mode selection switch Sl (4-element DIP switch) 4-15 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 ABCDEF ABCDEF ABCDEF ABCDEF T yg3 v T ABC ABC ABC FIGURE 4-ZO-NLSUSTRAPPING J2 I TB7 L,,,,---,,-,,,,,,,,- -------------PIGGY-BACK PCB C,m,.mC - 1- miunt 4-Zl-NU ..--.. --- -----.- I U STRAPPING 4-16 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 as follows: ELEMENT POSITION I MORE ON * 12 Multi (Robbed bit signaling) Sl OFF 24 Multi (Common channel signaling) s2 ON Zero Code Suppression (ZCS) OFF* Binary Eight Zero Suppression (B8ZS) Sl s2 I s4 1 Not used 1 NOTE: Set switch element to ON to enable associated digital trunk channels; OFF to disable channels. NOTE: Digital Multiplexed Interface BOS. 2) Determinethe proper transmit equalizer set- ting; either short (0 w 150 feet), medium (150 w 450 feet), or long (450 * 655 feet); then select the appropriatesetting using transmit equalizer setting switch S2 (8-element DIP switch) as follows: 4) Signaling modes are individually selectable for each activechannel.Determinethe appropriate signalingmodefor each channel;either CO (Loop Start) mode, CO (Ground Start) mode, DID (2-wire loop signaling), or TIE trunk (Type II 4-wire E&M) mode; then assign the selected signaling modes using signaling type selection switchesS4 w Sll (6-element DIP switches) see Loop/GroundStart Mode. 5) Configurethe NDTUfor the appropriateROM type, either 64 Kbit or 256 Kbit, using the strappings shown below. I s8 I Not used I 3) The NDTU is installed in the TOO slot. A second NDTU may be installedin the TO8slot. Each NDTU providesa maximumof 24 channels, divided into groups consisting of four channels each. The first group would fill trunk slot TOO,the second TO1 with the remaining four groups occupyingtrunk slots TO2 mTO5 for a total of six groups. For example, if eight channels are active on the NDTU then slots TOOand TO1 are active i.e., no PCB may be installed in slot TO1. However, PCBs may be installed in slots TO2wT05. Enablethe appropriate channels using slot enable/disable switch S3 (6-element DIP switch) as follows: 6) When configured for normal operation, the NDTU is in the slave mode, and the central office serves as the master clock. For CO testing purposes, the NDTU may be configured as the master. Configure the NDTU for the appropriate operating mode using the strapping options shown below. OPERATING MODE LOOPBACK OPTION SLAVE 1 MASTER MASTER ( SLAVE TB3andTB4 l-2’ I 2-3 ITB~ and TB6l 1 1-2 1 2-3’ 1 4-17 STRAPS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 Loop/GroundStart Mode 7) In some installations, particularly those near the serving Central Office, noise may be introduced over the CO trunk that will appear as sidetone at the telephone. In such situations, a 2dB pad can be inserted into the line, for either incoming voice or outgoing voice, to reduce the sidetone. Strapping options for the 2dB pad are shown below. 8) Install the NDTU in the TOOslot in the main cabinet. If applicable, install a second NDTU in the TO8 slot. Connect the NDTU to the CSU using the Toshiba-supplied cable. 9) The NDTU contains an on-board 12.288 MHz clock used to synchronize the NDTU with the NTWU-3. Connect a coaxial clock cable from NDTU connector 53 to NTWU connector J2. 3.90 NMDU and NDCU 3.91 The NMDU (Figure 4-22) must be strapped for operation with either a one-pair or two-pair modem connection. The two strapping positions for each modem are shown below. CIRCUIT I 4I OPEfi ,TION One-pair Two-pair STRAPS TB 501 1 TB 502 1 A-B 3.92 To change the strap positions on TB 8011802 it is necessary to lift the small piggy-back PCB off the NMDU. Replace the PCB once the straps have been changed. 3.93 If any of the first four NMDU circuits are not used for Modem Pooling, the corresponding DDIU 4-18 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 TBBOI TB701 I \ \ TB601 I TB501 - II n n n rluunc IYIVIUU3 I mrruw *xl- circuit may be used for a DDIU (-MA or -MAT) connection. Use the DDIU Program in Section 200255-300, Programming, to assign the desired port (1 -, 4) on the NMDU. 4.01 Detailed connectioninformationfor each cable is shown in Chapter 5. IMPORTANT! Note the station, trunk, DSS console, and DDIWPDIU connections are identified by the PCB location and circuit number on that PCB. These numbers combine to form a Port Number and are used in the programming section as the station, DSS console, or trunk circuit’s identifier when directory numbers and features are assigned. 3.94 The NDCU PCB is installed at a rate of one PCB for each group of eight DDIUs. There are no strapping options on this PCB. NOTE: The NMDU and NDCU PCBs are not used with the PDIUs. PDlUs use the NDKU PCB. 4.02 Determine the station and DSS console (or data) port numbers as follows (DSS consoles assigned to L or U slots use circuits 1, 3, 5, & 7): 4. CABLE CONNECTIONS 4.00 All connections to the system are made on the rear of the basic and expansion cabinets and on the Power Failure Transfer Unit. Cables with standard male 25pair amphenol-type connectors are used for everything except the TTY, SMDR and MODEM connectors (which require male RS-232C DB25pin connectors). PCB LOCATION PCB CIRCUIT FL LOO- L26orCOO I FL uoo- u31 1 Example:LO1 4-19 PORT NO. 1- 8 t l-8 2 1 I LO12 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY 1992 4.03 Determinetrunk port numbers as follows: I PC6 LOCATION 1 P,TOO-~15 gx TOO-T15 uoo - u31 Example: TO2 I I PCB CIRCUIT 1-4 I PORT NO. I I I 1-4 3 wall or any other flat, vertical surface to which the base can be secured.Whenselectingthe mounting site, considerthe electronictelephone’sweightand the additional stresses to which the mountingwill be subjected. 5.12 Loosen the four captivescrews securingthe electronictelephone’sbase, and removethe base (Figure 4-24). TO23 5. ELECTRONICTELEPHONE STATION EQUIPMENTINSTALLATION 5.13 Using a cutter, remove the handset hanger from the base. Insertthe handsethangerin the slot provided on the front of the telephone (Figure 425). The hanger fits in the notch on the handset. 5.00 Electronic Telephone Connections 5.01 See the DEKT Program in Section200-255300, Programming,for instructions on programming electronic telephones. The system must be told which type of electronictelephone (lo- or 20button, LCD) and what button assignment is required. 5.02 Electronic telephones are connected to the MDF via standard twisted-pairjacketed telephone cable. (Two-pairwiring is required;however,3-pair wiring is strongly recommendedto permit future upgrades,such as data, etc.) To accommodatethe electronictelephone line cord, terminatethe cable in a modular station connector block (RJ25) at the station location. The standard modular electronic telephone cord length is 7 feet (the maximum allowed length is 25 feet). 5.03 The overall length of the electronictelephone cable run from equipment cabinet to phone must not exceed 1,000 feet (305 M), 24 AWG cable. IMPORTANT! When installing the electronic telephone cable, do not run parallel to and within 3 feet of an AC power line. Such power lines should be crossed at right angles (90”) only. 5.14 Rotatethe mountingbase 180”and secureto the telephonewith the four captivescrews (Figure 4-26). 5.15 Connect the electronictelephone to the wall modularconnectorwith a shortcord (approximately 3 inch length). Route the cord into the hollow portion of the base, then mount the electronic telephone on the wail mounting connector. Test each electronic telephone using the TTRM Program, Section 200-255-300,Programming. 5.20 Off-hook Call Announce 5.21 The Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) feature enables an electronic telephone to originate and receive voice announcementwhen the station’s handsetis off-hook.Standardtelephonescan originate off-hook call announces, however, it cannot receive them. A station user is allowed or denied the ability to originatethe Off-hook Call Announce feature in the DCOS Program. In order to receive the Off-hook Call Announce feature, PCBs are required to be installed in each affected electronic telephone and the cabinet. 5.22 A PCB called NOCU is requiredto be installed in the cabinet. Each NOCUprovideseight Off-hook Call Announcecircuits.This PCBtakes up a station slot. Therefore, for each NOCU installed, station capacity is decreased by eight stations. 5.04 Electronic telephone connection details are shown in Figure 4-23. 5.10 Electronic Telephone Wall Mounting 5.23 HVSU and HVSI PCBs inside a 6500-series electronictelephoneallowthe electronictelephone to receive the Off-hook Call Announce feature. 5.11 All electronictelephonesare wall-mountedin the same manner, and they may be mounted on a 4-20 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 CROSS-CONNECT BLOCK NEKU PCB PCB CONNECTOR 1 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 CKT 1 CKT 2 CKT 3 CKT 4 CKT 5 CKT c 1 RL7 i - ; CKT 8 \ (W-BL) (BL-W) W-0) (0-W W-G) G-W (W-BR) VI,.I,V TAILCO TO TELEPWNF *p TO TELEPHONE #3 TO TELEPHONE #4 TO TELEPHONE #5 TO TELEPHONE #6 (G-W 1 f (BK-BR) (BR-BK) i ; 1 ! W-S) (S-BK) , I I ; (Y-W (BL-Y) ; I ; I . RL7 DTL7 DRL7 TL8 RL8 DTL8 DRL8 TO TELEPHONE #7 TO TELEPHONE #8 1 25-PAIR CABLE “J” CABLE CONNECTOR PINS FlGURE4-23-ELECTRONICTELEPHONECONNECTION 4-21 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 HANDSET HANGER PLASTIC FIGURE 4-26-INSTALLATION OF MOUNTING BASEFORWALL-MOUNT INSTALLATION : FIGURE 4-24--REMOVAL OF ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE BASE 1) Removethe base as describedin Paragraph 5.12. NOTE: Exercise care when assembling the HVSU PCB to the HVSl PC5 to prevent damage to the connectorpins. 2) Align the P5 connectoron the HVSI PCB with its receptacle on the HVSU PCB (Figure 427). Apply firm, even pressureto the PCBs to ensurethatthe connectorsmate properly(they click when mated properly). FIGURE 4-25-REMOVALOFHANDSET HANGER 3) Position the HVSWHVSI assembly on the standoffs inside the base, and securewith the two screws provided. NOTE: It is not recommended to equip electronic telephoneswith both Off-hookCal/Announce and the headset option at the same time. 4) Connect the HVSWHVSI PCBs to the electronic telephone PCB as shown in Figure 4- 5.24 The installationof the HVSWHVSIPCBs has to be done in accordancewith the following steps: 5) Reinstall the electronic telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws. 2a. 4-22 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY 1992 TO HVSU CONNECTOR ON MAIN PCB INSIDE TELEPHONE 5.25 Two pairs of the provided 3-pair modular line connector connect the electronic telephone to the DEKT port, and the other pair connects it to the NOCU PCB. HSVI 8 Q i /‘” 5.26 NOCU connection details are shown in Figure 4-29. 5.30 Carbon Handset Transmitter Installation 5.31 If a customer-supplied carbon-type handset is used with the 6500-series electronic telephone, it is necessary to cut two jumper straps located on the main PCB inside the telephone. Cut the jumpers as follows: 5.32 Loosen the four captive screws securing the electronic telephone’s base, and remove the base (Figure 4-24). 5.33 Locate the two carbon straps W201and W202 (Figure 4-30). Cut both straps. FIGURE 4-27-HVSI/HVSUINSTALLATION HKT65-20KSD HHEU CONNECTOR I ROOM NOISE \ I 5.34 Cut the W401 strap for proper LCD functions in A.05 (and below) software. 5.35 Reinstall the electronic telephone’s base and secure using the four captive screws. 5.36 Remove the Toshiba handset and connect the carbon-type handset. 5.40 HHEU Installation 5.41 The HHEU option provides the interface and control for a customer-supplied headset. HVSU -WIRE CONNECTOR W203 FIGURE 4-28 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE PC8CONNECTIONS 5.42 Loosen the four captive screws securing the electronic telephone’s mounting base, and remove the base as shown in Figure 4-24. 5.43 Using a screwdriver or other suitable tool, remove the plastic access tab located on the back of the mounting base (Figure 4-31). The HHEU modular connector is accessed through this opening. 5.44 Set HEADSET/EXT IO switch SW601 on the HHEU PCB (Figure 4-32) to the HEADSET position. 4-23 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY 1992 CROSS-CONNECT BLOCK NOCU PCB I CKT 1 CKT 2 TLI (-1 RLI f TL2 1 RL2I RL4 I I I ’ I ! I ! TL5 ! TL3 CKT 3 RL3 TL4 CKT 4 CKT 5 RL5 f TL6 CKT 6 1 I ’ I ! l28 ! 0 ] ; I , ; I I I TL7 CKT a 1 ; RL8I - @L-W) ; I RLI ; I TL2 (W-G) 1 ; / RL2 30 - (W-S) I ; TL3 5 - (S-W I j RL3 32 - (R-O) ! ’ TL4 7 - RL4 34 - TL5 9 - RL.5 36 I \,I I I I - EKT WITH HVSU f TL6 1 PAIR FOR OCA RL6 38 * TL7 ,3 I l I ! ’ & TLl ,, TL8Il RL7 I-: (G-W) ! ; (W-BL) - 3 RL6II CKT 7 I 26 I=) RL7 To EKT#7 - 4. 15 “J” CABLE CONNECTOR PINSr TO EKT #8 - RJ-25 d I ‘25-PAIR CABLE *CORRECT POLARITY FIGURE 4-29-OFF-HOOK CALLANNOUNCE CONNECTION (NOCU) LCD STRAP w401 HKT6520KSD CARBON STRAPS w201 FIGURE 4-30-LOCATIONOFCARBON STRAPS FIGURE 4-31-REMOVALOF HHEUMODULAR CONNECTOR ACCESS TAB 4-24 INSTALLATlONlNSTRUCTlONS SECTlON200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 5.45 Position the HHEU PCB on the standoffs inside the mounting base, and secure in place using the two screws provided. COMPONENTSIDE OF HHEU 5.46 Connect the HHEU PCB to the electronic telephone PCB (Figure 4-30). 5.47 Connect the headset modular cord through the access hole created in Paragraph 5.43 of this procedure. 5.48 Reinstall the electronic telephone’s base and secure in place using the four captive screws. 5.50 Attendant Console Connection 5.51 The attendant console is connected to the MDF via an industry-standard 25pair cable equipped with a female amphenol-type connector at the console location. 5.52 Connection details for the attendant console(s) are shown in Figures 4-33 and 4-34. FIGURE 4-32-INSTALLATIONOF HHEUUPGRADE OPTION , NEKU (LOOI) CROSS-CONNECT 5.53 Each attendant console requires a port on an BLOCK\ /\ 26 1 27 2 - (W-BL) (BL-W) @L-W) (W-O) (W-D) (O-W) ; ;i ’ ; ; , ’ ( (W-BR) (BR-W) (BR-WI (S-W) I I I I I I I I I : ; , I ; i ; , : ; I I I I I I I I I ,I ; , I ; 1I.; , 8 ; I ! ; , I I , : I : -AnO-24V - AnO -24V ; -24V , -24V >_ >__ -24V I , -24V , -24V 29 4 5 - 44 45 46 47 48 49 (Y-BR) (Y-EM) --(Y-S)(Y-S) w-w W-W (V-0) (V-G) (V-BR) a 9 IO 11 12 13 - (G-R) (BR-R) (S-R) - (BL-BK) (O-BK) (G-BK) -. - TLOOl RLOO~ RLOOl DTLOOl DRLOOI ----- (W-BL) + (BL-W) 4 (W-0) (0-w) 26 1 27 2 + I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONSOLE CONNECTOR EMT0 INITO MAJINO MPJINO ---- (W-BR) d+ (BR-W) I (S-W) g- 29 4 5 -AlTOEG EG EG EG EG EG ------- (Y-BR) = (Y-S) (V-BL) I I (V-BR) I 44 45 46 47 48 49 -------- (G-R) (BR-R) d--i+/-- 6-R) - - I 1 CORD a 9 10 11 12 13 CONSOLE #O CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Jl -P, fl JG-Pex 25PAIR CABLE’ 25PAIR CABLE/ FIGURE 4-33-AlTENDANTCONSOLE#OCONNECTlON 4-25 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 NEKU P, (L151) PexWll) CROSS-CONNECT I- \ - TL RL DTL DAL ----- (W-EL) (BL-W) (W-O) (O-W) - EMT1 iNIT MPlJlNl ---- (w-BR) (BR-W) (S-W) W-W ; (Y-S) -vW-B’-) ; W-0) --+W-G) ! (V-W ; ; -- Al71 EG EG EG ! .EG EG i .EG ; .- ------- (Y-BR) (Y-S) W-W (V-0) (V-G) (V-BR) ’ ’ (G-R) (BR-R) ( (S-R) : (BL-BK) ; (O-BK) , (G-BK) ---cy , : -ATT1 ; ., .j , - ------ (G-R) (BR-R) (S-R) (BL-BK) (O-BK) (G-BK) (W-EL) (BL-W) ! ; W-0) (O-W) I ; ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ 1 (W-W --cy (BR-W) ; (S-W) -’ ‘\ CONNECTOR J501-P, CONNECTOR J5-Pex 25-PAIR CABLE -.-__-- _ -_ f r ; : I I I I I I I I ; BLOCK I -24V -24V -24V -24V -24V -24V - ’ 25-PAIR CABLE _--_.--_.---_.--.- t* f w l-l . -- ATTENDANT CONSOLE #l ____---_-_. FIGURE4-34-ATTENOANT CONSOLE#l CONNECTION PERCEPTlONe Att#O-PCB position LOO Circuit #l Att#l -PCB position L15 Circuit #l connected to the MDF via standard twisted-pair telephone cables. The console connection is made using only the data pair. An RJ25 modular connector should be attached to the instrument-end of the telephone cable to permit connection to the DSS console. PERCEPTlONe, Att#O-PCB position LOOCircuit #1Att#l-PCB position LO1 Circuit #l 5.63 The overall length of the DSS console cable run from the equipment cabinet must not exceed 500 feet (152.5 M), 24 AWG cable. NEKU PCB to provide a speech path. The NEKUs must be installed as follows: IMPORTANT! When installing the DSS console cable, do not run parallel to and within 3’ of an AC power line. Such power lines should be crossed at right angles (90”) only. NOTE: DO NOT cross connect an electronic telephone with either of these ports if the associated aftendant console is installed. 5.60 DSS Console Connections 5.64 DSS console(s) connection details are shown in Figures 4-35 and 4-36, PERCEPTION, and ex, respectively. 5.61 See the DSS Program in Section 200-255300, Programming, to input information concerning the electronic DSS consoles. 5.70 Digital Data Interface Unit Connections (DDIU) 5.62 The DSS console must be positioned adjacent to an electronic telephone (preferably an LCD model). DSS consoles use 2-pair wiring and are 5.71 See the DDIU Program in Section 200-255300, Programming, to input information concerning 4-26 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 PCB CONNECTOR NDSU MODULAR JACK CKT 1 CKT 2 CKT 3 CKT 4 - TLI - 26 - W-BL - RLl - 1 - BL-w - DTLl - 27 - w-0 - DRLl - 2 - O-w - TL2 - 28 - W-G - RI-2 - 3 - G-W - DTL2 - 29 - W-BR - DRL2 - 4 - BR-w - TL3 - 30 - w-s - RL3 - 5 - S-w - DTL3 - 31 - R-BL - DRL3 - 6 - BL-R - TL4 32 - R-O - - RL4 - 7 - O-R - DTL4 - 33 - R-G - DRL4 - 8 - G-R DSS CONSOLE #l CONSOLE #3 FIGURE 4-35-DSS CONSOLE CONNECTION FORPERCEPTION, “c”SLOT PCB CONNECTOR NDSU CKT 1 WI3 - TLI RLl DTLl DRLl TL2 - DTL2 DRL2 TL3 RL3 DTL3 DRL3 I”” - - 26 I 27 2 - W-BL BL-w W-O O-w - W-S S-w R-BL BL-R NOT USED > - 30 5 31 10 NOT USED CKT 5 TL.5 RL5 DTL5 -DRL5 - 34 9 35 10 R-BR BR-R R-S -S-R NOT USED CKl 7 - TL7 RL7 DTL7 DRL7 TL8 DTL8 --RL8 DRL8 c,m,,nr rluunc nnn 1 -c 4-30-1~33 - 38 13 39 14 - BK-G G-BK BK-BR BR-BK NOT USED > #tm.,r,e, ldJNSULt I c #b- . . . . .-a-.-.. WNNtl; m-e I ---------~~ I ION HJK PERCEPTION, 4-27 ____ -_-.. ..-.. -- --- “U”SLOTSANDPERCEPTION, ‘I” SLOTS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 1) Remove the electronic telephone base (see Paragraph 5.12). Digital Data Interface Units. The system must be told which type of DDIU (-MA or -MAT) is installed at each location. 2) Replace the telephone base with the DDIUMAT. 5.72 Digital Data Interface Units requireonlysinglepair wiring and are connected to the MDF via standard twisted-pair telephone cables. NOTE: An electronic telephone with a DDIlJ-MAT attached cannot be wall-mounted. NOTE: The DDIU-MAT requires an additional twopair for electronic telephone operation. (For this reason, three-pair cab/e should be used at locations wherea DDIU-MATmaybe installed.) 5.82 The DDIU-MAT requires four types of connections for proper operation. l Power supply (to power outlet). l 25-pin female RS-232C connector (to data device). l 2-pair modular line cord (to electronic telephone). l 3-pair modular connector (to LCECYNCEC). 5.73 Digital Data Interface Unit connection details are shown in Figure 4-37. 5.80 DDIU-MAT 5.83 The power supply (provided) connects the DDIU-MAT to a 117 VAC wall outlet. The 25-pin female RS-232C connector interfaces with the customer-supplied Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and uses the following pins: 5.81 The DDIU-MAT (Figure4-38) mounts directly on the bottom of an electronic telephone (forming a single unit) as follows: CROSS-CONNECT BLOCK \. , NDCU PCB CKT 1 PI/-r Ur\l 2 CKT 3 CKT 4 TLI I-‘\ RLl I TL2 f I AL2 i I TL3 I I RL3 1 I TL4 ’ I RL4 ! TL5 CKT 5 RL5 j TL6 CKT 6 CKT 8 ] j I ; I , I , I RL6II TL7 CKT 7 ! I ’ I ! 1 ! r ; ’ ; ; I TL8 I I RL7 I I I ’ I ’ ’ RL6h 26 - (W-BL) 1 26 - (EL-W) - (W-G) 3 - (G-W) 30 - RJll II 5 32 - 7 34 9 (R-BR) - 36 ,, 36 ,3 do ,5 I ’ L-1 “J” CABLE CONNECTOR PINS - T : ’ (BR-R) I ’ (BK-EL) I - ’ ’ / f, J-0 (BL-BK) ’ ; ,qL6 --] DDlU#6 (BK-G) ; ; TL7 -* l-0 RL7 / f (BK-S) ; ] (S-BK) ; : DDIU-MAT TO DDIU #5 lx5 --I TL5 TL6 -* (G-BK) DDIU-MA --] DDIU #7 TO DDIU #8 RJ-25 ‘25-PAIR CABLE *CORRECT POLARITY FIGURE 4-37-DIGITALDATAINTERFACE UNITCONNECTION (DDIU-MAand DDIU-MAT) 4-28 INSTALLATlONlNSTRUCTlONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 FIGURE4-38-INSTALLINGDDIU-MAT Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 1 8 1 15 ,7 2o 22 Designation FG ProtectiveGround/Frame SD TransmittedData (to DDIU) RD ReceiveData (fromDDIU) RTS Requestto Send (to DDIU) CTS Clear to Send (fromDDIU) DSR Data Set Readv(fromDDIU) 1 SG 1 Sianal Ground/Common Return1 (RCDI ReceiveCarrierDetect(from DDIU) /ST21 TransmissionSignal ElementTiming (from DDIU) RT TransmissionSignal ElementTiming (from DDIU) Data TerminalReady/Equipment DTR Readv (to DDIU) 1 Cl ) Ring Indicator(from DDIU) I I < 5.85 Several DIP switches found on the bottom of the DDIU-MAT must be set for proper operation (Figure 4-39). DIP SWITCHES 1 I 1 1 1 NO DATA 1 1 2 1 2400 bps 1 1 3 1 4800 bps 1 1 4 / 9600 bps ) . FIGURE4-39-DDIU-MAT DIP SWITCHES 5.84 The provided 2-pair modular line cord connects the DDIU-MAT to the electronic telephone line connector. The 3-pair modular line connector connects to the 3-pair house cable run from the LCEC/NCEC (see Digital Data Interface Unit Connections, Paragraph 5.70). 5.86 When the DATA DETECTION switch (Switch 1) is placed in the ON position, the automatic data release feature will be activated (data connection is automatically released if no data is transmitted for a period of 18 minutes). 4-29 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 Switch 1* = Equipment Ready Supervision ON-Data device provides an Equipment Ready signal to the DDIU (the Terminal Ready LED will light only when the signal is received). OFF-Data device does not provide an Equipment Ready signal to the DDIU (the Terminal Ready LED will remain lit continuously). Switch 2 = not used. Switch 3 = not used. Switch 4 = ON (Enables automatic answer mode of operation.) Switch 5 = ON (Activates Automatic Data Release feature. The data connection is automatically released if no data is transmitted for a period of 18 minutes.) Switch 6 = 2400 BPS ** Switch 7 = 4800 BPS ** Switch 8 = 9600 BPS ** 5.87 Switches 2,3, and 4 select the data speed for synchronous transmission only. Switch 2 = 2400 bps Switch 3 = 4800 bps Switch 4 = 9600 bps 5.88 If asynchronous operation is used, the switches will have no effect and the data speed will self-adjust to a maximum speed of 19.2 kbps or less. 5.89 A power ON/OFFswitch that appears on some early DDIU-MAT models controls power to the DDIU-MAT from the power supply. If the switch is OFF, the DDIU-MAT will not function, but the electronic telephone will continue functioning normally. When the switch is ON, both DDIU-MAT and electronic telephone are functional. In later models, the DDIU-MAT is operational when the power supply is plugged in. *A data path cannot be established if the Terminal Ready light is OFF (even though a DDIU-MA can be answered manually). The Terminal Ready light must be ON to establish a data path when answering manually. **Select the appropriate speed for synchronous data transmission. If the asynchronous mode of operation is used, these switches, have no effectand the DDIU-MA willautomatitally adjust to the appropriate speed (to a maximum of 19.2 kbps). /MPORTANT! All connections to DDlUs (-MA or -MAT) must observe correct tip and ring polarity for proper operation. 5.90 DDIU-MA 5.91 The DDIU-MA is a stand-alone unit that incorporates both the manual dialing and auto-answering features of the DDIU-MAT, but is used as a data transceiver only. 5.95 Two switches on the DIUB PCB must be set for either DTE or MODEM (DCE) operation. The pin assignments shown in Paragraph 5.83 explain the RS-232C cable signaling differences between DTE and DCE devices. (Typically, a DTE is a terminal device such as a personal computer or printer, while a DCE is an intermediate device such as a modem or protocol converter connected to a host. Refer to the data device manufacturer’s documentation for its signaling information.) Set the DIUB PCB switches as follows: 5.92 The DDIU-MA has several internal and external switches that must be set for proper operation. 5.93 The power ON/OFF switch, on the bottom of the DDIU-MA, must be turned ON for the DDIU-MA to operate. When the switch is ON, an LED on the front faceplate will light. 5.94 The DDIU-MA’s faceplate must be removed to set the internal DIP switches. Remove the faceplate by carefully lifting the lower right corner and then pulling the faceplate away from the base. Set the following parameters as required at switch S26 on the internal DIUA PCB (Figure 4-40): 1) Loosen the two screws found under the DDIUMA’s faceplate on the right side (top and bottom) of the DIUA PCB (Figure 4-40). 4-30 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTlON200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 LOOSEN I- \ s3 LOOSEN’ -- FIGURE4-40-DDIU-MA DNA PCB FIGURE4-41-DIUB P[;B 2) Carefully separate the two halves of the DDIUMA to expose the S2 and S3 (DTE/MODEM) switches (Figure 4-41) in the upper left corner of the DIUB PCB. 5.97 The DDIU-MA requires three types of connections for proper operation: l Power supply (to facility power). l 25-pin female RS-232C connector (DDIU-MA to LCEC/NCEC). l Single-pair modular connector (DDIU-MA to LCEWNCEC). 3) If the DDIU-MA is to be connected to a DTE, both switches must be in the DTE position. If it will be connected to a DCE, both switches must be in the MODEM position. 4) Reassemble the DDIU-MA. 5.96 See Operating Procedures or DDIU-MA and Electronic Telephone User Guides for information on the DDIU dialpad, LED/button operation and functions. 4-31 5.98 The power supply (provided) connects the DDIU-MA to a 117 VAC wail outlet. The 25pin female RS-232C connector connects to the customer-supplied data device and is configured for either DTE or DCE operation as follows: INSTALLATIONINSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 DTE Position: Pin No. 6. DIGITAL TELEPHONE STATION EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION Desianation 1 2 1 8 4 5 6 7 8 ,5 FG ProtectiveGround/Frame SD TransmittedData (to DDIU) ( RD ) Receive Data (from DDIU) RTS Requestto Send (to DDIU) CTS Clear to Send (from DDIU) DSR Data Set Ready (from DDIU) SG Signal Ground/CommonReturn RCD ReceiveCarrier Detect (from DDIU) ST2 TransmissionSignal ElementTiming 2 (from DDIU) Timing ~ ~ Element ____~~~ ~ 2 17 j RT 1 TransmissionSignal (from DDIU) 20 /DTRI Data Terminal Ready/Equipment Ready (to DDIU) 1 22 ( Cl 1 Ring Indicator(from DDIU) 1 1 6.00 Digital Telephone Connections I 1 I DCE (MODEM) Position: Pin No. Designation I 1 FG 2 TD 3 RD 4 IRTS/ ProtectiveGround/Frame TransmittedData (from DDIU) Receive Data (to DDIU) Requestto Send (from DDIU) I 6.01 See the DEKT Program in Section 200-255300, Programming, for instructions on programming digital telephones. When installing digital telephones, digital DSSconsoles, PDIU-DI, or PDIUDS, Version D.04 software or higher must be installed. The system must be told the type of digital telephone (20-button, or 20-button with LCD) and what button assignment is required. 6.02 Digital telephones are connected to the MDF via standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. (Single-pair wiring is required; however, 2- or 3-pair wiring is strongly recommended to permit expected -distances for data, spare pair, etc.) To accommodate the digital telephone line cord, terminate the cable in a modular station connector block (RJ25) at the station location. The standard modular digital telephone cord length is 7 feet (the maximum allowed length is 25 feet). 6.03 The overall length of the digital telephone cable run from equipment cabinet to phone must not exceed 1,000 feet (305 M), 24 AWG cable. IMPORTANT! When installing the digital telephone cable, do not run parallel to and within 3 feet of an AC po wer line. Such power lines should be crossed at right angles (90”) only. Transmit Signal ElementXming 1 1 24 1ST1 1 (to DDIU) 6.04 Digital telephone connection details areshown in Figure 4-42. 5.99 The DDIU-MA connects to the LCEC/NCEC with a single-pair station line cable that plugs into the modular connector on the back of the base (see Digital Data interface Unit Connections, Paragraph 5.70). 6.10 Digital Telephone Wall Mounting 6.11 Both telephones are wall-mounted in the same manner, and they may be mounted on a wall or any other flat, vertical surface to which the base can be secured. When selecting the mounting site, consider the digital telephone’s weight and the additional stresses to which the mounting will be subjected. IMPORTANT! All connections to DDlUs (-MA or -MAT) must observe correct tip and ring polarity for proper operation. 4-32 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTIONZOO-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 NOTE: Digital Telephones with Data Interface Units (PDIU-DI) or Off-hook Cal/Announce (DVSU), and Standa/one Data Interface Units (PDIU-DS) are connected, per Figure 4-42, using single-pair wiring. NDKU PCB I CROSS-CONNECT BLOCK PCB CONNECTOR MODULAR JACK -I TL4 DI ” 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 I I I La -. - I I l-I 7 l I I I I I I I I I 1 I 32 34 37 12 (W-BL) (BL-W) (W-0) (0-W) (W-G) G-W) (W-BR) (BR-W) I TLl RLl IR - TL2 RL2 I (W) 8AUX Y 8R2 MODULAR STATION TAILCORD I 1 TO TELEPHONE #2 &Rl W-S) ii;; I- l- k I 15 l- 8’ f= (R-O) --+I (0-R) I (R-G) (G-R) ; (R-BR) ! P-R) P-3 (S-W (BK-BL) (BL-BK) (BK-0) (0-BK) (BK-G) , ! ; ; 1 I I ; , I ; ; I [ ! ; i ’ ; I (BR-BK) (BK-S) (S-BK) 1 ; I I I I ; , I ; I ; U-W (BL-Y) 1 I ; J G-W (BK-BR) I - . j TOTELEPHONE#3 TL4 RL4 TO TELEPHONE #4 1 TL5 RL5 TO TELEPHONE #5 1 TL6 RL6 TO TELEPHONE #6 I TL7 RL7 TO TELEPHONE #7 1 TL8 RL8 1 TO TELEPHONE #8 25-PAIR CABLE \ “J” CABLE CONNECTOR PINS FIGURE4-42-DIGITAL TELEPHONE CONNECTION 4-33 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY 1992 6.12 Loosen the four captive screws securing the digital telephone’s base, and remove the base (Figure 4-43). 6.13 Using a cutter, remove the handset hanger from the base. Insert the handset hanger in the slot provided on the front of the telephone (Figure 444). The hanger fits in the notch on the handset. 6.14 Rotate the mounting base 180”and secure to the telephone with the four captive screws (Figure 4-45). 6.15 Connect the electronic telephone to the wall modular connector with a short cord (approximately 3 inch length). Route the cord into the hollow portion of the base, then mount the digital telephone on the wall mounting connector. Test each digital telephone using the 7TRM Program, Section 200255-300, /=rogramming. FIGURE4-44-REMOVALOFHANDSET HANGER 6.20 Off-hook Call Announce 6.21 The Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) feature enables a digital telephone to originate and receive HANDSET HANGER I PLASTIC TAB FIGURE4-45-INSTALLATIONOF MOUNTING BASEFORWALL-MOUNT INSTALLATION I-IbUKt 4-4Y-HtMUVAL voice announcement when the station’s handset is off-hook. Standard telephones can originate offhook call announces, however, it cannot receive them. A station user is allowed or denied the ability to originate the Off-hook Call Announce feature in the DCOS Program. In order to receive the Offhook Call Announce feature, a PCB (DVSU) is required to be installed in each affected digital Ul- DIGITALTELEPHONE BASE 4-34 INSTALLATIONINSTRUCTIONS SECTlON200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 telephone, and the NDKU must be set for option 2 (see Paragraph 3.45 of this chapter). (Figure 4-46), and secure it with the four screws provided. ’ 6.22 A DVSU PCB inside a lOOO-series digital telephone allows the digital telephone to receive the Off-hook Call Announce feature. 4) Connect the DVSU wire plugs to the connectors labelled “DVSU”on both telephone’s PCBs (Figures 4-46 and 4-47). IMPORTANT NOTE.’ Make sure that the DVSU wire plugs are connected to the proper connectors. NOTE: It is not recommended to equip digital telephones with both Off-hook Cal/Announce and the headset option at the same time. 5) Reinstall the telephone’s mounting base (Figure 4-43), and secure it with its four captive screws. 6.23 The installation of the DVSU PCB must be done in accordance with the following steps: 6.24 A single pair of wires are required to connect the digital telephone to the NDKU port. OCA connection details are shown in Figure 4-42, the Digital Telephone Connection diagram. 1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the telephone’s mounting base (Figure 4-43), and remove the base. 2) Loosen the four captive screws securing the metal plate to the standoffs inside the base where the DVSU PCB will be installed (Figure 4-46). Remove the metal plate and discard it. 6.30 Carbon Handset Transmitter Installation 6.31 If a customer-supplied carbon-type handset is used with the 1OOO-seriesdigital telephone, the two jumper straps on the telephone’s upper PCB, labelled “PERCEPTION-SUB (SPF),” must be cut. To cut the straps: 3) Position the DVSU PCB on the standoffs IMPORTANT! .I-,------? that the DVSU wire Make sure TO DVSU CONNECTOR ON UPPERPCB INSIDE TELEPHONE 1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the telephone’s mounting base (Figure4-43), and remove the base. plugs are! inserted into the correct UPPER ‘PPER and LOWER nnectors PCB connectors of the telephone. Do not plug DVSU into HHEU connector. ON LOWER PC TELEPHONE FIGURE 4-47 TELEPHONEPCBCONNECTIONSANDSTRAPS FIGURE4-46-DVSU INSTALLATION 4-35 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 2) Refer to Figure 4-47, and locate the CARBON straps, W301 and W302, and cut them. telephone’s mounting base (Figure 4-43) and remove the base. 3) Reinstall the telephone base (Figure 4-43), and secure it with its four captive screws. 2) Using a screw driver or other suitable tool, remove the plastic tab located on the back of the mounting base (Figure 4-43). The HHEU modularconnectorfor the headset is accessed through this opening. 6.40 Beep Strap Removal 6.41 A beep is emitted whenever a dialpad button or flexible button is pressed. This beep can be eliminated if the beep strap is cut. To cut the strap: 3) Set the SW601 switch on the HHEU PCB to the HEADSET position (Figure 4-48). 1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the telephone’s mounting base (Figure 4-43), and remove the base. 2) Refer to Figure 4-47, and locate the BEEP strap, W304, labelled “PERCEPTION1O-SUB (SPF)”on the telephone’s upper PCB, and cut it. 3) Reinstall the telephone’s mounting base (Figure 4-43), and secure it with its four captive screws. 6.50 Microphone/Speaker Threshold Adjustment (Speakerphone only) 6.51 If the speaker frequently cuts off during handsfreeoperation, because of high ambient noise levels, set the ROOM NOISE switch to the high position. To set the switch: 4) If the headset receiver is not to receive OCA caller voice announcements, cut both sides of the R607 resistoron the HHEU PCB (Figure448), then remove the resistor. 5) Position the HHEU PCB on the standoffs inside the base (Figure 4-48), and secure with the two screws provided. 6) Connect the HHEU PCB to the telephone’s upper PCB, labelled “PERCEPTION1O-SUB (SPF).” See Figure 4-47. COMPONENTSIDE OF HHEU (V.3 or later) 1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the telephone’s mounting base (Figure4-43), and remove the base. 2) Refer to Figure 4-47, and locate the ROOM NOISE switch, labelled “PERCEPTION1 OSUB (SPF)” on the telephone’s upper PCB. Carefully push the switch to the HIGH (H) position. 3) Reinstall the telephone’s mounting base (Figure 4-43), and secure it with its four captive screws. 6.60 HHEU Installation 6.61 The HHEU option provides the interface and control for a customer-supplied headset. It is installed in accordance with the following steps: FIGURE4-48 HHEUINSTALLATION FORDIGITALTELEPHONE 1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the 4-36 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 7) Refer to Figure 4-47, and locate the HHEU strap, W303, on the upper PCB. Cut the strap if the HHEU PCB is to be connected to a headset. 8) Reinstall the telephone’s mounting base and secure it with its four captive screws. 6.70 Attendant Console Connection 6.71 See Paragraph 5.50 for the attendant console connection. 6.80 DSS Console Connections 6.81 See the DSS Program in Section 200-255300, Programming, to input information concerning the digital DSS consoles. 6.82 The DSS console must be positioned adjacent to a digital telephone (preferably an LCD model). DSS consoles use 2-pair wiring and are connected to the MDF via standard twisted-pair telephone cables. An RJ25 modular connector should be attached to the instrument-end of the telephone cable to permit connection to the DSS console. 6.83 The overall length of the DSS console cable run from the equipment cabinet must not exceed 1000 feet (304 M), 24 AWG cable. IMPORTANT! When installing the DSS console cable, do not run parallel to and within 3’ of an AC power line. Such power lines should be crossed at right angles (90”) only. municating on a voice call. One unit, called the integrated DIU (PDIU-DI) replaces the digital telephone’s base; the other unit is a small selfcontained box called the stand-alone DIU (PDIUDS). Each DIU is powered by the NDKU PCB it is connected to; therefore, no external power is required. 6.92 Both PDlUs can be connected to standard Electronic Industries Association (EIA) RS-232 asynchronous serial data devices. EIA devices are divided into two categories: l Data communication equipment (DCE). Common DCE devices are modems and some printers. l Data terminal equipment (DTE). Common DTE devices are personal computers, ASCII terminals, and some printers. .The PDIU-DI operates like a DCE, and it connects directly to DTE devices using standard RS-232 cables. Depending on how its internal jumper plugs are configured, the PDIU-DS can either operate like a DTE and connect to DCE devices, or operate like a DCE device and connect to a DTE device. In most applications, DTE and DCE devices exchange data between each other via the standard RS-232 cable connection. 6.93 PDlUs can function with DCE and DTE devices at data speeds of up to 19.2kbps; however, keyboard dialing using AT commands (from a PC or a terminal connected to a PDIU) is limited up to 9.6kbps. PDIU data transmission speed is set by the first AT command that the PDIU receives once it is in the command mode. The transmission speed is transparent to the PDIU if data is being sent via manual dialing or if the PDIU is receiving calls. 6.84 DSS console(s) connection details are shown in Figures 4-49 and 4-50, for both PERCEPTION, and ex. NOTES: 1. See the DDIU Program in Section 200255-300 for information on programming the Digital Data interface Units. The system must be told which type of PDIU (-DI or -DS) is installed at each location. 2. Digital Data interface Unit (PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS) connection details are shown in Figure 4-42, the Digital Telephone Connection diagram. 6.90 DIGITAL DATA INTERFACE UNIT (PDIU) 6.91 The Perceptione8ie, with D.04 software provides two new style digital Data Interface Units (DIUs) that enable digital telephone users to simultaneously transmit and receive data on the same NDKU station port and wire pair while com- 4-37 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTlON200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 PCB CONNECTOR NDKU MODULAR JACK t CKT 1 CKT 2 CKT 3 CKT 4 - TLl - 26 - W-EL - RLl - 1 - BL-W - DTLl - 27 - W-O - DRLl - 2 - O-W - TL2 - 20 - W-G - RLZ! - 3 - G-W - DTL2 - 29 - W-BR - DRL2 - 4 - BR-W - TL3 - 30 - W-S - AL3 - 5 - s-w - DTL3 - 31 - R-BL - DRL3 - 6 - BL-R - TL4 - 32 - R-O - RL4 - 7 - O-R - DTL4 - 33 - R-G - DRL4 - 0 - G-R STATION CORD CONSOLE #l CONSOLE #3 CONSOLE #4 FIGURE 4-49-DIGITALDSSCONSOLE CONNECTION FORPERCEPTION, “c” SLOT PCB CONNECTOR NDKU CKl 1 CKT 3 CKT 5 MODULAR JACK - TLl RLI DTLl DRLl - 26 1 27 2 - STATION CORD W-BL BL-W W-O O-W NOT USED - TL3 RL3 DTL3 DRLB - 30 5 31 10 W-S S-W R-BL --L-R NOT USED - TL5 RL5 DTL.5 DRL5 - 34 9 35 10 - R-BR BR-R R-S S-R - BK-G G-BK BK-BR BR-BK NOT USED CKT 7 - n-7 RL7 DTL7 DRL7 - 38 13 39 14 CONSOLE #4 NOT USED I-Ibunt 4-su DIGITALDSSCONSOLE CONNECTION FORPERCEPTION, “U”SLOTSANDPERCEPTION, ‘I” SLOTS 4-38 lNSTALLATlONlNSTRUCTlONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 IMPORTANT NOTE! To use the PDIU-DI or PDIU-DS with AT 232 cables, available from telephone supply stores. The PDIU-DVPDIU-DS Data Units require ten signals for some applications, but can function with sight, using modular cords and connectors with RJ45/DB25 adapters for other applications (Fig.rres 4-52 and 4-53). If uncertain which signals are iecessary for an application, all ten should be connected. commands, communications software or some program that performs “terminal emulation”must be loaded in the computer. The AT commands cannot be issued from the computer’s operating system prompt. 6.100 Common DIU Connections IMPORTANT NOTES.’ 1. The PDIU-DI is always a DCE device; the PDIU-DS may be a DTE or DCE, depending on how its in ternal jumpers (1 - 9) are configured (see Figure 4-54). 2. In the descriptions below, when a signal is ON, its potential is about seven volts positive, relative to signal ground (pin 7); when a signal is OFF, it is about 7 volts negative, relative to the signal ground (pin 7). 6.101 The block diagram in Figure 4-51 illustrates common DIU connections. In this example, PDIUDls are connected to laptop personal computers (PC1 and PC2), and the PDIU-DS’s are connected to a serial printer and modems. The PC users can transfer files internally, print files on the same printer, and access the modem to send/receive data to/from an external personal computer, or dial up a data service. 6.102 To access these devices, a data call connection must be established between the DIUs. This is accomplished by dialing the destination DIU from a digital telephone dialpad or from a PC keyboard using standard AT dial commands. PDIU-Dls have port and DATA DN assignments adjacent to the digital telephones that they are connected to, while PDIU-DS’s have separate port and DATA DN assignments. The and m buttons on the digital telephone tell the system whether a voice or data button indicates voice call is being made: The calls, and the m button indicates data calls. When dialing from a keyboard with AT commands, enter ATD for data calls. Only DATA calls can be made through keyboard dialing. Frame Ground (FG, Pin 1): The FG signal (EIA circuit AA) is a protective or safety ground which is bonded to the PDIU-DVPDIU-DS. If required by local codes, the FG may be connected to external ground. Transmit Data (TD, Pin 2): DTE devices transmit, and DCE devices receive data on theTD lead (EIA circuit BA). Before the DTE device can transmit the TD signal, the RTS, CTS, DSR, and DTR signals (all discussed later in this section) must be ON. The TD signal is OFF in the idle state. Receive Data (RD, Pin 3): The DCE device transmits data to the DTE device on the RD lead (EIA circuit BB). Requestto Send (RTS,Pin 4): Some DTE devices send an RTS signal (EIA circuit CA) to the DCE device when they are ready to transmit data on the TD lead. If the DTE device generates the RTS signal, the DIU DIP switch SWI-4 should be set to ON to inform the PDIU. Sometimes, the DTUDCE device may use RTSKTS for Ready/Busy-type flow control. In these cases, DIP switch SWl-4 should be set to OFF (see Figure 4-55 for the DIP switch information). q q 6.103 Installation instructions for these devices are provided in Paragraphs 6.140 w 6.160. Call paths and scenarios for four types of data calls are provided in Paragraphs6.181 m6.185. Step-by-step data calling procedures are provided in the PDlU User Guide. 6.110 EIA interface Leads (Signals) 6.111 Both DIUs operate with the ten standard EIA M-232 interface leads (signals) on which signaling data is transmitted and received. DlUs connect to serial data devices’ signals with standard RS- 4-39 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 1 LAPTOP, PC 1 PERCEIPTiONeh.ex DIIJ-DI I I NOTES: 1. W-232 cable and connector information is provided in Figures 4-53 to 4-54. 2. PDIU-DVPDIU-DS MDF station wiring to NDKU is in Section 200-255-205. r-l! 3. Modem MDF station wiring to NSTU is in Section 200-255- UlIl DIAL-UP COMPUTER TFI 1 FDUANF I fiff!E&MODEM I I IL I TELEPHONE I aMoDEMI 111 - m-m PDIU-DS u IL PC3 . FIGURE 4-51-PERCEPTION DATAINSTALLATION EXAMPLE BLOCKDIAGRAM 4-40 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 CONNECTIONEXAMPLE 1 DIGITALTELEPHONE TOSHIBA LAPTOP OR IBM AT TYPE PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC) L PDIU-DI BASE I / L TYPE 1 MODULAR ADAPTER’ EikfY;;;;;ssED)’ IMPORTANT! Will not function with applications that require the Ring Indicator signal to PC. CONNECTIONEXAMPLE 2 IBM PC OR Xl TYPE PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC) DIGITAL TELEPHONE PDIU-DI BASE TYPE 3 MODULAR ADAPTER’ TYPE A MODULAR CORD (STRAIGHT)’ (50 ft max, 24AWG) TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER’ IMPORTANT! Will not function with applications that require the Ring Indicator signal to PC. CONNECTIONEXAMPLE 3 NOTES: 1. See Figure 4-53 for detailed pin out information of modular cords and adaprers. 2. Never use modular cords and adapters when connecting a PDIU-Dl/PDIU-DS to a modem. 3. Connection examples 1 and 2 work when using the PDIU-DI to make calls with personal computer applications (printer sharing, outgoing modem calls, erc). If the PC PDIU-DI must receive calls, rhe RI lead is normally required; therefore, a srandard 1X-232 cable must be used (see Figures 4-54 and 4-55). 4. In Connection example 3, PDIU-DS must be in the “connect to DTE mode” (Pl - P9, strapped A-B). 5. All modular cords and adapters are customer-supplied. FIGURE4-5%PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS MODULAR CABLE/RJ-45 ADAPTER CONNECTIONS 4-41 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 TYPE 1 RJ45 TO DB9 (FEMALE) ADAPTER 8 6 7 5 2 4 1 RJ45 N/C DSR RTS RD DCD TD GND CTS RI 6 7 2 1 3 5 8 9 LEAD NAME DB9 TYPE 2 RJ45 TO DB25 (MALE) ADAPTER 8 7 5 6 4 3 2 1 N/C CTS SG DTR TD DCD RD RTS DSR RI 5 7 20 2 8 3 4 6 22 l RJ45 LEAD NAME DB25 2345678 ooooeooooooo l ooooooooooo TYPE 3 RJ45 TO DB25 (FEMA ,I-E) ADAPTER CTS SG DTR TD DCD RD RTS DSR RI 5 7 20 2 8 3 4 6 22 FRONT TYPE A RJ45 FLAT MODULAR CORD (STRAIGHT) 1-8 LEAD NAME 1 DB25 RJ45 STRAIGHT THROUGH 1 2 FRONT 1 i : x : 5 3 f8 1.8 TYPE B RJ45 FLAT MODULAR CORD (CROSSED) Modular Cords (50 ft max, 24AWG; customer supplied) FIGURE 4-53-PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS MODULAR CORDS ANDRJ-45/W-232ADAPTER PINCONNECTIONS 4-42 lNSTALLATlONlNSTRUCTlONS SECTION200-255-294 FEBRUARY1992 PDIU-DS (FRONT VIEW) PDIU-DS (REAR VIEW) MODULAR JACK FOR CONNECTING E FIGURE 4-55 FOR SWITCH (1 - 4) OPTIONS INFORMATION POWER LED RS-23i, DB25 (FEMALE) CONNECTOR Pl - P9 LOCATED ON PCB INSIDE OF PDIU-DS UNIT (SEE NOTES) SIGNAL DIRECTION AND FUNCTION OF Pl - P9 POIU-DS CONNECTED TO CITE 1 I I I FG -1 FRAME GROUND I 1 SG SIGNAL GROUND 7 TD TRANSMIT DATA 2 I RECEIVE DATA RD I I~- I DTE e DIU -I-Pl ~2 3 PDIU-DS CONNECTED TO DCE I MODEM c 1 kIDEM w I DIU Pl DIU 1 P2 RTS REQUEST TO SEND 4 DTE l DIU P6 MODEM c DIU P6 CTS CLEAR TO SEND 5 DTE l DIU P7lP5 MODEM r) DIU P7iP5 DSR DATA SET READY 6 DTE CDIIJ P4 MODEM I) DIU P4 DTR DATA TERMINAL READY 20 DTE e DIU P3 MODEM a DIU P3 DCD DATA CARRIER DETECT 6 DTE c DIU P6 MODEM I) DIU P6 I-MODEM ~~* DIU RI I RING INDICATOR I 22 I DTECDIU I p9 I P9 NOTES: 1. Mode select (Pl - P9) ‘A-B” if PDIU-DS is connected to a terminal-type device (DTE), 2. Mode select (PI - P9) “B-c” if PDIU-DS is connected to a modem-type device (DCE). 3. See Figure 4-61 to disassemble/assemble PDIU-DI. 4. Some US-232 leads go by different names depending on the equipment manufacturer. FIGURE 4-54-PDIU-DSJUMPERPLUGOPTIONS/R%?32 CONNECTOR INFORMATION 4-43 1 I INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY 1992 PDIU-DI (BOmOM VIEW) DIP SWITCH ACCESS FROM BOTTOM - OUTSIDE OF PDIU-DI DIP SWITCH SWI BACK VIEW (ACCESS FROM BACK 1 OUTSIDE OF PDIU-DS) PDIU-DS (REAR VIEW) I DB25 CONNECTOR (FEMALE) FOR DTE OR DCE RS-232 CABLE CONNECTION PDIU-DI DIGITAL TELEPHONE BASE MODULAR CONNECTOR FOR NDKU LINE CONNECTION PDIU-DI AND -DS SW1 DIP SWITCH (1 .. 4) FUNCTIONS SWITCH FUNCTION INITIAL POSITION OFF SW1 (1) Forced hang up when DIU does not detect space signal on TD or RD for about 9 minutes ON: enable (auto-disconnect) OFF: disable SW1 (2) DCD, DSR control ON: continuous on OFF: DSR depends on DTR (DCD is on during communication state) SW1 (3) RI control ON: RI is on continuously during ringing state OFF: RI is 1 set ON/3 set OFF during ringing state OFF SW1 (4) RTS control ON: DTE doesn’t have RTS signal OFF: DTE has RTS signal (ready/busy flow control: RTS/CTS:DCD1 OFF FIGURE 4-55-PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS SW1DIPSWITCHINFORMATION 4-44 INSTALLATIONIN~TRUCTlONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 l l l l Clear to Send (CTS, Pin 5): The DCE device sends the CTS signal (EIA circuit CB) which indicates that it is prepared to transmit data to the DTE device. The DCE device sends this signal, only when it receives the RTS signal from the DTE device. Sometimes, the DTE/DCE device may use RTS/CTS for Ready/Busytype flow control; in these cases, dip switch SW1 -4 should be set to OFF (see Figure 4-55 for the DIP switch information). Data Set Ready (DSF?, Pin 6): When connected to the communication channel and prepared to exchange control characters to initiate data transmission, the DCE device sends the DSR signal (EIA circuit CC) to the DTE device. If the PDIU DIP switch SWl-1 is set to OFF, DSR and DCD (see DCD description below) will be ON continuously; if the switch is set to ON, the PDIU generates DSR only after receiving the DTR signal. Sometimes, DTE/DCE devices use DTW DSR for Ready/Busy flow control; in these cases, DIP switch SWl-2 should be set to OFF (see Figure 4-55for the DIP switch information). Signal Ground (SG, Pin 7): The SG signal (EIA circuit AB) establishes the common ground reference for all other PDIU and data device signals, and must be wired for all applications. Data Carrier Detect (DCD, Pin 8): The DCE device sends the DCD signal (DCD, Pin 8) when receiving the carrier signal on the line side. Before transmitting or receiving data, most DTE devices require that the DCD be ON. If the carrier signal is removed by the remote end or lost due to a fault condition on the line, the DCE notifies the DTE device by an OFF condition with the DCD signal. To set the DCD on continuously, PDIU DIP switch SW1 -2 is set to ON; if set to OFF, the DCD signal will be on during the 4-45 l l communication state only. SWl-2 is set to OFF when the DTE/DCE uses the DTFUDSRsignals for Ready/Busy flow control(seeFigure4-55fortheDIPswitch information). Data Terminal Ready (DTR, Pin 20): The DTE device sends the DTR signal (EIA circuit CD) to the DCE device, prompting the DCE device to open the communication line. The line is closed and the call disconnected when the DTE device quits sending the DTR signal. DTR may be sent any time to indicate that the DTE is ready to transmit or receive data. Sometimes, DTE/DCE devices use DTWDSR for Ready/Busy flow control; in these cases, DIP switch SWI2 should be set to OFF (see Figure 4-55 for the DIP switch information). Ring Indicator (Rl, Pin 22): The RI signal (EIA circuit CE) is sent by the DCE device to the DTE device. Whenever the DCE device receives a ringing signal on the line side, it turns the RI signal on. If PDIU DIP switch SWI-3 is set to ON, the RI signal will be on continuously; if the switch is set to OFF, the RI signal will be one second on/three seconds off. Pin No. Designation 1 1 1 FG 1 ProtectiveGround/Frame 1 6 IDSRl Data Set Readv(from PDIU) 7 SG Signal Ground/CommonReturn 8 RCD ReceiveCarrierDetect (from PDIU) , 5 ST2 TransmissionSignal ElementTiming (from PDIU) TransmissionSignal ElementTiming (from PDIU) 20 DTR Data TerminalReady/Equipment Ready(to PDIU) 22 Cl Ring Indicator(from PDIU) I 171RTI I INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 6.120 DIP Switch Options 6.121 Each of the PDIU-DI and the PDIU-DS data units has a four-control DIP switch which can be configured for signaling options. The switch is located on the bottom of the PDIU-DI, and on the back panel of the PDIU-DS (see Figure 4-55). l SW1 -1: Normally, this switch is set to OFF. When set to ON, it automatically disconnects devices from the PDlUs if no data is exchanged between the devices and PDIU for an interval of eight to nine minutes. l SWl-2: This switch is placed in the ON position when the PDIU-DI (or PDIU-DS configured like a DCE) must hold DCD and DSR on continuously. Sometimes, a computer may use DTR/DSR for Ready/Busy flow control; in these cases, this switch should be OFF. Consult the DTE/DCE device or application software documentation to determine which type of flow control is required. l SWl-3: The PDIU-DI (or PDIU-DS configured as a DCE) sends the Ring Indicate signal (RI) to the computer to tell the computer (DTE) that the l PD.lUis receiving an incomingcall. SW1-3should be set to ON for the DCE to send RI continuously, and OFF to send at one-second-ON/three-seconds-OFF intervals. Consult the DTUDCE device or application software documentation to determine which type of flow control is required. SWl-4: This switch is placed in the ON position if the computer does not output the RTS signal. Sometimes, the computer may use RTS/CTS for Ready/Busy flow control; in these cases, SW1 4 should be OFF. Consult the DTE/DCE device or application software documentation to determine which type of flow control is required. 6.130 PDIU-DI INSTALLATION 6.131 The PDIU-DI (Figure 4-56) mounts directly on the bottom of a digital telephone (forming a single unit) as follows: 1) Remove the digital telephone base (see Paragraph 6.12). 2) Replace the telephone base with the PDIU-DI. RS-232 (FEMALE) DB-25 CONNECTOR - / ii;E- TO P2 OF BOITOM IMPORTANT: DO NOT CONNECT DIU CABLES TO HHEU CONNECTOR DIRECTORY -.- -. DIGITAL TELEPHONEBASE FIGURE4-56-PDIU-DI PCB/DIGITAL TELEPHONE INSTALLATION 4-46 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 NOTE: A digital telephone with a PDIU-DI attached cannot be wall-mounted. 6.140 PDIU-DI to Personal Installation Computer for correct RS-232 pin requirements; requirements vary with each manufacturer. The number of EIA RS-232 signals required (8,9, or 10 wires) will depend on the application. When EIA signal requirements are not known, connect the 10 EIA signals listed in Paragraph 6.110. Figures 4-57,458, and 4-59 provide diagrams for connecting RS-232 cables between PDIU-Dls and a Toshiba printer and laptop computer, IBM XT-type and A T-type personal computers. (PC) 6.141 The PDIU-DI always functions as a DCE device; it transmits data on the Receive Data lead (RD) and receives data on the Transmit Data lead (TD). Most personal computers function as DTE devices; PCs transmit data on the TD lead and receive data on the RD lead. Follow the steps below to install the PDIU-DI to a DTE or DCE PC: 4) Set the PDIU-DVPDIU-DS DIP switch (SWl1 - 4) for the desired application. Figure 4-55 shows the DIP switch locations and Paragraph 6.120 describes the switch functions. NOTES: 1. Use the steps below when installing an ASCII terminal, orany other DTE device to a PDIU-DI. 2. The PDIU-DI can connect to a DCE computer or any other DCE-type device using a specially configured M-232 cable or adapter; however, this applica tion is rarely required. 5) Access the DEKT and DDIU Programs for PDIU port connection and data button assignments. l The port number entered for the PDIU-DI in the DDIU Program is the adjacent port number of the digital telephone. 1) lnstall the digital telephone that is to be aquipped with PDIU-DI in accordance with the instructions in Section 200-255-205, MDF Jrrangement, Paragraph 1.01 and in Figure 5-2. 2) Example: DKTportnumber= L024, PDIUDI port number = LO34 IMPORTANT NOTE.’ The eighth port (circuit) of the NDKU cannot be used for data switching connections (PDIU-DI or PDIU-DS). nstall the PDIU-DI in the digital telephone’s )ase in accordance with the instructions in ‘aragraph 6.130. 6.150 PDIU-DS To Printer Installation NOTE: The PDIU-DI operates only as a DCE device; therefore, unlike the PDIU-DS, it has no internal jumpers. 3) Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the PDIU-DI DB-25 female connector and the PC’s appropriate asynchronous serial communications port connector. IMPORTANT NOTE! Check the PC manufacturer’s serial communication port interface documentation 6.151 PERCEPTIONeLex enables serial printers (laser, dot matrix, or other types) to be connected to stand-alone data interface units (PDIU-DS). Digital telephones equipped with PDIU-DI and Electronic Telephones equipped with DDIU-MAT can share access to these printers. Serial printers operate as DCE or DTE devices, depending on the vendor. The PDIU-DS can be connected to either type, since it can be configured as a DTE or DCE device. (The PDIU-DS comes from the factory configured as a DCE device.) Follow the steps below to install the PDIU-DS to a serial printer. 4-47 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 TOSHIBA PS321SL PRINTER (FUNCTIONS LIKE A DTE) PDIU-US (CONFIGURED IN THE “CONNECT TO DTE” MODE: Pl - P9 = A-B SO PDIU FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE) DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS PRIMER PIN# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22 piK#Ds NAME FG TD RD FITS N/C DSR SG DCD DTR RI NAME 12345678 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD 20 22 DTR RI Rear view of printer (50 ft max, 24 AWG; customer supplied). NOTES: 1. The printer receives data on pin 3 (RD) and transmits data on pin 2 (TO). 2. The PDIU-DS should be in the connect to DTE mode (Pl - P9 are strapped A-B), so that it transmits data on pin 3 (RD) and receives data on pin 2 (TO). FIGURE 4-57-PDIU-DSTOTOSHIBA PRINTER, RS-232CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS 4-48 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTlON200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 IBM XT PERSONAL COMPUTER OR ASCII TERMINAL (FUNCTIONSLIKE A DTE) PDIU-DI (FUNCTIONSLIKE A DCE) DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS PDIU-DI PIN# NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS 6 20 22 PDIU-DI PIN# FG TD RD FITS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR RI Rear view of personal computer or ASCII te NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 20 22 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR RI Rear view of PDIU-DI DB25. , 1CONNECTOR 1 RS-232 CABLE IBM PC XT modem style (serial) DB25 to DB25 (M/F) RS-232 cable (50 ft max, 24 AWG, customer supplied). NOTE: The PC/ASCII terminal receives data on pin 3 (170)and transmits data on pin 2 (TO). FIGURE 4-58-PDIU-DITOIBMXT-TYPE COMPUTER, RS-232CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS 4-49 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY 1992 PDIU-DI (FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE) TOSHIBA LAPTOP OR IBM AT-TYPE PERSONAL COMPUTER (DTE) PIN DESIGNATIONS COM PORT PIN # NAME PIN DESIGNATIONS PDIU-DI PIN# 123456769 DCD RD TD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI NAME Rear view of asynchronous (serial) communication interface connector (DB9) of Toshiba laptop or IBM AT personal computer 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR RI Rear view of PIN-DI DB25, FE-232 female connector DE9 MALE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR IBM PC AT modem style (serial) DB25 to DB9, RS-232 cable. Pin to pin connections are configured as a straight cable, not as a null modem cable (50 ft max, 24AWG; customer supplied). NOTES: 1. Some RS-232 E/A leads may be called by other names by some manufacturers. 2. The computer receives data on pin 2 (RD) and sends data on pin 3 (TD). FIGURE4-59-PDIU-DI TO IBM AT-TYPECOMPUTER, RS-232CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS 4-50 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTlON200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 4) If steps 2 and 3 are properly done, the POWER and READY LEDs on the PDIU-DS should light when the printer is turned on. NOTES: 1. Only serial printers that conform to EIA M-232 signaling requirements can be connected to PDIU-DS units. 2. In rare applications, printers can be connected to PDIU-Dls. Refer to the printer’s installation instructions. 1) Consult the serial printer’s documentation, and determine if the printer operates as a DCE or DTE device: l As a DCE device: a) Disassemble the PDIU-DS, and configure it to operate like a DTE device by placing the jumper plugs PI - P9 in the “B-C” (MODEM) position. b) Reassemble the PDIU-DS, and mark “B-C”on the bottom identification label for future reference. (Paragraph 6.170 provides PDIU-DS disassembly/assembly instructions, and Figure 4-54 provides jumper plug information). l As a DTE device: It may not be necessary to disassemble the PDIU-DS, since it comes direct from the factory configured as a DCE device. However, if uncertain, a) Disassemblethe PDIU-DS, and verify that jumper plugs PI - P9 are in the “A-B” (DTE) position for DTE operation. b) Reassemble the PDIU-DS and mark “A-B”on the bottom identification label for future reference. (Paragraph 6.170 provides PDIU-DS disassembly/assembly instructions, and Figure 4-54 provides jumper plug information). IMPORTANTNOTE! Check the printer’s serial documentation for correct RS-232 pin requirements. The requirements vary with each manufacturer. 5) Refer to the DDIU Program for PDIU-DS data assignments. IMPORTANTNOTE! The eighth port (circuit) of the NDKU cannot be used for data switching connection (PDIU-DI or PDIU-DS). 6.160 PDIU-DS To Modem Installation 6.161 With D.04 software, PERCEPTIONeLe, enables asynchronous-type (not synchronous) modems to be connected to PDIU-DS’s. This allows PDIU-Dl-equipped digital telephones that are connected to PCs, terminals, and other devices to share access to a modem. 6.162 Modems can be accessed internally for outgoing data calls or externally for incoming data calls. Modems operate as DCE devices, so the PDIU-DS must be configured to operate like DTE devices. The installation example in Figure 4-51 shows that two modems are connected to NSTU ports; however, the line side of modems can be directly connected to a dedicated CO line. The modem connects to the PDIU-DS with a standard RS-232 connector; the PDIU-DS line side (RJ-I 1 connector) always connects to its own individual NDKU port. Use the following instructions to connect modems to PDIU-DS’s. 1) Configure the PDIU-DS as a DTE device: a) Disassemble the PDIU-DS, and place jumper plugs PI - P9 in the “B-C”position (MODEM). b) Reassemble the PDIU-DS, and mark “B-C” on the bottom identification label for future reference (Paragraph 6.170 provides 2) Connect the PDIU-DS to the appropriateNDKU circuit in accordance with the wiring diagrams in Section 200-255-205. 3) Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the printer and the PDIU-DS. 4-51 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY 1992 PDIU-DS disassembly/assembly instructions, and Figure 4-54 provides jumper plug information). not captive, so place them together where they can be easily accessed. 2) Remove the bottom panel. 2) Connectthe PDIU-DS totheappropriate NDKU 3) Remove the PCB by lifting the back panel from its side grooves. circuit in accordance with the wiring diagrams in Section 200-255-205. 4) Turn the PCB over and set jumper plugs Pl P9 as follows: l If the PDIU-DS is connected to a DTE, set the plugs to the “A-B”position. l If the PDIU-DS is connected to a DCE device, set the plugs to the “B-C”position. 3) Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the modem and the PDIU-DS. Figure 4-60 shows an example of PDIU-DS to a Hayes modem RS-232 connection. IMPORTANT NOTE! All ten PDIU-DS EIA leads (signals) should be connected to the modem. Consult the modem’s documentation for correct RS232 pin requirements. The requirements may vary with each manufacturer. 6.173 Assembling the PDIU-DS 1) Position the back panel to the PCB. 2) Slide the back panel down into its side grooves. 4) Connect the line side of the modem to a NSTU standard telephone circuit, or a dedicated CO line (Consult the modem’s documentation to connect it to a CO line). Section 200-255-205 provides NSTU station portwiring information. 5) Refer to the DDIU Program for PDIU-DS connection assignments. IMPORTANT NOTE.’ The eighth port (circuit) of the NDKU cannot be used for data switching connections (PDIU-DI or PDIU-DS). 6.170 PDIU-DS Disassembly and Assembly 6.171 To set the jumper plugs PI - P9 on the subassembly inside the PDIU-DS for DCE or DTE operation, the PDIU-DS must be disassembled (Figure 4-61). Disassemble the PDIU-DS in accordance with the steps in Paragraph 6.172. 6.172 Disassembling the PDIU-DS 1) Remove the four screws securing the bottom panel to the rest of the unit. These screws are 3) Attach the bottom panel, and secure it with the four noncaptive screws. 6.180 PDIU-DVPDIU-DS Installation Tests 6.181 Figures 4-62 - 4-65 provide tests for four PDIU call applications. The telephone and port numbers used in these figures are provided for explanation purposes only. When actually testing, use port and telephone numbers appropriate for the system. Each of these tests can be conducted with either manual dialing from atelephone dialpad, or AT dialing from a personal computer keyboard; however, only the preferred method of dialing for the application is presented, The PDIU User Guide has additional information on the tests, which are listed below: l Figure 4-62-PC to PC Test Call Using AT Commands l Figure4-63-PCto PrinterTestCall Using Manual Dialing l Figure 4-64-Internal PC to External PC Test Call Using AT Commands l Figure 4-65-External PC to Internal PC Test Call Using AT Commands 4-52 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 HAYES-TYPESMART MODEM (FUNCTIONSLIKE A DCE) PDIU-DS (CONFIGUREDIN THE “CONNECTTO MODEM” MODE, Pl - P9 = B-C, SO IT FUNCTIONSLIKE A DTE) MODEM PIN# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22 PDIU-DS PIN# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22 NAME FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR RI NAME FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR RI Rear view of modem DB25 connector Rear view of PDIU-DS DB25. connector DB25 FEMALE DB25 FEMALE CONNECTOR I DB25 nAALE CONNEECTOR I ,825 DBW PIN# NAME I I PIN # I t-la DCD 8 3 RD 3 L--k-- 1 MALE 1 LCONNECTOR 1 2 6 (50 ft max, 24 AWG; customer supplied) 4 5 22 FG 1 NOTES: 1. Modem receives data on pin 2 (TO) and transmits data on pin 3 (170). 2. The PDIU-DS must be in the connect to modem mode (PI - P9 strapped B-C) so that it transmits data on pin 2 (TO) and receives data on pin 3 (RD). FIGURE 4-60-PDIU-DSTOHAYES-TYPE SMARTMODEM,RS-232CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS 4-53 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 DTE/h!ODEM JUMPER PLUGS PDIU-DS FIGURE 4-61-PDIU-DSDISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY 1992 3 DKT/PDIU-DI 1 w LAPTOP PC 2 FIGURE 4-63 PCTOPRINTER TESTCALLUSINGMANUALDIALING FIGURE 4-62 PCTOPCTESTCALLUSINGAT COMMANDS PERCEPTION,,,, TELEPHONE TELEPHONE 1 LAPTOP PC 1 LAPTOP PC2 FIGURE 4-64-INTERNALPCTOEXTERNAL PCTESTCALLUSINGAT COMMANDS 4-55 - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 MDF NSTU ’ : NCOU I : ’ , ; ’ TRUNK I - CIRCUIT I :! : TELEPHONE - TELEPHONE LAPTOP PC 1 PC2 FIGURE4-65-EXTERNALPCTO INTERNALPCTESTCALLUSINGAT COMMANDS 6.182 PC to PC Test Call Using AT Commands l The DATA LED on each DKT will be Off. 1) Make sure that PC 1 and PC 2 are equipped with a communication software package, and that the communication parameters of each PC and the communication software package are set to the same values (data transmission rate, flow control, etc.). 6.183 PC to Printer Test Call Using Manual Dialing 1) Make sure that the PC is configured to print data from its serial COM port (the PC COM port is connected to DKT/PDIU-DI). This is normally accomplished using the DOS and MODE commands. 2) From either PC keyboard, type A T D X X X X and press m, where XXXX is the Data Extension number. (AT commands must be capital letters.) 2) Using the manufacturer’s documentation, make sure that the communication parameters (data speed, data bits, etc.) of the PC COM port match the printer’s serial interface parameters. 3) To terminate the call: a) Type + + + from either PC keyboard. l The PC screen displays “OK.” b) Type A T H from the PC keyboard used in step 3a. l PC 1 and PC 2 screens both display “NO CARRIER.” 3) To connect the PC to the printer, press the DKT’sm button and dial XXX, where XXX is the Data Extension number. 4-56 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 l l l The CONNECT LED on the PDIU-DS will light. The connection between the PC and the printer is complete. If busy tone is sent to the DKT, the connection is not complete. Try step 3 again. l l 4) Operate the PC to print data as required. 5) To terminate the call, press the DKT’s m button. 4) To terminate the call: a) Type + + + from either PC keyboard. l The PC screen displays “OK.” b) Type A T H from the PC keyboard used in step 5a. l PC 1 and PC 2 screens both display “NO CARRIER.” l The DATA LEDs on each DKT will go out. 6.184 Internal PC to External PC Test Call Using AT Commands 1) Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are equipped with a communication software package, and that the communication parameters of each PC and communication software package are set to the same values (data transmission rate, flow control, etc.). If the external modem sends resultcodes, the screen on PC 1 displays “CONNECT XxXx,” where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communication software. At this time PC 1 and PC 2 are connected, and can exchange data (file transfers, type messages, etc.). 6.185 External PC to Internal PC Test Call Using AT Commands 1) Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are equipped with a communication software package, and that the communication parameters of each PC and communication software package are set to the same values (data transmission rate, flow control, etc.). 2) From PC 1‘s keyboard, type A T D X X X X and press m, where XXXX is Data Extension number. (AT commands must be capital letters.) l The DATA LED on the DKT will light. l The CONNECT LED on the PDIU-DS will light. l The screen on PC 1 displays “CONNECT XXXX,” where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communication software. l At this time, PC 1 and the PDIU-DS are connected. 2) From PC 2’s ke board, type A T D X X X X,X X X and press km3 -, where XXXXXXX is telephone number. l The external modem originates the call. l Trunk rings incoming call to the internal modem. l The internal modem rings and auto answers, the modems handshake and establish communications. l If the internal modem sends result codes, PC 2’s screen displays “CONNECT XXXX,” where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communication software. l At this time, PC 2 is connected to the PDIU-DS. 3) From PC l’s keyboard, type A T D T X X X X X X X X X X and press m, where XXXXXXXXXXX is the trunk access code and modem telephone number. l The internal modem goes off-hook, dials the access code to seize the trunk, and then dials the external modem’s telephone number. l The external modem rings and auto answers, the modems handshake and establish communications. 4-57 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 3) From PC 2’s keyboard, type A T D X X X X and press m, where XXXX is the Data Extension number. (AT commands must be capital letters.)ThispromptsthePDIU-DS to dial and connect to the PDIU-DI. l The CONNECT LED on the PDIU-DS will light, the DATA LED on the DKT will also light. l The screens on PC 1 and PC 2 display “CONNECT XXXX,” where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communication software. l At this time PC 1 and PC 2 are connected and they exchange data (file transfers, typed messages, etc.). on the CO portion of the MDF, using the Tables 5-7, 5-8, and 5-13 - 5-l 5 as guides. Connection requirements for each type of trunk are shown below. i DESIGNATOR1 FUNCTIONt TRUNKTYPE Tb I t CO. DID. TIE I T R Ti Rl E SG M SB Ring Tip 1 Ring 1 E Sig. Gnd. M Sig. Bat. 1 1 CO, DID, TIE TIE (Cwire) TIE (4-wire) TIE TIE (Type II) TIE TIE (Type II) 9. PERIPHERALEQUIPMENTINSTALLATlON 4) To terminate the call: a) Type + + + from either PC keyboard. l The PC screen displays “OK.” b) Type AT H from the PC keyboard used in step 5a. l PC l’s and PC 2’s screens both display “NO CARRIER.” l The DATA LED on each DKT will go out. 9.00 Modem Pooling Connections (DDIU-MA only) 9.01 See the NMDM Program in Section 200-255. 300, Programming,to input information concerning Modem Pooling for the DDIU-MA only. 7. STANDARD TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 7.00 Standard Telephone Connections 7.01 See the DSTT Program in Section 200-255300, Programming,for instructions on programming standard telephones. The system must be told at which ports standard telephones are installed. 9.02 Most modems require only single-pair wiring and are connected to the MDF via standard twistedpair telephone cables. However, some modems may require a two-pair connection (one for transmit-one for receive). For this type of connection, use the next wire pair (which is not normally used). Modem Pooling Connection details are shown in Figure 4-67. IMPORTANT! All connections to DDlUs (-MA or -MAT) must observe correct tip and ring polarity for proper operation. 7.02 Standard telephones require single-pair wire and are connected to the MDF via standard twistedpair telephone cables, 9.10 Power Failure/Emergency Transfer 7.03 Standard telephone connection details are shown in Figure 4-66. 9.11 One DPFT can be installed in a twocabinet system. Install the DPFT as follows: 8. TRUNK CONNECTIONS 1) Mount the DPFT near the MDF. 8.10 Connections from the telephone company jack (RJ21X for CO/FX/VVATSIDIDtrunks and RJ2EXfor E & M TIE trunk) should be terminated on a 66-block, and then cross-connected to the appropriate leads 2) Using 25-pair cables with amphenol-type connectors (female for Jl, male for J2), connect the DPFT to two 66-type cross-connect blocks. 4-58 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 500/2500-TYPE CROSS-CONNECT BLOCK NMDU PCB ( I ’ ; I I TLl (BL-W) ! ; RLI W-G) ’ ; I i TL2 (G-W) : 1 RL2 ’ I ; ; W-W 30 -. W-S) FiJil BLOCK TO TELEPHONE #2 TL3 5 RL3 32 TL4 7 RL4 34 TL5 9 RL5 36 TL6 TO TELEPHONE #3 I TO TELEPHONE #4 TO TELEPHONE #5 1 TO TELEPHONE #6 RL6 I TL7 CKT 7 CKT 8 TL8 ; jI ,3 RL7 i I ; ; ’ ! 4. RL8 - ’ I ’.- : RL7 TO TELEPHONE #7 TL8 TO TELEPHONE #8 ,5 RL8 1 ‘25-PAIR CABLE \ “J” CABLE CONNECTOR PINS FIGURE 4-66-STANDARDTELEPHONE CONNECTION 4-59 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 , NMDU PCB CROSS~CONNECT BLOCK \ RJII \ * CKT 1 CKT 2 CKT 3 (W-BL) I-: (BL-W) ; (W-G) i 6-W ; (W-S) ] (S-W) ; I I (R-0) (O-R) CKT 5 CKT 6 DDll J-MA TLl I , RLl / I i TL2-L RC~ -- I ! TL3 2 ‘1 -rn I ! ’ TO DDIU #2 FiL3 TL4 RL4 (R-BR) ; I : ’ ’ ’ TLS (BR-R) !. I RL5 W-B’-) ’ f I , TL6 J I MODEM #2 TO MODEM #3 l TO 1 CORRECT POLARITY MODEM #4 25-PAIR CABLE CONNECTOR PINS FIGURE4-67-MODEM POOLING CONNECTION (DDIU-MAONLY) 3) Using Tables 5-8 and 5-15 for guides: l Connect the trunks selected for emergency use to the Jl block “CO Tip” and “CO Ring” terminals. l Connect the NCOU circuits supportingthe emergency trunks to the Ji block “NCOU Tip” and “NCOU Ring”terminals. Pin 25 (S-V) = Pin 25 (S-V)* Pin 50 (V-S) = Pin 50 (V-S)* DPFT 52 (station) = LCEWNCEC-M & S J4J15/J504-J515 PERCEPTION, Any trunk position 4) Using Tables 5-6, 5-7, 5-9, 5-14 and 5-16 for guides: l Connect the standard telephone stations, designated for emergency use, to the properterminals on the J2 block“TELTip” and “TEL Ring” terminals. *On the J7 connector, the pin 25 connection provides the -24 VDC input required to drive the DPFTand the pin 50 connection provides ground, There are no power connections on connector J2. 9.20 Reserve Power 5) At the MDF, connect the DPFT to the system as follows: 9.21 Install Reserve Power as follows (Figure 468): PERCEPTION, DPFT Jl (trunk) = LCEWNCEC-M & S J8-J15/ J508-J515 1) Place the customer-supplied battery pack where it will be located. 4-60 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 CA UT/ON! Batteries can emit fumes that are poisonous to people, potentially explosive, and corrosive to electronic components. Locate batteries so that any fumes are adequately vented per local fire codes. 6) Plug the AC cable into the outlet and turn the POWER switch ON. 9.30 Paging Equipment 9.31 By combining a single customer-supplied paging amplifier with the system’s paging interface and speaker zone switching, it is possible to provide a paging system of up to five zones with All Zone Page capability. 2) Place the POWER switch (on the front of the main power supply) in the OFF position and remove the AC power cable from the outlet. 3) Connect the battery pack leads (customersupplied) to TB2 BAT on the NPSA-M or LPSA (Figure 4-68). Observe the correct polarity. Leave the leads from the peak load battery PEAK LOAD 9.32 Figures 4-69, 4-70 and 4-71 show possible paging arrangements. As a standard feature (part of the NPRU PCB), the system provides a 600-ohm output to a paging amplifier. If more than one paging zone is required, the output of the amplifier can be routed back to the NPRU PCB where it will be switched to one of five sets of speakers. The speaker operated is determined by the access code dialed by the station user. The actual access code is assigned in software (see Section 200-255300, Programming). 9.33 An All Page code can also be defined in software. When that code is dialed, all relays will be activated simultaneously to permit paging to all speaker zones. I I IllIll 9.34 If the power loads of the different zones are such that a single amplifier is not suitable, multiple amplifiers (up to one for each zone) can be connected as shown in Figure 4-71. \\I 9.35 If music is to be broadcast over the paging system, two arrangements are possible: POWER CABLE 4) Connect the leads to the battery pack (Figure 4-67). Observe the correct polarity. Fix battery leads to the cabinet using the clamp. 1) If the music is supplied from a separate amplifier (as in Figures 4-70 and 4-71), it can be connected between the speaker common line and the PG GND input to the NPRU (PERCEPTlONe J2/J502 and pin 2 or PERCEPTlONe, Jl/J2 and pin 2). The music will be connected to all speaker zones when no page is in progress. When a page access code is dialed, the music is disconnected from the zone and the page amplifier output is connected. 5) Place the BAT BACK UP switch on the front of the main power supply in the ON position. 2) If the music is connected to a second input Of the paging amplifier (Figure 4-69), the PG1 NOTE: Ensure that the correct polarity is maintained. FIGURE4-68-RESERVEPOWERINSTALLATION 4-61 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 Pe -J2/J502 I x-1 %x-J1/J2 3c: L jl,, -.. I I < I- ; PRl I I I \ I I I IThA #I 1 ---t IN- e- I-mm-, I MUSIC 1-e-m-qI SOURCE I,,,,-,,-,,,,,,J I i : I FIGURE 4-69-PAGINGWlTHMUSlCOVEREXTERNALSPEAKERFROMSAMEAMPLlFlER control lead (52 and J502 pin 27 or Jl and 52 for PERCEPTION,&,, , respectively) can be connected to the MUTE terminal of the page amplifier music channel. When any page access code is dialed, a ground output is applied to the PGl lead to mute the music. 9.43 Adjust the MOH volume with the MOH volume control on the front of the NPRU PCB. Maximum volume is limited by internal circuits in order to comply with FCC regulations. 9.36 All paging connections are made at the J2 and J502 or Jl and 52 connectors on the PERCEPTION,&,, systems, respectively. The connectors are located on the rear of the basic and expansion cabinets. See Tables 5-4 and 5-10 for details, 9.51 The Universal Night Answer (UNA) feature provides an output of interrupted ringing voltage (85 +10 VRMS, 20 Hz superimposed on -24 VDC) whenever the system is in Night Service and an incoming call is received by a trunk designated for UNA. Any station user, upon hearing the chime or bell, can dial the UNA access code and be connected to the caller. 9.50 Universal Night Answer 9.40 Music-on-Hold 9.41 A Music-on-Hold (MOH) interface is a standard feature on the system. The circuitry occupies part of the NPRU PCB. If MOH is equipped, it will be heard by any station or trunks on-hold in the system, or by any trunk put into the camp-on state. 9.52 The ringing voltage output is intended to control a strategically located chime or loud ringing bell. The available power is five ringer equivalents. 9.53 Two UNA zones can be installed in tenant systems. Either zone can be assigned in programming to either tenant. For PERCEPTION,, connections to the UNA ringing signal are via pins 12 and 37 (0-BK, BK-0) of J2. This connection is to J502 in the expansion cabinet for UNAZone 1 (see Tables 5-4 and 5-10). UNA zone 1 requires a second NPRU PCB in the expansion cabinet. 9.42 A tuner or other program source, supplied by the customer, is connected to the MOH input via pins 4 and 29 (Br-W and W-BR) of J2 or J502 / Jl or J2 forthe PERCEPTIONe&exsystems, respectively(see Tables 5-4 and 5-10). The input impedance is 600 ohms. (This cannot be the same source used to provide music over external speakers.) 4-62 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 P,-J2lJ502 P,, -J 1lJ2 ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 hi- ,,,-,,---,----,I NPRU I I I I , I I I PGl PGGND I ! i i 27 < 4 < +-z-- r-----1 I MUSIC : SOURCE ; iL------l ‘-““--“-“--“-, I r-4 MUSIC AMP ,““““““” I i IN; i PUT 1-j ,,,,,,-,,,,,,,I I I I L-1 I OUT- I PUT: I----! 1 I I i ! OPTIONAL CONNECTION FOR MUSIC OVER EXTERNAL SPEAKER FlGURE4-70-PAGING WITHONEAMPLIFIER upper rear of the LCEC-M or NCEC-M. (In Lodging/ Health Care applications, data specific to those applications are included in the SMDR output.) 9.54 UNA connections for PERCEPTION,, are made at pins 12 and 37 connectors Jl and 52 on the basic cabinet. A second UNA device requires a second NPRU to be installed in the basic cabinet. 9.60 Station Message Detail Recording 9.61 The Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) feature enables a business to monitor and control its telephone costs. Data can be collected for each outgoing and/or incoming trunk call. Each such call generates a call record that is output at the SMDR connector on the connector panel at the 9.62 SMDR output can be connected to a variety of customer-provided equipment: l A local 80-column printer for an on-line printout at the termination of each trunk call. l A recording device to store data for subsequent processing, either on-site or by a service bureau. 0 Call accounting equipment to provide customized call reports. 4-63 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY 1992 J2 NPRU -------------------. ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 I I i -----------,-,-I OPTIONAL CONNECTION PGGND i FIGURE 4-71-PAGINGWITHMULTIPLE AMPLIFIERS 4-64 INSTALLATIONINSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 JANUARY1993 9.67 When outgoing calls are chosen, all calls seizing a trunk will be recorded regardless of duration. On incoming calls, all answered calls will be recorded. Calls disconnected by Toll or Code Restriction features are not recorded. 9.63 Refer to the external device manufacturer’s documentation for information on its SMDR connector pin assignments. 9.64 The SMDR output speed can be set for either 300 bps or 1200 bps by the MDR switch on the front panel of the LCCU PCB (Figure 4-72). SMDR pin assignments are as follows: 9.68 Timing for recorded calls will start as follows (Figure 4-73): l Outgoing-when trunk is seized. l Incoming to attendant only-when attendant answers. l Incoming and extended by the attendant-when attendant answers. l Incoming to a station-when answered. 9.69 A station user can enter a charge account code of up to 12 digits for each call. This code is included in the SMDR output. 9.70 The recording criteriaand account code length are defined in DMDR Program (see Section 200255-300, Programming). FIGURE 4-72-LCCU SWITCHES 1 5 1 Clear to Send (to SMDR device) 6 Data Set Ready 7 Sianal Ground 1 8 I Carrier Detect I 20 I Data Terminal Readv (from SMDR device) 9.65 The code used by SMDR is standard 7-level ASCII using one start bit, one stop bit and one parity bit (even parity). 9.66 SMDR can be programmed to record data under any one of the following conditions: 0 Incoming calls only. l Outgoing calls only. l Incoming and outgoing calls. l Outgoing toll calls only. l All incoming calls and outgoing toll calls. I I 9.71 Each time a trunk is seized, data is collected for that call until the trunk is released. This data is output at the SMDR port in thefollowingformat (see Figure 4-73). l Time l Start of Call Hour - tens - units Minute - tens - units l Call Duration Hour - units Minute - tens- units Seconds - tens - units l Condition Code (see table) A = Attendant handled D = Call > 10 hours E = Maintenance (SMDR port) F = Maintenance (trunk test) I = Incoming call K = Outgoing call L = Conference Attendant or 3-party M = Transfer or Call Forward N = SPCC #l 0 = SPCC #2 P = Date/Time change Q = System Initialize R = Incomplete call S = Date printed (every hour) 3 digits maximum l Access Code 4-65 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 JANUARY1993 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 9 101112131415161716192021222324252627282930313233343536373639404i424344454647484950515253545556575859606162636165666768697071 /?/202:13310:00:25A~X9C001~1-516-669-1234/:201I'ii002~123456789012~~ -DIALEDPHONENUMBER STARTOF CALL CALLWRATlON CONDlTlONACCESS TPN 72 OUTGOING -STATION 73 PGRT ACCOUNTCODE ORSTROKECOUNT FIGURE 4-73-EXAMPLE:SMDRCALLRECORD l l l I l l l l Dialed Number Calling DN Trunk Port DNIS Digits Calling Port No. Account Code or Stroke Count 15 digits 4 digits 3 digits 4 digits 3 digits 12 digits 9.74 Some complex calls will cause multiple call records (CR) for the same station or trunk. maximum maximum maximum maximum maximum maximum Examples: 1) Station 1 transfers Trunk 1 to Station 2 CR for Station 1 - Trunk 1 = Condition Code I or K CR for Station 2 - Trunk 1 = Condition Code M 4 digits maximum 9.72 The format of the special record, for Initialize/ Reload and Time Change, is as follows: Initialize/Reload: NNNN etc. (previous records-usual call) 00 (initialize or reload) 9.73 Any record printed after the initialize record will appear on the same line and be offset three columns from the usual record. 2) Station 1 transfers Trunk 1 to Trunk 2 CR for Station 1 - Trunk 1 = Condition Code I or K CR for Station 1 - Trunk 2 = Condition Code L CR for Trunk 1 - Trunk 2 = Condition Code M 3) Station 1 holds Trunk 1 and calls Trunk 2 CR for Station 1 - Trunk 1 = Condition Code I or K CR for Station 1 - Trunk 2 = Condition Code K Example: NNNN (previous record) 00 NNNNN (initialize and next record) NNNNNN Time Change: MM DD (old date) HH : MM (old time) MM DD (new date) HH : MM (new time) 9.75 All connections to miscellaneous equipment are made via J2, Jl, TTY, SMDR, and MODEM connectors on the connector panels of the system. 4-66 INSTALLATIONINSTRUCTIONS SECTIONZOO-255-204 FEBRUARY1992 9.80 Lodging/Health Care Data Audit 9.86 Figure 4-74 shows a typical Lodging/Health Care audit printout. Notes on the figure explain the possible value for each column. 9.81 The Lodging/Health Care Data Audit feature enables the user to record and analyze the registration and operation of specific features in Lodging/ Health Care applications. 10. SYSTEM POWER UP 10.00 General 9.82 Lodging/Health Care audit data is output at either the SMDR (as part of the SMDR printout) or the TTY (as a separate report) connector on the upper rear of the basic cabinet. (Because the TTY connector is required for on-site programming and maintenance procedures, it is recommended that the SMDR port be used.) The selection of data to be output and the connector choice (lTY or SMDR) are software-controlled (see DHMF Program in Section 200-255-300, Programming). 10.01 Upon initial power up, the system will automatically load its operating system and customer data from the disk. Two sets of disks are provided with each system; one set should always be mounted in the drive, the other kept as a spare. 10.02 Activate the system as follows: 1) Be sure the main power switch on the NPSAM is in the OFF position, and plug the AC cord into the outlet. 9.83 The SMDR or TTY output can be connected to either: l A local 80-column printer for an on-line printout. l Compatible call accounting or property management interface equipment, supplied by another vendor. 2) If the system uses D.02 or later version soft- ware, insert the SYSTEM disk in FDDO.If two drives are used, insert the MAINTENANCE disk (Figure 4-75) in FDDl . If the system uses D.O1software, insert the program disk in FDDO. 9.84 The audit pin-out assignments at the SMDR or the TTY connector are not identical. Refer to Paragraph 9.64for the pin-out assignments of each connector. For instruction on connecting equipment provided by other vendors, refer to the manufacturer’s documentation. 3) Turn the main power switch on the NPSA-M to the ON position. 4) The floppy disk will run: LED will come on. l LCCU MAJ ALARM LED will be on. l NPRU PFT LED will be on. 9.85 The audit data output rate can be set for either 300 bps or 1200 bps (depending on the configuration of the receiving equipment) at either the SMDR switch or the TTY switch on the front panel of the LCCU PCB. 5) When loading is complete, the system will initialize and clear all LEDs. Only a true fault indication will remain. Refer to Section 200255-500, Fault Finding Procedures, for meaning of indications and assistance with fault clearing. CAUTION! If the TTY connector is used for programming and maintenance operations, (either with an on-site teleprinter or remotely via a modem) be careful not to change the data rate setting of the 773’switch so that it is incompatible with programming equip- 6) Refer to Section 200-255-300, Programming, to complete customer data assignments. men t. 4-67 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-204 FEBRUARY 1992 ROOM/DIRECTORY NUMBER FEATURE ’ OPERATION * TIME FEATURE WAS REGISTERED/ACTIVATED ROOM STATUS CODE 3 TELEPHONE SET STATUS/AGENT REGISTERING OR CANCELLING FEATURE4 NW AAzmma CANCEL q LYL!VVd202nAWU~SETAAAAAAl5:11~0307660~M~15:1~~ NOTES: 1. FEATURE Room 4. This column shows either the status of the station accessed for feature operation (for example, a wake-up call) or the agent who registered the feature. MW = Message Waiting A WU = Automatic Wake-up MRA = Message Registration Audit Status = Room Status Audit STATUS RNA = Ring No-Answer Bsy = Busy $XxX.Xx = Total call charges for this station M = Maid in Room XX:XX = Time Wake-up Call Scheduled for AGENT MC = Message Center EXT = Station 2. OPERATION ON = Set at Attendant Console OFF = Cancelled at either Attendant Console or Station SET = Set at either Attendant Console or Station CANCEL = Cancelled at either Attendant Console or Station 3. ROOM STATUS 1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = m CODE Vacant and clean Occupied and clean Vacant and needs cleaning Occupied and needs cleaning FIGURE4-74-EXAMPLE: AUDIT PRINTOUT(LODGING/HEALTH CARE) 4-68 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 200-255-204 FEBRUARY 1992 PO0 coo LOO LO1 LO2 LO: l-- FDDl T TO5 TO4 TO3 TO2 TO1 TOI LO5 LO6 LO7 LOB LO9 LlO Ll LO4 ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” LABEL’ SIDE FIGURE4-75-INSERTING DISK (PERCEPTION,,ONLY) FIGURE4-76-INSERTING DISK (PERCEPTION,ONLY) 4-69 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-205 JANUARY 1993 CHAPTER 5 MDF ARRANGEMENT 1.00 All connections from the system to external equipment, such as trunks, stations, data interface units, etc., are made via a customer-provided main distribution frame (MDF). 1 .Ol Cables with male amphenol-type connectors are attached to the connector panels of the basic and expansion cabinets and secured with the connectorlocking bar (Figure51). Plasticcableclamps are provided along the base of the basic cabinet to secure cables. The opposite ends of the cables are then terminated on 66-type quick-connect terminal blocks on the MDF (split blocks with bridging clips should be used to allow for fault isolation). A typical MDF layout is shown in Figure 5-2. Connect each cable from the basic and expansion cabinets to one side of the block and external equipment cables to the other side. Use bridge clips to make the connections. FlGURE5-l-CONNECTORLOCKINGBAR 1.02 FCC regulations prohibit unregistered equipment from being terminated on the same block as CO trunks. It is good practice to separate trunks from all other equipment at the MDF. Install and test the secondary protectors per the installation instructions of the applicable U.L. listed manufacturers: l 1.03 Table 5-I shows the connector-card slot match-up. Table 5-2 lists the connector cables required for the system. Each connector provides the interface for only a single card slot. l l 1.04 To protect against transient voltages and currents beyond what is provided by simple primary protectors, the Underwriters’ Laboratories’ Standard 1459 2nd edition lists secondary protectors that should be installed if there are outside leads. See Figure 5-3 for these conditions. l l 5-1 Centron Corp., Anaheim, California92807: Model 08450. Curtis Mfg. Co. Inc., Jaffrey, New Hampshire 03452: Model Diamond Chip. Oneac Corp., Libertyville, Illinois 60048: Models OnLine 614 and OnLine DG/S. Siemon Co., Watertown, Connecticut 06795: Models PM-2305 and CPM-2 Plus. Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardener, Massachusetts 01440: Models 2081-9027 and 20819028. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-205 JANUARY 1993 PERCEPTION,~,, - MODEM CABINETS TO Tl LINE MDF B -- t NDTU l-l-Y -- I-+ (P, ZLY) c NCOU TO CO, DID, OR TIE TRUNK SMDR -co CALL ACCOUNTING AUX POWER EXTERNAL BATTERY SUPPLY -24V 11 NDSU 03 “V T\n 0 UNA BELL ELECTRONIC DSS CONSOLES 2 --4ll e -AI- \ ‘I L_’ r RINm ExT GND 1 GENERATOR ,----j/o EXTERNAL+ GROUND ,NMDU I. -- 117VAC POWER V” / J , 2dAIR .- --. .--. IUSIC; SOURCE EMERGENCY TELEPHONE I-PAIR Al-rENDANT CONSOLE l-PilR /-I II I 2-PAIR 3Pj9lR II . . ,..., l-PAIR II I’ --J DDIU-MA DIGITAL JOICE MAIL/ 4UTOMATED 4lTENDANT DSS TA UIPMENT tUUIrMtl\ FIGURE5-2-MAIN DISTRIBUTIONFRAMELAYOUT 5-2 I J INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-205 FEBRUARY1992 BUILDING e Perception;, #l \ BUILDING / #2 6; ex I I I DIGITAL DSS II II n DIG11TAL DIU NEKU I 4NT E Cl cm curlTRONIC DSS CONSOLE NDSU EM ELECTRONIC I NSTU m0. LINE -0. LINE 1 Shows Secondary FIGURE!+3-SECONDARYPROTECTORDIAGRAM 5-3 Protectors INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-205 FEBRUARY 1992 PAQll Cl IlTIPAQl CONFIGURATION TABLE5-1 E PflU)rlEPTflQMATQIY CARD SLOT CONNECTOR BASIC i= 4 E nw EXPANDED BASIC E $ J503 J504 J505 J506 J507 J508 J509 L21m3 L22rr12 L23rrll L24i-n 0 L25rro9 L26rrO8 J510 J511 J512 J513 J514 J515 J18 J17 J16 J15 J14 J13 J12 Jll JlO JO9 JO8 JO7 U08 uo9 UlO Ull u12 u13 u14 u15 TO7 TO6 TO5 TO4 J30 J29 J28 J27 J26 J25 J24 J23 J22 J21 J20 J19 J512 J511 J510 J509 J508 J507 u22 U23 Tll TlO TO9 TO8 J506 J505 J504 J503 J502 J501 J524 J523 J522 J521 J520 J519 u30 u31 T15 T14 T13 T12 J518 J517 J516 J515 J514 J513 co1 L15 L16 L17 L18 L19iT15 L2orr14 uoo UOl uo2 uo3 uo4 uo5 U06 uo7 TO3 TO2 TO1 TOO U24 U25 U26 U27 U28 u29 5-4 JlO Jll J12 J13 J1.4 J15 J3 J4 J5 J6 h 2 if EXPANDED CrwO EXPANSION UNITS) LO6iTO5 LO7rrO4 LO8iTO3 L09iT02 Ll o/-r01 Ll 1/Too coo LOO LO1 LO2 LO3 LO4/TO7 L05/T06 EXPANDED WE EXPANSION UNIT) CARD SLOT CONNECTOF J9 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-205 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE5-2 LISTOFCONNECTORCABLES PERCEPTION, CARD SLOT CONN. NO. CONTENT OF CONNECTOR DESC. TABLE MDF Ji & J501 ATO & Al-r1 5-3 MDF J2 & J502 Paging, Music & UNA Ringing 5-4 MDF J3 & J503 NDSU 5-5 MDF J4-J7&J504-J507 NDSU/NEKU/NDKU/NSTU/NDCU/NMDU/NOCU MDF J8-J15 NDSU/NEKU/NDKU/NSTU/NDCU/NMDU/NOCU or NCOU/NLSU/NEMU/NDTU ’ From PFT to MDF PFT Conn. No. CO Line & NCOU 00-07 (Maximum: 8) (Maximum: 8) From PFT to MDF PFT Conn. No. Sll Line & NSTU 00- 14 (Maximum: 8) (Maximum: 8) & J508-J515 ’ 5-6 5-7 I- 5-8 5-9 I PERCEPTION,, MDF 1 Jl & J2 / Paging, Music & UNA Ringing MDF I J6 1A-IT0 I 5-l 0 I J5 AlTl I 5-l 0 MDF From PFT to MDF From PFT to MDF I 5-l 1 JO7-JlO/J19-J22/ J501 -J504/J513-J518 NCOWNEMWNLSWNDTU Jl 1 -J18/J23-J30/ J505-J512/J517-J524 NDSU/NEKU/NDKU/NSTU/NDCU/NMDU/NOCU or NCOWNEMWNLSU PFT Conn. No. CO Line & NCOU 00-07 (Maximum: 8) (Maximum: 8) I PFT Conn. No. STT Line & NSTU 00-14 (Maximum: 81 (Maximum: 81 I 5-l 2 * 5-l 3 5-l 4 5-15 NOTES: 1. In PERCEPTION, the J connector cabinet is determined by I- and Z-digit numbers indicating the basic cabinet. Three-digit number connectors are located in the expansion cabinet. 2. In PERCEPTION,, the J connector cabinet is determined by 1- and Z-digit numbers indicating the cabinet #l. Three-digit basic cabinet. Three-digit numbers J50 1 - J512 identity expansion numbers J513 - J524 identity expansion cabinet #2. 5-5 I I I INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-205 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE 5-3 TERMINAL SEQUENCE& DESIGNATIONS CONNECTORNO. Jl/J501 ATTENDANT CONSOLE#O & #I PAIR 1T R 2T R 3T PIN 26 1 27 2 28 -coti OR COL IE W-BI BI-W w-o o-w W-G , LEAD DESIGNATION -~-~ TL 001/151 RL 001/151 DTL 001/151 DRL 001/l 51 SDare FUNCTION Ticdine Ring-Line Data Tip-Line Data Ring-Line 5-6 PCB POSITION CKT -... CKT CKT CKT on1 --. 001 001 001 NEKU NEKU NEKU NEKU LOO/L1 LOO/L1 LOO/L1 LOO/L1 5 5 5 5 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 200-255-205 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE5-4 TERMINALSEQUENCE & DESIGNATIONS CONNECTOR NO.J2/5502 PAGING,MUSIC& UNARINGING INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 200-255-205 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE5-5 TERMINALSEQUENCE & DESIGNATIONS FORPERCEPTION, ONLY CONNECTOR NO. 53.503 NDSU/NDKU “ne”“‘n”‘l(DSSCONSOLES) “c”SLOT 5-B INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 200-255-205 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE5-6 TERMINALSEQUENCE & DESIGNATIONS CONNECTOR NO.54 - J7/5504- 5507 NDSU/NEKU/NDKU/NSTU/NDCU/NMDU/NOCU (LOO- LO3/L15- L18) PAIR PIN COLOR CODE 26 1 27 fi 1T R 2T R 3T R 4T 5TR I R 6T -R W-BI BI-W w-o g-w - .. W-G G-W W-Br _. -. -. . . w-s s-w FL . . RI -. RI-R G-0 I rr R 87 R 9T R 10T R I I 1 2 28 3 29 3d I I 5 -. 31 fi 3; 7 33 8 34 I I O-R R-G G-R R-Br i&R R-S S-R STATION FUNCTION TiD-Line Ring-Line Data Tip-Line Data RincJ-Line Tip-Line Rim-Line Data -rip-line Data Ring I-Line Tip-Line Ring-Line Da& -rip-line Data Ring I-Line Tip-Line Rha-Line Data TiD-Line Data Rinc_J-Line Tip-Line Ring-Line Data Tip-Line Data Ring-Line Tip-Line Ring-Line Data Tip-Line Data Riq J-Line Tip-Line I I I I I I Tip-Line Data Ring-Line Tip-Line TiD-Line 5-9 I LINE CIRCUIT LXX1 LXX2 I LXX3 LXX4 LXX5 LXX6 I I INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 200-255-205 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE5-7 TERMINALSEQUENCE & DESIGNATIONS CONNECTOR NO. 58 - J15/5508- 5515 NDSU/NEKU/NDKU/NSTU/NDCU/NMDU/NOCU (LO4- Lll/L19 - L26) or NCOU/NLSU/NEMU (TO7- TOO/T15 - T08) 5-10 lNSTALLATlONlNSTRUCTlONS SECTION200-255-205 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE 5-B TERMlNALSEQUENCE& DESIGNATIONS CENTRALOFFlCELlNECONNECTlON&PFTCONTROL Jl PAIR t 1 1T I PIN 76 , COLOR CnnF w-w- I W-RI , I LEAD DESIGNATION T FUNCTION Tip-CO R #l #l #l #l #2 #2 #2 Rinn-Cm .‘r ._--Ring-NCOU Tip-CO Ring-CO Tip-NCOU R T R T R Rim-NCOI R T R I #2 I #3 #3 #3 #3 liikgzo Tip-NCOU Rinn-NC01 PCB POSITION ft4 I II I 18T R 19T R 20T I .l-l . 71T -. R 227 R 23T R 24T R 25T R l/ I 43 18 44 19 45 U-Y Y-G G-Y Y-Br Br-Y Y-S I, b-XI I -S-Y I 46.- I v-. I 71 I 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 BI RI-V r/L& o-v V-G G-V V-Br Br-V v-s s-v i mare &are Spare Spare Spare Snare spare Spare Spare StX3W -I---Spare SDare C..“Vr.e qJa1 Spare Snare -r-‘PFT EG PFT -24V I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PFT -24v’iln;;;;j-., Grm rnfi llnnl pFT It\ NPRU NPRl 5-11 I INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 200-255-205 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE5-9 TERMINALSEQUENCE & DESIGNATIONS STATIONLINECONNECTION 52 5-12 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTlON200-255-205 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE5-10 TERMlNALSEQUENCE&DESlGNATlONS CONNECTORNO.J6/J5 ATTENDANTCONSOLE#O&#l INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-205 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE 5-11 TERMINAL SEQUENCE& DESIGNATIONS CONNECTORNO. Jl 8152 PAGING, MUSIC & UNA RINGING I 61 R 7T 1 31 6 32 R I 1 7 R- BI BI-R R-O I I 1I 33 I1 i-G I R 97 II I 8 1I G-R I 34 9 35 10 I -.. R-Br-. Br-R R-S S-R -BI ,Bk Bk-0 1 12T t 37 I 1 Pnninn I Amn it-i nllt hlDDl #4 out #5 out #5 out . .NPRU NPRU I Paging Zone Paninn Amn n- 8? R 10T R PG In 1 PG Out i PGIn 2 I I 1 1 I PG In 3 PG- In . 4 PG Out 4 PG In 5 PG Out 5 SDare &are UNA B Paging Zone Paging Amp Paninn 7nne - .. . --.,I UNA Ringing Ground UNA Rinoino 20 Hz NPRU NPRI I V-V R 23T R 247 R 25T R ;; 48 o-v V-G 23 G-V 49 24 50 25 V-l% Br-V v-s s-v Spare Spare Spare Snare -r-‘Spare Spare Share I 5-14 PFT-3d \/nltc ICjround) I I NPRU hlDDI I INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-205 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE5-12 TERMlNALSEQUENCE&DESlGNATlONS CONNECTORNO.J07-JlO/J19-J22/5501 -5504/5513-5518 NCOU/NEMU/NLSU/NDTU (TOO-T15) TXXl TXX2 TXX4 NOTE: The NDTU may be installed in universal slots. in TOO or TO8, connectors 5-15 JO7 and J50 1 respectively. It may not be used INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 200-255-205 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE5-13 TERMINALSEQUENCE & DESIGNATIONS CONNECTOR NO. Jll - J18/523- J30/5505- J512/5517- 5524 NDSU/NEKU/NDKU/NSTU/DCU/NMDU/NOCU (UOO- U31) or NCOU/NEMU/NLSU (T16- T31) 5-16 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTlON200-255-205 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE5-14 TERMlNALSEQUENCE&DESlGNATlONS CENTRALOFFlCELlNECONNECTlON&PFTCONTROL Jl 1 PAIR 1 PIN LEAD DESIGNATION T PC6 POSITION FUNCTION TbCO #l INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SECTION200-255-205 AUGUST1991 TABLE5-15 TERMINALSEQUENCE & DESIGNATIONS STATIONLINECONNECTION 52 5-18 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTlON200-255-300 FEBRUARY1992 Perceptionb 6$ex PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES (D.05 SOFTWARE) PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTlON200-255-300 FEBRUARY1992 PERCEPTIONeh, PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES TABLEOFCONTENTS CHAPTER SUBJECT PAGE I INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 1. General ................................................................................................................ 2. Dual Disk Operation ............................................................................................ 3. Customer Data .................................................................................................... 4. Utility Programs ................................................................................................... I-I I-I I-I I-I I-I 2 SET UP KEYBOARD/REMOTE MAINTENANCE ................................................... 1. Keyboard Terminal .............................................................................................. 2. Remote Administration ........................................................................................ 3. Data Format ........................................................................................................ 2-I 2-I 2-I 2-I 3 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT PROCEDURES.. ............................................................... 1. General.. .............................................................................................................. 2. Data Input.. .......................................................................................................... 3. Data Output ................................................................................................ 4 AUTHORIZATION PROCEDURES/UTILITY PROGRAM USE .............................. I. Authorization Procedure.. .................................................................................... 2. Authorization Level Allowances-Data Input Procedures ................................... 3. Authorization Level Allowances-Data Output Procedures ................................ 4. Authorization Level Allowances-Maintenance Procedures ............................... 5. Execution of Authorization Procedure ................................................................. 6. Utility Program Use ............................................................................................. 4-I 4-I 4-I 4-I 4-I 4-2 4-2 5 SYSTEM DATA 1. Authorization 2. System Data 3. Print System 4. System Data 5. Print System 5-I 5-I 5-2 5-8 5-9 5-13 6 FEATURE DATA ..................................................................................................... 1. Access Code Data Block (Table 6-l) .................................................................. 2. Print Access Code Data Block (Table 6-2) .......................................................... 3. Class of Service Data Block (Table 6-3) ............................................................. 4. Print Class of Service Data Block (Table 6-4) ..................................................... 6-I 6-I 6-5 6-6 6-10 7 Al-TENDANT/STATION/DSS DATA ....................................................................... 1. Attendant Data Block (Table 7-1) ........................................................................ 2. Electronic/Digital Telephone Data Block (Table 7-2). .......................................... 3. Standard Telephone Data Block (Table 7-3) ....................................................... 7-I 7-I 7-4 7-I 3 ........................................................................................................ Code Change (Table 5-I). ............................................................. Block (Table 5-2) ........................................................................... Data Block (Table 5-3) ................................................................... Block 2 (Table 5-4) ........................................................................ Data Block 2 (Table 5-5) ................................................................ 3-I 3-I 3-I ...... .;. 3-I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-300 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLEOF CONTENTS(continued) SUBJECT CHAPTER 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Print Print Print Print DSS Print Station Data Block (Table 7-4) .................................................................... Call Pickup Groups (Table 7-5) ................................................................... Hunting Arrangements (Table 7-6) ............................................................. Paging Group Data Block (Table 7-7) ......................................................... Console Data Block (Table 7-8) .................................................................. DSS Console Data Block (Table 7-9) ........................................................ PAGE 7-17 7-19 7-20 7-21 7-22 . 7-29 MESSAGE CENTER DATA .................................................................................... 1. Message Center Data Block (Table 8-l) ............................................................. 2. Print Message Center Data Block (Table 8-2). .................................................... 8-1 8-l 8-4 TRUNK DATA ......................................................................................................... 1. Trunk Group Data Block (Table 9-l) ................................................................... 2. Print Trunk Group Data Block (Table 9-2) ........................................................... 3. Trunk Data Block (Table 9-3) .............................................................................. 4. Print Trunk Data Block (Table 9-4) ...................................................................... 5. Station Message Detail Recording Data Block (Table 9-5) ................................. 6. Print Station Message Detail Recording Data Block (Table 9-6). ........................ 7. Dialed Number Identification Service Data Block (Table 9-7) ............................. 8. Print Dialed Number Identification Service Data Block (Table 9-8) ..................... 9-I 9-1 9-3 9-8 9-14 9-16 9-18 9-18 9-20 10 TOLL RESTRICTION DATA ................................................................................... 1. Toll Restriction Data Block (Tables IO-1 - 10-4). ................................................ 2. Print Toll Restriction Data Block (Table 1 O-5) ..................................................... 10-I IO-I 1 O-8 11 DATA SWITCHING DATA.. ..................................................................................... 1. Digital Data Interface Unit Data Block (Table 11-l) ............................................ 2. Print Digital Data Interface Unit Data Block (Table 1 l-2) .................................... 3. Modem Pooling Data Block (Table 1 l-3) ............................................................ 4. Print Modem Pooling Data Block (Table 1 l-4) .................................................... 11-I 11-i 11-6 1 l-7 11-9 12 LEAST 1. Least 2. Least 3. Least 4. Print 12-I 12-1 12-2 12-6 12-12 13 LODGING/HEALTH CARE DATA ........................................................................... 1. Lodging/Health Care Features Data Block (Table 13-I) ..................................... 2. Print Lodging/Health Care Features Data Block (Table 13-2) ............................. 3. Message Registration Data Block (Table 13-3) ................................................... 4. Print Message Registration Data Block (Table 13-4) .......................................... 13-1 13-I 13-3 13-4 13-7 14 SPEED DIAL LIST DATA ........................................................................................ 1. Speed Dial List Data Block (Table 14-I) ............................................................. 2. Print Speed Dial List Data Block (Table 14-2) ..................................................... 14-1 14-1 14-3 COST Cost Cost Cost Least ROUTING DATA .............................................................................. Routing Data Block (Table 12-1) ....................................................... Routing Data Block 1 (Tables 12-2 - 12-4) ....................................... Routing Data Block 2 (Tables 12-5 - 12-6) ....................................... Cost Routing Data Block (Table 12-7) .............................................. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-300 FEBRUARY1992 TABLEOF CONTENTS(continued) CHAPTER SUBJECT PAGE 15 TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT DATA .. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 1. Traffic Measurement Data Block (Table 15-1) .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 15-1 16 ALPHANUMERIC MESSAGING DATA .................................................................. 1. Alphanumeric Message Data Block (Table 16-l) ................................................ 2. Print Alphanumeric Message Data Block (Table 16-2) ....................................... 16-1 16-1 16-2 17 ACD DATA .............................................................................................................. 1. ACD Data Block (Table 17-l) .............................................................................. 2. Print ACD Data Block (Table 17-2) ..................................................................... 17-1 17-I 17-7 18 VERIFIABLE ACCOUNT CODES DATA ................................................................ 1. Verifiable Account Codes Data Block (Table 18-1) ............................................. 2. Print Verifiable Account Codes Data Block (Table 18-2) .................................... 18-1 18-1 18-4 19 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . .. .. . ..*..........................*........................................ 1. General . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. . . .. . . 2. Backup Memory Check Entry Procedure (Table 19-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . 3. Data Dump Program (Table 19-2) . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . 4. Electronic or Digital Telephone/Attendant Console Test (Tables 19-3 - 19-4) . . . 5. Peripheral Equipment Test (Table 19-S) . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 9-1 9-1 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-8 TABLELIST TABLE l-1 2-l 2-2 3-1 5-I 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 7-1 7-2 7-3 TITLE Floppy Disk installation Procedures ........................................................................ PERCEPTlONe TTY and MODEM Connections .................................................... PERCEPTION,, TTY and MODEM Connections.. ................................................. Utility Program Reference Guide Data Input and Output Procedures ..................... Authorization Code Change .................................................................................... System Data Block .................................................................................................. Print System Data Block .......................................................................................... System Data Block 2 ............................................................................................... Print System Data Block 2 ....................................................................................... Access Code Data Block ......................................................................................... Print Access Code Data Block ................................................................................ Class of Service Data Block .................................................................................... Print Class of Service Data Block ............................................................................ Attendant Data Block ............................................................................................... Electronic/Digital Telephone Data Block ................................................................. Standard Telephone Data Block ............................................................................. . .. -ill- PAGE l-2 2-2 2-3 3-2 5-1 5-6 5-8 5-11 5-13 6-l 6-5 6-6 6-10 7-2 7-8 7-15 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-300 FEBRUARY1992 TABLELIST (continued) TABLE 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 8-I 8-2 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 10-l IO-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 11-l 11-2 11-3 11-4 12-I 12-2 12-3 12-4 12-5 12-6 12-7 13-1 13-2 13-3 13-4 14-1 14-2 15-1 16-1 16-2 17-l 17-2 18-1 18-2 19-1 TITLE Print Station Data Block .......................................................................................... Print Call Pickup Groups ......................................................................................... Print Hunting Arrangements .................................................................................... Print Paging Group Data Block ............................................................................... DSS Console Data Block ........................................................................................ Print DSS Console Data Block ................................................................................ Message Center Data Block .................................................................................... Print Message Center Data Block ........................................................................... Trunk Group Data Block .......................................................................................... Print Trunk Group Data Block ................................................................................. Trunk Data Block ..................................................................................................... Print Trunk Data Block ............................................................................................ Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Data Block.. ........................................ Print Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) .................................................... Dialed Number Identification Service Data Block.. .................................................. Print Dialed Number Identification Service Data Block ........................................... Toll Restriction Data Block ...................................................................................... Miscellaneous Parameters Table ............................................................................ Restriction Class Table ........................................................................................... Area/Office Code Exception Table .......................................................................... Print Toll Restriction Data Block .............................................................................. Digital Data Interface Unit Data Block ..................................................................... Print Digital Data Interface Unit Data Block.. ........................................................... Modem Pooling Data Block ..................................................................................... Print Modem Pooling Data Block ............................................................................. Least Cost Routing Data Block ............................................................................... Miscellaneous Parameters Table ............................................................................ Area Code Table ..................................................................................................... Area/Off ice Code Table ........................................................................................... Route Table ............................................................................................................. Modify Digits Table .................................................................................................. Print Least Cost Routing Data Block ....................................................................... Lodging/Health Care Features Data Block.. ............................................................ Print Lodging/Health Care Features Data Block ..................................................... Message Registration Data Block ........................................................................... Print Message Registration Data Block ................................................................... Speed Dial List Data Block ...................................................................................... Print Speed Dial List Data Block ............................................................................. Traffic Measurement Data Block ............................................................................. Alphanumeric Message Data Block ........................................................................ Print Alphanumeric Message Data Block ................................................................ ACD Data Block ...................................................................................................... Print ACD Data Block .............................................................................................. Verifiable Account Codes Data Block ...................................................................... Print Verifiable Account Codes Data Block ............................................................. Backup Memory Check Entry Procedure ................................................................ -iv- PAGE 7-17 7-19 7-20 7-21 7-24 7-29 8-2 8-4 9-4 9-7 9-l 0 9-15 9-17 9-18 9-19 9-20 10-l 1 O-3 IO-5 1 O-7 10-8 11-3 1 l-6 11-8 11-9 12-1. 12-3 12-4 12-5 12-8 12-10 12-13 13-2 13-3 13-5 13-7 14-2 14-3 15-2 16-1 16-2 17-4 17-7 18-2 18-4 19-I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-300 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLELIST (continued) TABLE 19-2 19-3 19-4 19-5 19-6 TITLE Data Dump Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic/Digital Telephone Test Procedure . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attendant Console Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disk Drive Operation Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -V- PAGE 19-2 19-4 19-6 19-l 1 19-15 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-301 JANUARY 1993 CHAPTER 1 the insertion of the System FD in FDDO, followed by the insertion of the Maintenance FD in FDDl. The various steps involved in floppy disk installation for both single- and dual-disk systems are noted in Table l-1. INTRODUCTION 1. General 3. Customer 1.01 PERCEPTION, and PERCEPTION,, are both stored program-controlled systems which utilize a 16-bit microprocessor as the central processing unit (CPU). The system memory is made up of Read Only Memory (ROM), Dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM), and Static Random Access Memory (SRAM). The small amount of ROM that is provided contains the “Loader” program for the 3.5inch disk drive (NFDU card). When the system is initially powered up or is reset manually, the remainder of the Operating System programs and Customer Data will be loaded into RAM from the disk, under the control of the Loader program. 3.01 All PERCEPTION,,,, options are controlled by entries made in the Customer Database. Tables are provided for defining System Parameters and Trunks, as well as individual station features. The Customer Data is unique to each system and is usually entered by using a keyboard terminal. After the data has been entered into system memory, a simple keyboard command causes it to be copied onto the System FD, where it remains as a permanent record. 4. Utility 1.02 Since Dynamic RAM is volatile (its contents are lost when power is removed), the disk remains in the system as backup. If a reload is required, the entire system program and customer database will reload in approximately 45 seconds. In Lodging/ Health Care operation, some customer data is stored in Static RAM in order to protect it in case of a power failure. I Data Programs 4.01 In addition to the Operating System Programs and Customer Data, the System FD also contains many Utility Programs, which are used to program and maintain customer data. The Utility Programs are divided into three main groups: 1) Data Input Procedures 2. Dual Disk Operation 2) Data Output 2.01 PERCEPTION e&ex systems with D.02 software and above, utilize two floppy disks (FDs) for the storage of operating and maintenance data. One of these disks (the System FD) is used specifically for the system program, customer data, and the DSYS, DTRF, and TPER maintenance programs, while the other disk (the Maintenance FD) is used exclusively for all other maintenance programs. A separate disk drive for each disk is required for remote maintenance. Systems with a single disk drive must interchange disks manually in order to perform the various system programming functions. The System FD is inserted for system program loading, data saving, and system operation, while the Maintenance FD is inserted for system programming or the performance of maintenance operations. Dual-drive systems require 3) Maintenance Procedures Procedures 4.02 When required, a Utility Program can be called up by entering a command via the keyboard terminal. The system will respond by locating the proper Utility Program on the proper floppy disk and then loading it into the memory overlay area. When the loading is completed, a prompt will be output to the terminal. The overlay area can accommodate only one Utility Program at a time. When a program is called up, the previous program will be taken out of the overlay. NOTE: Any disk failure will cause an error code to be output to the terminal. See Table 19-6 for the list of error codes. l-1 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-301 JANUARY1993 TABLEl-1 FLOPPYDISKINSTALLATION PROCEDURES Disk That Performs Operation Operation One-Disk Systems Two-Disk Systems Note 1. Turn power on (Boot Loading). Sys-FD Sys-FD in FDDO 1 2. For two-drive systems: After the system initializes, change the NOD entry in the DSYS Program from 1 to 2. Sys-FD Sys-FD in FDDO 1 3. Set up customer data for all maintenance DSYS, DTRF, and TPER. Mnt-FD Mnt-FD in FDDl 2&.3 Sys-FD Sys-FD in FDDO 4 programs except 4. Save and dump data. I NOTES: 1. If the System-FD is not inserted in FdDO, LEDs 1 - 4 on the LCCU will light. 2. The DSYS, DTRF, and TPER Programs are stored on the System-FD. If this disk is not inserted in FDDO, then the system will respond with the following message: “CURRENT FD IS NOT SYSTEM FD. CHANGE IT TO SYSTEM FD.” 3. If the Maintenance-FD is not installed either in FDDO of a one-drive system, or in FDDl of a twodrive system, then the following message will be generated: “CURRENT FD IS NOT MAINT. FD. CHANGE IT TO MAINT. FD. ” 4. If the System-FD is not installed in FDDO, then the system will request a change by generating the same message as in note 2. 5. In single drive systems, the Maintenance FD can be left in FDDO up untilperforming a SAVE. Before a SAVE can actually be performed, the System FD must be installed. 6. After an initialization, to clear Call Forwarding (CFD) and Message Waiting (MSG) data, is performed on the system, perform the following procedures: a. Run the DMYC Program. b. When it is completed, perform the following steps at the attendant console: : ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ l l l l Wait about 20 min& for the system to run ihrough Initialize the system. Do a data dump (DDMP) procedure. Reload the system (power off and on). 1-2 and clear the above data. PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-302 FEBRUARY1992 3. Data Format CHAPTER 2 3.01 The PERCEPTION, and PERCEPTION,, systems communicate on the TTY and modem ports via the standard 7-bit ASCII code, using one start bit, one stop bit, and one parity bit. Both systems transmit even parity and ignore parity on the receive side. SET UP KEYBOARD/REMOTE MAINTENANCE 1. Keyboard Terminal 1 .Ol PERCEPTION, and PERCEPTION,, systems are designed to interface with a standard asynchronous keyboard/printer data terminal (a Texas instruments Model 743or745, or equivalent) or a personal computer configured as a dumb terminal. The terminal is connected to the system via a female-type RS-232C connector (labeled TTY), which is located on the connector panel on the lower rear of the basic cabinet. The TTY port can operate at a speed of either 300 or 1200 bps, which is designated by a switch on the front of the LCCU PCB. The selected bps setting must match the setting on the connected modem or TTY. TTY and modem port pin assignments for PERCEPTlONe systems are shown in Table 2-1, while assignments for PERCEPTlONe, systems are shown in Table 2-2. 3.02 Prior to switching on the PERCEPTfONe or PERCEPTION,, system, data terminal, ormodem power, all speed settings should be made and data terminals and modems should be set for full duplex operation. 2. Remote Administration 2.01 PERCEPTlONe and PERCEPTIONex SYSterns can be programmed and tested from a remote location via a locally-provided 300 or 1200 bps modem. Utility Programs can be called up via a telephone line and then the desired data change or test can be performed. On the PERCEPTION,, the modem connects to the TTY RS-232C connector on the rear of the basic cabinet via a Null Modem cable (see Table 2-1 for PERCEPTlONe pin assignments). On the PERCEPTIONex, the modem connects directly to the modem connector on the rear of the basic cabinet (see Table 2-2 for PERCEPTIONex pin assignments). 2-1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-302 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE2-1 PERCEPTION, TTYandMODEMCONNECTIONS MODEM TTY PORT PIN I SIGNAL 2 I Receive Data I PIN I SIGNAL 3 I Transmit Data 3 Transmit Data 2 Receive Data 4 Ready to Send 5 Clear to Send 5 Clear to Send 4 Readv to Send Data Set Ready 20 Data Terminal Ready Signal Ground 7 Signal Ground D8W#E3’Fminal Ready 6 Data Set Readv 6 m 20 2-2 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-302 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE2-2 PERCEPTION,, TTYand MODEMCONNECTIONS MODEM PORT I I I PIN 1 SIGNAL 2 1 Transmit Data 3 I Receive Data MODEM PIN 1 SIGNAL 1 2 1 Receive Data I 3 I Transmit Data 4 Ready to Send 4 Clear to Send 5 Clear to Send 5 Ready to Send 6 I Data Set Ready 7 Signal Ground 20 Data Terminal Ready I 2-3 6 I I Data Set Ready 1 7 Signal Ground - 20 Data Terminal Ready PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-303 JANUARY 1993 CHAPTER DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 3 mnemonic name is included in the listing in Table 31. Before a Utility Program can be called up, an Authorization Procedure must be performed. PROCEDURES 1. General 2. Data Input 1.01 Prior to actual system programming, customer data is recorded on special System Record Sheets which correspond with the prompts outlined in the data block tables contained in this manual (see Appendix 1). Afterthese sheets arecompleted and after the PERCEPTION, or PERCEPTlONe, system is connected to the data terminal (see Chapter 2), data can be entered into the system via the Data Input Utility Programs. Once the information is input, it can be printed out via Data Output Procedures and tested via special Maintenance Procedures. The Utility Programs used to program and maintain customer data are summarized as follows: 2.01 Before PERCEPTION,~,, system be input, option selections must be made listed on the System Record Sheets (see 1). The System Record will then serve gramming guide and installation record. data can and then Appendix as a pro- 2.02 The System Record contains a form for each Data Input Utility Program. Each form is identified by the Utility Program name and by the program’s corresponding mnemonic that is requested by the system (for example: System Data Block = DSYS Program). 2.03 Data input via a Utility Program is accomplished by responding to the program’s prompts. These prompts are listed in their proper order in the System Record Sheets. Space is provided to record a response to each prompt. 1) Data Input Procedures-used when entering or making changes to Customer Data. 2) Data Output Procedures-used for obtaining printouts of the contents of the Customer Data memory. 2.04 Refer to each Utility Program’s specific instructions for an explanation of the possible responses to each prompt. Record each selected response on the program’s corresponding System Record Sheet. 3) Maintenance Procedures-used when testing the system. The System FD contains only the DSYS, DTRF, and TPER maintenance programs, while the maintenance FD contains all other maintenance programs. 2.05 To input new customer data or to change an established database, perform the Authorization Procedure and then enter the mnemonic name of the desired Data Input Utility Program (see Chapter 4). Refer to the completed System Record Sheets and input the required information. 1.02 Within this manual, tables dealing with Data input and Data Output Procedures are presented collectively under each chapter category of data (e.g., System Data, Station Data, etc.). This provides a convenient reference to all information that deals with a specific type of data. Maintenance Procedures, consisting of the Data Dump and various test procedures, are grouped into their own chapter at the end of this manual. For convenient reference, each Utility Program’s location within this manual is listed in Table 3-l. 3. Data Output 3.01 To print. out data that is contained in the various data blocks of the customer database, perform the Authorization Procedure and then enter the mnemonic name of the desired Data Output Utility Program. Within this manual, Data Output programs are grouped next to their related Data Input Program. For detailed instructions on how to print out data, refer to each specific program and program table. 1.03 Each Utility Program has a4-letter mnemonic name that is used to identify it and to call it up from the disk on which it is contained. Each program’s 3-I t-caysPROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-303 JANUARY1993 c. --: 7-w I( ., ~~ .,@23 -I&L -7. TABLE3-1 UTILITYPROGRAMREFERENCEGUIDE DATAINPUTANDOUTPUTPROCEDURES TABLE 1 NAME I MNEM.I PAGE 11-2 1Print DDIU DB I PDIU 11-3 I Modem I DMDMI 1 l-8 Poolina DB I Print Modem Poolina DB I PMDMI 11-9 .:.12-l p Least Cost Routing DB 1 12-3 IDLCl I26 - &east Cost Routing DB 2 1 DLC2 1Print Least Cost Routing DB 12-8 1 PLCR I 12-l 3 I I DHMF 13-2 Care PHMF 13-3 13-3 Message Registration DB DMRD 13-5 13-4 Print Message Registration DB PMRD 13-7 Print Lodging/Health Features DB 13-2 14-1 I Speed Dial List DB 1 DSDL 1 14-2 14-2 I Print Speed Dial List DB 1 PSDL 15-1 1Traffic Measurement 1DTRF 1 15-2 16-l I Alphanumeric Message DB 16-2 rnt DB PMSC I 1 6-2 I I 3%1 @I ACD/MIS DB 14-3 IDMSG I 16-1 Alphanumeric Message I I I I DACM I 17-4. 1 PACM 1 17-7 17-2 I Print ACD/MIS DB l&l@ 1Verifiable Account Codes DB I DVAC I 18-2 18-2 Print Verifiable Account I Codes DB TABLE I Ill I I PVAC I 18-4 MAINTENANCEPROCE IURES NAME HNEM. PAGE DMYC 19-1 I Data Dump Program DDMP 19-2 Electronic and Digital 19-3 - 4 Telephone/Attendant Console Test Proc. lTRM 19-4 TPER 19-11 19-l 19-2 19-5 Backup Memory Check Entry Proc. Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic Proc. with each data block are listed after each data block table. 3-2 1 12-1 Cost Routine DB 1 Lodging/Health Care Features DB NOTE: Error codes associated DLC 12i;2 - &east - 12-7 11-6 I PRQGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-304 FEBRUARY1992 NOTE: No otherauthorization MIS Data Block. CHAPTER 4 AUTHORIZATION PROCEDURES/UTILITY PROGRAM USE 1. Authorization 3. Authorization put Procedures Procedure 1 .Ol Before any Utility Program can be called up, PERCEPTlONe and PERCEPTlONe, systems require an authorization code to be entered. This prevents unauthorized tampering with the Customer Database. Level Allowances-Data Level Allowances-Data Out- 3.01 The entrance of the different authorization codes permits specific customer data to be$nted. The data output activities that are allowed to three of the four authorization levels are as follows: 1.02 There are four levels of authorization (each of which has a unique 4-digit code that is assigned in the system memory). Each authorization level allows certain input, output, and maintenance procedures to be performed. When shipped from the factory, all levels are assigned 0000. Codes are changed with the Authorization Code Change procedure (DCHG). 2. Authorization Procedures level can access ACD/ input 2.01 The data input activities that are allowed to each of the four authorization levels are as follows: Level 1: Can do all activities of Levels 2 and 3. Can change the 4-digit codes of Levels 1, 2, 3, and 4. Level 2: Can do all Level 1 activities except change or read out codes for Level 1. Can change Level 2,3, and 4 codes. Level 3: Normally assigned for end user use. Can change: System Data Block 2 Class of Service Data Block Station Data Block Attendant Data Block DSS Console Data Block Station Message Detail Recording Data Block Speed Dial List Data Digital Data Interface Unit Data Block Modem Pooling Data Block Alphanumeric Message Data Block Levels Print Print Print Print Print Print Print Print Print Print Print 1, 2, or 3: Print System Data Block System Data Block 2 Class Service Data Block Station Data Block DSS Console Data Block SMDR Data Block Digital Data Interface Data Block Modem Pooling Data Block Speed Dial List Data Block Call Pickup Groups Hunting Arrangements Alphanumeric Message Data Block Levels Print Print Print Print Print Print Print Print Pri?t 2 or 3 only: Print System Data Block Access Code Data Block Message Center Data Block Trunk Group Data Block Trunk Data Block Toll Restriction Data Block Least Cost Routing Data Block Lodging/Health Care Features Data Block Message Registration Data Block Paging Group Data 4. Authorization nance Procedures Level Allowances-Mainte- 4.01 The maintenance activities that are allowed to three of the four authorization levels are as follows: Levels 1, 2, or 3: Data Dump Program Electronic and Digital Telephone/Attendant Console Test Levels 1 or 2 only: Backup Memory Procedure Peripheral Equipment Test Level 4: Normally assigned for ACD Supervisor use. Can change ACD/MIS Data Block. 4-1 Check Entry PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-304 FEBRUARY1992 5. Execution of Authorization 5.01 To perform 1) the Authorization Procedure obvious, but in most cases it will be an alphanumericcode. The alphanumeric code consists of five letters (identifying the program) and two numbers (identifying the error). Error code lists are provided in this manual to explain each error code. Procedure: Plug in and power up the data terminal. 2) The system then greater will respond with a copyright than sign (>). and IMPORTANT! This masking measure is not effective when a CRT is used. Be careful not to leave the authorization code displayed on the screen. 4) Enter the 4-digit authorization code (0000 default value), followed by a . l The system will print: ERROR if an invalid code is entered (return to Step 2). OK if a valid code is entered (proceed to request Utility Program). q Program .. 6.05 Boxes are used to indicate keys on the programming terminal. The m (control) key must be held down while simultaneously pressing either key. Press the carriage return key appears. The following keys are available when using Utility Programs (press the - pycegr each.code): I nore lrne entered-the same prompt 5 will be repeated. mEBackspace will allow you to overwrite the previous character(s). W-May be entered at anytime-the system will stoo execution and return to the REQ oromot. F-Exits the program-ends the u.se of bne utility. The system will respond with SAVE. A ‘Y” entry will cause the system to copy all present data onto the disk. If more changes are to be made, enter “N.” 3) Press the carriage return [9 key. l The system will respond by printing COD and will print several characters in the spaces to be occupied by your next entry (this is done to mask the authorization code). 6. Utility .. NOTE: The above key indications are for Texas lnstruments Silent 700 series terminals. Other Use 6.01 After performing the Authorization Procedure and receiving an OK response, enter the mnemonic of the required Utility Program. 6.06 When data already exists for a given prompt and a change is not required, entering a will advance the system to the next prompt without changing existing data. q 6.02 After the Utility Program name is entered, the program will be loaded from the disk. When the loading is complete, the system will prompt REQ for Request. 6.07 Tables 5-1 through 19-5 show the format of each Utility Program. Programs are grouped into general categorical areas (e.g., System Data, Feature Data, etc.). Each Data Output program is grouped with its related Data Input program(s). If applicable, each data table is followed by a list explaining the error codes which pertain to that program. Using the appropriate tables as guides, enter data that has been previously recorded in the System Record Sheets. 6.03 Entering data via a Utility Program is a matter of responding to the prompts given by the system via the data terminal. The prompts and the required responses are mnemonics that are usually abbreviations of the actual English word required. 6.04 If an improper response is made to a prompt, the system will respond with an error message. The error message will be a “?,, when the error is 4-2 *. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-305 JANUARY 1993 CHAPTER 5 above, L 1 willnotbe output. Go to the next prompt (L2). 2. If a Level 3 authorization code was entered above, an error message will be given, Level 3 cannot change the authorization codes. Enter: New L 1 code (4 digits) a. L2XXXX (Level 2 authorization code). (XXXX = present code.) Enter: New L2 code (4 digits) . j L3XXXX (Level 3 authorization code). (XXXX = present code.) , Enter: New L3 code (4 digits) L4XXXX (Level 4 authorization code). Enter: New L4 code (4 digits) , En ten m m (to exit the program). SYSTEM DATA 1. Authorization Code Change (Table 5-1) 1 .Ol The DCHG Program changes the authorization codes which are used in the Authorization Procedure. 1.02 To use the DCHG Program: Complete the Authorization Procedure (Level 1 or 2). Enter: DCHGm (in response to the OK prompt). The next prompt will be: LiXXXX (Level 1 authorization code). (XXXX = present code.) NOTES: I. If a Level 2 authorization q q q code was given TABLE 5-l Procedure - Authorization Code Change Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response is received, proceed as follows: NOTES: 1. a. An error message will be received if Level3 or Level4 was given in the Authorization Procedure. 6. If Level2 was given in the Authorization Procedure, L 1 will be omitted and the response to CHG will be: L2 = XXXX. c. XXXX = Present code of the designated level 1 - 4. 2. The possible responses are: YYYY = This new access code will replace the existing XXXX. = Carriage Return - the code will not be changed and the system will issue the next (9 prompt. = Ignore line entered. = Backspace. - Stop printing and return to REQ. = Exit program. 3. Enter: Y or N. 5-I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-305 JANUARY1993 2. System Data Block (Table 5-2) following Data Blocks: Electronic/Digital Telephone (DEKT Program), Standard Telephone (DSTT Program), and Trunk Group (DTGP Program). If “N” is entered, then the attendant consoles will operate in the load sharing mode. Enter: Y or N. 2.01 The System Data Block (DSYS Program) contains miscellaneous data entries that apply to the system as a whole rather than to any individual station or trunk. Data is entered as follows: REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program has loaded. Since data is always present, only the CHG response is possible. NOTE: In tenant service, when the Attendant console transfers a call to a station, if the call RNAs and recalls back to the Attendant, it will recall to the original Attendant that transferred the call. In some cases this may mean the call will recall to the Attendant that the station is not assigned to. EXP (Expansion Cabinet)-Indicates whether or not an expansion cabinet is installed. Enter: Y: if an expansion cabinet is installed. N: if only the basic cabinet is installed. NOTES: 1. Y must be entered to enable the system to provide up to 20 simultaneous conferences in a cabinet using a second NPRU PCB. 2. If N is entered, then only ten simultaneous conferences will be supported. ICPl (Intercept #l)--If the attendant takes control of a trunk group by using the trunk group access control feature, then stations that place calls to that trunk group will be routed to Intercept #Il. This entry defines ICPl as being either overflow tone (OFL) or the attendant (ATT). Enter: ATT or OFL. NOD (Number of Drives)--Indicates whether one or two disk drives are being used. (Two drives are used only with D.02 or later software versions.) Enter: 1: if only a single drive (FDDO) is used. ;$s&..q: if two drives (FDDO and FDDl) are used. (The system will not access M%LwzG maintenance programs in FDDl if 1 is entered, unless the Maintenance FD is used in place of the System FD.) ICP2 (Intercept #2)-An incoming call from a DID, TIE, or CCSA trunk to a non-existing DN will be routed to Intercept #2 when the system is in day service and to overflow tone when night service is active. This entry defines ICP2 as being either overflow tone (OFL), the attendant (An), a standard station, or an answering device connected to a trunk or a standard station pdrt (TNNX, LNNX). Enter: AlT, OFL, TNNX, or LNNX. TOR (Time of Daily Routine)-Specifies the time of day that the daily routine task (System Dump) will run (listed after the next prompt). Enter: 24-hour clock time. (For example: 1315 = 1:15 pm.) DRT (Daily Routine Task)-Specifies whether not a System Data Dump is to be performed the time specified in response to TOR. Enter: DDMP (Data Dump) or NONE. ICP3 (Intercept #3)-A call that is’violating trunk access restrictions will be routed to Intercept #3 when the system is in day service and to overflow tone when night service is active. This entry defines ICP3 as being either ovetflow tone or the attendant. Enter: AIT or OFL. or at LCR (Least Cost Routing)-A 7 response enables Least Cost Routing in the system. Refer to the Least Cost Routing Data Block DLCI and DLC2 Programs. Enter: Y or N. TEN (Tenant Service)-Specifies whether or not tenant service is to be used. If “Y” is entered, incoming trunk calls, dial calls, intercepts, etc. will be routed to the proper attendant console (Att. #O for Tenant #0, and Att. #l for Tenant #l). Tenant designation for each telephone and trunk is selected in response to the TEN prompt in the APG (All Page Access Code)-Defines the All Page access code. The use of this code will simultaneously access Internal Group 0 Paging 5-2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-305 JANUARY1993 OFL2 (Overflow DN-Attendant Console #l)AAT (Not Used): Defines the destination for calls that are rerouted from attendant console #l during an overflow condition. Enter: 1, 2, 3, or 4 digits, or NONE (UNA). Enter: m. APX (Not Used): Enter: (9. NOTES: 1. The overfiow destination can also be changed at the attendant console. 2. OF1 2 applies to tenant 1 and wiiinotprint out when the system is not in tenant ser-. vice. LNl (Listed Directory Number #l)-Defines the LDN #l , which is used with the DID feature when routing a call to the attendant console (maximum: 4 digits). Enter: 1, 2, 3, or 4 digits or NONE. MMP (Meet-me Page Access Code)-Defines LN2 (Listed Directory Number #2-Defines the LDN #2, which is used with the DID feature when routing a call to the attendant console (maximum: 4 digits). Enter: 1, 2, 3, or 4 digits or NONE. the access code that is used by the attendant or attendant-position electronic/digital telephone to “park” a call for the Meet-me Page feature (maximum: 3 digits; the system default is 10). Enter: 1,2, or 3 digits. NT1 (LDN #1 Night Number)-Defines the destination to which LDN #l calls will be routed when the system is in night service (DN or Universal Night Answer). Enter: 1,2, 3, or 4 digits or UNA. REM (Remote Access DN)-Defines the DN that is used to assign a trunk for “Remote Access to Services” operation (maximum: 4 digits). The DN must be the same as an assigned station DN. Refer to the note at the NIT prompt in the DTRK Program . NT2 (LDN #2 Night Number)- The response to this prompt defines the destination to which LDN #2 calls will be routed when the system is in night service (DN or UNA). Enter: 1, 2, 3, or 4 digits or UNA. Enter: 1,2, 3, or 4 digits, or NONE. RAC (Remote Access to Services Change Code)-Defines the access code that must be entered before the system’s remote access code can be changed. The remote access code can be changed from either an attendant console or an attendant-position electronic telephone after entering the change code. The remote access code is used by outside callers who want to access the system’s remote access feature. Enter: 1, 2, or 3 digits. BLFl (Busy Lamp Field #l)-Defines one of the hundreds groups that is to be displayed by the console BLF. Enter: 1 digit (1 - 9). BLF2 (Busy Lamp Field #P)-Defines one of the hundreds groups that is to be displayed by the console BLF. Enter: 1 digit (1 - 9). ACC* (*Access Code)-Defines the digit that is to be used by a rotary dial telephone in place of the a button. Enter: 1 digit or NONE. OFLl (Overflow DN-Attendant Console #IO)Defines the destination for calls that are rerouted from attendant console #0 during an overflow condition. Enter: 1, 2, 3, or 4 digits or NONE (UNA). NOTE: This data may also be changed dant console. NOTE: AAC * must not conflict with either the DN or other access codes-it is not checked by software. via the atten- 5-3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-305 JANUARY 1993 ACC# (# Access Code)-Defines the digit that is to be used by a rotary dial telephone in place of the 1 button. Enter: 1 digit or NONE. that are overflow lockout Enter: NOTES: 1. The Dial Pause Timeout also controls the release of an idle attendant console m button. 2. Outbound calls can send DTMF tones until the DPTtimerexpires. Once the timer expires, it changes to the transfer mode. NOTE: AAC# must not conflict with either the DN or other access codes-it is not checked by the software. COT (Camp-on or Call Waiting Timeout)-Defines the Camp-on and Call Waiting feature timeout period. Enter: Time in seconds. For example: 30. PBT (Pushbutton Timeout)-Defines the maximum pause that is allowed between digits that are dialed on a trunk from a DTMF telephone. The transmit voice path from a DTMF telephone to a trunk is broken during dialing. The PBT timer determines how quickly the path is restored and therefore, should be set as short as possible. Enter: Time in seconds. RNA (Ring No Answer Timeout)-Defines the Ring No Answer timeout period for attendanthandled calls, Enter: Time in seconds. NOTE: See Note following TEN prompt on page 5-2. AOF (Attendant Overflow Timeout)-Defines timeout period for the attendant overflow Enter: Time in seconds, released due to the DPT timer will hear tone. This timeout is used with the line feature. Time in seconds. LLO (Line Lockout Time)-Defines the length of time that overflow tone is applied to a station after having been released due to the DPT timer. After this timeout occurs,’ the station will hear silence. When Emergency Ringdown is used, a transfer to the Emergency Ringdown destination will not occur until the LLO timeout period has elapsed. Enter: Time in seconds. the facility. CFD (Call Forward No Answer Timeout)-Defines the Call Forward No Answer timeout period. Enter: Time in seconds. ACB (Automatic Callback Reserve Time)-Defines the length of time that the called station or trunk in an AC6 call is reserved for the caller. Enter: Time in seconds. NOTE: The CFD timeout period must be less than RNA time or else RNA time will be in effect. HLD (2500 Hold/Electronic/Digital Telephone Park Timeout)-Defines the timeout period for the recall of a held call to a single line telephone or of a parked call to an electronic/digital telephone. Enter: Time in seconds or NONE. DLY (Delay Ring Timer)-Defines the time period between the ringing of Direct-in Line day answering stations programmed to ring immediately, and stations set for delayed ringing. For example, if stations 200 and 201 are set for immediate ringing, and station 202 is set for delayed ringing, then when a call rings in, the delayed ring-time period must elapse before station 202 will ring. Enter: Time in seconds (0 - 99). DPT (Dial Pause Timeout)-Defines the maximum pause that is allowed before the first digit is dialed or between other digits that are dialed from an electronic/digital telephone. Stations 5-4 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-305 FEBRUARY1992 account code that has not been entered or during the call. Enter: Time in seconds (0 M 255). HFS (Handsfree response allows announce to an is equipped with Enter: Y or N. before Answerback Station)-A ‘Y” calls from any station to voiceelectronic/digital telephone that Handsfree Answerback. HFA (Handsfree AnswerbackAttendant)-A Y” response allows calls from the attendant to voiceannounce to an electronic/digital telephone that is equipped with Handsfree Answerback. Enter: Y or N. MDR (SMDR Equipped)-A”Y” response enables SMDR and activates the MDR alarm on the console. Enter: Y or N. UNAO (Universal Night Answer Zone 0)-A response of 0 assigns UNA Zone 0 to Tenant 0. A response of 1 assigns UNA Zone 0 to Tenant 1. (This prompt will only appear if TEN was answered Y.) Enter: TEN0 or TENl. UNAI (Universal Night Answer Zone 1)-A response of 0 assigns UNA Zone 1 to Tenant 0. A response of 1 assigns UNA Zone 1 to Tenant 1. (This prompt will only appear if TEN was answered Y.) Enter: TEN0 or TENl. 5-5 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-305 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE 5-2 Procedure - System Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response is received, proceed as follows: Meet-me Page Access Code Remote Access DN REM 1 - 4 digits or NONE (NONE) Remote Access to Services Change Code RAC 1 - 3 digits (#*2) “*‘IAccess Code ACC* 1 digit or NONE (NONE) 5&6 ‘W Access Code ACC# 1 digit or NONE (NONE) 5&6 Camp-on (or CWT) Timeout COT 0 - 255 seconds (50) Ring No Answer Timeout RNA 0 - 255 seconds (31) Default values are noted in parentheses (). (continued) 5-6 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-305 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE 5-2(continued) ITEM PROMPT USER ENTRY NOTE Attendant Overflow Timeout AOF 0 - 255 seconds (30) 7 Call Forward No Answer Timeout CFD 0 - 255 seconds (10) 8 2500 Hold/Electronic/Digital Timeout Telephone Park I Dial Pause Timeout I HLD I DPT 0 - 255 seconds or NONE (50) 1 0 - 255 seconds (15) I I 9 Pushbutton Timeout PBT 0 - 255 seconds (4) Line Lockout Timeout LLO 0 - 255 seconds (15) Automatic ACB 0 - 255 seconds (4) Delay Ring Timer DLY 0 - 99 seconds (15) After Call Timer ACT 0 - 255 seconds (15) HFS Y or N (Nl 11 HFA Y or N (N) 12 SMDR Equipped MDR Y or N (N) Universal Night Answer UNAO TEN0 or TEN1 (NONE) Universal Niaht Answer DNA1 TEN0 Callback Reserve Time Handsfree Answerback Handsfree - Station Answerback - Attendant Default values are noted in parentheses 10 or TEN 1 (NONE) (continued) (). NOTES: 1. D.02and latersoftware versions can use two diskdrives. If two drives are used, enter2; otherwise, enter 1. 2. LNNX = Single line station port. 3. The all page access code can be 1,2, or 3 digits. 4. Not printed if tenant service is not used (TEN = N). 5. An entered digit indicates that a number can be dialed in place of ‘*‘Ior “#. ’ 6. Be ware of conflicts with the numbering plan and access codes-the system will not always check. 7. Timer activates only when a loop button (LPK) is in use at that attendant console. 8. CFD time must be less than RNA or else RNA will prevail. 9. The DPT timer also controls attendant LPK release. 10. The LLO timer also controls emergency ringdown time, since a transfer to an emergency ringdown destination will not occur until LLO times out. II. A “Y” response allows calls from any station to a handsfree answerback-equipped electronic telephone to be answered handsfree. 12. A “Y” response allows calls from the attendant telephone to be answered handsfree. = Ignore line entered. = Backspace. = Stop printing and return to REQ. = Exit program. 5-7 to a handsfree answerback-equipped electronic PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-305 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE5-2 (continued) Error Codes Program Name: System Data Block (DSYS Program) Error Code Meaning I The directory number or access code conflicts with an existing directory number, access code, or room prefix. ERSYS 00 ERSYS 01 I The entered DN does not exist in the system. ERSYS 02 -entered 1 ERSYS 05 DN is a trunk DN. The station DN has not been assigned as a remote access DN. The entered station port is not assigned, or is not a 500/25004ype port. ERSYS 08 I The input port has already been assigned to another tvoe of announcement bon. gram. 3. Print System Data Block (Table 5-3) 3.01 To use the Print System Example: Data Block (PSYS Program): Perform the Authorization l Procedure (Level 1 or 2). Enter: PSYS (in response to the OK prompt). When the REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded: Enter: PRT. ’ The System Data Block will be output in the same format as it was input in the DSYS Pro- l l l i1 REQ PRT EXP N NOD 2 TOR 0000 DRT NONE TEN N ICPl Al-T ICP2 Al-T etc. REQ will be prompted again once the printout complete. Enter: mm (to exit the program). q TABLE5-3 Procedure - Print System Data Block Authorization I Procedure ITEM I must be completed. If an OK response 1 PROMPT 1 I OK I is received, USER ENTRY PSYS - DISK LOADING PRT REQ - EXECUTE - NOTES: response possible is: PRT = Outputs System Data Block. Ignore line entered. Stop printing and return to REQ. 5-8 proceed as follows: t NOTE is PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-305 FEBRUARY1992 4. System Data Block 2 (Table (1 - 4 digits), or to a UNA device. Enter: XXXX (Station or voice directory ber [l - 4 digits]). NONE (UNA). 5-4) 4.01 The System Data Block (DSDZ Program) contains miscellaneous data entries that apply to the system as a whole rather than to any individual station or trunk. Data is entered as follows: num- MD1 (Master DNl)-Assigns a “master number’ to Distributed Hunt Group 1. Whenever this number is dialed, the calls will be distributed among the stations in the group. Enter: 1 - 4-digit number. RTO (Transfer Recall Timeout)-Assigns the length of time that the system will wait before performing a transfer recall. A transfer recall occurs when a station transfers a call to another station which is not answered. This station will ring until the Ring No-Answer timeout period elapses (or, if the station is busy, until the Campon/Call Waiting timeout period elapses). After this time, the transferred call will return to the transferring station, where it will ring for the period designated by the Transfer Recall Timer, before it is directed to another destination (an attendant console, system UNA device, voice mail system, or alternative station). This final destination is assigned for each trunk, in response to the TRCL prompt in the DTRK Program. Enter: 1 - 255 seconds. MD2 (Master DNP)-Assigns a “master number’ to Distributed Hunt Group 2. Whenever this number is dialed, the calls will be distributed among the stations in the group. Enter: 1 - 4-digit number. NOTE: If the system is to utilize a voice mail system, then it is recommended that the Transfer Recall Timer be set rather short so that voice mail will be activated promptly. MD3 (Master DN3)-Assigns a “master number’ to Distributed Hunt Group 3. Whenever this number is dialed, the calls will be distributed among the stations in the group. Enter: 1 - 4-digit number. AEKT (Attendant-Position Telephone)Assigns an electronic/digital telephone as an attendant position (up to eight per system). This assignment enables the electronic/digital telephone to access several features that are normally associated only with attendant console access (e.g., Meet-me Page assignment and cancellation, system- wide call forward cancellation, and Remote Access Code assignment). Following the AEKT prompt, the system will prompt “D.” Any port numbers that are entered, will be deleted. To add an entry, press the carriage return ([9> key. The system will then prompt “A” and any port numbers that are entered will be added. Enter: LNNX LNNX (in response to the D prompt). LNNX LNNX (in response to the A prompt). REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program has loaded. Since data is always present, only the CHG response is possible. MD0 (Master DNO)-Assigns a “master number’ to Distributed Hunt Group 0. Whenever this number is dialed, the calls will be distributed among the stations in the group. Enter: 1 - 4-digit number. NOTE: The Capacity of each Distributed Hunt Group has been increased to 32 stations. AHM (Lodging/Health Care)-Identifies tem’s mode of operation. Enter: Y (Lodging/Health Care). N (Business). the sys- NOS (Night Operator Station)-Assigns the Night Mode answering destination for calls to an attendant console. Calls can be routed either directly to a designated station or voice directory number 5-9 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-305 FEBRUARY1992 length may be entered. Enter the digit 1, 2, 3, or 4 representing the code length to be used. The default entry to the SCL prompt is NONE. Enter: The digit 1, 2, 3, or 4, or NONE. (LNNX denotes the station port number of the electronic telephone that is to be assigned as an attendant position. Up to eight port numbers may be entered in any one line.) MIS (MIS Machine)-Defines whether the system is connected to the MIS machine. A “Y” entry indicates that the system is connected to-the MIS machine, and an “N” entry indicates that it is not. Enter: Y or N. PEX (PERCEPTIONex Indication)-Designates whether the system being utilized is a PERCEPTIONex. Enter: Y or N. AHA (ACD Handsfree Answerback)--Defines the system-wide availability of an Auto-Answer feature for the ACD station. When an ACD agent position is in auto-answer mode (EKT/DKT feature ONLY), the system will provide the agent position with an audible burst of tone (zip tone) before connecting the agent to the incoming ACD call. Two entries are available for this mode: Y = Auto-answer feature for the ACD station is possible. N = Auto-answer feature for the ACD station is not possible. The default entry to the AHA prompt is N. Enter: Y or N. CDA (Call Distribution Algorithm)-Offers two algorithms that the system can choose to process incoming calls that are in queue. The two algorithms offered are: NAF = Next Available First. MIF = Most Idle First. Incoming calls can be routed to either an agent that is next available, or one that is most idle. This prompt only applies to ACD groups and NOT to Master Distributed Hunt Groups. This is a system wide promptwhich applies to all ACD groups. Only one type of distribution can be selected for all ACD groups used in the system. The default entry to the CDA prompt is the NAF algorithm. Enter: NAF or MIF. HVP (Handset Volume Preset Level )-Defines the system-wide preset of all digital telephones for the handset’s initial off-hook volume level. This level can be changed with the digital telephone’s volume control button while the handset is offhook. It will return to the preset level in this program after the handset is placed on-hook (for the next call). The volume level range for digital telephone handsets is 0 - 8, with 0 as the lowest. Anytime a handset is off-hook, its volume level can be adjusted anywhere between 0 - 8. The level setting established in this program, however, can only be from 1 - 4. The default entry to the HVP prompt is 2. Enter: The digit 1,2, 3, or 4. SCL (Stroke Count Length)-Defines the length of a Stroke Count Code (Call Record Identifier) that has to be entered. The Stroke Count feature allows an ACD agent to use the agent station’s dial keypad to register up to a four-digit code (this code is optional). For example, a stroke code can be designated for response(s) to various sales campaigns, or calls from a particular location. The code entered will be sent to the MIS processor or recorded by SMDR in the account code field. If an MIS processor is connected, only 1,2, or None digit code length may be entered. Without the MIS processor, up to 4 or None digit code 5-10 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-305 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE 5-4 Procedure - System Data Block 2 Authorization Procedure must be completed. ITEM If an OK response PROMPT OK is received, proceed as follows: USER ENTRY NOTE DSD2 - DISK LOADING REQ Master DNO #0 Master DNl #I Master DN2 #2 Master DN3 #3 Lodging/Health Care Night Operator Station Transfer Recall Timeout Attendant-Position Electronic/Digital Telephone MD0 MD1 MD2 MD3 AHM NOS RTO AEKT D A PEX PERCEPTlONe, Call Distribution algorithm Stroke Count Length MIS Machine ACD Handsfree Answerback Handset Volume Preset Level Default values are noted in parentheses CDA SCL MIS AHA H-VP ( ). 1 CH& 1 - 4 Digits (NONE) 1 - 4 Digits (NONE) 1 - 4 Digits (NONE) 1 - 4 Digits (NONE) Y or N (N) XXXX or NONE (NONE) 1 - 255 seconds (30) LNNX, LNNX... (NONE) LNNX, LNNX.. . LNNX, LNNX. . . Y or N (Y) NAF, MIF (NAF) 1,2,3,4, or None (NONE) Y or N (N) Y orN (N)~ 1,2,3, or4 (2) 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5&6 5&7 5, 8, & 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 (continued) NOTES: 1. This entry cannot be changed back to NONE. 2. Y = Lodging/Health Care mode (HRM must also be entered in DCOS Data Block). N = Business mode. 3. XXXX = The directory number to which dial 0 calls will go when the system is in night service. NONE = UNA. 4. If a system utilizes a voice mail system, it is recommended that this timer be set rather short so that voice mail can be activated promptly. 5. LNNX denotes the station port number of the electronic/digital telephone that is to be assigned (or is to be added or deleted) as an attendant-position electronic/digital telephone. 6. Data which appears represents old entries. If no old data exists, then the system will respond with “NONE. ’ 7. “D”represents a deletion. Any port number that is entered in response to this prompt will be deleted as an attendant-position electronic/digital telephone. 8. “A’ represents an addition. Any port number that is added in response to this prompt will be added as an attendant-position electronic/digital telephone. 9. Up to eight port numbers (eight electronic/digital telephones) may be added or deleted in any one line. There is a maximum of eight attendant-position electronic/digital telephones per system, 10. Designates whether or not the system is a PERCEPTIONex. Y = PERCEPTIONex. N = PERCEPTlONe. 5-11 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-305 FEBRUARY I 72. 13. 1992 1. NAF = The digit may be Y = The Next Available 7, 2,3,4, or NON entered. system is connec machine. 14. Y= The position 15. The ACDagentpositionisinauto-answermode is digit not 1, 2, in auto-answer 3, or = Ignore = Backspace. = = Stop Exit 4 li printing program. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-305 FEBRUARY1992 5. Print System Data Block 2 (Table 5-5) l 5.01 To use the Print System Data Block 2 (PSYS Program): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PSY2 (in response to the OK prompt). l When the REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded: l Enter: PRT. The System Data Block 2 will be output in the same format as it was input in the DSDP Program. REQ will be prompted again once the printout is complete. Enter: p w (to exit the program). q TABLE 5-5 Procedure Authorization Print System Data Block 2 Procedure must be completed. ITEM If an OK response PROMPT is received, USER ENTRY proceed as follows: NOTE .PSY2 OK - DISK LOADING - PRT =Q 1 - EXECUTE 1 REQ NOTES: 1. The on/y response 2. possible is: PRT = Outputs System Data Block 2. 5-13 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-306 JANUARY1993 CHAPTER 6 FEATURE 1. Access Code FTR (Feature)Enter: The 3- or 4-character feature abbreviation (see Table 6-1 a), a space, and then the desired 1 - 3 digit access code. (See Table 6-1 a for feature names and standard code assignments.) DATA Data Block (Table 6-1) 1.01 The Access Code Data Block (DACD Program) assigns the dial access codes for feature execution. Data is entered as follows: NOTE: Default access codes are shown in Table 61a. Any fea ture that does not require a change, does notneed to be entered. Features maybe entered in any order. REQ (Request)--indicates that the program has loaded. Since data is always present, only the CHG response is possible. TABLE 6-1 Procedure - Access Code Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. ITEM Feature? PROMPT OK REQ FTR If an OK response is received, USER ENTRY DACD - DISK LOADING CHG Feature + [space] + 1 - 3 digits proceed as follows: NOTE 1 (continued) NOTES: 1. a. In response to FTR, enter the feature abbreviation, followed by a space and its access code. b. Features may be entered in any order, and any new access code will overwrite the existing one. c. Any feature code which does not need to be changed, does not need to be entered. d. The feature abbreviations and factory-assigned codes are listed in Table 6-la. Ignore line entered. Stop printing and return to REQ. 6-1 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-306 JANUARY1993 TABLE64a FEATUREABBREVIATIONANDCODELIST (con tirtued) 6-2 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTlON200-255-306 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE 6-la (continued) FEATURE ABB. STD. CODE Speed Dial-Station - Call SDU #3 Speed Dial-Station - Program SDC ##3 Speed Dial-System - Call SDS #6 Universal Night Answer UNA ‘1 Charge Account (ACL in DMDR must be set) CRG #9 Flash FLH *5 Internal Group Paging (selected group 1, 2 - 17) PINT 151 Expanded PINA 152 External Paging (selected zone 0 - 4) PEXT 153 External All Paging (zones 0 - 4) PEXA Hold - All Calls Retrieve RTV 154 t* 3 Message Waiting All Clear MAL ##5 Message Waiting Cancel MCC #5 Do Not Disturb DND #2 Do Not Disturb Cancel DNC ##2 Internal Group Paging (group 0) Remote Access to Services Authorization Code RAC l * 5 Least Cost Routing Access Code LCR ##6 Day Destination DIL #*3 AWTJ #80 Automatic Change Code Wake-up Time Set/Cancel Message Registration Print - All #81 Message Registration Print - Directed #a2 Message Registration Print - Stop MRST #83 CRS #84 CRC #85 Room Status Print - All RSAA #86 Room Status Print - Directed RSAN #87 Room Status Print - Stop RSST #88 Room Status Change MIR #OO Controlled Outgoing Restriction Set Controlled Outgoing Restriction Cancel Room Status - Maid-in-Room Set MIRS #Ol Room Status - Maid-in-Room Cancel MIRC #02 Room Status - Maid-in-Room Cancel and Set Room Clean RCLN #03 Room-to-Room Block Set RRS #04 Room-to-Room Block Cancel RRC #05 (con timed) 6-3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-306 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE 6-la (continued) FEATURE ABB. I STD. CODE Room Status - Status 1 Set (Vacant/Clean) I RSSl I %l Room Status - Status 2 Set (Occuoied/CleanI I RSS2 I “#2 Room Status - Status 3 Set (Vacant/Needs Cleaning) Room Status - Status 4 Set (Occupied/Needs Cleaning) Room Status Set From 2 to 4 I Room Status Set From 4 to 2 RSS3 *#3 RSS4 *#4 RS24 *#5 RS42 I *#6 Display Deposit Paid Set Deposit Paid SDPP *#8 Clear Deposit Paid CDPP *#9 Voice Message Set VW3 #15 Voice Message Cancel mm #16 Alphanumeric AN-M #17 Night Operator Station NOS #*4 Unavailable Agent (ACD only) STAS ‘20 Available Agent (ACD only) STAC l 21 Remote Log-in, if LOG button is not assigned (ACD only) RLGI *22 Remote Log-out, if LOG button is not assigned RLGO l 23 Assistance (ACD only) ASS1 *24 Stroke Count (ACD only) STRK l 25 Work Mode Cancel, if CANCEL button is not assigned (ACD only) CAN ‘26 Verifiable Account Codes, Add VACA #*5 Verifiable Account Codes, Delete VACD #*6 Traveling Class of Service CHS #*7 Off-hook Call Announce OHCA #*8 BOV *27 Ringer Volume Control (Digital telephone only) RNGV l 28 Maid-in-Room RSSO l #fl Message (ACD only) Busy Override Tone Volume Control (Digital telephone only) Status Clear TABLE 6-I (continued) Error Codes Program Name: Access Code Data Block (DACD) Error Code Meaning ERACC 00 The input access code conflicts with an existing access code. ERACC 01 Invalid response (1 - 3 digits are allowed). ERACC 02 Invalid response (7*5, 8#, etc. are not allowed). 6-4 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-306 FEBRUARY1992 2. Print Access Code Data Block (Table 6-2) Example: 2.01 To use the Print Access Code Data Block (PACD Program): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1 or a Enter: PACD (in response to the OK prompt). When the REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded: Enter: PRT. The Access Code Data Block will be output in the same format as it was input in the DACD Program. l l l REQ PRT ACB *7 CBR **7 CFD *9 CFR **9 etc. REQ will be prompted again once the printout is complete. Enter: pm (to exit the program). q TABLE 6-2 Procedure Authorization Print Access Code Data Block Procedure must be completed. ITEM If an OK response PROMPT is received, proceed USER ENTRY as follows: NOTE PACD OK - DISK LOADING - I PRT =Q 1 - EXECUTE 1 RElQ NOTES: response possible is: PRT = Outputs Access Code Data Block. = Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. 6-5 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-306 FEBRUARY1992 3. Class of Service Data Block (Table 6-3) ber (0 - 15) and the restrictions to be associated with it. The possible restrictions are listed in Table 6-3a. Enter: COS number, followed by the restriction(s), in the following format: 3 TOO OVR ACO. 3.01 The Class of Service Data Block (DCOS Program) defines the 16 Classes of Service that are available in the system. All features that are controlled by the COS are allowed (except as indicated in notes 3 - 10) to all stations unless they are restricted in this Data Block. NOTES: 1. In this example, COS 3 will not allow access to Trunk Group 00, the Override feature, or the Attendant Control Override fea We. 2. If Lodging/Health Care features are to be allowed in the COS, the code HRM must be entered. The result of this entry is the opposite of other COS entries, since it allows rather than denies feature opera- 3.02 The DCOS Program assigns a number (0 15) to each group of restrictions to be used. The number defined here is then entered in response to the COS prompt in the DSlT, DEKT, and DTGP Programs. Any numbers that are not entered or are otherwise defined will have no COS restrictions. Data is entered as follows: REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program has loaded. The only response possible is CHG. COS (Class of Service)--Defines tion. COS-Repeat the COS num- for all COS entries. TABLE 6-3 Procedure - Class of Service Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response PROMPT ITEM is received, proceed as follows: NOTE USER ENTRY OK DCOS - DISK LOADING- I r I REQ CHG I I cos 0 AAA BBB etc. cos 1 AAA BBB etc. 11 cos Ia! 12 I REQI Repeat prowam l-10 if necessary I (con timed) NOTES: 1. Enter a list of all features which are not allowed fo this group. and codes. 2. Default = All features allowed. 3. lfLodging/Health Care features are to be allowed in this COS, entry enables rather than denies these features. 4. If the initiation of Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) by a station be entered in the Class Of Service (COS). This entry enables 5. If a station is to be required to enter Forced Account Codes, COS. This entry enables rather than denies this feature. 6-6 See Table 6-3a for a list of features the code HRM must be entered. This is to be allowed, the code OCA must rather than denies the OCA feature. the code FAC must be entered in the PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-306 FEBRUARY 1992 6. If a station is to be required to enter Verifiable Account Codes, the code VAC must be entered in the COS. This entry enables rather than denies this feature. 7. If a station is to be required to enter Forced Account Codes on to// calls only, the code FATmust be entered in the COS. This entry enables rather than denies the feature. 8. if a station is to be required to enter Forcedand Verifiable Account Codes, the codes FAC and VAC must be entered in the COS. This entry enables rather than denies this feature. 9. If a station is to be required to enter Forced and Verifiable Account Codes on toll calls only, the codes FATand VACmust be enteredin the COS. This entry enables rather than denies the feature. IO. For APU and ABPU, the station must be put in a Call Pick-up Group in either the DEKTor DSTT Data Block. I 1. A maximum of 16 COS groups (0 - 15) is allowed, 12. The COS prompt will be repeated until DEL is entered, and then an REQ prompt will be given. = ignore line entered. = Backspace. - Stop printing and return to REQ. = Exit program. /’ 6-7 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-306 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE 6-3a CLASS OF SERVICE FEATURES AND CODES I FEATURE I Trunk 1 CODE FEATURE Automatic Group 0 CODE Callback ACB Trunk Group 1 TO1 Call Forward (All Calls/Station) CFD Trunk Grouo 2 TO2 Call Forward/Busy CFB TO3 Call Forward/No 1 Trunk Group 3 I Trunk Group 7 1 Trunk Group 14 I Trunk I DDIU I I T14 Group 15 Group 3 (Station) Answer (Station) ‘CFN Call Forward Busy/No Answer (Station) -CFB Call Forward - Busy (DID) CSB Call Forward - Busy/No Answer (DID) CSN Call Pickup - Directed PUD Call Pickup - Group PUG Call Waiting CW-I- Override OVR Speed Dialing - System SDS Attendant AC0 Control Override Internal Group Paging (Group 00) PI00 Internal Group Paging (Group 02) PI02 Internal Group Paging (Group 03) PI03 Internal Group Paging (Group 04) PI04 Internal Group Paging (Group 05) PI05 Internal Group Paging (Group 06) PI06 Internal Group Paging (Group 07) PI07 Internal Group Paging (Group 08) PI08 Internal Group Paging (Group 09) PI09 Internal Group Paging (Group 10) PI10 Internal Group Paging (Group 11) PI11 Internal Group Paging (Group 12) PI12 Internal Group Paging (Group 13) PI13 DDIU Group 10 DlO Internal Group Paging (Group 14) PI14 DDIU Grouo 11 Dll Internal Group Paging (Group 15) PI15 DDIU Group 12 D12 Internal Group Paging (Group 16) PI16 DDIU Group 13 D13 Internal Group Paging (Group 17) PI17 DDIU Group 14 D14 Internal Group Paging (Groups 02 - 17) PIA DDIU GrouD 15 D15 External Zone Paging (Zone 0) PEO (con timed) 6-8 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-306 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE6-3a (continued) FEATURE CODE FEATURE CODE External Zone Paging (Zone 1) PEI LCR Class 3 LC3 External Zone Paging (Zone 2) PE2 ACD/MIS Call Pick-up APU External Zone Paging (Zone 3) PE3 ACD/MIS Call Be Picked-up ABPU External Zone Paging (Zone 4) PE4 Supervisor External All Paging (Zones 0 - 4) PEA Remote Log-in RLOG All Paging (Group 00, Zones 0 - 4) PAL Off-hook Call Announce OCA Direct Trunk Access DTA Forced Account Code FAC LCR Class 1 LCl Verifiable Account Code VAC LCR Class 2 LC2 Forced Account Code-Toll FAT Do Not Disturb DND Monitor Tone and LCD Display TABLE6-3 (continued) ErrorCodes Program Name: Class of Service Data Block (DCOS) Error Code ERCOS 01 Meaning Invalid Resoonse (0 - 15 is allowed). 6-9 MTL PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-306 FEBRUARY1992 4. Print Class of Service Data Block (Table 6-4) l 4.01 To use the Print Class of Service Data Block (PCOS Program): l l Perform or 3). Enter: When program Enter: the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, PCOS (in response to the OK prompt). an REQ prompt is received after the is loaded: PRT. The COS Data Block will print out in the following format (see Table 6-3a for an explanation of feature codes): COS NO. COSO AAA BBB CCC DDD EEE FFF GGG HHH ill JJJ KKK LLL COS 1 (etc., up to 15) REQ (This prompt will be given at the end of printout.) Enter: w m 19 (to exit program). TABLE 6-4 Procedure - Print Class of Service Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. ITEM If an OK response PROMPT is received, proceed USER ENTRY PCOS OK - DISK LOADINGPRT =Q - EXECUTE =Q NOTES: is: PRT = Outputs = Stop printing Class of Service and return to REQ. 6-10 Data Block. as follows: NOTE PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-307 FEBRUARY 1992 CHAPTER 7 paging zones, or the Expanded Internal Paging Group and all external paging zones. Options that are not assigned to the feature access button may still be accessed by dialing a paging access code. Enter one of the following: INT-Expanded Internal Group Paging (Group 0). EXT-External All Paging (Zones 0 - 4). N-External Paging to Zone N (0 - 4). ALL-Expanded Internal Group Paging and External All Paging. NONE-No Internal or External Paging Access. Al-i-ENDANT/STATION/DSS DATA 1. Attendant Data Block (Table 7-I) 1.01 The Attendant Data Block (DAlT Program) defines one or two attendant consoles in the system and selects the attendant options. Data is entered as follows: REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program loaded. Three responses are possible: NEW-To create a new Data Block. CHG-To alter an existing Data Block. OUT-To delete an existing Data Block. AN0 (Attendant Number)---Selects that is to be assigned. Enter: 0 or 1. has PRI (Incoming Call Priority )-A “Y” response will direct all calls to the attendant console according to the priority defined by the PRl - PR5 prompts. An “N” response will direct all calls to the attendant console on a first-in/first-out priority basis. Enter: Y or N. the console POR (Port Number)-Selects the port that is to be occupied by the console. Enter: For PERCEPTlONe-LO01 for Attendant Console #O. L151 for Attendant Console #I. For PERCEPTION,,-LO01 for Attendant Console #O. LO1 1 for Attendant Console #l. NLPK (Number of Loop Keys)-Indicates quantity of buttons that can be designated Attendant Loop Buttons. _ Enter: 4, 6, or 8. PRl - 5 (Priority 1 - 5, Current)--A “Y” response to the PRI prompt will print the current priority tables. PRl - 5 (Priority 1 - 5, Set)--Defines the incoming call priority. The possible types of calls are: CO, FX, TIE, WAT, OPR, RCL, HLD, TIM, LNl, LN2, INT, SER (Business mode only). Enter: NN or NNN (type of call). the as NOTE: There is no program provided to print out the Attendant Data Bock. NOTE: If the system is operating in the Lodging/ Health Care mode, only four loop buttons can be assigned. LKO (Lockout Allowed?)-A “Y” response will enable the lockout feature, and will not allow the attendant to re-enter a held m button conference. Enter: Y or N. PAG (Page Button)-Assigns the console m button to access either the Expanded Internal Paging Group (Group 0), one or all external 7-1 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE7-1 Procedure - Attendant Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response is received, proceed NOTES: 1. Entries of 6 and 8 are allowed only in the Business mode. 2. Designates the specific kind of paging accessed by the m button. /NT = Expanded Internal Group Paging (Group 0). EXT = External All Paging (Zones 0 - 4). = External Paging to Zone N (0 - 4). N ALL = Expanded Internal Group Paging and External All Paging. NONE = No Internal or External Paging Access. 3. If ‘7”’(yes) is entered, all calls will be directed to the attendant console according defined by the PR1 - PR5 prompts. If “N” (no) is entered, all calls will be directed to console on a first in/first out priority basis. 4. If “Incoming Call Priority” is selected (PI?/ = Y), the current priority table (PR 1 - PR5) up and printed. 5. Used to change the “Incoming Call Priority” tab/es (PRl - PR5). NNN = Type of call WAT, OPR, RCL, HLD, TIM, LNl, LN2, INT, SER[Business mode only]). 7-2 as follows: (continued) to the priority the attendant will be called (CO, FX, T/E, PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-307 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE7-1 (continued) Error Codes Program Name: Attendant Data Block (DAlT) Error Code Meaning ERAT-T 00 A PCB is not equipped in that location. ERATT 01 The PCB is not an NEKU type. ERA-I-T 02 The port is busy. ERAl-f 03 The port has already been assigned to a station or DDIU (REQ = NEW). ERATI- 04 The port has not been assigned (REQ = CHG, OUT). ERAl-F 05 Invalid port number. ERA-I-T 06 The entered access code is not assigned to a paging zone or group. ERA-I-I- 08 Input data was erased because the program was aborted during NEW data entry. ERA-IT 09 Attendant data is not assigned to the input port (REQ = CHG, OUT). ERA-I-T 10 The trunk group is already in this priority group. ERAl-T 11 This is not a valid entry. ERA-I-T 12 The port has already been assigned to a DSS console. ERA-I-T 13 The port has already been assigned to a trunk. ERA-I-T 14 The number of the Attendant cannot be changed. NOTE: There is no program to print out the Attendant Loop Buttons in the Lodging/Health Data Block. 7-3 Care mode PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 FEBRUARY 1992 2. Electronic/Digital (Table 7-2) Telephone Data ten) that the electronic/digital telephone will have. Enter: 1 (for 1 O-button) or 2 (for 20-button). Block COS (Class of Service)-Assigns one of the 16 Classes of Service to the electronic/digital telephone. (Classes of Service are defined in the DCOS Program.) Enter: COS Number (0 - 15). 2.01 The Electronic/Digital Telephone Data Block (DEKT Program) defines all parameters for each electronic/digital telephone. A separate Electronic/ Digital Telephone Data Block must be completed for each electronic/digital telephone in the system. Data is entered as follows: REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program loaded. Three responses are possible: NEW-To create a new Data Block. CHG-To alter an existing Data Block. OUT-To delete an existing Data Block. TEN (Tenant Number)-Assigns the electronic/ digital telephone to one of two possible tenants in the system. Enter: 0 if tenant service is not selected in the DSYS Program (TEN = N). 0 or 1 to indicate the specific tenant if tenant service is selected in the DSYS Program (TEN = Y). has POR (Port Number)-Identifies the hardware location of the electronic/digital telephone circuit that is to be defined. The port number has two parts: PUG (Call Pickup Group)-Assigns the electronic/digital telephone to one of the 32 possible Call Pickup groups. Enter: Group number (0 - 31) or NONE. 1) NEKU/NDKU PCB location: PERCEPTION, -LOO-Lll/Ll&L26(NN). -LOO - L31 (NN). PERCEPTlONe, WTA (Warning Tone Allowed? )-Defines an interruption-protected station. An “N” response will prevent warning tones from being applied to the station. (CWT cannot be assigned if N is entered.) Enter: Y or N. 2) Circuit number on that PCB: 1 - 8 (X). Example: The port number of the 4th circuit on the NEKU/NDKU in position LO1 is L014. Enter: Port number of the electronic/digital telephone (LNNX). CFT(Call Forward toTrunk)-Permits calls tothis station to be forwarded over a trunk to an outside directory number (maximum: 16 digits). Enter: Y or N. NOTES: 1. If the OUT command was given above, the port just defined will be deleted and the next prompt will be REQ. 2. Port L378 cannot be assigned. 3. The NEKU will not support Digital Telephones and the NDKU will not support Electronic telephones. TOL (Toll Restricted Class)-Assigns one of the ten classes of Toll Restriction to the electronic/ digital telephone. Classes 0 - 7 are defined in the Toll Restriction Data Block (DTOL Program). Class 8 is simple toll restriction, restricting when 0 or 1 is dialed as the first digit. NONE defines the electronic/digital telephone as unrestricted. Enter: 0 - 8 or NONE. DKT (Digital Key Telephone)-Defines the type of telephone. A YES answer is to be entered with digital telephones, and a NO answer with nondigital electronic telephones. Enter: Y or N. MTA (Not Used): Enter: N. KS (Number of Button Strips)-Informs the system of the number of feature buttons (groups of HFA (Handsfree Answerback Equipped)-A ‘9”’ response activates the Handsfree Answerback 7-4 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 JANUARY1993 and voice-announce digital telephone. Enter: Y or N. capability DIS (Display Electronic/Digital of this electronic/ Enter: LNNX or NONE. NOTE: The NN indicates the PCB location, the circuit number. Telephone)-A “1” or “2” response activates the LCD display on the electronic/digital telephone (maximum display electronic/digital telephones in the system may equal the total number of allowable stations). Enter: 1, 2, or NONE. (1 = 2000-series Electronic LCD Telephone, 2 = 6000~series Electronic/l OOO-series Digital LCD Telephone, NONE = Not an Electronic/Digital LCD Telephone.) OCA(Off-hookCallAnnounce)-Defineswhether this feature is in automatic or manual mode. When programmed in auto mode, it allows the system to announce an incoming call when the called station is off -hook. If it is in manual mode, the system will let the caller enter an access code or press the feature button before the call interrupts the on-going conversation. Busy tone must be heard (i.e., no call-forwards) to acivate this feature. Enter: A or M. PAG (Paging Group)-Assigns the station to up to four internal paging groups (numbers 0, 2 - 17) or to no paging groups (NONE). Enter: 0, 2 - 17 or NONE. KEY (Key Assignments)-Assigns ture to one of the flexible buttons. 1) the destination for an emergency signal (continuous ringing) when a station goes off-hook and does not dial a number, or does not complete dialing a valid number. The emergency ringdown destination will be signalled when the DPT and LLO timers (from the DSYS program) expire. The destination can be programmed as either a specific station, the attendant, or the system UNA device. (In tenant service, the system will route the RDS call to the assigned tenant when ATT is entered.) The designation of an Emergency Ringdown Station is particularly important in Lodging/Health Care applications. Enter: XXXX = l- - 4-digit station number. AIT = Attendant. UNA = System UNA. NONE = No designation of Emergency Ringdown Station. station with a capability to answer any come in on the ACD trunks, by just telephone handset (without pressing tons) when the telephone rings. For calls, lifting any ACD The number of the button to be defined, followed by a m m. Buttons are numbered 0 - 9 (or 19 for a 20-button electronic/digital telephone), startingfrom the bottom of the vertical button strip (the four buttons below the dialpad have fixed assignments). Following the button number and space, any existing button data will be output. 2) Feature or DN assignments. The possible assignments are as follows: Directory (Station) Number (1, 2, 3, or 4 digits): SCR NNNN XXXX-Single Call Ring l Incoming calls will audibly ring this station. l NNNN = Directory (Station) Number. l XXXX = Hunt number. Enter either the DN to which this DN will hunt or the code for distributed hunt (see below). SCN NNNN XXXX-Single Call, No Ring l Incoming calls will not audibly ring this station (LED flash only). l NNNN = Directory Number. 0 XXXX = Hunt number. Enter either the DN to which this DN will hunt or the code for distributed hunt (see below). the that the butDNs ONLY. Enter: Y or N. OCP (Off-hook Call Announce Port)-Indicates the port that is used for Off-hook a DN or fea- Enter: RDS (Emergency Ringdown Station)-Indicates RSP (Ring State Preselection)-Provides and the X Call Announce. 7-5 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 JANUARY 1993 PVN XXX-Private Line No Ring l Incoming calls will not audibly ring this station (LED flash only). l XXX = TDN assigned in Trunk Data Block. number above. For example: SCR NNN #X. X = Distributed Hunt Group Number (0 - 3). Maximum: 8 stations per group. Data Directory Number Button Assignment: DIU LNNX-Data Port Assignment. Incoming data calls will audibly ring the electronic/digital telephone. NN = PC9 location for NDCU or NMDU PC9 or adjacent port location for NDKU. 0 X = circuit number. 0 An electronic telephone/DDIU-MAT combination will use two station portsone DEKU port and one NDCU or NMDU port. 0 A digital telephone/PDIU-DI combination will use two station ports-one NDKU port and the open incremented adjacent port. Example: Voice = L024, Data = L034. Features: CRG-Account Number (SMDR) MES-Alphanumeric Message ACB-Automatic Callback ADL-Automatic Dialing FAD XXX-Fixed Automatic Dialing CFD-Call Forward CFBY-Call Forward - Busy CFBD-Call Forward - Busy/No Answer CFNA-Call Forward - No Answer CFSB-Call Forward - Busy (System/DID) CFSN-Call Forward - Busy/No Answer (System/DID) PUD-Call Pickup - Directed PUG-Call Pickup Group CWT-Call Waiting DND-Do Not Disturb DIS-Display Date & Time/Elapsed Time FLH-Flash (a 500 ms or 1 second flash on a CO trunk) HNG XX-Hundreds Group SIG LNNX-Manual Signaling (LNNX = port number of electronic/digital telephone to be signaled.) MSG-Message Waiting OVR-Override PEXT-External Paging PINT-Internal Paging PARK-Call Park PRS-Privacy Release RLS-Release RND-Repeat Last Number Dialed SCF-Speaker Cut-off SDS-Speed Dial - System SDC XX-Speed Dial - Station (controller of list xx; xx = 1 - 50.) SDU XX-Speed Dial - Station (user of list XX; xx = 1 - 50.) SSM-Station-to-Station Message SYS-System Night Operation (a m button can be assigned to one attendant-position electronic/digital telephone or DSS console per tenant if an attendant console is not assigned to that tenant.) IMPORTANT NOTE: The NDKU’s eighth circuit cannot be used for Data (PDIU-DI or PDIU-DS). NOTES: 7, The data a) button entry assigns a data port to an electronic/digital telephone port. 2, The data DN is assigned when the data port is assigned (see DDIU Data Block). This must be done before assigning a data port number to an electronic/digital telephone. DRS Data Release-Private CO Lines: PVR XXX-Private Line Ring l Incoming calls will audibly ring this station. l XXX = Trunk Directory Number assigned in Trunk Data Block. NOTE: buttons are used to cause the DDIUlm MAT and PDIU-DI to go back on-hook. 7-6 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-307 JANUARY 1993 UNA-Universal Night Answer VCP XXXX-Voice Page (XXXX = DN to be paged.) ACDS XXXX-ACD Supervisor Line ACDA XXX-ACD Agent Line ASST-Assistance LOG-Log-in/out MONT-Monitor OCA-Off-hook Call Announce STAT-Status Available/Unavailable STRK-Stroke Count ATAP-Agent Monitor CAN-Work Mode Cancel NOTE: The system does not check to verify if two buttons are assigned the same feature. When programming digital telephones (DKT= Y), do NOTassign RND and MSG to feature buttons. They are fixed buttons on the telephone set. KEY-The prompt will be repeated until all entries have been made and the m key is pressed. 7-7 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 JANUARY 1993 TABLE 7-2 Procedure - Electronic/Digital Telephone Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response is received, proceed as follows: ITEM ‘: PROMPT USER ENTRY OK DEKT - DISK LOADING I REQ - I NEW, CHG, OUT Port Number POR LNNX Digital Key Telephone DKT Y or N I I1 l&2 Number of Buttonstrips KS 1 or2 3 Class of Service Group cos o-15 4 Tenant Number I TEN Call Pickup Group I PUG Warning Tone Allowed? I I 0 or 1 I 0 - 31 or NONE 1 -61 WTA Y or N Call Forward to Trunk CFT Y or N Toll Restricted TOL 0-8orNONE Class Not Used Handsfree Answerback Display Electronic/Diqital Equipped? Telephone Emergency Ringdown 1N I HFA I Y or N I DIS 1 1,2, or NONE I I 1-s PA0 0,2-17,0rNONE 9 RDS 1 - 4 digits, ATT, UNA, or NONE (NONE) IO RSP Y or N OCP LNNX or NONE OCA A or M Ring State Preselection Port Off-hook Call Announce Button Assignments (lo-button) I KEY Button Assignments (20-button) I KEY Default values are noted in parentheses I o - 9 [space] Feature I 0 - 19 [space1 Feature (). I 7 mA Station Off-hook Call Announce 5 I Paging Group L NOTE l&2 l11-13 Ill - 13 (continued) NOTES: 1. NN = PCB location. 2. X = circuit number. 3. 1 = 1O-button electronic/dig~tal telephone. 2 = ZO-button electronic/digiital telephone. 4. There are 16 different COS groups, which are defined in the Class of Service Data Block. 5. When RNA calls recall to the Attendant, they will recall to the Attendant (0 or 1) that ORIGINALLY transferred the call. 6. There is a maximum of 32 Call Pickup Groups. 7. Classes 0 - 7 are defined in the Toll Restriction Data Block (DTOL Program). Class 8 = 1 ori restriction. .~ NONE = No Toll Restriction. 8. I= ZOOO-series LCD electronic telephone. 2 = 6000-series electronic or 1OOO/ZOOO-series digital LCD. NONE = Not an LCD electronic/digiital telephone. 9. The four possible paging groups to which an electronic/dgiital telephone can belong are 0, or 2 - 17. NONE indicates that an electronic/digital telephone does not belong to any paging group. There is a maximum of 32 electronic/digiial telephone members for groups 2 - 17 and a maximum of 96 for group 0. 70. The emergency ringdown destination will be signalled when the DPTand LLO timers (from the DSYSprogram) expire. 11. Enter button number followed by a space and then the entry. Button 0 must be the station’s primary DN. See Table 7-2a for possible entries. 12. Button numbers may be entered in any order. The KEY prompt will be repeated untilm is entered. 13. If KS was 1, 0 - 9 will be allowed. If KS was 2, 0 - 19 will be allowed. = Ignore line entered. Stop printing I and return to REQ. 7-8 .I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE7-2a ELECTRONIC/DIGITALTELEPHONEBUTTONASSlGNMENTS DIRECTORY ENTRY NUMBER Single Call Ring SCR Nmm XxXx 1 Single Call No Ring SCN N’NNNXXXX 1 +bx 2 Station Hunt Distributed I ACD/MIS DIRECTORY NUMBER I ACD/MIS Supervisor Line ACD/MIS Agent Line I NOTE DATA DIRECTORY NUMBER I / Data Port Number ENTRY NOTE ACDS XXXX 3 ACDA XXX 4 ENTRY DIU LNNX Data Release I I NOTE 5 DRS PRIVATE CO LINE ENTRY NOTE Private Line Ring PVR XXX 6 Private Line No Ring PVNXXX 6 ENTRY FEATURE Account Number (SMDR) CRG Alphanumeric MES Message NOTE Assistance (ACD) ASS1 Automatic Callback ACB Automatic ADL 7 FAD XXX 8 Dialing Automatic Dialing (Fixed) Call Forward - All Calls CFD Call Forward - Busy CFBY Call Forward - Busy/No Answer CFBD Call Forward - No Answer CFNA Call Forward - Busy (System/DID) CFSB Call Forward - Busy/No Answer (System/DID) CFSN Call Pickup Directed PUD Call Pickup Group PUG Call Waiting CWT Display Date and Time/Elapsed Time DIS 9 (continued) 7-9 1 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE 7-2a (continued) I I FEATURE Do Not Disturb ! ENTRY I DND Flash I 10 Hundreds Group HNG XX 11 Log-in/out (ACD) LOG Manual Signaling I .Off-hook Call Announce I 12 OCA I OVR Paging, External PEXT 13 Paging, internal PINT 14 Call Park Privacy Release PRS Release RLS Repeat Last Number Dialed RND Speaker Cut-off Speed Dial - System SDS Speed Dial - Station (Controller) SDC XX 15 Speed Dial - Station (User) SDU XX 15 Station-to-Station Message Status (Available/Unavailable, SSM ACD) STAT Stroke Count (ACD) System Night Operation STRK - SYS Tap (Agent Monitor) (ACD) ATAP Universal Night Answer 16 UNA Voice Page I I MONT Override I SIG LNNX MSG Monitor (ACD Supervisor) I I FLH Message Waiting I NOTE VCP XXXX 17 Work Mode Cancel (ACD) NOTES: 7:WNNN = Directory Number: l-, 2-, 3-, of 4-digit DNs are allowed if there is no conflict (e.g., 30X cannot be used if 30 is already being used). XXXX = Hunt DN. To remove the present DN, enter NONE. (Also see Station Hunt-Distributed.) 2. Following electronic/digital telephone DN assignment, enter # in place of the usual hunt DN. X = Distributed Hunt Group Number (0 - 3). 3. XXXX = A Supervisor DN. 4. XXX = An Agent Line number (0 - 127). 5. NN = PCB location for the NDClJ or NDMU PCB. X = Circuit Number. 6. XXX = Trunk Directory Number (assigned in Trunk Data Block). 7-10 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-307 FEBRUARY 1992 7. 8. 9. IO. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. There is a maximum of 500 Autodial a buttons per system. XXX = Fixed digits to be dialed (maximum: 16 digits/* = pause). This feature can on/y be assigned to 2000~series electronic/l OOO-series digital LCD telephones. The Flash button causes a 500 ms or a 1-second flash to a CO trunk. XX = Leading one or two digits (1 - 9) designating the Hundreds Group to be activated on an associated DSS console (switched operation only). LNNX = The port number of the electronic/digital telephone to be signaled. External Paging is used to access External Paging Zones (0 - 4). Internal Paging is used to access Internal Paging Groups (0, 2 - 17). SDC XX makes the station a controller of Station Speed Dial list XX (XX = 01 - 50). SDU XX makes the station a user of Station Speed Dial list XX (XX = 01 - 50). A System Night Button m can be assigned to one attendant-position electronic/digital telephone per tenant if an attendant console is not assigned to that tenant. XXXX = The DN of the station that is to receive a Voice Page. = Ignore line entered. = Backspace. = Stop printing and return to REQ. = Exit program. TABLE7-2 (continued) ErrorCodes I Program Name: Electronic Telephone Error Code I Meaning EREKT 00 ~. Data Block (DEKT) A PCB is not equipped at that location. EREKT 01 1 The PCB is an NSTU type (not an NEKU/NDKU). I 1 EREKT 02 1 The port is busy (REQ = CHG or OUT). EREKT 03 I The port has already been assigned to a station, DSS console, or DDIU (REQ = NEW). I EREKT 04 1 1 was entered, but tenant service was not enabled in the Svstem Data Block. EREKT 05 1 was entered, but Attendant 1 was not programmed EREKT 06 Wrong button number (over permitted (no Attendant Data Block). button strip number). EREKT 07 Assigned port LNNX is not assigned as a station port (Manual Signaling).-. EREKT 08 1 The maximum number of m buttons has already been assigned (maximum: EREKT 09 PUG was entered, but a Call Pickup Group number is not assigned. EREKT 10 The DN conflicts with existing DN. EREKT 11 510 DNs have already been assigned in the system. The DN has already been assigned to its maximum Secondary is 95). number of appearances EREKT 13 “Call Pickup Group number = NONE” was entered, but m EREKT 14 The next hunt DN is not assigned. EREKT 15 A DN has already been assigned to the port. IEREKT12 1 500). 1 EREKT 16 1 The input DN has already been assigned (Primary is 1, button has already been assigned. to this station. EREKT 17 The input data was erased because the program was aborted during a NEW data entry. EREKT 18 The port is not assigned. EREKT 19 The port is assianed to an NSTU PCB. 7-11 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE 7-2 (continued) Error Codes Program Name: Electronic Error Code 1 Telephone Data Block (DEKT) Meaning -1 1 EREKT 20 1 The SDC has already been assigned to this Speed Dial. 1 EREKT 21 1 The input port is not an NEKUINDKU port (SIG LNNX). EREKT 22 PVR NNN/PVN NNN is entered, but trunk DN NNN has not been assigned. EREKT 23 The input DN is a trunk DN (VCP NNN Hunt DN). EREKT 24 32 DNs have already been assigned to the Distributed I-EREKT 26 TThe input port conflicts with the electronic/digital 1 EREKT27 The station is assigned as a Lodging/Health 1m buttons can be assigned. EREKT 28 Hunt Group. telephone’s port (KEY x DIU LNNX). Care guest room telephone, I therefore only fixed Autodial (ADL) digits exceed the maximum of 16. 1 EREKT 30 1 The input port is not an NDCU/NDKU 1 EREKT 31 (The m I open port (KEY x DIU LNNX). I button has already been assigned to another button. I EREKT 32 1 The associated DIU is busy. -1 EREKT 33 MES is set but the station is not DIS = 2. EREKT 34 DIS was entered, but DIS does not equal 1. EREKT 40 The m EREKT 41 More than two digits were entered as station HNG XX. EREKT 42 The Paging Group number is out of range. It should be 0 or 2 - 17. EREKT 43 The group to be assigned is already full (maximum maximum member number of Group 0 is 96). button has already been assigned in the system once. member number of each Group 2 - 17 is 32; I EREKT 44 The same Group number was entered twice. I EREKT 45 1 More than 4 (maximum) Paging Groups have been entered. I I ---1 EREKT 47 The electronic/digital can be deleted. EREKT 48 The m button cannot be set because the station is not an attendant-position telephone (DSD2 Data Block). EREKT 49 The port has already been assigned to a trunk. EREKT 50 telephone’s assigned DSS console must be electronic/digital The entry should be AIT (0 and/or 1 is not required). I EREKT 51 The m button or m button has already been assigned to another button/station. EREKT 52 1 The Agent Line number conflicts with an existino line-number. EREKT 53 The input DN is not a Supervisor DN. EREKT 54 No NOCU is equipped at that location. EREKT 55 A PCB other than an NEKWNDKU EREKT 56 The input port has already been assigned. EREKT 57 The input data is different from the old data. EREKT 58 The port has been assigned to the slot. has already been assigned to an OCA port. I EREKT 59 1 An ACD Supervisor DN is not allowed to hunt to another DN. 7-12 I I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-307 JANUARY1993 3. Standard Telephone Data Block (Table 7-3) N (bridging is not allowed-privacy ists with an LED indication). The Standard Telephone Data Block (DSTT Program) defines all parameters for a given standard telephone. One Data Block must be completed for each standard telephone in the system. Data is entered as follows: ex- 3.01 REQ (Request)--indicates that the program loaded. Three responses are possible: NEW-To create a new Data Block. CHG-To alter an existing Data Block. OUT-To delete an existing Data Block. NOTE: If Station enter “N. ” COS (Class of Group Services)--Assigns one of the 16 available Classes of Service to the telephone. (The Classes of Service are defined in the DCOS Program.) Enter: COS Number 0 - 15). has TEN (Tenant Number)-Assigns the station to one of the two possible tenants in the system. Enter: 0 if tenant service is not selected in the System Data Block. (TEN = N.) 0 or 1 to specify tenant, if tenant service is selected in the System Data Block. (TEN = Y.) NOTE: If OUT is entered, then only the port number (PO/?) needs to be entered below. No other entry is necessary. POR (Port Number)-Identifies the hardware location of the STT circuit that is to be defined. The port number has two parts: PUG (Call Pickup Group)-Assigns the station to one of the 32 possible pickup groups. Enter: Group number (0 - 31) or NONE. 1) NSTU PCB location: PERCEPTlONe -LOO-Lli/L15-L26(NN). PERCEPTlONe, -LOO - L31 (NN). HNT (Hunt Number)-Defines the station to which this DN hunts. Enter: Next DN in hunt group (1 - 4 digits). For Station Hunt-Distributed: #X. (X = Distributed hunt group number, [0 31; Maximum: 8 stations per group.) NONE: No hunt group assignment. 2) Circuit number on that PCB: 1 - 8 (X). For example: The port number of the fifth circuit on the NSTU in position’L02 is L025. Enter: Port Number of station (LNNX). NOTES: 1. If the OUTcommand wasgivenabove, the port just defined will be deleted and the next prompt will be REQ. 2. Port L318 cannot be assigned. DLG (Dialing Type)-Defines the type of dialing, if any, to be used by the station. Enter: DIP for dial pulse. TON for DTMF. MNL XXXX for Manual Line to attendant or a DN. (XXXX = ATTO, ATTl, or DN [-I - 4 digits].) DN (Directory Number)-Defines the directory number (station number) of the station. Enter: DN (1, 2, 3, or 4 digits). SMX (Station Set Mix)-When I Set Mix is not desired, SDL (Speed Dial List)-Assigns the DN that was entered after the DN prompt is also programmed as a secondary DN(s) on an electronic/digital telephone(s), bridging is possible between the telephones. Enter: Y (bridging is automatically established without a warning tone-i.e., no privacy.) or... one of the 50,l Onumber speed dial lists for use at this station. Enter: SDC XX-Makes the station a controller of list number XX. (XX = 1 - 50.) SDU XX-Makes the station list number XX. (XX = 1 - 50.) NONE-No list assigned. 7-13 a user of PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 JANUARY1993 list number XX. (XX = 1 - 50.) NONE-No list assigned. tinuous ringing) when a station goes off-hook, but does not complete dialing a valid number before the Line Lockout Timeout period elapses. The destination can be programmed as either a specific station, an attendant, orthe system UNA device. (In tenant service, the system will route the RDS call to the assigned tenant, when ATT is entered.) The designation of an Emergency Ringdown Station is particularly important in Lodging/Health Care applications. Enter: XXXX = l- - 4-digit station number. ATT = Attendant. UNA = System UNA. NONE = No designation of Emergency Ringdown Station. WTA (Warning Tone Allowed?)-Defines an interruption-protected station. An “N” response will prevent warning tones from being applied to the station. Enter: Y or N. CFT (Call Forward to Trunk)-Permits calls to this station to be forwarded over a trunk to an outside directory number (maximum: 16 digits). Enter: Y or N. TOL (Toll Restriction Class)-Assigns one of the ten Toll Restriction classes to the station. Classes 0 - 7 are defined in the Toll Restriction Data Block (DTOL Program). Class 8 is simple toll restriction; restricting either 0 or 1 as the first digit. NONE defines the station as unrestricted. Enter: 0 - 8 or NONE. MWL (Message Waiting Lamp)-Defines tion that is equipped with a Message Lamp. Enter: Y or N. RDS (Emergency the destination OCA (Off-hook Call Announce)-Defines whether this feature is in automatic or manual mode. When programmed in auto mode, it allows the system to announce an incoming call when the station is off-hook. If it is in manual mode, the system will let the caller enter an access code before the call interrupts the ongoing conversation. Busy tone must be heard (i.e., no callforwards) to activate this feature. Enter: A or M. a staWaiting Ringdown Station)-Indicates for an emergency signal (con- 7-14 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-307 JANUARY1993 TABLE7-3 Procedure - Standard Telephone Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response PROMPT ITEM proceed as follows: USER ENTRY DS-IT OK is received, NOTE JY-IAl, - DISK LOADING -Q NEW, CHG, OUT POR LNNX DN 1 - 4 digits Station Mix SMX Y or N Class of Service cos o- 15 4 Tenant Number TEN 0 or 1 5 Call Pickup Group PUG 0 - 31 or NONE 6 Hunt number HNT 1 - 4 digits, #X, or NONE 7 Dialing Type DLG DIP, TON, MNL XXXX 8 Speed Dial List SDL SDC XX, SDU XX, or NONE 9 Warning Tone Allowed? WTA Y or N 10 Call Forward to Trunk CFT Y or N Toll Restriction Class TOL 0-8orNONE Message Waiting Lamp MWL Y or N Emergency Ringdown Station RDS 1 - 4 digits, ATT, UNA, or NONE Off-hook Call Announce OCA AorM -JQ Repeat program, if necessary Port Number Directory Number I I NOTES: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. l&2 I 3 11 I I (continued) NN = PCB location.X = Circuit number. 4-, 3-, 2-, or l-digit DNs are allowed if there is no conflict (e.g., 30X is not allowed if 30 is used). There are 16 different COS groups which are defined in the DCOS Data Block. When RNA calls recall to the Attendant, they will recall to the Attendant (0 or 1) that ORIGINALLY transferred the call. There is a maximum of 32 Call Pickup Groups. The number to which this DN hunts. #X = Station Hunt-Distributed, X = Distributed hunt group number (0 - 3), Maximum 8 members per group. NONE = No hunt. DIP = Dial Pulse. TON = DTMF. MNL XXXX = Manual Line Direct to DN (1 - 4 digits), ATT 0, or A777. SDC XX makes the station a controller of Station Speed Dial List XX (XX = 01 - 50). SDU XX makes the station a user of Station Speed Dial List XX (XX = 01 - 50). Y = Warning tones applied (call waiting feature activated). N = No warning tones applied (camp-on feature activated). 7-15 I . I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 JANUARY 1993 Classes 0 - 7 are defined in the Toll Restriction Class 8 = Dia/m or 0 restriction. NONE = No Toll Restriction. Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. Data Block (DTOL Program). TABLE 7-3 (continued) Error Codes Program Error Code Name: Standard Telephone 1 Data block (DSlT) Meanina ERSTA 00 No PCB is equipped at that location. ERSTA 01 The PCB is an NEKU type (not an NSTU). ERSTA 02 Port is busy (REQ = CHG, OUT). ERSTA 03 Port has already been assigned to a station, DSS console, or DDIU. ERSTA 05 1 was entered, but tenant service was not enabled in the System Data Block. ERSTA 06 1 was entered, but ATT #l was not programmed ERSTA 09 1 (no Attendant Data Block). Unknown input. ERSTA 10 DN conflicts with existing DN. ERSTA 11 510 DNs have already been assigned in the system. ERSTA 12 DN has already been assigned to the maximum number of appearances ERSTA 13 Hot Line DN does not exist. ERSTA 14 1 Next Hunt DN does not exist. ERSTA 17 MNL 0 was entered, but ATO ERSTA 18 MNL 1 was entered, but ATT1 is not equipped. ERSTA 19 MNL 0 was entered, but this station is in tenant group #l. ERSTA 20 1 I (96). is not equipped. MNL 0 was entered, but this station is in tenant group #2. ERSTA 21 Input data was erased because the program was aborted during NEW data entry. ERSTA 22 The port is not assigned. ERSTA 23 Another type of data (electronic telephone, ERSTA 24 SDC has already been assigned to the input list. ERSTA 25 I etc.) is assigned to the input port. The next input hunt DN is a trunk DN. ERSTA 26 The Distributed Hunt Group has already been assigned its maximum member number (8), ERSTA 27 invalid Toll Class Number (0 - 8). ERSTA 28 The first digit does not match with RM PFX, or the second digit conflicts with another DN or access code. ERSTA 29 The port has already been assigned to a trunk. ERSTA 30 The entry should be ATT (0 and/or 1 not required). ERSTA 31 Port has already been assigned as an announcement 7-16 port. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 FEBRUARY 1992 4. Print Station Data Block (Table 7-4) 4.01 To use the Print Station Program): DNALL-All Electronic/Digital Telephone and Station Data Blocks will be output in numerical order of DN (lowest to highest). For electronic/digital telephones, the prime DN will be used. Data Block (PSDB Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PSDB (in response to the OK prompt). After the program is loaded and the REQ prompt is received, enter one of the following commands: l l DNXXXX-The Data Block for DN XXXX will be output. If it is a multiple appearance DN, then all Data Blocks in which it appears will be output. EKTALL-All Electronic/Digital Telephone Data Blocks will be output in order of prime DN (lowest first). PORALL-All Electronic/Digital Telephone and Standard Telephone Data Blocks will be output in numerical order of port numbers (lowest number first). ST-TALL-All order of DN be the same DSTT data PORNNX-The Data Block for port NNX will be output (NNX = port number without L). PORVAC-A output. list of all unassigned SIT Data blocks will be output in (lowest first). The output format will as the input format in the DEKT and input programs. ports will be TABLE 7-4 Procedure - Print Station Data Block Authorization Procedure ITEM must be completed. If an OK response PROMPT is received, proceed as follows: USER ENTRY NOTE PSDB OK - DISK LOADING REQ - EXECUTE REQ t 1' I 1 (continued) NOTES: 1. The following PORALL = PORNNX = PORVAC = DNALL = DNXXXX EKTALL SmALL responses are possible: Outputs all Station Data Blocks in numerical order of ports (lowest first). Outputs port NNX data. Outputs a list of all unassigned ports. Outputs all Station Data Blocks in numerical order (lowest first) by DN (prime DN for electronic/digital telephones). = Outputs DNXXXX data. If it is a multiple appearance DN, then all Data Blocks in which it appears will be output. (XXXX = DN number, 1 - 4 digits.) = Outputs all Electronic/Digital Telephone Data Blocks in orderofprime DN (lowest first). Outputs all Standard Telephone Data Blocks in order of DN (lowest first). = Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. 7-17 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE 7-4 (continued) Error Codes Program Error 1 Code Name: Print Station Data Block (PSDB) Meaning 1 ERPST 00 The input PCB number or circuit number is out of range. ERPST 01 The inout DN does not exist. ERPST 02 1 The input port is not assigned to an electronic or a 500/2500-series ERPST 03 A manual signaling port does not exist. ERPST 04 The input DN is not assigned to an electronic/digital telephone. 7-18 telephone. telephone or to a 500/2500-series PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 FEBRUARY1992 5. Print Call Pickup Groups (Table 7-5) 5.01 To use the Print Call Pickup Groups (PCPG Program): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PCPG (in response to the OK prompt). l After the program is loaded and an REQ prompt is received, enter one of the following commands: ALL-All Call Pickup groups will be output. DNXXXX-The number of containing DNXXXX will Example: #l REQ DN205 GRPOO #2 ALL REQ GRPOO xxx xxx xxx XXX GRPOl xxx GRP02 xxx the Call Pickup be output. xxx xxx xxx etc. xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx group xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx TABLE7-5 Procedure - Print Call Pickup Groups Authorization Procedure must be completed. ITEM If an OK response PROMPT is received, proceed USER ENTRY as follows: NOTE PCPG OK - DISK LOADING 1 REQ - EXECUTE - NOTES: I. The following responses are possible: ALL = Outputs all Call Pickup Groups (listed by DN). DNXXXX = Lists the numbers of all Call Pickup Groups containing DNXXXX. Error Codes Program Name: Error Code Print Call Pickup Groups (PCPG) 1 Meaning i 1 invalid rewonse. 1 ERPCP 01 1 The input DN does not exist. I I 7-19 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 FEBRUARY1992 6. Print Hunting Arrangements (Table ALL-All 7-6) l 6.01 To use the Print Hunting Arrangements (PHNT Program): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PHNT (in response to the OK prompt). l When an REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded, enter the following command: hunting sequences will be output. The output format will be as in the following examples: REQ ALL 223-224-225 HNT HNT 242-243 250-25 l-252 HNT etc. TABLE 7-6 Procedure - Print Hunting Arrangements Authorization Procedure must be completed. I TiiOiPT ITEM If an OK response 1 USER ENTRY proceed as follows: i NOTE ~~ PHNT OK - DISK LOADING - 1 ALL =Q t is received, - EXECUTE 1 =Q NOTES: 7. The following responses are possible: ALL = Outputs a// hunting sequences (listed by DN). Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. - Error Codes Program Error Code &PHT 00 Name: 1 Print Hunting List (PHNT) Meaning The input DN does not exist. I 7-20 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 FEBRUARY 1992 PAG N-All 7. Print Paging Group Data Block (Table 7-7) 7.01 To use the Print Paging (PPAG Program): l l Group longing to output in grammed, group 00): PAGING Data Block Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PPAG (in response to the OK prompt). After the program has loaded and the REQ prompt has been received, enter one of the following commands: electronic/digital telephone ports bethe indicated paging group N will be the order in which they were proin the format shown below (for paging GROUP 00 LNNX LNNX LNNX PAGALL-All assigned paging groups and their electronic telephone members will be output in the order in which they were programmed. TABLE 7-7 Procedure - Print Paging Group Data Block Authorization Procedure ITEM must be completed. If an OK response PROMPT is received, proceed USER ENTRY OK as follows: NOTE PPAG - DISK LOADING -Q - EXECUTE - 1 REQ 1 NOTES: 1. The following responses are possible: PAGN = Outputs all electronic/digital telephone ports belonging to the indicated paging group N in the order in which they were programmed. telephone ports belonging to the assigned paging PAGALL = Outputs all electronic/digital. groups in the order in which they were programmed, /snore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. .. 7-21 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 FEBRUARY1992 8. DSS Console Data Block (Table 7-8) NOTE: 1. Electronic DSS consoles are assigned to the NDSU PCB at port locations CNNX or LNNX. Digital DSS consoles are assigned to the NDKU PCBatportlocations CNNXor LNNX. 2. When using8 DDSSconsoles on one NDKU PCB, program the first four DDSSs on circuits I, 3, 5 and 7 on fhe NDKU PCB. Program the second four DDSSs on circuits 1,3,5and7on theadjacentslotnextto the NDKU PCB. 8.01 The DSS Console Data Block (DDSS Program) is used to assign both electronic and digital DSS consoles. A maximum of eight electronic/digital DSS consoles can be assigned. Each DSS console must be assigned to an electronic/digital telephone and up to two consoles may be assigned to each electronic/digital telephone. Each console has 60 programmable buttons, which may be programmed as either fixed or switched direct station select (DN) buttons or as feature access buttons. Any electronic/ digital telephone feature, except those requiring a speech path, can be programmed onto a DSS console button (see Table 7-8a). Data for this program is entered as follows: REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program loaded. Three responses are possible: NEW-To create a new Data Block. CHG-To alter an existing Data Block. OUT-To delete an existing Data Block. DDSS (Digital DSS)-Identifies if the DSS Console assigned is a digital or non-digital DSS. Enter: Y (for digital) or N (for electronic). SPT (Station Port)-Designates the electronic/ digital telephone station that is to be associated with the DSS console. Enter: Port number of station (LNNX). has F/S (Fixed or Switched Operation)-Defines the operation of DSS button assignment on the console. Fixed assignment (F) means that each DSS console button is permanently associated with a singlestation DN. Switchedassignment (S) means that each DSS console button is variably assigned and can be changed by a Hundreds Group button. For example, when a Hundreds Group button ofi is pressed, switched DN keys 00 - 09 become buttons 200 - 209. When a Hundreds Group button of B is pressed, these same buttons become buttons 300 - 309. When an electronic/ digital telephone has two associated DSS consoles, one may be assigned as switched and one may be assigned as fixed. However, there can be no mixture of switched/fixed functions on the same console. Enter: F or S. NOTE: If OUT is entered, then only the port number (POR) needs to be entered below. No other en try is necessary. NBR (DSS NumberkDefines the number of the DSS console in the system. There is a maximum of eight consoles per system. Enter: DSS number (0 - 7). POR (Port Number)-Identifies the hardware location of the DSS console circuit that is to be defined (CNNX/LNNX). The port number has two parts, which are each noted as follows: 1) NN designates the location of the PCB on which the DSS console circuit is installed: PERCEPTION,: COO - CO1 or LOO - Lli/ L15 - L26. CNNX:X=l-4;LNNX:Xz 1, 3, 5, 7. PERCEPTION,: LOO - L31. LNNX:X=1,3,5,7. NOTE: hisprompt wilonlyappearwhen NEWis entered in response to REQ. To change a programmed DSS console from Fixed/Switched, the console must be deleted and then reprogrammed 2) X designates the DSS console’s associated circuit number. Enter: Port number of the DSS console (CNNWLNNX). KEY (DSS Console Button)-Defines the various buttons on the DSS console. Each button is assigned either to a specific DN (for fixed operation), to a two-digit number (for switched 7-22 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 FEBRUARY 1992 operation), or to a specific feature. When assigning or deleting data from DSS console buttons, data can be assigned/deleted in groups. Additionally, data that is assigned to one DSS console may be duplicated either entirely or partially (either specific buttons or columns of buttons) onto another DSS console by using range programming functions. To program a DSS console button, perform oneof the following operations: stations will include the starting station number that is entered, and each subsequent station within the indicated range. The operation of these assignments will depend on whether the DSS console is programmed as fixed or switched. For example, in switched DN assignment, a data input of 10 19 30 will assign DNs 30 - 39 to DSS console buttons IO - 19. In fixed DN assignment, a data input of 00 59 200 will assign DNs 200 - 259 to DSS console buttons 0 - 59. Enter: AUT L M XX or XXX. 1) Assign a DN: For a fixed button, enter the number of the button being defined (m = 0 59, followed by a space, *, and the station DN (N, NN, NNN, or NNNN). For a switched button, enter the number of the button being defined, a space, #, and the last two digits of the station DN (NN). The digit preceding these lower digits will be determined by Hundreds Group buttons. Enter: m l N (NN, NNN, or NNNN) (for Fixed operation). m #NN (for Switched operation). 4) Duplicate a Complete DSS Console Button Arrangement: This option will duplicate the entire button arrangement of one DSS console onto another DSS console. Enter: DUP M. (M = The number [0 - 71 of the console that is to be duplicated entirely.) 5) Duplicate a Column of DSS Console Buttons: This option will duplicate a complete column of assigned DSS console buttons (X) onto another DSS console (Y). Console button columns are numbered 0 - 5, from left to right on the DSS console. Enter: DUP MX Y. (M = The number of the console being copied. X = The column of the DSS console being copied. Y = The column of the DSS console to which the copy will be applied.) --., NOTE: There cannot be a mixture of switched/fixed buttons on the same console. 2) Assign a Feature: Enter the number of the button being defined, followed by a space and the mnemonic of the feature. All electronic/digital telephone features are available to a DSS console arrangement, except those requiring a speech path (DIU, DRS, SCR, SCN, PVR, and PVN). Features that are available for DSS assignment are listed in Table 7-8a. Enter: m Feature. (m = button number [0 - 591.) 6) Duplicate Selected Buttons: This option will duplicate a series of buttons (YY thru ZZ) from one console (M) to the console being programmed. Enter: DUP MXX YY ZZ. (M = Number of the console being copied. XX = The first button on the console that is to be programmed. YY = Starting range button of the console being copied. zz = Ending range button of the console being copied.) 3) Range Assignment : This entry allows a consecutive range of directory numbers to be simultaneously assigned to DSS console buttons. Ranges are entered by using a format which indicates the starting point (L) and the ending point (M) of the button range (L must be less than M), and the starting station DN to be programmed (XX, XXX, xxxx [2- - 4-digit DNs]). The programmed 7-23 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE7-8 Procedure - DSS Console Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response is received, proceed as follows: m #NN 7 m Feature 8 AUT L M XX (XXX, XXXX) 9 DUP M 10 DUP MX Y 11 DUP MXX YY ZZ 12 (continued) NOTES: 1. A maximum of eight DSS consoles may be assigned to each system. Up to two consoles may be assigned to a single electronic/digital telephone. N = 0 - 7. 2. CNNx/LNNX represents the port assigned to the DSS console. PERCEPTlONe: COOXZOlX or LOOX - L 1 lx/L 15X - L26X. CNNX: X = 1 - 4; LNNX: X = 1, 3, 5, 7. PERCEPTIONex: LOOX - L31X. LNNX: X= 1, 3, 5, 7. 3. Identifies DSS console as: digital = Y or electronic = N. 4. LNNX represents the port of the station associated with the DSS console. PERCEPTION,: LOOX - L 1 lx/L 15X - L26X. PERCEPTIONex: LOOX - L31X. 5. When an electronic/digital telephone is assigned to two consoles, both may be switched/fixed or one maybe switched and one maybe fixed. However, there cannot be a mixture of switched/fixed functions on the same console. 6. Used to assign a fixed DN to a DSS console button (m = button number; N = station DN). 7. Used to assign a switched DN to a DSS console button (m = button number; NN = last two digits of station DN). 8. Used to assign a feature to a DSS console button. See Table 7-8a for a list of available features. 9. Used to assign a range of numbers to a single console. L (00 - 59) = Starting button of range. (L must be less than M.) M (00 - 59) = Ending button of range. XX, XXX = Starting DN to be programmed. 7-24 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE7-8 (continued) 10. Used to duplicate an entire DSS console button arrangement, M = number of the DSS console be copied (0 - 7). 11. Used to duplicate a row of DSS console buttons to another console. = Number of the DSS console being copied. M (0 - 7) x (0 - 5) = Row of the DSS console being copied. = Row of the DSS console to which the copy will be applied. Y (0 - 5) 12. Used to duplicate specific buttons from one console to another. = Number of the DSS console being copied. M (0 - 7) XX(0 - 5) = Starting button on the DSS console being programmed. YY (0 - 5) = Starting button of the range to be copied. ZZ (0 - 5) = Ending button of the range to be copied. = /snore line entered. 13. = Backspace. = Stop printing and return to REQ. 7-25 to PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-307 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE 7-8a AVAILABLE FEATURES FOR DSS BUTTON ASSIGNMENT FEATURE Account Number (SMDR) Alphanumeric I Message ENTRY I CRG I MES Assistance (ACD) AS.9 Automatic Callback AC6 Automatic Dialing, Flexible Automatic Dialing, Fixed NOTE I FAD XXX 1 1 CFD Call Forward - All Calls Call Forward - Busy I CFBY Call Forward - Busy/No Answer CFBD Call Forward - No Answer CFNA Call Forward - Busy (System/DID) CFSN I Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Group Display Date and Time/Elapsed PUG Time DIS 2 DND Do Not Disturb External Zone Paging Flash FLH 3 Hundreds Group HNG XX 4 Internal Group Paging PINT Log-in/out (ACD) Manual Signaling SIG LNNX Message Waiting MSG Monitor (ACD Supervisor) MONT Off-hook Call Announce OCA Override OVR Call Park PARK Privacy Release PRS Release RLS Repeat Last Number Dialed RND Speaker Cut-off SCF Speed Dial - System SDS Speed Dial - Station (Controller) SDC XX 5 6 (con timed) 7-26 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-307 JANUARY1993 TABLE7-8a (continued) AVAILABLE FEATURES FORDSSBUTTONASSIGNMENT FEATURE I :--.+ ENTRY Speed Dial - Station (User) SDU XX Station-to-Station SSM Message Status (Available/Unavailable) (ACD) I STAT Stroke Count (ACD) STRK System Night Operation SYS Tap (Agent Monitor) (ACD) ATAP Universal Night Answer UNA Voice Page VCP Work Mode Cancel (ACD) CAN NOTE 6 I 7 NOTES: 1. There is a maximum of 500 Autodial buttons per system. 2. This feature can only be assigned to 2000series electronic/l boo-series digital LCD telephones. 3. The Flash button causes a 500 ms or a i-second flash to a CO trunk. 4. XX = The higher two digits of the station DN (00 - 99). 5. LNNX = The port number of the electronic/digital telephone to be signaled. 6, SDC XX makes the station a controller of list #XX. SDU XX makes the station a user of list #XX. Maximum: 50, lo-number Speed Dial-Station lists (XX = 1 - 50). 7. Only ONE= button can be assignedper SYSTEM when an attendant console is not assigned. Them button can ONLY be assigned to an attendant-position electronic/digital telephone or to a DSS console assigned to an attendant-position electronic/digital telephone. -. 7-27 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 JANUARY 1993 TABLE 7-8 (continued) Error Codes Program Name: DSS Console Error Code A PCB is not equipped ERDSS 01 The port has already been assigned (REQ = NEW). ERDSS 02 The wrong button number was entered. I in that location. The input DSS console or feature button conflicts with the existing button. ERDSS 04 The PCB is not an NDSU/NDKU. ERDSS 05 The port is not assigned (REQ = CHG, OUT). ERDSS 06 The port is busy (REQ = CHG, OUT). ERDSS 07 1 An electronic/digital ERDSS08 1 Two DSS have already been assigned to the electronic/digital telephone telephone. The start button number is larger than the end button number (DUP). ERDSS 10’ Them button or feature button conflicts with an existing button (DUP). ERDSS 11 The m button has already been assigned in this tenant. ERDSS 12 The input port cannot be disabled. ERDSS 13 The wrong button parameter was entered. I I has already been assigned to the PCB. ERDSS 09 ERDSS 14 I Meaning ERDSS 00 ERDSS 03 1 Data Block (DDSS) The input port is not an electronic/digital telephone I port (SIG LNNX). I ERDSS 15 A station port (SPT) was entered, but the DSS console has already been assigned to the PCB. ERDSS 16 The start button number is larger than the end button number (AUT). ERDSS 17 The button data does not exist. ERDSS 18 1 The type of button assignment (Fixed/Switched) is different from the master DSS console. ERDSS 19 m button is set, but station is not set (DIS = 1). ERDSS 20 m ERDSS 21 The ERDSS 22 The input DN is a trunk DN (VCP NNN). ERDSS 23 This SDC has already been assigned. ERDSS 24 A m ERDSS 25 The maximum number of m ERDSS 26 Too many digits have been assigned to ADL (maximum = 16). ERDSS 27 Fixed dialing digits cannot be assigned to m ERDSS 28 The m ERDSS 31 The port has already been assigned to OCA. button is set, but station is not set (DIS = 2). port must be assianed to a COO or CO1 location. button has been entered, but a Call Pickup Group has not been assigned. buttons (500) has already been assigned. buttons. Assign these digits to m button is set, but the station is not an attendant-position 7-28 electronic/digital buttons. telephone. 1 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-307 FEBRUARY1992 9. Print DSS Console Data Block (Table PORCNNX (or PORLNNX)-All data will be output. 7-9) 9.01 To use the Print DSS Console Data Block (PDSS Program): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PDSS (in response to the OK prompt). l After the program has loaded and the REQ prompt is received: Enter one of the following commands: PORVAC-A output. CNNX (or LNNX) list of all unassigned ports will be STACNNX (or STALNNX)-All data regarding the station that is associated with the DSS console (installed at either CNNX or LNNX) will be output. DSSNN-All DSS console switched DN assignments (#NN = the last two digits of station numbers) will be output. PORALL-All DSS console Data Blocks will be output in numerical order of ports (lowest.first). TABLE7-9 Procedure Authorization Print DSS Console Data Block Procedure must be completed. ITEM If an OK response PROMPT is received, USER ENTRY proceed as follows: NOTE PDSS OK - DISK LOADING 1 =Q I - EXECUTE 1 REP NOTES: 1. The folio wing responses are possible: PORALL = Outputs all DSS console Data Blocks in numerical order of ports (lowest first). PORCNNX (or PORLNNX) = Outputs all CNNX (or LNNX) data. PORVAC = Outputs a list of all unassigned ports (COO/CO1 slots only). STACNNX (or STALNNX) = Outputs allstation data that is associated with CNNX DSS consoles (or LNNX DSS consoles). DSSNN = Outputs all DSS console switched DN assignments (#NN = lower two digits of station numbers). = Ignore line entered. = Backspace. = Stop printing and return to REQ. = Exit program. 7-29 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-308 JANUARY 1993 CHAPTER 8 MESSAGE 1. Message Center 1.01 The Message Program) identifies and its location. will allow internal these ports.) DTMF signaling to CENTER DATA Data Block (Table Center Data Block the type of Message (DMCD Center REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program loaded. Two responses are possible: NEW-To create a new Data Block. CHG-To alter an existing Data Block. MWCO (Message Center of Message Center. Enter: MC (Message Mail). #0)-Identifies Center) NOTE: If using a Toshiba INTOUCH Digital Voice Messaging System, do not make any entries for the MDNO and MDNI prompts. Press the key, 8-1) q has DSCO (Disconnect Code)-Defines the disconnect code of the voice mail equipment for Message Center #O. (This prompt will only appear when MWCO =VM.) This disconnect code is sent to voice mail equipment for disconnect before the voice mail timeout occurs, and it must match the code that is programmed in the voice mail svstem. Enter: XXXX or NONE. the type or VM (Voice MWCI (Message Center #I )-Identifies the type of Message Center. (This prompt will only appear if TEN = Y in the DSYS Data Block.) Enter: MC (Message Center) or VM (Voice Mail). DSCI (Disconnect Code)--Defines the disconnect code of the voice mail equipment for Message Center #1. (This prompt will only appear when MWCl = VM.) This disconnect code is sent to voice mail equipment before the voice mail timeout occurs, and it must match the code that is programmed in the voice mail system. Enter: XXXX or NONE. MDNO (Message Center #0 DN)-Identifies directory numbers of Message Center #O. An “A” will follow the MDNO prompt and any entries made will be added. To delete a port, press the carriage return (m key. The system will then prompt “D” and any entries made will be deleted. Enter: 1 - 4 digits for each DN, or ATTO. (ATT0 or electronic/digital telephone DN is valid only if MWCO = MC. If MWCO = VM, then up to 32 standard telephone [NSTUJ port DNs can be entered. This will allow internal DTMF signaling to these ports.) NM0 (Toshiba Voice Messaging #O)-If using a Toshiba INTOUCH or VP Digital Voice Messaging System, enter up to 32 directory numbers (NSTU ports) that will be connected to the INTOUCH or VP system. This provides enhanced integration of the PERCEPTIONehex and INTOUCH or VP systems. Following the NM0 prompt, the PERCEPTlONe or PERCEPTION,, system will prompt an “A.” Any entries made will be added. To delete a port, press the carriage return m) key. The system will then prompt a “D” and any entries made will be deleted. Enter: XXXX XXXX... (in response to the A prompt). XXXX XXXX... (in response to the D prompt). MDNl (Message Center #l DN)-Identifies directory numbers of Message Center #l . This prompt will appear only in tenant systems. An “A” will follow the MDNl prompt and any entries made will be added. To delete a port, press the carriage return (m key. The system will then prompt “D” and any entries made will be deleted. Enter: 1 - 4 digits for each DN, or ATT1 . (ATT1 or electronic/digital telephone DN is valid only if MWCl = MC. If MWCI = VM, then up to 32 standard telephone [NSTU] port DNs can be entered. This 1 1 1 TVMl (Toshiba Voice Messaging #1)-This prompt will only appear in tenant systems. If using a Toshiba INTOUCH or VP Digital Voice Messaging System, enter up to 32 directory numbers (NSTU ports) that will be connected to 8-1 1 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-308 JANUARY1993 I I the INTOUCH or VP system. This provides enhanced integration of the PERCEPTIONeke, and INTOUCH or VP systems. Following the TVMO prompt, the PERCEPTlONe or PERCEPTION,, system will prompt an “A.“Any entries made will be added. To delete a port, press the carriage return m key. The system will then prompt a 9” and any entries made will be deleted. Enter: XXXX XXXX... (in response to the A prompt). XXXX XXXX... (in response to the D prompt). TABLE 8-1 Procedure Authorization Message Center Data Block Procedure must be completed. If an OK response is received, proceed as follows: Toshiba Voice Messaging #O 1 - 4 digits (maximum: Default values are noted in parentheses (). 32 DNs) (con timed) NOTES: 1. This entry will appear when TEN = Y. 2. If MWCO or M WC1 = VM, then the user will be able to enter a maximum of 32 directory numbers in MDNO. If MWCO or MWCl= MC, then the user can only enter one directory in MDNI (electronic/digital telephone DN or attendant console). XXXX = Station directory number. 3. An “A” will appear after the MDNO (MDNl) prompt and any entries made will be added. After pressing the return key, a “D” will appear and any entries made will be deleted. 4. If MWCO= MC, enter Al70 or electronic/digital telephone DN. If MWCI = MC, enter ATT1 or electronic/digital telephone DN. (This prompt will only appear in tenant systems.) 8-2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-308 JANUARY1993 5. If M WC0 = VM, mail If MWCI = VM, mail enter up to 32 directory numbers (NSTU ports) that will be connected system. enter up to 32 directory numbers (NSTUporfs) that will be connected system for Tenant 1 (TEN = Y). to the voice to the voice NOTE: Do not make any entries for these two rompts if using the Toshiba INTOUCH or VP Digital Voice Messaging System. Press the lb - key. 6. This entry will appear when MWCO or MWCl = VM. 7. If MWCO = VM and a Toshiba INTOUCH or VP Digital Voice Messaging System is being used, enter up to 32 directory numbers (NSTlJpons) that will be connected to the iNTOUCH or VP system. If MWC1 = VM and a Toshiba INTOUCH or VP Digital Voice Messaging System is being used, enter up to 32 directory numbers (NSTU ports) that will be connected to the INTOUCH or VP system for Tenant #1 (TEN = Y). Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. TABLE8-1,(continued) ErrorCodes Program Error Code Name: Message Center Data Block (DMCD) Meaning I ERMCD 00 All MDNs are assigned. ERMCD 01 The DN you are trying to delete does not exist. ERMCD 02 The MDN has already been assigned. ERMCD 03 The DN does not exist in the system. ERMCD 04 Data has already been assigned (REQ = NEW). ERMCD 05 Data is not assigned (REQ = CHG). ERMCD 06 MWCO or MWCl = VM, therefore AlTO or ATT1 cannot be entered. You cannot enter Al70 at the MDN1 prompt, or ATT1 at the MDNO prompt. ,.. -.. I. “‘Y :-/- 8-3 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-308 JANUARY1993 2. Print Message Center Data Block (Table 8-2) 2.01 To use the Print Message l Center Data Block (PMCD Program): l Perform the Authorization l Procedure (Level 1 or Program. 2). Enter: !r.,:I Le. When the REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded: Enter: PRT. The Message Center Data Block will output data in the same format as it was input in the DMCD PMCD (in response to the OK prompt). TABLE8-2 Procedure - Print Message Center Data Block Authorization Procedure ITEM must be completed. If an OK response PROMPT is received, proceed USER ENTRY as follows: NOTE PMCD OK - DISK LOADING - =x2 1 PRT NOTES: response possible is: PRT = Outputs Message = Ignore line entered. = Backspace. = Stop printing and return to REQ. = Exit program. 8-4 Center Data Block. I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 CHAPTER 9 TIE-TIE trunk. WAT-WATS line. TRUNK DATA 1. Trunk Group Data Block (Table NOTES: 1. It is not possible to enter a change (CHG) for Trunk Type (TKT). The Data Block must be deleted (OUT) and a new (NEW) Data Block must be entered. 2. The ‘DNIS” prompt will appear only when one of these trunk types (DID, CCSA, TIE) is entered. 9-1) 1.01 The Trunk Group Data Block (DTGP Program) defines the parameters for each of the 16 possible trunk groups in the system. A Data Block must be completed for each trunk group in the system. Not all of the prompts listed below are used for all trunk types. The response given to the TKT (trunk type) prompt will determine which prompts will be given. Table g-la shows the prompts that can be expected for each trunk type. (Use the proper system record form for the type of trunk being defined.) Data is entered as follows: REQ (Request)--Indicates that the program loaded. Three responses are possible: NEW-To create a new trunk group. CHG-To alter an existing Data Block. OUT-To delete an existing Data Block. DNIS (DNIS Allowed?)-Defines if Dialed Number lndentification Service (DNIS) is allowed. This prompt will appear only when TKT is DID, CCSA, or TIE. Enter: Y or N. NOTE: DNIS is not intended to tie two PBXs together. Each PBX DN needs to be in a table, limiting it to 125 stations. However, the most important thing to remember is that a station user is NOT able to dial a trunk. has NOTES: 1. Before the OUT command is accepted, all trunks must be deleted from the group by using the DTRK Program. 2. If OUT is entered, only the Trunk Group Number (GRP) needs to be entered. No other entries are necessary. DIG (DNIS Digits Received)-Defines the number of digits that will be received from an incoming dialed number on a DID, CCSA, or TIE trunk. Enter: 1 - 5 digits. NOTE: If DNIS is currently programmed at N, and then at a later date changed to Y, the default value of DIG will become zero (0). GRP (Trunk Group Number)-Identifies the trunk group number. Sixteen groups are available (00 - 15). If private lines are to be used, they all occupy one trunk group called PVL. The PVL group replaces group 15. Enter: 00 - 15 (Trunk Group Number) or PVL. TEN (Tenant Number)-Identifies which the trunk group belongs. Enter: 0 or 1 (Tenant Number). the tenant IA0 (Incoming/Outgoing)-Determines whether the trunks will give 2-way or 1 -way service. Enter: ICT-Incoming only. OGT-Outgoing only. IAO-2-way. to STP (Advance Step)--Identifies the next trunk group in a route advance sequence. If a station user attempts to access a trunk in this group and all trunks are busy, then a trunk from the group identified in response to STP will be selected. Enter: 00 - 15 (Next Trunk Group Number) or NONE. TKT (Trunk Type)-Identifies the type of trunk to be used in the group. Enter: COT-Local CO trunk. FEX-Foreign Exchange line. DID-Direct Inward Dialing trunk. CSA-CCSA line. 9-1 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 COD (Access Code)-Defines the access code for the trunk group. Access codes can consist of 1, 2, or 3 digits as long as there is no conflict in the system. For example: 3 cannot be used if 30 or 300 is used as an access code or DN. Enter: 1 - 3 digits. Enter: Number of digits (maximum: TRNl (Translated Number l)-Defines the absorbed digit (IAB) that is to be translated from one digit to another digit or digits (see example following TRN2). . Enter: X # Y, X # YY, or NONE. (X = The digit that is to be translated. When two digits are absorbed, only the second digit will be translated. Y or YY = The translated digit (Y) or digits (YY) that will be inserted.) COS (Class of Service)-Defines the feature access level of each inward dialing trunk (TIE, DID, or CCSA trunk). Use one of the 16 Classes of Service that has been defined via the DCOS Program. Enter: 0 - 15 (COS number). TRNP (Translated Number 2)-Defines TRN (Transmission)-Defines the digit that is to be translated from one digit to another digit or digits. (The same as TRNl; used when over 100 digits are to be translated-see examples.) Enter: X # Y, X # YY, or NONE. the transmission arrangement that is required for the trunks in the group. The entry made here will determine the type of PAD switching that is performed on trunk connections (see Table g-lb for loss plan). Enter: NTC-Non-transmission compensated (2-wire circuit with less than 2dB loss). TRC-Transmission compensated (4wire circuit or 2-wire circuit with greater than 2dB loss). VNL-Via net loss (4-wire VNL circuit). EXAMPLE TRNl = 9#2. TRN2 = 8#3. 3 Digits Received 900 - 999 800 - 819 STR (Start Arrangement)--Defines the start arrangement that is to be used by the trunks in the group. Enter: IMM-Immediate start. WNK-Wink start. DDL-Delay dial. 4 Digits Received 5900 - 5999 5800 - 5819 an interruption-protected trunk group (e.g., a data line). An “N” response will prevent warning tones from being applied to this trunk group. Enter: Y or N. the digits which are to be ignored by the Toll Restriction program. These digits will be outpulsed, but will not be counted as the first digit. Enter: Digits to be absorbed (for example: 1; maximum: 2 digits) or NONE. Absorb Digits)-Defines 3 Digits Received 590 - 599 580 - 589 the 4 Digits Received 5900 - 5999 5800 - 5899 9-2 To Ring 3-digit DN: 200 - 299 300 - 319 C: IAB = 2. from CO: EXAMPLE TRNl = 9#21. TRN2 = 8#32. number of digits that are to be stripped from an incoming dialed number from a TIE, CCSA, or DID trunk. B: IAB = 2. from CO: EXAMPLE TRNl = 9#21. TRN2 = 8#32. OAB (Outgoing Absorb Digits)-Identifies A: IAB = 1. from CO: To Ring 3-digit DN: 200 - 299 300 - 319 EXAMPLE TRNl = 9#2. TRN2 = 8#3. WTA (Warning Tone Allowed?)-Defines IAB (Incoming 2) or NONE. To Ring 3-digit DN: 210-219 320 - 329 D: IAB = 2. from CO: To Ring 4-digit DN: 2100 - 2199 3200 - 3299 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 TOL (Toll Restriction Class)-Assigns one of the IO classes of Toil Restriction to each outgoing TIE, CCSA, and DID trunk. Classes 0 - 7 are defined in the Toll Restriction Data Block (DTOL Program). Class 8 is simple Toll Restriction and restricts when either 1 or n is dialed as the first digit. NONE defines the trunk as unrestricted. Enter: 0 - 8 or NONE. l ALL-All CTX (Centrex)-A “Y” response indicates that the trunk group is operating on Centrex lines. An “N” response indicates that the trunk group is not operating on Centrex lines. The entry “Y” made here defeats Toll Restriction. Enter: Y or N. NOTE: When DNIS = Y, the following prompts do NOT apply, eventhough they appear on the screen: COS, IAB, TRNI, TRN2, and TOL. Group Data Block (Table Group XX Data Block will be out- COT-All output. CO Trunk Group Data Blocks will be FEX-All output. FX Trunk Group Data Blocks WAT-All output. WATS Trunk Group Data Blocks will be will be TIE-All TIE Trunk output. Group Data Blocks will be DID-All DID Trunk output. Group Data Blocks will be CSA-All output. CCSA Trunk Group Data Blocks will be PVL-All Private Line Trunk Group Data Blocks will be output. 9-2) NOTE: The output format willbe the same as the input format that is used in the DTGP Program. 2.01 To use the Print Trunk Group Data Block (PTGP Program): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1 or l Enter: PTGP (in response Trunk Group Data Blocks will be output. GRPXX-Trunk put. FLT (Flash-hook Timing)-Defines the length of time of a flash-hook (line open) while connected to a CO trunk. On an electronic/digital telephone, the flash-hook will occur whenever them key is pressed. Enter: 1 = 500 milliseconds. 2 = 1 second. 2. Print Trunk When an REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded: Enter one of the following commands: to the OK prompt). REQ will be prompted when the printout is complete. Enter: m m (to exit the program). q 9-3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY 1992 Procedure - Trunk Group Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. TABLE 9-l If an OK response is received, proceed as follows: (continued) NOTES: I. A maximum of 76 Trunk’Groups (normally 00 - 75) is possible. If priva te lines are to be equipped, the code PVL is used in place of 15. 2. TKT cannot be changed. The Data Block must be removed (OUT) and NEW data must be entered. The “DNIS” prompt will appear only when one of these trunk types (DID, CCSA, TIE) is entered. 3. This prompt will appear only when TKT is DID, CCSA, or TIE. 4. This prompt will appear only when DNIS is allowed. 5. The Trunk Group that is to be stepped to if this group is busy (00 - 15). 6. COS is meaningful only for TiE/CCSA/DiD Trunks. Sixteen COS groups are provided and are defined in the Class of Service Data Block. 7. List the digits which are to be ignored for the purpose of Toil Restriction, These,digits will be outpulsed, but not counted as the first digit. 8. Enter the number of digits which are to be stripped from an incoming dialed DN (TIE, DID, or CCSA Trunk). Example: IAB = 1. incoming DN = 8249. Recognized DN = 249. 9. Enter the absorbed digit (IAB) to be translated. X = the absorbed digit (IAB) to be translated. Y or YY = the translated digits to be inserted. Example: IAB = 1. TRNl = 9#2. incoming DN = 949. Recognized DN = 249. TRN2 = 8#3. incoming DN = 849. Recognized DN = 349. 10. Classes 0 - 7are defined in the Toil Restriction Data Block (DTOL Program). Class 8 = 0 and 1 restriction. NONE = no restriction. 11. 1 = 500 ms. 2 = 1 second. 12. Enter yes if the trunk group is 73. mm = ignore line entered. Stop printing and return to REQ. =B = Backspace. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE 9--la TRUNK GROUP DATA IBLOCK ENTRIES TRUNK TYPES COT FEX WAT PVL DID CSA TIE GRP X X X X X X X TEN X X X X X X X x I x I ITKT I x I x I x I x I x I DNIS 0 0 0 0 X X X DIG 0 0 0 0 X X X IA0 X X X X X X X STP X X X 0 X X X COD X X X 0 X X X cos 0 0 0 0 x x x TRN X X X X X X X STR X X X X X X X WTA X X X X X X X IAB 0 0 0 0 X X X TRNl 0 0 0 0 X X X ITRNPI 0 0 1 0 X 1 X TOL 0 0 0 0 0 X X FLT X X X X 0 0 0 ICTX 1 X I 0 I X Legend: 1 I X I X X = Used 1 I 0 I I 0 I X 0 1 I 0 = Not Used TABLE 9-l (continued) Error Codes Program Name: Trunk Group Data Block (DTGP) Error Code Meaning ERTRG 01 The group still has a trunk assigned (REQ = OUT). ERTRG 02 The entered group number has already been assigned ERTRG 03 One or more trunks are busy (REQ = CHG). ERTRG 04 The entered group number does not exist (REQ = CHG). ERTRG 05 The entered advance step group is the same as this group number. ERTRG 08 #1 entered, but tenant service is not enabled in System Data Block. ERTRG 09 #l entered, but Attendant ERTRG 10 The start arrangement ERTRG 13 The entered group number does not exist (REQ = OUT). ERTRG 14 The Access Code conflicts with an existing number. ERTRG 15 Input data was erased because the program was aborted (REQ = NEW). Console #1 does not exist. conflicts with the trunk type. 9-5 during a NEW mode. PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION ZOO-255309 FEBRUARY1992 TABLEg-lb PERCEPTION,LOSSPLAN THROUGH CONNECTION TERMINAL BALANCE NON-VNL Non-transmission Compensated Station Lines/ (2-wire facility Attendant Lines <2dB loss and not impedance compensated) Station Lines/ Attendant Lines THROUGHBALANC VNL Transmission Compensated (2-wire facility >2dB loss or impedance compensated or 4-wire facility) . 4 wire .. 5 1 1 3 Non-transmission Compensated (2-wire facility c2dB loss and not impedance compensated) 1 3 1 3 Transmission Compensated (2-wire facility >2dB loss or impedance compensated or 4-wire facility) 1 1 1 1 4 wire 3 3 1 1 ti 2 2 i 1 $ 2 E = g$ gsg lx-‘> Id cm /VOTE: The numbers in the boxes represent actual through 9-6 connection loss in dB. PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE 9-2 Procedure - Print Trunk Authorization Procedure Group Data Block must be completed. ITEM If an OK response PROMPT is received, USER ENTRY proceed as follows: NOTE PTGP OK - DISK LOADING 1 REQ - EXECUTE - NOTES: 1. The following ALL = = GRPXX COT = FEX = WAT = TIE = DID = CSA = PVL = = = = responses are possible: Outputs all Trunk Group Data Blocks. Outputs Trunk Group XX Data Blocks. Outputs all CO Trunk Group Data Blocks. Outputs all FX Trunk Group Data Blocks. Outputs all WATS Trunk Group Data Blocks. Outputs all TIE Trunk Group Data Blocks. Outputs all DID Trunk Group Data Blocks. Outputs all CCSA Trunk Group Data Blocks. Outputs all PVL Trunk Group Data Blocks. Ignore line entered, Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. Error Codes Program Error Code 1 Name: Print Trunk Group Data Block (PTGP) Meaning ERPTG 00 Invalid response. ERPTG 01 The input trunk group number is out of range (REQ = GRPXX). 9-7 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 3. Trunk Data Block (Table 9-3) Enter: PERCEPTlONe: ber of trunk). PERCEPTION,,: 3.01 The Trunk Data Block (DTRK Program) defines the parameters for each of the trunk circuits in the system. A separate Data Block must be completed for each trunk circuit in the system. NOTE: When using the NDTU face) Trunk Data Block the same. Each T-l NDTU PCB) equals a NOTE: NN = Trunk PCB number; (port num- ,. ‘i,( See UPN prompt. X= Circuit number. UPN (Universal Port Number)-Identifies the hardware location of the trunk circuit that is to be defined in a PERCEPTlONe, system which has trunks assigned above T15. The universal port number’s trunk PCB location is TOO - T31. Enter: NN (NN = 00 - 31). PC6 (Digital T-l interprogramming remains channel (24 per each trunk circuit. 3.02 The trunk type (TKT) defined for the group (in the DTPG Program) will determine which entries must be made. Not all prompts are meaningful for all trunk types. Table 9-3a shows the prompts to which responses should be made. (Use the proper system record form for the type of trunk being defined.) Data is entered as follows: REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program loaded. Three responses are possible: NEW-To create a new Data Block. CHG-To alter an existing Data Block. OUT-To delete an existing Data Block. TNNX NOTE: When reprogramming universal port assignments from trunk to station ports (and vice versa), all ports on the existing PCB must be deleted prior to entering the new port assignment. GMN (Group/Member Number)-The group/ member number identifies the trunk position in the system. The GMN is composed of two parts: has 1) Group (GG) Number (defined in the DTGP Program): Identifies the trunk as being a member of that group (00 - 15). NOTE: If OUT is entered, then only the port (POR) needs to be specified. No other dafa entries are necessary. 2) Member (MM) Number: A unique number is given to each trunk in a group. The numerical order of the number will determine the order in which the trunks will be selected upon dial access. The highest member number will be selected first. (PERCEPTlONe: 00 - 63; PERCEPTlONe,: 00 - 63). Enter: GGMM (Group and Member Number). POR (Port Number)--Identifies the hardware location of the trunk circuit that is to be defined in a PERCEPTION, or PERCEPTION,, system. The port number has two parts: 1) PERCEPTlONe: TOO - T15 (trunk PCB location). PERCEPTIONex: TOO - T15; T16 - T31 for the assignment of additional trunk ports, exceeding T15. When Ti 6 - T31 are used, an entry must also be made in response to the UPN prompt. While TOO - T15 are fixed trunk slots, T16 - T31 are flexible and may be assigned to any universal port slot (00 - 31). A maximum of 16 universal port slots can be used for trunks. NOTES: 1. GMN cannot be altered by CHG procedure. The GMN prompt will be followed by the existing GMN. 2. To change the GMN, the Data Blockmust be deleted (OUT) and a new Data Block (NEW) must be entered. TKID (Trunk Name)-Indicates the alphanumeric name assigned to a particular trunk for CO, FX, and WATS only. When a call is coming in via a named trunk, the receiver can see in the LCD display who the call is intended for. This feature 2) 1 - 4 (circuit number on the trunk PCB). For example: The port number of the third circuit on the PCB in position TO2 is T023. 9-8 ...-. ‘. PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 better enables the receiver to handle the call. Trunk Name also appears on outgoing calls. Enter: Trunk name (A - Z, 0 - 9, [space]), NONE. each incoming call. A Day Number can also be assigned as the attendant console, but the Attendant Console cannot be included as part of delayed ringing. ACD pilot numbers cannot be used as part of delayed ringing either. If NONE is entered, the following occurs: If TEN = N in DSYS, calls will load share between the two consoles in the DAY mode, and will activate the UNA device in the NIGHT mode. If TEN = Y in DSYS, trunks assigned to TEN 0 will ring AlTO in the DAY mode and UNA 0 in the NIGHT mode; trunks assigned to TEN1 will ring ATT1 in the DAY mode and UNAI in the NIGHT mode. The DAY parameter can also be entered and changed by the attendant console. Enter: Day station number (up to 8 numbers maybeentered; maximum:4digitseach). After each station number that is to have delayed ringing, enter a i. Enter a space after each DN and/or DN p assignment. AlTO orATT1 (attendant console0 or l), or NONE (UNA in NITE service-ATT in Day Service). NOTE: The maximum number of alphanumeric characters a//owed for a trunk name is 16. TDN (Trunk Directory Number)-For private lines only (Trunk Group 15-PVL). TDN defines a directory number that will be used to assign private lines to a station. Enter: 1 - - 3-digit directory number. RAD (Remote Access Day)-A “Y” response enables the Remote Access to Services trunk for both day and night service. An “N” response enables Remote Access only during night service. Enter: Y or N. NIT(Night Number)-Assigns the night station for the trunk. Incoming calls on the trunk will ring the night station whenever the system is in night service. If NONE is entered, then the call will activate the UNA signal. This parameter can also be entered and changed by the attendant console. Enter: Night station number (maximum: 4 digits) or NONE (UNA). NOTE: To assign Access to was used Data Block Number). TRCL (Destination for Transfer Recall Termination)--Assigns the destination to which a transfer recall terminates. When a transfer recall is not answered at the originally transferring station, the call can be routed to either an attendant, the system UNA device, or an alternative DN. Enter: AlTO, Al71 -Attendant Console 0 or 1. UNA-System UNA device. DN-Alternative station (either a station user DN or a master hunt DN). NONE-No termination destination (the call will continue to ring at the originallytransferring station). a ground-start trunk to Remote Services, enter the same DN that for the REM entry in the System (DSYS Program) for NIT (Night DAY (Day Number)-Assigns the day station(s) for the trunk. Incoming calls on the trunk will ring the day station(s) when the system is not in night service. Up to eight stations can be entered as day stations, to have ,either immediate or delayed ringing. Delayed ringing is achieved by entering a 9 immediately after each station number that is to ring after the immediate-ring station(s). This will delay the ringing of these stations for the period set by the Delay Ring Timer in the DSYS Program (0 - 99 seconds). After this time period elapses, the delayed station(s) will ring. All day stations will receive an immediate visual LED indication with SIG (Signaling)-ldentiies the type of signaling to be used on the trunk circuit: Enter: GRD-Ground Start. LOP--Loop start. EAM-E&M. LDR-LoopDialRepeating(forDIDtrunks). DIS (Disconnect Supetvision~lnfotrns the system whether or not supervision can be expected when the distant end disconnects. Disconnect Supervision controls trunk-to-trunk connections for ground start trunks. Enter: Y or N. 9-9 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY 1992 CTL (Control of Disconnect)-Defines the release control of TIE, DID, or CCSA connection. Enter: OPC (Originating Party Control)-The circuit will not be released until the trunk that originated the call disconnects. FPR (First Party Release)-The trunk at either end of the connection can release. DIN (incoming Dialing)-Informs the system of what type of dialing to expect on an incoming call. (This prompt is for TIE, CCSA, and DID trunks only.) Enter: DIP-Dial Pulse. TON-DTMF. DOT (Outgoing Dialing)-Informs the system of what type of dialing to expect on an outgoing call. Enter: PlO = Rotary Dial IO PPS. P20 = Rotary Dial 20 PPS. TON = DTMF. OTR (Private Line Outgoing Call Restriction)-This prompt will only appear if the trunk is a member of the private line trunk group (Group 15). The OTR prompt is used to exclude selected stations from making outgoing calls over the private line. Consequently, these lines can be used only for answering incoming calls. If a private line appears on more than one station, then each station can be individually restricted from using the line for outgoing calls by entering the port number of each DN that is to be restricted (LNNX). Following the OTR prompt, the system will prompt “D” and any entries made will be deleted. To add entries, press the carriage return m key. An “A” prompt will appear and any entries made will be added. Enter: LNNX LNNX (in response to the D prompt)-To delete a station port. LNNX LNNX (in response to the A prompt)-To add a station port. TABLE 9-3 Procedure - Trunk Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If OK response is received, proceed as follows: (continued) PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE 9-3 (continued) NOTES: 1. NN = trunk PCB number, X = circuit number 1 - 4 . 2. Used only for PERCEPTIONex systems, for trunks assigned above T15. 3. GG = trunk group number (00 - 15). MM = unique trunk number within group (00 - 63). 15MM = Private Line or PVLMM = Private Line 4. GMN cannot be changed. The Data Block must be removed (OUT) and NEW data must be entered. 5. The characters available for trunk names are A - Z, 0 - 9, [space]. A maximum of 16 alphanumeric charaters are allowed for each name. for CO, FX, WATS trunks only. 6. This prompt only appears for Trunk Group 15 (PVL). TDN is the DN assigned to a private trunk line (1 - 3 digits). 7. Enter Trunk’s Night Directory Number (1 - 4 digits). This number can also be changed by the attendant when making night assignments (no meaning for TIuCCSA/DID/PVL trunks). This number must match the REM entry in the DSYS Program in order to activate Remote Access to Services. 8. Enter Trunk’s Day Directory Number (1 - 4 digits). Up to 8 numbers may be entered, for either immediate or delayed ringing. Indicate delayed ringing for a specific station by entering i immediately after the station number. Day number(s) can also be changed by the attendant. The Attendant Console(s) CANNOTbe included as part of delayed ringing. i.e., lfA770 is entered at the DA Yprompt, no other entries are allowed. ACD pilot numbers also CANNOT be entered as part of delay ringing. i.e., If an ACD pilot number is entered at the DAY prompt, no other entries are allowed. 9. If TEN = Yin the DSYS Data Block and trunks are assigned to TEN = 0 in DTGP, calls will ring only at Attendant 0; if the trunks are assigned to TEN = 1 in DTGP, calls will ring only at Attendant 1. If TEN = N in the DSYS Data Block, only ATO can be entered and calls will load share between ATT0 and ATT1 in a two-console operation. NONE = Calls will activate the UNA device. 10. This entry assigns the destination of a Transfer Recall on this trunk. 11. OPC = Originating Party Control. FPR = First Party Release. 12. This prompt only appears for TlffCCSA/DID trunks. 13. Outgoing dialing method: PlO = rotary dial 10 PPS. P20 = rotary dial 20 PPS. TON = DTMF. 14. The OTR prompt appears only when a trunk is assigned to Trunk Group 15 (PVL). Following the OTR prom t, the system will prompt D and any entries made will be deleted. To add a station port, press the &I - key. The system will then prompt A and any entries made will be added. Each private line can have up to 96 line appearances, each of which can be individually restricted by using OTR. When programming these station ports, up to 10 ports may be entered in a single line. 15. Is Answer Supervision required to the calling party? Y = yes; N = no. 16. = Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit Program. 9-11 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 TABLEg-3a TRUNKDATABLOCKENTRIES TRUNKTYPES COT POR UPN GMN 1 FEX 1 WAT PVL x I x I x 1 DID ) CSA 1 TIE xlxlxlx +-l-+-k TKID TDN RAD NIT DAY TRCL SIG CTL x I x I x 0 I 0 I 0 DIN 0 0 0 0 x x X DOT X X X X X X X OTR 0 0 0 X 0 0 0 ANS 0 0 0 0 x x X DIS 9-12 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE9-3(continued) ErrorCodes Program Name: Trunk Group Data Block (DTRK) Error Code 1 ERTRK 00 1 A PCB is not equipped in that location. Meaning ERTRK 01 The PCB is not a trunk type. ERTRK 02 The port is busy (REQ = OUT). ERTRK 03 1 The port has alreadv been assiqned to a station, DSS console, DDIU, or NDKU (REQ = NEW). ERTRK 04 This Trunk Group Data Block does not exist. ERTRK 05 Member number has already been assigned. ERTRK 06 1 The entry conflicts with an existinq DN or TDN. ERTRK 07 The night number that was entered does not yet exist. ERTRK 09 The type of signaling entered conflicts with the trunk type. ERTRK 11 The input data was erased because the program was aborted during a NEW mode. ERTRK 12 The port is not assigned. ERTRK 13 Another type of data has already been assigned to the input port. ERTRK 15 The entered DN has already been assigned to a station (electronic/digital ERTRK 16 The entered DN has already been assigned to another trunk. ERTRK 17 The input DN is a DIU DN. ERTRK 19 The Transfer Recall Termination ERTRK 21 The input port DN does not exist. has alreadv been entered. I The maximum number of ports (96) has already been registered for this PVL. ERTRK 23 The entered port does not exist. ERTRK 24 The input ERTRK 25 or standard telephone). I The DN Table is full. ERTRK 20 ERTRK 22 1 port is not assiqned as a universal port. I The input universal port number has already been assiqned. ERTRK 27 The input data is not a DN. ERTRK 28 The input data has already been entered. ERTRK 29 The maximum number of DNs (8) has already been entered for this port. ERTRK 30 The input data is AlTO, AlTl, ERTRK 31 (REQ = OUT) The input port has already been assigned as a voice port (DSYS: ICP2). ERTRK 32 The Trunk ID is too long (maximum = 16). ERTRK 33 The Aqent ID number cannot be assianed. UNA, or NONE. 9-13 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 ANS (Answer Supervision)-Determines whether or not answer supervision will be provided to the distant trunk on incoming calls. (This prompt is for TIE, CCSA, and DID trunks only.) If “N” is entered, then the system will not return answer supervision. Enter: Y or N. 4. Print Trunk Data Block (Table 9-4) 4.01 To use the Print Trunk Data Block (PTRK COT-All CO Trunk Data Blocks will be output. FEX-All FX Trunk Data Blocks will be output. TIE-All TIE Trunk Data Blocks will be output. DID-All DID Trunk Data Blocks will be output. WAT-All WATS Trunk Data Blocks will be output. CSA-All CCSA Trunk Data Blocks will be output. -- PVL-All output. Private Line Trunk Program): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1 or 2). l Enter: PTRK (in response to OK prompt). When the REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded: Enter one of the following commands: Data Blocks will be NIT-Night Station assignments WATS trunks will be output. for all CO/FX/ UPN-Universal Port Number assignments trunks above T15 will be output. PORALL-All Trunk Data Blocks will be output in order of Port Number (lowest first). NOTES: PORNXX-Trunk output. PORVAC-All Data Block of Port NNX will be unassigned 1. The output format will be the same as that used for data input in the DTRK Program. 2. OTR willprint for each trunk type, although it only has a meaning for PVL. trunk ports will be listed. TGPNN-All Trunk Data Blocks assigned Group NN will be output. to Trunk 9-14 - for PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTlON200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE9-4 Procedure - Print Trunk Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. ITEM If OK response PROMPT is received, proceed as follows: USER ENTRY NOTE PTRK OK - DISK LOADING 1 REQ - EXECUTE - 1 REQ NOTES: 1. The following PORALL = PORNNX = PORVAC = TGPNN = COT = FEX = WAT = TIE = DID = CSA = PVL = NIT = = UPN responses are possible: Outputs Trunk Data Blocks in numerical order of ports (lowest first). Outputs Trunk Data Block of Port NNX. Outputs all unassigned trunk pot-is. Outputs all Trunk Data Blocks assigned to trunk group NN. Outputs all CO Trunk Data Blocks. Outputs all FX Trunk Data Blocks. Outputs all WATS Trunk Data Blocks. Outputs all TIE Trunk Data Blocks. Outputs all DID Trunk Data Blocks. Outputs all CCSA Trunk Data Blocks. Outputs all PVL Trunk Data Blocks. Outputs the Night Station Assignments for all CO, FX, and WATS trunks. Outputs the Universal Port Number Assignments for trunks above T15. Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. ErrorCodes Program Print Trunk Data Block IPTRK) Meaning Error Code 1 Name: ERPTR 00 Invalid response. ERPTR 01 The PCB number or circuit number is out of range (REQ = PORNNX). ERPTR 02 The input trunk group is out of range (REQ = TGPNN). ERPTR 03 1 The inDut ~ort is not assianed to a trunk (REQ = PORVAC). 9-15 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 5. Station Message (Table 9-5) Detail Recording SPCC2 (Specialized Common Carrier &+-Same as SPCCI , but for a second carrier. Enter: SPCC Number NXXXXXX or Equal Access Number 1 OXXXor NONE. Data Block 5.01 The Station Message Detail Recording Data Block (DMDR Program) defines the account code length and type of calls to be recorded for each trunk group for the SMDR feature. Data is entered as follows: REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program loaded. Three responses are possible: NEW-To create a new Data Block. CHG-To alter an existing Data Block. OUT-To delete an existing Data Block. NOTE: Data that is entered here will also appear at the SPCCI and SPCC2 entries in the DTOL Data Block. SPCCI and SPCC2 entries..will not appear in the SMDR output. has TGP (Trunk Group)-Defines the type of calls to be recorded by SMDR for a given trunk group. Enter: XX YYY. (XX = Trunk group number.) (YYY = INC-Incoming only OGT-Outgoing only IAO-Incoming and outgoing TOL-Toll calls only INT-Incoming-all; Outgoing-toll only NONE-No records.) Repeat for each trunk group that is used in the system. TPN (Trunk Port Number)-Allows Trunk Port Numbers to be printed in the SMDR report. Enter: Y to allow; N to deny. ACL (Account Code Length)--Defines the length of the account code that is to be used or indicates that no account code is to be used. Enter: Number of digits to be used (1 - 12) or NONE. NOTE: A call made by using an SPCC is not treated as a toll call for SMDR purposes. NOTE: The account code length must be programmed in order for the account code features (Voluntary, Verified and Forced) to be enabled. SPCCI (Specialized Common Carrier #l )-Informs the system of the DN that is used to access an SPCC (MCI, Sprint, etc.). The system will recognize the DN and enter a unique condition code in the SMDR output. Enter: SPCC Number NXXXXXX or Equal Access Number 1 OXXX or NONE. 9-16 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE 9-5 Procedure - Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response ITEM is received, PROMPT proceed as follows: USER ENTRY NOTE DMDR OK - DISK LOADING - I I I REQ 1 NEW, CHG, OUT Trunk Port Number TPN Y or N Account Code Length ACL 1 - 12 or NONE Special Common Carrier #l DN I SPCCl I SPCC2 Special Common Carrier #2 DN TGP Trunk Group I TGP NXXXXXX or 10XxX or NONE I 1 1 2 NXXXXXX or 10XxX or NONE 2 xx YYY 3 I NOTES: 1. Y = Trunk Port Number will be printed in the SMDR report. N = Trunk Port Number will not be printed. 2. SPCC I & 2 entries are the DN of any Specialized Common Carrier (SPCC) used (MCI, Sprint, etc.) or Equal Access Number (10XxX). Data entered here will also appear in the PAR table in Toll Restriction (DTOL). (Data that is entered here will not appear in the SMDR output.) 3. Enter the trunkgroup number (XX) and the type of calls (YYY) to be recorded on this Trunk Group: INC = Incoming only. OGT = Outgoing. IA0 = Incoming and outgoing. TOL = Toll only. INT = Incoming -All. Outgoing - Toll only. NONE = No records. 4. TGP continues to be prompted untilm is entered. = Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. Error Codes Program Name: SMDR Data Block (DMDR) Error Code Meaning ERMDR 00 SMDR customer data already exists (REQ = NEW). ERMDR 01 SMDR customer data does not exist (REQ = CHG, OUT). ERMDR 02 I The account code length cannot be changed if verifiable account codes are programmed. 9-17 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY 1992 6. Print Station Message Block (Table 9-6) Detail Recording Data 6.01 To use the Print SMDR Data Block (PMDR Program): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3): Enter: PMDR (in response to the OK prompt). l When an REQ response is received after the program is loaded: Enter: PRT. l The SMDR Data Block will be printed out in the following format: REQ PRT ACL xx (01 12) SPCCl NXXXXXX or 1 OXXX SPCC2 NXXXXXX or 1 OXXX TGP xx xxx TGP xx xxx etc. The REQ prompt will be given when the printout is complete. Enter: mm (to exit the program). l q 7. Dialed Number Block (Table 9-7) Identification Service Data 7.01 The Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) Data Block (DDNI Program) is used to program DNIS numbers, destinations, and alphanumeric displays. The system refers to this data block for routing and other handling instructions for TABLE 9-6 Procedure - Print Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response I ITEM PROMPT USER ENTRY OK II I is received, proceed as follows: NOTE PMDR - DISK LOADING 1 =Q - EXECUTE REQ 1 NOTES: 1. The only response possible is: PRT = Outputs SMDR Data Block. Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. 9-18 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 calls received group. via a port assigned to a DNIS trunk DIG (Actual Digits Received)-Identifies the actual DTMF/DP digits received from CO. Enter: XXXXX (1 - 5 digits). REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program has loaded. Three responses are possible: NEW-To create a new Data Block. CHG-To alter an existing Data Block. OUT-To delete an existing Data Block. DN (Destination Directory Number)-Routing destination for DNIS trunk. This can be an internal directory number, an ACD Group pilot number, a Master Distributed Hunting Group pilot number, a voice mail port, the attendant console (UNA in Night Service), or UNA in either Day or Night Service. Enter: XXXX (1 - 4 digits) or NONE (UNA). TAB (DNIS Table Number)-Identifies the DNIS Table. The system can support a maximum of 125 DNIS tables. Enter: 1 - 125. NUM (Number of Digits Received)-identifies number of digits sent by the CO. Enter: 1 - 5. NOTES: 1. When TEN = N in the DSYS Program, programming A TTO or A TTI with two consoles causes a load share condition. the TABLE 9-7 Procedure Authorization Dialed Number Identification Service Data Block Procedure must be completed. If an OK response is received, ITEM PROMPT I OK - I 1 DISK LOADING REQ I NEW, CHG, OUT l-125 Number of Digits Received NOM 1-5 Actual Digits Received DIG xxxxx Destination DN 1 - 4 digits Display I NOTE DDNI TAB Alphanumeric as follows: USER ENTRY DNIS Table Number Directory Number proceed DIS I ~ 16 characters I --~l--il NOTES: 1. A maximum of 125 DNIS tables is possible. 2. Number of digits sent by CO. 3. Actual DTMF/DP digits received from CO. 4. Routing destination for DNIS trunk. This can be an internal directory number, an ACD Group pilot number, a Master Distributed Hunting Group pilot number, a voice mailport, the attendant console (UNA in Night Service), or UNA in either Day or Night service. 5. Alphanumeric characters to be displayed. If different digits (DIG) were received for different calls, and the calls were routed to the same Destination Directory Number (DN), a different message can --be displayed for each call. (A - Z, 0 - 9 allowed and SPACE/BLANK.). = Ignore line entered = Backspace. = Stop printing and return to REQ. = Exit program. 9-19 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-309 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE 9-7 (continued) Error Codes I Program 1 Error Code I Name: Dialed Number Identification 1 Service Data Block (DDNI) Meaning ERDNI 00 The data is already assigned (REQ=NEW). ERDNI 01 The number of “DIG” is different from “NUM.” ERDNI 02 I I I Input DIG data has already been assigned. I ERDNI 03 Input DN or table is not assigned. ERDNI 04 The input data was erased because the program was aborted during a NEW data entry. ERDNI 05 There is an inappropriate ERDNI 06 Input DN cannot be assigned for the destination DN. 2. character. When TEN = Y, the programming of TEN = 0 or 1 in the DTGP Program controls which console calls route to. Tenant service does not load share. Service Data Block (PDNI Program): l Perform the Authorization Procedure DIS (Alphanumeric Display)--Defines the alphanumeric characters to be displayed. Enter: Maximum of 16 characters. or None (LCD display will show trunk #I.) Identification 8.01 To use the Print Dialed Number (Level 1 or 2). l 8. Print Dialed Number Data Block (Table 9-8) I Enter: PDNI (in response to the OK prompt). When the REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded: Enter one of the following commands: TBL ALL-All DNIS Data Blocks will be output. NUM X-All X (X = 1 - 5) Digit Data Blocks will be output. ::.-r-, ‘. ” Service Identification TABLE 9-8 Procedure - Print Dialed Number Identification Service Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response is received, ITEM I PROMPT I OK - proceed as follows: NOTE USER ENTRY 1 PDNI I I DISK LOADING TBL ALL, NUM X =Q NOTE: The following responses are possible: Tl3L ALL = All DNIS Data Blocks will be output. NUM X = All X (X = 1 - 5) Digit Data Blocks will be output. 9-20 1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-310 FEBRUARY1992 CHAPTER 10 TOLL RESTRICTION 1. Toll Restriction REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program has loaded. The only response possible is CHG. DATA TYPE (Sub-program Type)-There are three subprograms within the DTOL Program. Select one of the following three possible responses: Data Block (Tables 1O-l - 1 O-4) 1.01 The Toll Restriction Data Block (DTOL Program) defines the office codes and area codes to be allowed or denied by the Toll Restriction feature. PAR (Miscellaneous Parameters Table-Table lo-2)-Defines system operating parameters. CLS (Restriction Class Table-Table Defines each class of Toll Restriction be customized (classes 0 - 7). 1.02 There are ten classes of Toll Restriction for defining a station’s outward dialing privileges. Of these ten classes, eight may be customized (0 - 7), one restricts the dialing of numbers containing 0 or 1 as the first or second digit (8), and one applies no restrictions (NONE). The privileges of each station may be tailored to meet the customer’s needs. Each class includes specific restrictions, one area code table, and one off ice code table. For convenience, the tables may be defined as either allow or deny tables. 1 O-3)that may AOC (Area/Off ice Code Exception TableTable lo-4)-Defines exceptions to the dialing allowances that are defined in the CLS area code table. 1.04 Each sub-program can be entered independently with one of the above responses to the TYPE prompt. After enterin the desired sub-program, press the return key &I ‘). The prompts associated with each sub-program will then be issued sequentially. 1.03 When specific off ice codes are to be allowed or denied within a specified area code, 32 area/ office code tables are available as exceptions to the area code tables. Data is entered as follows: TABLE IO-1 Procedure - Toll Restriction Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. ITEM If an OK resoonse PROMPT USER ENTRY OK I is received, oroceed as follows: NOTE DTOL - DISK LOADING I REQ CHG TYPE PAR. CL8 AOC NOTES: 1. Possible entries are: PAR = Miscellaneous Parameters Table (1 O-2). CLS = Restriction Class Table (10-3). AOC = Area/Office Code Exception fable (10-4). 10-l 1 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-310 FEBRUARY1992 When entering PAR in response to TYPE (Table 10.2), the next prompt will be: example). If the ICC response is “N,” then calls will be made using the normal NPA formula of NO/lx and NNX. Enter: 1,2, or 3 digits or NONE. HAC (Home Area Code)--Defines the area code in which the system is operating. Home area codes are also used to analyze a dialed number that does not contain an area code, Data that is entered here will appear in the Least Cost Routing Data Block (DLCl Program, PAR table, HAC prompt). Enter: Area Code NO/IX. NOTE: N=2 -9, O/l=OorI, X=0 Example: If ICC is ‘Y” and the DDP is programmed as 1, then the dialed number 2091234 is recognized as a call within the home area code, while the dialed number l-209-555 1234 is recognized as a call outside the home area code. If ICC is ‘IN,”this dialing plan-js not used. -9. NOTE: If a DDD prefix is used in the NPA, it must be entered here even if To// Restriction is not used. ICC (Interchangeable Codes)-A “Y” informs the system that interchangeable codes are used. Interchangeable codes are office codes that have 0 or 1 as the second digit (NO/IX format). Area codes will be identified as the three digits following the DDD prefix. Office codes will be identified as the first three digits when a DDD prefix is not dialed (see DDP prompt). Enter: Y or N. &JTHl (Authorization Code #l)-Indicates the number of digits in the authorization code to be used with SPCCl . These digits and the SPCCl DN that is entered will be ignored forToll Restriction purposes. Enter: 1 - 12 or NONE. SPCCl (Specialized Common Carrier #1)-h-t- NOTE: When using equalaccess (10XxX) forSPCC1 orSPCC2, do not enteran authorization code. forms the system of the DN that is to be used to access an SPCC (MCI, Sprint, etc.) or equal access carrier (10XxX). The system will recognize the DN and ignore it for Toll Restriction purposes. Data that is entered here will also appear in the DMDR Program . Enter: NXXXXXX (SPCC Number) or 10XxX (Equal Access Number) or NONE. AUTHP (Authorization NOTE: The SPCC and AUTH in the SMDR output. SPCC2 (Specialized Common Carrier#2)-Same as SPCCl, but for a second carrier. Enter: NXXXXXX (SPCC Number) or 10XxX (Equal Access Number) NONE. Code #2)-Same AUTHl, but for SPCC2. Enter: 1 - 12 or NONE. or DDP (Direct Distance Dialing Prefix)--Defines the Direct Distance Dialing (DDD) prefix in the Numbering Plan Area (NPA). If ICC is “Y,” then NO/l X and NXX become interchangeable, enabling area codes and office codes to have 0 or 1 as their second digit. In this case, the DDP is used to differentiate between the two code types (see IO-2 entries will not appear as PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTlON200-255-310 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE10-2 Miscellaneous Parameters Table Load the DTOL Utility Program. When the TYPE prompt is received, proceed as follows: NOTES: I. This entry is coupled with the HAC entry in the PAR table in Least Cost Routing (DLCl). Data that is entered here will also appear in that table. 2. Informs the system if interchangeable codes are used (office codes with NO/lx format). 3. SPCC 1 & 2 entries are the DN of any specialized common carrier (SPCC) used (MCI, Sprint, etc.) or Equal Access Number (10XxX). Data that is entered here will also appear in the SMDR (DMDR Program), but will not appear in the SMDR output. 4. This represents the number of d&its in the authorization codes that are used with SPCCl or SPCC2. Data that is entered here will not appear in the SMDR output. 5. = ignore line entered. = Backspace. = Stop printing and return to REQ. = Exit program. 10-3 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-310 FEBRUARY1992 When entering CLS in response to TYPE (Table lo-3), the next prompt will be: NO/i X NO/i X etc. (in response prompt) to delete area codes. CNO (Class Number)---Indicates the number of the Toll Restriction class that is being defined. This number is used in response to the TOL prompt in the DEKT, DSIT, and DTGP Pro- NOTES: 1. N=2 -9, O/l=Oorl, X=0 -9. 2. If “D” is entered in response to the ACT prompt, then “D” must also be entered in response to ACD (and vice versa). For no entries, press the return key m. 3. Following the ACDprompt, an ‘A”prompt will appear and any entered codes will be added. To delete, press the return key m. A “D” will appear and any entered codes will be deleted. grams . Enter: 0 - 7 (Class Number) or NOUT. NOTE: Enter OUT after the class number (N) in order to remove that class from service. to the D OPR (Operator and Operator-Assisted Calls)OCT (Office Code Table Type)--Defines A “Y” response allows a station in this toll restriction class to make operator and operator-assisted calls. Enter: Y or N. the Office Code Table of this toll restriction class as either an Allow (A) or a Deny (D) type table. An “A” entry will allow all office codes within the Home Area Code (HAC), except those deleted in response to the OCD prompt. A “D” entry will deny all off ice codes within the Home Area Code, except those added in response to the OCD prompt. Enter: A or D. INT (International Calls)-A ‘Y” response allows a station in this toll restriction class to make international calls (011, 01). Enter: Y or N. LDA (Long Distance Directory Assistance)-A OCD (Office Code Table)-Indicates the office codes to be allowed or denied for this toll restriction class. Office codes may be added or deleted either as single 3-digit codes, or as a “range” covering up to ten sequential 3-digit office codes. Ranges are entered by using a 4-digit format; where the first two digits are common to all codes in this range; the third digit represents the starting point of the range (from) for the last digit of the office code; and the fourth digit represents the end point of the range (to) for the last digit of the office code. See ranges example. Enter: NXXX NXX NXXX etc. (in response to the A prompt) to add office codes. . . . or. . . NXXX NXX NXXX etc. (in response to the D prompt) to delete office codes. ‘Y” response allows a station in this toll restriction class to call long distance directory assistance. Any area code + 555 + XXXX will be allowed. Enter: Y or N. ACT (Area Code Table Type)-Defines the Area Code Table of this toll restriction class as either an Allow (A) or a Deny (D) type table. l An “A” entry will allow all area codes except those deleted below, in response to the ACD prompt. l A “D” entry will deny all area codes except those added below, in response to the ACD prompt. Enter: A or D. ACD (Area Code Table)-Indicates the area codes that are to be allowed or denied for this toll restriction class. Area codes may be either added or deleted, as described above. Enter: NO/l X NO/i X etc. (in response to the A prompt) to add area codes. . . . or. . . NOTES: 1. N=2 -9, X=0 -9. 2. If “D” is entered in response to the OCT prompt, then “D” must also be entered in response to OCD (and vice versa). For no entries, press the return key m. 10-4 ,‘_ PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-310 FEBRUARY1992 3. Codes cannot be added and deletedin the same pass through the table. A separate pass is required for each step. 4. Following the OCDprompt, an ‘A”prompt will appear and any entered codes will be added. To delete, press the return key m. A ‘D” will appear and any entered codes will be deleted. RANGES 4-digit EXAMPLE: Format Off ice Codes 2209 220 - 229 2316 231 - 236 2478 247 - 248 TABLE10-3 Restriction Class Table Load the DTOL Utility Program. When the TYPE prompt is received, proceed as follows: Area Code List = Add or Delete Office Code List = Add or Delete Default values are noted in parentheses ( ). NOTES: 1. Enter the number of the Toll Restriction class (0 - 7) that is being defined. This number will be used in the DEKT, DSlT, and DTGP Data Blocks in response to the TOL prompt. 2. Enter OUT after the class number (NOUT) to remove that class from service. 3. Defines the Area Code Table of this class as an allow (A) or deny (0) type. a. IfA is entered, thesystem willallowallarea codes except those deletedin response to the ACD prompt (Note 4). b. If D is entered, the system will deny all area codes except those added in response to the ACD prompt (Note 4). 4. Used to add or to delete area codes from the table (Note 3). 5. Defines the Area Code Table of this class as an allow (A) or deny (0) type. a. If A is entered, the system will allow all office codes except those deleted in response to the OCD prompt (Note 6). b. If D is entered, the system will deny all office codes except those added in response to the OCD prompt (Note 6). 6. Used to add or delete office codes from the table (Note 5). Ranges are possible (7309 = 730 - 739). = Ignore line entered. = Backspace. = Stop printing and return to REQ. = Exit program. 10-5 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-310 FEBRUARY1992 NOTES: 1. N=2-9,X=0-9. 2. Codes cannot be added and deleted in the same pass through the table. A separate pass is required for each step. 3. When entering office codes (OFCprompt), thesystem willprompt %“andanyentries made willbeadded. To delete office codes, press the return key @). A “D”will appear and any entries made will be deleted. When entering AOC in response to TYPE (Table lo-4), the next prompt will be: TN0 (Table Number)-Selects one of 32 area/ office code exception (AOC) tables. Enter: 0 - 31 (Table Number). ARC (Area Code)--Identifies the area code to which this AOC table is assigned. A maximum of eight AOC tables can be assigned to any area code (the table numbers must be sequential). Enter: Area Code NO/IX or NONE. NOTE: N=2-9, O/l=OorI, X=0-9. CNO (Class Number)-Defines the toll restriction class numbers (0 - 7) that are subject to this exception table. Any number of classes, up to a maximum of eight, may be entered. If a toll restriction class table is allowed to dial an area code, then all office codes within that specified area code will be allowed, except those specifically added in response to the OFC prompt. If a toll restriction class table is not allowed to dial an area code, all office codes within that specified area code will not be allowed, except those specifically added in response to the OFC prompt. Enter: Class Numbers 0 1 2 etc. or NONE. OFC (Office Codes)-Indicates the office codes that are assigned to this area/office code exception table. Office codes may be added or deleted as single 3-digit codes or as a range covering up to ten sequential 3-digit office codes (the area/ office code table is initially blank). Ranges are entered by using a 4-digit format; where the first two digits are common to all codes in this range; the third digit represents the starting point of the range (from) for the last digit of the office code; and the fourth digit represents the end point of the range (to) for the last digit of the office code. See RANGES example, CLS sub-program, OCD prompt. Enter: NXXX NXX NXXX, etc. (in response to the A prompt) to add office codes. . ..or... NXXX NXX NXXX etc. (in response to the D prompt) to delete office codes. 10-6 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-310 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE10-4 Area/Office Code Exception Table Load the DTOL Utility Program. When the TYPE prompt is received, ITEM PROMPT proceed as follows: USER ENTRY TYPE AOC Table Number TN0 0 - 31 Area Code ARC NO/l X or NONE Class Number CNO 0 1 etc. or NONE Off ice Codes OFC A D NXXX NXX etc. NXXX NXX etc., or NOTE 1 2&3 NOTES: 1. ARC identifies the area code to which this AOC is assigned. Format is NO/lx (N = 2 - 9, X = 0 9). A maximum of eight AOC tables can be assigned to any one area code, but the table numbers (TNO) must be sequential. 2. Following the OFC prompt, the system will prompt “A” and any office codes that are entered will be added. To delete an office code, press them key @. The system will then prompt “D” and any entries that are made will be deleted. Office codes entered will be an exception to the listed area code and class. Ranges are possible (7309 = 730 - 739). 3. Codes cannot be added and deleted in the same pass through the table. A separate pass is required for each step. 4. Ignore line entered. Backspace. = Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. Error Codes I Program Name: Toll Restriction Error Code ERTD 00 I I ERTD 01 Data Block (DTOLI Meaning Area code (NO/lx) is bevond ranae. 1 Numeric error (0 - 9). ERTD 02 Authorization ERTD 03 Class number is out of range (0 - 7). ERTD 05 Number of entries exceeds the maximum (20). ERTD 06 code is out of range (0 - 12). 1 Table number is beyond range (0 - 31). ERTD 07 Class numbers exceed the maximum (8). ERTD 08 Office code does not exist. 10-7 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-310 FEBRUARY1992 2. Print Toll Restriction Data Block (Table 1O-5) 2.01 To use the Print Toll Restriction (PTOL Program): l l Data Block CLSCNX-All code tables (area, office, and area/ office) will be output for class X. Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PTOL (in response to the OK prompt). When an REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded: Enter one of the following commands: TRDALL-All Toll Restriction AOCALL-All Data Blocks will be Parameters Table AOC tables will be output. AOCNOXX-The area code and all office codes for AOC table number XX will be output. CODXXX-The AOC table which code XXX will be output. output. PAR-Miscellaneous output. CLSALL-All code tables (area, office and area/ office) will be output for all eight classes. relates to area will be TABLEiO-5 Procedure - Print Toll Restriction Data Block Authorization Procedure ITEM must be completed. If an OK response PROMPT is received, USER ENTRY OK proceed as follows: NOTE ? =.. PTOL - DISK LOADING 1 REQ - EXECUTE 1 REQ NOTES: 1. TRDALL = Outputs all Toll Restriction Data Blocks. PAR = Outputs Miscellaneous Parameters Table. CLSALL = Outputs all Code Tables (Area, Office, and Area/Office) for all eight classes. CLSCNX = Outputs all Code Tables (Area, Office, and Area/Office) for class X. AOCALL = Outputs all Area/Office Code Tables. AOCNOXX = Outputs the Area Code and all Office Codes forArea/Office Code Table number xx. CODXXX = Outputs the Area/Office Code Table relating to Area Code XXX. = Ignore line entered. 2. * . = Backspace. ii Stop printing and return to REQ. :m: Exit program. c 10-8 $-- PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-311 FEBRUARY1992 CHAPTER 11 DATA SWITCHING 1. Digital 11-I) Data Interface 4. DATA Unit Data Block (Table 1.01 The DDIU Data Block (DDIU Program) defines all parameters of a given Digital Data Interface Unit including the PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS. A DDIU Data Block must be completed for each DDIU/PDIU in the system. Not all of the prompts listed below are used for both DDlUs (-MA or -MAT) or PDlUs (-DI or -DS). The response given totheTYP (DDIU/PDIU type) promptwill determine which prompts will be given. Refer to the notes found in Table 11-l to determine which prompts can be expected for each DDIU/PDIU type. Data is entered as follows: REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program loaded. Three responses are possible: NEW-To create a new Data Block. CHG-To alter an existing Data Block. OUT-To delete an existing Data Block. PDIU (DIU Style)-Tells the system if a new D.04style digital data unit (PDIU-DI or PDIU-DS) is being assigned to this port. Y = PDIU (D.04 Software), and N = DDIU. Enter: Y or N. ATC (AT Commands)-Tells the system if you need to activate the “Echo Back” feature of the AT command set, when the new style data interface units (PDIUs) are connected. When connected to a modem, for modem pooling, Echo is off (N). Y = Echo on, and N = Echo off. Enter: Y or N. has TYP (Type)--Identifies the type of hardware that is to be connected to this port. Enter: DIUl (DDIU-MA/PDIU-DS) or DIU2 (DDIU-MAT/PDIU-DI). POR (Port Number)--Identifies the hardware location of the DDIU/PDIU circuit that is to be defined. The port number has two parts: 1) When programming a PDIU-DI or PDIUDS, these data units are programmed onto the ports adjacent to the port the NDKU PCB is programmed on. For example: If the NDKU is in slot L06, the PDlUs are programmed on to L07. If the NDKU is in slot L 1 I, the PDllJs are programmed on to L 12, etc. DN (Directory Number)-Assigns the directory number (data number) of the DDIU/PDIU. Enter: 1, 2, 3, or 4 digits. NDCU, NDKU or NMDU PCB location: PERCEPTlONe: LOO - Li 1; L15 * L26 (NW PERCEPTIONex: LOO - L31. HNT(Hunt Directory Number)-Defines the data station to which this DN hunts. (Used with the Hunting feature.) Enter: XXXX (1 - 4 digits) for the next DN in the hunt group or NONE. 2) Circuit number on that PCB: 1 - 8 (X) (See Note 3.) on the NDCU/NDKU type or 1 - 4 (X) on the NMDU type. Enter: Port number of DDIU (LNNX). COS (Class of Service)-Assigns one of the 16 Classes of Service to the data station. (The Classes of Service are defined in the DCOS Program.) Enter: COS Number (0 - 15). & NOTES: 1. There is a limit of four data PCBs per cabinet. 2. Port L318 cannot be assigned. 3. The eighth circuit of the NDKU cannot be used for PDIV-DI or PDIU-DS assignment. GOD(Groupof DDIUs/PDIUs)-Assigns the DDIU/ PDIU to one of the 16 possible DDIU/PDIU groups. Dial access into a group can be denied by Class of Service. Enter: 0 - 15. 11-l PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-311 FEBRUARY1992 TEN (Tenant Number)-Assigns of the vertical buttonstrip. The three buttons located next to the dialpad the data station to one of the two possible tenants in the system. Enter: 0 if tenant service is not selected in the System Data Block (TEN = N). 0 or 1 to specify tenant, if tenant service is selected in the System Data Block (TEN = Y). fixed assignments. The ons are for future use and are non-functional. 2) Feature or DN assignments. The possible assignments are as follows: Directory (Station) Number: (1,2,3, or 4 digits): SCR NNNN XXXX-Single Call Ring. l Incoming calls will audibly ring the DDIWPDIU. l NNNN = Directory (station) Number. l XXXX = Hunt number = Enter DN to which this DN will hunt. SCN NNNN XXXX-Single Call No Ring. l Incoming calls will not audibly ring DDIWPDIU (LED flash only). l NNNN = Directory (station) Number. l XXXX = Hunt number = Enter DN to which this DN will hunt. NOTE: The TEN entry for a DDIU-MAT/PDIU-DI should be the same as the TEN entry for the electronic/digital telephone to which it is assigned. KEY (Button Assignment)-Assigns a DN to the DDIU-MA and PDIU-DS data units. It also assigns features to one of the flexible buttons on DDIU-MA only. NOTE: PDIU-DS data units do not have flexible buttons for feature assignments. However, it is necessary to assign a data DN to key 0 when programming a PDIU-DS, so that the data unit can be called by other data units. Features (DDIU-MA only): ACB-Automatic Callback ADUFAD-Automatic Dialing (Flexible/Fixed) DND-Do Not Disturb RND--Repeat Last Number Dialed SDC/SDU-Station Speed Dial Controller/User SDS-Speed Dial System Enter: 1) The number of the button that is to be defined, followed byaspace. Buttons are numbered 0 - 9, starting from the bottom KEY-The prompt will be repeated until all entries have been made and the m key is pressed. 11-2 , : .._ PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-311 FEBRUARY1992 TABLEli-1 Procedure - Digital Data Interface Unit Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response is received, PROMPT ITEM proceed USER ENTRY OK as follows: NOTE DDIU - DISK LOADINGPort Number DIU Style I REQ NEW, CHG, OUT POR LNNX PDIU I 1,2,&3 Y or N 4 AT Commands ATC Y or N 5 Type of DDIU/PDIlJ TYP DIUl or DIU2 6 Directotv Number DN 1 - 4 diaits 7&8 1 - 4 digits or NONE 78x9 Hunt Directory Number I HNT I Class of Service Group cos o- 15 10 Groups of DDlUs GOD o- 15 11 Tenant Nbmber TEN 0 or 1 12 Button Assignment KEY 0 - 9 [space] FEATURE 13 & 14 (continued) NOTES: 7. NN = PC5 location. 2. X = Circuit number. 3. Ports LNNl - 4 on a NMDU PC5 can be used if they are not assigned in the DMDM Program. 4. Select the DIU style, DDIU or PDIU (0.04 software). Y = PDIU, N = DDIU. 5. Ethos AT commands; Y = Echo on, N = Echo off (Modem = N). 6. D/U7 = DDIU-MA/PD/U-DS. D/U2 = DDIU-MAT/PD/U-DI. 7. This prompt will only appear when DIU2 (DDIU-MAT/PDIU-DI) is entered after the TYP prompt. 8. This directory number will appear on an electronic/digital telephone. 9. Enter the number to which this DN hunts. NONE = No hunt. 10. There are 16 different COS groups (which are defined in the COS Data Block). 11. Assign this DDIWPDIU to one of 76 possible groups. Dial access into a group can be denied by Class of Service. 12. The TEN entry for a DDIU-MAT/PDIU-DI should be the same as the TEN entry for the etectronic/digital telephone to which it is assigned. 13. Enter the button number, followed by a space and then the feature entry. Button 0 must be the station’s primary DN. See Table 1 I- la for possible entries. 14. PDIU-DS requires a DN assignment to Key 0. 15. = Ignore line entered. = Backspace. = Stop printing and return to REQ. = Exit program. 11-3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-311 FEBRUARY 1992 SPECIAL NOTE: When a DlU2 is assigned, I two key entries must be made in the DEKT PROGRAM as follows: PROMPT I USER ENTRY NOTE I KEY DIU LNNX 1 KEY DRS 2 NOTES: 1. Port number of DIlJ attached to the electronic/digital 2. Data release button. telephone (Data ON). I TABLEV-la DDIUBUTTONASSIGNMENTS DIRECTORY I NUMBER ENTRY Single Call Ring SCR Single Call No Ring SCN NN’NNXXXX FEATURE I NOTE Automatic Callback Automatic Dialing NNNN 1 XXXX 1 ENTRY NOTE ACB 1 zmL/FziD xxx Do Not Disturb DND Repeat Last Number Dialed RND Station Speed Dial Controller/User SDC XX/SDTJ XX Svstem Soeed Dial SDS I 2 NOTES: Number: l-, 2-, 3-, or 4-digit DNs are allowed if there is no conflict (i.e., 30X is not allowed if 30 is used). For DDIU-MA and PDIU-DS units. XXXX = Hunt DN - enter NONE to remove present DN. Also see Station Hunt-Distributed. buttons for the entire system is 500. 2. The maximum number of m . 3. = Ignore line entered. I 6 = Backspace. D - Stop printing and return to REQ. D m i Exit program. c 1. NNNN = Directory 11-4 I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-311 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE114 (continued) Error Codes Proaram Error Code I ERDIU 00 1 A PCB is not eauiooed Name: DDIU Data Block (DDIU) Meaning in that location. ERDIU 01 The PCB is not an NDCU/NDKU ERDIU 02 The oort is busv (REQ = CHG or OUT). ERDIU 03 The port has already been assigned to a station, DSS console, DDIU, or PDIU (REQ = NEW). ERDIU 04 #1 was entered, but tenant service was not enabled in the Svstem Data Block. ERDIU 05 or NMDU type. 1 #l was entered, but Attendant #I was not programmed (no Attendant Data Block). ERDIU 06 The button number is not allowed (exceeds maximum allowed for this DDIU/PDIU). ERDIU 08 The maximum number of m ERDIU 10 The DN conflicts with the existing DN. ERDIU 11 510 DNs have already been assigned in the system. ERDIU 12 The DN has already been assigned to its maximum number of appearances Primary DN = 1; Secondary DN = 95). ERDIU 14 The next hunt DN is not assigned. ERDIU 16 The input DN has already been assigned to the port. ERDIU 17 The input data was erased because the program was aborted during a NEW entry. ERDIU 18 The port is not assigned. ERDIU 19 Another type of data is assigned to the input port. ERDIU 20 SDC has already been assigned to the input list. ERDIU 23 The input DN is a trunk DN (VCP NNN HUNT DN). ERDIU 24 The first digit of an input DN cannot be “0” or “9.” ERDIU 33 Only one DN can be assigned to a DIU. ERDIU 34 mbuttons has already been assigned (maximum = 500). I The port has already been assioned to a trunk. 11-5 (maximum for a PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-311 FEBRUARY 1992 2. Print Digital Data Interface Unit Data Block (Table 1l-2) l 2.01 To use the Print Digital Data Interface Unit Data Block (PDIU Program): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PDIU (in response to the OK prompt). l When a REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded: Enter: PORALL. All DDIU Data Blocks will be output in numerical order of ports (lowest first). TABLE 11-2 Procedure - Print Digital Data InterfaceUnit Authorization Procedure ITEM must be completed. If an OK response is received, proceed as follows: NOTE USER ENTRY PROMPT OK I Data Block PDIU - DISK LOADING1 REQ - EXECUTE 1 REQ NOTES: 7. The only response possible is: PORALL = Outputs all DDIU Data Blocks in numerical = Ignore line entered. 2. a = Backspace. = Stop printing and return to REQ. m = Exit program. 11-6 order of ports (lowest first). I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-311 FEBRUARY1992 3. Modem Pooling Data Block (Table 11-3) 3.01 The Modem Pooling Data Block (DMDM Program) identifies the Modem Pooling ports. The Modem Pooling Data Block is not used with the PDIU-DS. See the DDIU Data Block and the Installation Instructions section for Modem Pooling using the PDIU-DS. REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program loaded. Two responses are possible: NEW-To assign a new Data Block. OUT-To delete an existing Data Block. has POR (Port Number)--Identifies the hardware location of the NMDU circuits that are to be defined. The port number has two parts: 1) NMDU PCB location: PERCEPTION,-L00-L11/L15-L26(NN). PERCEPTION,,-LOO - L31. 2) Circuit number on that PCB: 1 - 4 (X). 3) When a circuit number is identified, two circuits are assigned, one for a modem and one for its associated DDIU (i.e., if circuit 1 is identified, circuits 1 and 5 are assigned; if circuit 2 is identified, circuits 2 and 6 are assigned, and so on). Enter: Port number (LNNX). NOTE: Port L314 cannot be assigned. 11-7 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-311 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE11-3 Procedure - Modem Pooling Data Block Authorization Procedure If an OK response must be completed. ITEM PROMPT is received, proceed USER ENTRY as follows: NOTE DMDM OK - DISK LOADINGPort Number NOTES: 1. NN = PCB location. PERCEPTION, - LOO - Ll7/L75 PERCEPTION,, - LOO - L31. 2. X = Circuit number (1 - 4). ignore line entered. REQ NEW, OUT POR LNNX l&2 - L26. Backspace. Stop printing Exit program. and return to REQ. Error Codes Program Name: Modem Error Code Pooling Data Block (DMDM) Meaning ERMDP 00 A PCB is not equipped in that location. ERMDP 01 The PCB is not an NMDU tvoe. ERMDP 02 1 The port is busy (REQ = CHG or OUT). ERMDP 03 The port has already been assigned to a station, DSS console, or DIU (REQ = NEW). ERMDP 04 The port is not assigned (REQ) = OUT). ERMDP 05 The input port is wrong (LNNX, X is not 1 - 4). ERMDP 06 The port has already been assigned to an attendant console. ERMDP 07 The input port is not a modem pooling port (NMDM). ERMDP 08 The port has already been assigned to a trunk. 11-8 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-311 FEBRUARY1992 4. Print Modem Pooling Data Block (Table 11-4) 4.01 To use the Print Modem Pooling Data Block (PMDM Program): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PMDM (in response to the OK prompt). l When the REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded: Enter: PORALL. All Modem Pooling Data Blocks will be output in numerical order of ports (lowest first). l TABLEll-4 Procedure Authorization I Print Modem Pooling Data Block Procedure must be completed. If an OK response 1 PROMPT 1 I is received, proceed as follows: USER ENTRY I I NOTE PMDM OK - DISK LOADING 1 REQ - EXECUTE - I I REQ I NOTES: 1. The only response possible is: PORALL = Outputs all Modem Pooling Data Blocks in numerical = Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. 11-9 order of ports (lowest first). PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-312 FEBRUARY1992 CHAPTER 12 TYPE (Sub-program Type)-There are three subprograms within the DLCl Program and two within the DLC2 Program. The possible responses are as follows: LEAST COST ROUTING DATA 1. Least Cost Routing Data Block (Table 12-1) DLCI : PAR (Miscellaneous Parameters Table)Identifies the system operating parameters. ACT (Area Code Table)-Defines each area code table. AOC (Area/Office Code Table)-Modifies an area code table. 1.01 The Least Cost Routing Data Block (DLCR Program) defines the proper outgoing trunk based on the outside number that is dialed. LCR stores and examines the number dialed, checking the area and/or office codes. Based on this examination and the time of day, LCR chooses the proper trunk from a programmed route table. The LCR Data Block has been divided between two utility programs (DLCI and DLC2). l DLCl defines the miscellaneous system parameters, the 15 area code tables, and the 16 area/ office tables which further modify the area code tables. l DLC2 defines the 15 route tables, containing six routes each, and includes three schedules for time of day selection and 12 Modify Digits Tables. Each route table’s data (DLCl or DLCS) is entered as follows: DLC2: RTB (Route Table)-Defines routes and the routing selection sequence. MDT (Modify Digits Table)-Defines the digit modification that is to be applied to a dialed number. Enter: DLCI or DLC2, followed by the desired sub-program: DLCl: PAR, ACT, or AOC. DLC2: RTB or MDT. 1.02 After enterin the desired sub-program, press the return key d ‘). The prompts associated with each sub-program will then be issued sequentially. REQ (Request)-indicates that the program has loaded. The only response possible is CHG. TABLE12-1 Procedure Authorization Least Cost Routing Data Block Procedure must be completed. If an OK response ITEM LCR Utility #I or #2 PROMPT OK proceed as follows: USER ENTRY NOTE DLCl , DLC2 - DISK LOADING Data Table Type is received, 1 - REQ CHG TYPE PAR, ACT, AOC (DLCl), or RTB, MDT (DLC2) NOTES: 1. LCR utilities are divided between two programs: Enter: DLC 1 for: PAR (Miscellaneous Parameters). ACT (Area Code Table). AOC (Area/Office Code Table). DLC2 for: RTB (Route Table). MDT (Modify Digits Table). 2. If DLCl was entered, the possible responses are PAR, ACT, or AOC. If DLC2 was entered, possible responses are RTB or MDT. 12-1 2 the PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-312 FEBRUARY1992 2. Least Cost 12-2 - 12-4) Routing Data Block 1 (Tables LCR (Local Call Route)--Defines the route to be selected for local calls (undefined numbers), area code 800 calls (TFC prompt), and Service Code calls (SVC prompt). Enter: Route Table (1 - 15). When entering DLCI , PAR (Table 12-2), the next prompt will be: ICC (Interchangeable Codes)-A “Y” informs the system that interchangeable codes are used. These are office codes that have 0 or 1 as the second digit (NO/i X format). Area codes will be identified as the three digits following the DDD prefix. Office codes will be identified as the first three digits when a DDD prefix is not dialed (see DTOL Program, PAR table, DDP prompt). Enter: Y or N. SVC (Service Code Table)--Defines the local service codes (411,611,911, etc.) that are to be routed via the Route Table defined by the LCR prompt (maximum: IO 3-digit codes). Enter: NXX NXX etc. (in response to the A prompt, to add service codes). and/or . . . NXX NXX etc. (in response to the D prompt, to delete service codes). OTO (Operator Call Timeout)-Defines the time, in seconds, that the system will wait for additional digits to be dialed after 1 is pressed. Enter: Time in seconds (for example: 10). DAC (Directory Assistance Calls Allowed)-A “Y” response will route long distance directory assistance calls (NPA + 555 + XXXX) to the route table defined in the long distance information route (LDI prompt). An “N” response will not allow long distance directory assistance calls using Least Cost Routing. Enter: Y or N. RTDl (Return Dial Tone)-A “Y” response returns system dial tone after the LCR access code has been dialed. An “N” response will return silence. Enter: Y or N. LDO (Long Distance International Call Route)Defines the route table that is to be selected for international (011) calls. Enter: Route Table (1 - 15). WTA (Warning Tone Allowed?)-A “Y” response will cause the system to give a 3-second 440 Hz warning tone when the most expensive (last choice) route is being selected. Enter: Y or N. NOTES: 7. A route table number is entered here, however, it is not necessary to create an RTB table. 2. This is for 0 11 calls only. 0 1 calls folio w the local call route. HAC (Home Area Code)-Defines the area code in which the system is operating. A home area code is also used to analyze dialed numbers which do not contain an area code. Data that is entered here will appear in the Toll Restriction Data Block (DTOL Program, PAR table, HAC prompt). Enter: NO/IX (Area Code). NOTE: N=2-9, O/l=Oorl, LDI (Long Distance Information Route)-Defines the route table that is to be selected for long distance directory assistance calls (NPA + 555 + XXXX) if permitted by the DAC prompt. Enter: Route Table (1 - 15). X=0-9. TFC (Toll-Free Calls)-A “Y” response will route toll-free calls (area code = 800) to the route table defined in the Local Call Route (LCR) prompt. An “N” response informs the system to treat area code 800 as a normal area code. Enter: Y or N. DDP (Direct Distance Dialing Prefix)-Defines the Direct Distance Dialing (DDD) prefix in the Nurnbering Plan Area (NPA). If ICC is “Y,” then NO/l X and NXX become interchangeable, enabling area codes and office codes to have 0 or 1 as their 12-2 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-312 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE12-2 Miscellaneous Parameters Table Load the DLCI Utility Program. When TYPE is prompted, ITEM Interchangeable 1 PROMPT 1 I 1 Codes TYPE proceed USER as follows: ENTRY -PAR ICC Y or N “0” Call Timeout OTO Time in seconds: 0 - 99 Return Dial Tone after LCR Access Code RTD Y or N Warning Tone to caller when the most expensive route is selected WTA Y or N Home Area Code ! Toll Free (800) calls permitted via the Local Call Route II Local Call Route Long Distance Call Route International LCR (011) II NOTE I 1 2 NO/l X (Home Area Code) .lxAc TFC I Y or N I 1 XX (Local Call Route Table 1 - 15) LDO 1 - 15 Directory Assistance (555) Call Route LDI l-15 DDD Prefix DDP 1 - 3 digits or NONE 1 6 NOTES: 7. Informs the system if interchangeable codes are used (Office Codes with NO/IX format). 2, Defines the area code in which the system is located. Home area codes are used to route dialed numbers which do not contain an area code. This entry is coupled with the HAC entry in the PAR table Toll Restriction (DTOL Program). Data that is entered here will also appear in that table. 3. These calls will be routed via the Local Call Route. 4. Folio wing the S esystem willpromptan “A. “Anyentriesmade willbeadded. Todelete key. The system will then prompt “D,” and any entries made will be a code, press deleted. Codes cannot be added and deleted in the same pass through the table. A separate pass is required for each step, 5. Route Table to be used for 555 calls. 6. Route Table to be used for 017 calls. A route tab/e number is entered here, however, it is not necessary to create an RTB table for that route. This is for 011 calls only, 01 calls will follow the local call route. = Ignore line entered. = Backspace. - Stop printing and return to REQ. 1 Exit program. 12-3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-312 FEBRUARY 1992 RTB sub-program of the DLC2 Program) to which this Area Code Table is assigned. Entering OUT will clear all area codes from Route Table Numbers (RNO)l - 14 and will assign all area codes to RN0 15. Entering a Route Table Number 1 14, followed by OUT will clear only RN0 XX and will assign the area codes to RN0 15. Enter: 1 - 15 or OUT or 1 - 14 OUT. second digit. In this case, the DDP is used to differentiate between the two code types (see example). If the ICC response is “N,” then calls will be made using the normal NPA formula of NO/i X and NNX. Enter: 1, 2, or 3 digits or NONE. Example: If ICC is ‘Y” and the DDP is programmed as 1, then the dialed number209-1234 is recognized as a call within the home area code, while the dialed number 1-209-555-l 234 is recognized as a call outside the home area code. If ICC is “N,” this dialing plan is not used. ACA (Area Codes-Add)-Indicates the area codes that are to be added to this RNO. A maximum of 160 area codes are permitted. Initially, RN0 15 contains all possible 160 area codes, but as codes are added to RN0 1 - 14, they are automatically deleted from RN0 15. Enter: NO/l X NO/l X etc. When entering DLCl , ACT (Table 12-3), the next prompt will be: RN0 (Route Table Number)-Identifies number the in the of the Route Table (programmed TABLE 12-3 Area Code Table Load the DLCI Utility Program. When TYPE is prompted, ITEM .. as follows: USER ENTRY PROMPT TYPE proceed NOTE ACT Route Table Number RN0 Route Table 1 - 15, OUT, or NN OUT 1 Area Codes - Add ACA NO/l X, NO/l X, etc. 2. Area Codes - ACD NO/lx, NO/lx, etc. 3 Delete NOTES: 1. OUT clears RN0 1 - 14 and assigns all area codes to RN0 15. NN OUT clears RN0 NN and assigns the cleared area codes to RN0 15. 2. Input area codes are to be added to this RNO. A maximum of 160 codes in the format NO/IX are permitted (N = 2 - 9, X = 0 - 9). At start-up, RN0 15 contains al/possible area codes. As codes are added to RN0 1 - 14, they are automatically deleted from RN0 15. 3. Input codes to be deleted from this RNO. As codes are deleted from RN0 1 - 14, they are automaticallyadded to RN0 15. Codes can onlybe deleted from RN0 15byadding them to another RNO. 4. = Ignore line entered. . = Backspace. 6 Stop printing and return to REQ. :B m: Exit program, 12-4 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-312 FEBRUARY1992 NOTE: N=2-9, O/l=Oorl, X=0-9. ACD (Area Codes-Delete)-indicates codes that are to be deleted from this codes are deleted from RN0 1 - 14, automatically added to RN0 15. Codes be deleted from RN0 15 by adding another RN0 (1 - 14). Enter: NO/i X NO/i X etc. When entering DLCl, next prompt will be: OCA (Off ice Codes-Add)-Indicates the off ice codes that are assigned to the AOC modification table. Office codes may be added either as single 3-digit codes or as a “range,” covering up to 10 sequential 3-digit codes. Ranges are entered by using a4-digit format, where the first two digits are common to all codes in this range; the third digit represents the starting (from) point of the range; and the fourth digit represents the end (to) point of the range for the last office code digit. See RANGES example. Enter: NXXX NXX NXXXX etc. I’- AOC (Table the area RNO. As they are can only them to 12-4), the OCD (Office Codes-Delete)-Indicates the office codes that are to be deleted from the AOC modification table. Office codes may be deleted by using either single 3-digit codes or a range of codes (entered in the same manner as a range for adding codes). See OCA prompt and RANGES example. Enter: NXXX NXX NXXX etc. TN0 (Table Number)-Selects one of the 16 area/ office code modification (AOC) tables that are to be used. Enter: 01 - 16. ARC (Area Code)-Identifies the area code to which this AOC table is assigned. Enter: NO/IX or NONE. I RN0 (Route Table Number)-Specifies the number of the route table (RNO) that is to be followed for the calls meeting the area/office code criteria of this AOC table. Enter: 1 - 15. RANGES I 4-digit I Format EXAMPLE: I 1 I Off ice Codes 2209 220 - 229 2316 231 - 236 2478 I 247 - 248 I TABLE 12-4 Area/Off ice Code Table Load the DLCl Utility Program. I I ITEM When TYPE is prompted, PROMPT 1 proceed as follows: USER ENTRY I NOTE TYPE AOC Table Number TN0 1-16 Area Code ARC N 0/1X or NONE Route Table Number RN0 Off ice Codes - Add OCA NXX NXXX etc. 1 Off ice Codes - Delete OCD NXX NXXX etc. 1 NOTE: A maximum are possible of 800 3-digit numbers (7309 = 730 - 739). I 1-15 (in the format NXX [N = 2 - 9, X = 0 - 91) are permittted. 12-5 I Ranges PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-312 FEBRUARY 1992 NOTE: . . . or. . . NONE (this entry for LC3 will also change LC2 & LCl to NONE for this schedule). Codes cannot be added and deleted in the same pass through the table. A separate pass is required for each step. r LC2 (Class 2 Routing Priority)-Defines the routing choice sequence that is accessible to station classes LC2 and LCl during Schedule A time interval. Enter the routes (RTl - 6) in the order of selection priority. Enter: Routing Choice (for example: RT5 RT2 etc.). or. . . NONE. ’” 3. Least Cost Routing Data Block 2 (Tables 12-5 - 12-6) When entering DLC2, RTB (Table 124, the next prompt will be: RN0 (Route Table Number)-identifies the number of the Route Table to which an Area Code Table (ACT) and/or an AOC Table is assigned. Entering OUT will clear all Route Tables. Entering RN0 1 - 15, followed by OUT will clear RN0 XX. Enter: 1 - 15 or 1 - 150UT. LCl (Class 1 Routing Priority)-Defines the routing choice sequence that is accessible to station class LCl during Schedule A time interval. Enter the routes (RTl - 6) in the order of selection priority. Enter: Routing Choice (for example: RT4 RT3 etc.). or. . . NONE. * ‘. RTl - 6 (Route Definition)-Defines the Trunk Group for each route in this Route Table. If a Trunk Group is entered at this time, then a Modify Digits Table must also be entered. A particular routing definition (RTl, RT2, etc.) may only be used one time per routing schedule. Enter: XX MM or NONE. (XX = Trunk Group Number 0 - 15.) (MM = Modify Digits Table Number 1 12.) .. NOTE: The DCOS Data Block is used to define station class of service for Least Cost Routing (LCR) by using three classes of service for LCR. Theaccesspermitted to each LCR Class of Service is as follows: LCI-Allows routes defined for LC3, LC2; and LCI. LCZ-Allows routes defined for LC2 and LC3. LC3-Allows routes defined for LC3 only. NOTE: The existing Route Schedule data will be automatically printed after the response to RT6 prompt is entered. .i ‘.- SCHB (Route Schedule B)-Defines the time-ofday interval for the second of three possible routing schedules. The start time, which is the end time of Schedule A, will be automatically printed (24-hour-clock format). Enter: End Time (for example: 2300). SCHA (Route Schedule A)-Defines the time-ofday interval for the first of three possible routing schedules. Start and end times are entered by using a 24-hour-clock format. Enter: Start Time End Time. (for example: 0900 1700.) LC3 (Class 3 Routing Priority)-Same LC3 (Class 3 Routing Priority)-Defines the routing choice sequence that is accessible to station classes LC3, LC2, and LCl during Schedule A time interval. Enter the routes (RTl - 6) in the order of selection priority. Enter: Routing Choice (for example: RT6 RTl etc.). as LC3 in Schedule A, but for Schedule B time interval. Enter: Routing Choice (for example: RT5 RT4 etc.). . ..or... NONE (this entry for LC3 will also cause LC2 & LCl to be longer for this schedule). 12-6 ” PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-312 FEBRUARY1992 LC2 (Class 2 Routing Priority)-Same as LC2 in Schedule A, but for Schedule B time interval. Enter: Routing Choice (for example: RT3 RT2 etc.). , . . or.. . NONE. LC2 (Class 2 Routing Priority)-Same as LC2 in Schedules A and B, but for Schedule C time interval. Enter: Routing Choice (for example: RT2 RT3 etc.). or. . . NONE. ” ’ LCl (Class 1 Routing Priority)-Same as LCl in Schedule A, but for Schedule B time interval. Enter: Routing Choice (for example: RTl RT6 etc.). or.. . NONE. **’ LCI (Class 1 Routing Priority)-Same as LCI in Schedules A and B, but for Schedule C time interval. Enter: Routing Choice (for example: RT4 RT5 etc.). or.. . NONE. ’” SCHC (Route Schedule Q-Defines the time-ofday interval for the last of three possible routing schedules. The start time, which is the end time of Schedule B, and the end time, which is the start time of Schedule A, will be automatically printed (24-hour-clock format). No entry is necessary. LC3 (Class 3 Routing Priority)-Same as LC3 in Schedules A and B, but for Schedule C time interval. Enter: Routing Choice (for example: RTl RT6 etc.). . ..or... NONE (this entry for LC3 will also cause LC2 and LCl to be NONE for this schedule). 12-7 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-312 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE12-5 Route Table Load the DLC2 Utility Program. When TYPE is prompted, proceed as follows: Default values are noted in parentheses (), 12-8 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTlON200-255-312 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE12-5(continued) NOTES: 1. OUT = Will clear all Route Tables. NN OUT = Will clear Route Table NN. 2. Route definition - maximum is six routes, Format is: XX = Trunk Group Number (0 - 15). MM = Modify Digits Table to be applied (1 - 12). Modify Digits Table must be entered. 3. Existing Route Schedule data is printed automatically after the response to RT6prompt is entered. 4. Time-of-day interval for this routing schedule. 5. Maximum combinedentries for LC3, LC2, LCl are sixroutes. Do notassign the same route tomore . than one c/ass. 6. Entry required for schedule B end time only. Schedule A end time has definedschedule B start time. 7. No entry required. Schedule A start time has defined the schedule C end time and schedule B end time has defined the schedule C start time. 8. LC3, LC2, and LCI are used in DCOS Data Block to define Station Class of Service. The access permitted to each class is as follows: LCl = All routes defined for LCl, LC2, LC3. LC2 = Routes defined for LCZ, LC3. LC3 = Routes defined for LC3 on/v. 9. Ignore line entered, Backspace. Stop printing and return to REC. Exit program. 12-9 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-312 FEBRUARY1992 ADD (Digits to be Added)-Defines the actual digits to be prefixed to a dialed number. The system will prefix these digits after removing the number of digits defined by the digits-to-bedeleted (DLT) prompt. Maximum:, 20 digits. Enter: Actual digits to be prefixed or NONE. When entering DLCP, MDT(Table 12-6), the next prompt will be: TN0 (Modify Digits Table Number)-Specifies the Modify Digits Table Number assigned to the defined routes in the Route Tables (RTl - RT6). The same Modify Digits Table may be used for more than one route. Enter: Table Number (1 - 12). DLT (Digits to be Deleted )-Defines the number of digits that are to be deleted from the start of a dialed number. The system will remove these digits before prefixing any digits defined by the digits-to-be-added (ADD) prompt. Maximum: 10 digits. Enter: Number of digits to be deleted or NONE. . NOTE: The following codes are used in response to the ADD prompt to insert pauses: *I = lsecond pause, *2 = 2-second pause, *3 = 6second pause (*X = 1 digit). TABLE12-6 Modify Digits Table Load the DLC2 Utility Program. When TYPE is prompted, ITEM proceed USER ENTRY PROMPT ‘: as follows: TYPE MDT Table Number TN0 1 - 12 Number of digits to be deleted from dialed number DLT XX etc., maximum: (NONE) Digits to be prefixed to dialed numb& ADD 10 or NONE XXXX etc, maximum: 20 or NONE (NONE) NOTE 1 18.2 (continued) Default values are noted in parentheses ( j. NOTES: 1. Default Value = NONE. 2. The following codes are used to insert pauses in response to ADD: *I = 1 digit = 1 -second pause. l 2 = I &git = 2-second pause. *3 = 1 digit = 6-second Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. 12-10 pause. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-312 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE12-6 (continued) Error Codes Program Name: Least Cost Routing ERLCR 00 Input time (in seconds) is out of range (0 - 99). ERLCR 01 Area Code (N 0/1X) is out of range (N = 2 -9, X = 0 - 9). ERLCR 02 Route number is out of range (I - 15). ERLCR 03 Service Code error. ERLCR 04 Service Codes exceed the maximum (10). ERLCR 05 Table number is out of range (1 - 16). 1 ERLCR 06 1 Office Code is out of range. ERLCR 07 Trunk Group number is out of range. ERLCR 08 Modify Digits Table number is out of range (1 - 12). ERLCR 09 Route number error (RTl - RT6). ERLCR 10 The number of digits to be deleted is out of range (10). ERLCR 11 The digits to be added exceed the maximum (20). ERLCR 12 The diait to be added is incorrect. ERLCR 13 and DLCP) Meaning Error Code 1 Data Block (DLCl 1 Numeric error (0 - 9). ERLCR 14 The number of Area Codes exceeds the maximum (maximum = 160). ERLCR 15 The number of Office Codes exceeds the maximum (maximum = 800). ERLCR 16 Schedule time is out of ranoe (HH = 0 - 23, MM = 0 - 59). 1 ERLCR 17 ERLCR 18 1 Schedule time error. Route number has alreadv been assianed. 12-11 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-312 FEBRUARY1992 4. Print Least Cost Routing Data Block (Table 12-7) AOCNOXX-Area/Office output. 4.01 To use the Print Least Cost Routing Data Block (PLCR Program). l Perform Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PLCR (in response to the OK prompt). l When the REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded, enter one of the following commands: AOCRNXX-All Area/Office Code Tables that point to Route Number (RN) XX will be output. CODXXX-All Area/Office Code Tables relating to Area Code XXX will be output. RTALL-All RTXX-Route LCRALL-Ail be output. Least Cost Routing ACTALL-All Parameters will be output. Table XX will be output. Data Blocks will Table using Trunk Group XX will be RTMDXX-All Route Tables Table XX will be output. using Modify Digits Area Code Tables will be output. MDTXX-Modify ACTRNXX-All Area Code Tables that point to Route Number (RN) XX will be output. AOCALL-All output. Route Tables TGPXX-All Route Tables will be output. PAR-Miscellaneous output. Code Table XX will be Area/Office Code Tables will be 12-12 Digits Table XX will be output. . PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-312 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE12-7 Procedure - Print Least Cost Routing Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response ITEM PROMPT is received, USER ENTRY proceed as follows: NOTE PLCR OK - DISK LOADING 1 =JQ - EXECUTE - 1 REQ NOTES: 1. The following LCRALL PAR ACTALL ACTRNXX AOCALL AOCNOXX AOCRNXX CODXXX RTALL RTXX TGPXX RTMDXX MDTXX 2. . ii d:m: = = = = = = = = = = = = = = responses are possible: Outputs all Least Cost Routing Data Blocks, Outputs Miscellaneous Parameters Table. Outputs all Area Code Tables. Outputs all Area Code Tables that point to Route Number (RNO) XX. Outputs all Area/Office Code Tables. Outputs Area/Office Code Table XX. Outputs all Area/Office Code Tables that point to Route Number (RNO) XX. Outputs all Area Code and Area/Office Code Tables relating to Area Code XXX. Outputs all Route Tables. Outputs Route Table XX. Outputs all Route Tables using Trunk Group XX. Outputs all Route Tables using Modify Digits Table XX. Outputs Modify Digits Table XX. Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. 12-13 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-313 FEBRUARY 1992 CHAPTER 13 AWU SRC (Automatic LODGING/HEALTH CARE DATA 1. Lodging/Health (Table 13-l) Care Features Data Block 1.Ol The Lodging/Health Care Features Data Block (DHMF Program) defines the number of miscella- AWU POR (Automatic Wake-up)-Identifies the output port that the system will use to send automatic wake-up verification information. Enter: SMDR, TTY, or NONE. neous parameters that pertain to the Lodging/ Health Care features. Data is entered as follows: NOTE: Be sure to run the DMYC program (Back-up Memory Check Entry Procedure) when the system is put into the Lodging/Health Care mode of operation, and before this program is entered, REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program loaded. Three responses are possible: NEW-To create a new Data Block. CHGTo alter an existing Data Block. OUT-To delete an existing Data Block. NOTE: If OUT is entered, “NONE. ” all entries Wake-up Source)- identifies the source that the called party will hear after the wake-up call has been answered. Enter: MOH-Music-on-Hold. VCE-Preprogrammed digitized voice announcement. NONE-Silence. MW POR put port waiting Enter: (Message Waiting)-Identifies the outthat the system will use to send message verification information. SMDR, TTY, or NONE. MR POR (Message Registration)-Identifies the output port that the system will use to send message registration information. Enter: SMDR, TTY, or NONE. has RMS (Room Status Audit)-Identifies the output pot-tthat the system will use to send Room Status Audit information. Enter: SMDR, -TTY, or NONE. will be set to 13-1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-313 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE 13-I Procedure - Lodging/Health Care Features Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. ITEM If an OK response PROMPT is received, proceed as follows: USER ENTRY NOTE DHMF OK - DISK LOADING NEW, CHG, OUT 1 AWU SRC MOH, VCE, or NONE (NONE) 2 AWU POR SMDR, TTY, or NONE (NONE) Message Waiting MW POR SMDR, TTY, or NONE (NONE) Message Registration MR POR SMDR, TTY, or NONE (NONE) RMS SMDR, lTY, or NONE (NONE) REQ Automatic Wake-up Source Automatic Wake-up Room Status Audit Default values are noted in parentheses ( ). NOTES: 1. “OUT” sets all entries to “NONE. ” 2. MOH = Music-on-Hold source. Preprogrammed digitized voice announcement. Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. Error Codes I Program 1 Error Code 1 Name: Lodging/Health Care Features Data Block (DHMF) Meanina ERHMF 00 The input data was erased because the program was aborted during a NEW entry. ERHMF 01 The input DN conflicts with an existing DN. 13-2 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-313 FEBRUARY1992 2. Print Lodging/Health Block (Table 13-2) Care Features Data 2.01 To use the Print Lodging/Health Care Features Data Block (PHMF Program): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PHMF (in response to the OK prompt). l l When an REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded: Enter: PRT. The Lodging/Health Care Features Data Block will be output, with features listed in the order that they were input in the DHMF Program. .,.- TABLE13-2 Procedure - Print Lodging/Health Care Features Data Block Authorization Procedure ITEM must be completed. If an OK response PROMPT is received, proceed as follows: NOTE USER ENTRY OK PHMF - DISK LOADING PRT REQ 1 - EXECUTE I REO NOTES: response possible is: PRT = Outputs Lodging/Health = Ignore line entered. = Backspace. = Stop printing and return to REQ. = Exit program. 13-3 Care Features Data Block. 1 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-313 FEBRUARY 1992 3.01 TheMessage Registration DataBlock(DMRD Program) defines all parameters for the Message Registration feature. SVT (Supervision Time)-Defines the time allowed for a call to be connected before the First Billing Interval begins. This timer will start when the system accesses a trunk during an outgoing local call. Enter: 0 - 120 (time in seconds). REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program has loaded. Two responses are possible: CHG-To change an existing Data Block. OUT-To delete an existing Data Block. TNl-TN5 (Rate Tables 1 - 5)-These prompts require no user entry. They wiil be followed by prompts which request parameters for the operation of the Message Registration features. ICC (Interchangeable Codes)-A “Y” informs the system that interchangeable codes are ,used. These are office codes that have 0 or 1 as the second digit (NO/i X format). Area codes will be identified as the three digits following the DDD prefix. Office codes will be identified as the first three digits when a DDD prefix is not dialed (see DDP prompt). Enter: Y or N. FBI (First Billing Interval)-Defines time for the first billing interval. Enter: 1 - 180 (time in seconds). 3. Message 13-3) Registration Data Block (Table FBU (First Billing Unit)-Defines the number billing units per first billing interval. Enter: 0 - 100. of IBI (Incremental Billing Interval)-Defines the interval time for each incremental billing interval. Enter: 1 - 180 (time in seconds). DDP (Direct Distance Dialing Prefix)-Defines the Direct Distance Dialing (DDD) prefix in the Numbering Plan Area (NPA). If ICC is “Y,” then NO/l X and NXX become interchangeable, enabling area codes and office codes to have 0 or 1 as their second digit. In this case, the DDP is used to differentiate between the two code types (see example). If the ICC response is “N”, then calls will be made using the normal NPA formula of NO/lx and NNX. Enter: 1, 2, or 3 digits or NONE. Example: the interval IBU (Incremental Billing Units)-Defines number of billing units per incremental interval. Enter: 0 - 100. the billing CST (Unit Cost)-Defines the cost per each billing unit. Enter: 1 - 500 (cost in cents). OCA (Office Codes-Add)-Indicates the office codes that are to be added to the office code table and defines the calls that are to be billed according to one of the five Rate Tables. Office codes may be added either by using single 3digit codes or by using 4-digit range codes. Enter: NXXX NXX NXXX etc. If ICC is “Y” and the DDP is programmed as 1, then the dialed number 209-1234 is recognized as a call within the home area code, while the dialed number 1-209-555-l 234 is recognized as acall outside the home area code. If ICC is “N”, this dialing plan is not used. OCD (Off ice Codes-Delete)-indicates the off ice codes that are to be deleted from the office code table. Office codes may be deleted either by using single 3-digit codes or by using 4-digit range codes. Enter: NXXX NXX NXXX etc. HAC (Home Area Code)-Defines the area code in which the system is operating. A home area code is also used to analyze dialed numbers which do not contain an area code. Data entered here will appear in theToll Restriction Data Block (DTOL Program, PAR table, HAC prompt). Enter: Area Code (NO/l X). NOTE: N=2-9, 13-4 X=0-9. PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-313 FEBRUARY1992 RANGES 4-digit EXAMPLE: Format Off ice Codes 2209 220-229 2316 231 -236 2478 247-248 TABLE13-3 Procedure - Message Registration Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response ITEM PROMPT OK is received, proceed as follows: USER ENTRY NOTE DMRD - DISK LOADING - ICC 1 CHG; OUT I 1 Y or N (N) ! DDP 1 1 - 3 digits or NONE (NONE) ! HAC 1 NO/lx (NONE) Supervision Time SVT 1 0 - 120 (time in seconds) (NONE) Rate Table #l TN1 First Billing interval FBI First Billing Unit FBU 1 0 - 100 (NONE) IBI 1 1 - 180 (time in seconds) (NONE) IBU 1 0 - 100 (NONE) I interchangeable Code? I DDD Prefix Home Area Code ! Incremental Billing Interval Incremental Billing Units ! Unit Cost Off ice Codes - Add Off ice Codes - Delete I Default values are noted in parentheses =Q 1 2 1 - 180 (time in seconds) (NONE) CST 1 - 500 (cost in cents) (NONE) OCA NXX or NXXX 3 OCD I NXX or NXXX I 3&4 0. (con timed, NOTES: 1. N=2-9,X=0-9. 2. This Rate Table will be followed by four other Rate Tables with the same prompts (FBI - OCD). 3. A maximum of 800 3-digit numbers (in the format NXX[N = 2 - 9, X = 0 - 91) is permitted. Ranges are possible (7309 = 730 - 739). 4. Rate Table 5 contains all office codes. As office codes are added to any Rate Table 1 - 4, they are automatically deleted from Rate Table 5. If an office code is deleted from any Rate Table 1 - 4, it is automatically returned to Rate Table 5. Ignore line entered. Stop printing and return to REQ. 13-5 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-313 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE13-3(continued) Error Codes Program Name: Message Registration Error Code Data Block (DMRD) Meaning ERMRD 00 Numeric error (0 - 9). ERMRD 01 Area Code (NO/IX) is out of range (N = 2 - 9, X = 0 - 9). ERMRD 02 Supervision Time is out of range (0 - 120). ERMRD 03 Billing Interval is out of range (1 - 180). ERMRD 04 Billing Unit is beyond time (0 - 100). ERMRD 05 Unit Cost is bevond limit (1 - 500). ERMRD 06 Office Code (NXX) is out of range (N = 2 - 9, X = 0 - 9). ERMRD 07 The number of Office Codes exceeds the maximum (800). ERMRD 08 The input data was erased because the program was aborted during a NEW entry. ERMRD 10 1 MRD data does not exist (REQ = CHG, OUT). 13-6 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-313 FEBRUARY1992 4. Print Message 13-4) Registration Data Block(Table MRDPAR-The system will output a partial list of the Message Registration Data Block (ICC, DDP, HAC, and S/T). 4.01 To use the Message Registration Data Block (PMRD Program): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PMRD (in response to the OK prompt). l When an REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded: Enter: One of the following commands: RTNPAR-The system will output a partial list of the Message Registration Data Block (FBI, FBU, IBI, IBU, and CST for Rate Tables 1 - 5). RTNALL-The system will output all the data from the Rate Tables 1 - 5 (FBI, FBU, IBI, IBU, CST, and OCA). There may be a delay in the output after the OCA prompt. MRDALL-Ail Message Registration Data will be output. There may be a delay in the output after the OCA prompt. TABLE.13-4 Procedure - Print Message Registration Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response ITEM PROMPT is received, proceed as follows: USER ENTRY NOTE PMRD OK - DISK LOADING 1 REQ - EXECUTE - I =Q I I 1. I NOTES: 1. The following responses are possible: MRDALL =- Outputs all Message Registration Data. There may be a delay in the output after the OCA prompt. MRDPAR = Outputs a partial list of the Message Registration Data Block (ICC, DDP, HAC, and SW,). RTNPAR = Outputs a partiallist of the Message Registration Data Block(FBI, FBU, IBI, IBU, and CST for Rate Tables 1 - 5). RTNALL = Outputs all the data from Rate Tables 1 - 5 (FBI, FBLJ, IBI, IBU, CST, and OCA). There may be a delay in the output after the OCA prompt. Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. 13-7 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-314 FEBRUARY 1992 CHAPTER 14 STR (Store Number)-This prompt requests the number to be stored. Enter: Address code, space, and number in the following format: Example: 0 9*NPANNXXXXX 1 9*NPANNXXXXX SPEED DIAL LIST DATA 1. Speed Dial List Data Block (Table 14-I) 1.01 The Speed Dial List Data Block (DSDL Program) contains all numbers stored on the 90number Speed Dial - System list and the 50 lonumber Speed Dial - Station lists. NOTE: In these examples, 9 is Therefore, a “““is entered pause for dial tone delay. one of the 16 allowable 1.02 The DSDL Program allows initial storage or changes to any speed dial list from the maintenance terminal. Data is entered as follows: REQ (Request)--Indicates that the program has loaded. Two responses are possible: CHG-To alter an existing or to enter a new Data Block. OUT-To delete an existing Data Block. LNO (List Number)-The number of the list to be changed or deleted. Enter: 00 (for System List) or 01 - 50 (for Station List). NOTE:’ If the OUTcommand was entered in response to REQ above, then no other data is required. 14-l a trunk access code. to cause a 3-second The “*“is counted as digits. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-314 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE14-l Procedure - Speed Dial List Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. ITEM If an OK response PROMPT is received, proceed as follows. NOTE USER ENTRY DSDL OK - DISK LOADING - I I I RN List Number I LNO Store Number I STR CHG, OUT I 2&3 19’ NPANN XXXXX I 2 9* NPANN XXXXX STR 4 ma! I I 0 9’ NPANN XXXXX Repeat program, if necessary. RR0 NOTES: 1. XX = List number. 00 = System List (90 numbers maximum: 10 - 99). 01 - 50 = Station Lists (10 numbers each maximum: 0 - 9). 2. Input procedure is: Address Code + [space] + Access Code + Pause + DN. For example: 1 9*NPANNXXXX. 3. Stored numbers may be any length between 1 and 16 digits; * enters a 3second pause and is counted as one of the 16 diaits. 4. No further prompt will be &en until= is entered. = Ignore line entered. ii = Backspace. = Stop printing and return to REQ. , m = Exit program. Error Codes Program Name: Standard Telephone Error Code Data Block (DSTT) Meaning ERSDL 00 The input list number is out of range (0 - 50 are allowed). ERSDL 01 The address code of the system list is out or range (10 - 99 are allowed). ERSDL 02 The address code of the station list is out of range (0 - 9 are allowed). ERSDL 03 I Invalid DN (1 - 16 digits are allowed). 14-2 I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-314 FEBRUARY1992 2. Print Speed Dial List Data Block (Table NOTE: There are 50 Station Speed Dial Lists (LSTOI - LST50), each of which may have up to ten numbers (0 - 9). 14-2) 2.01 To use the Print Speed Dial List Data Block (PSDL Program): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PSDL (in response to the OK prompt). l When the REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded: Enter one of the following commands: ALL-All of the Speed SYST-System LSTXX-Station The output format is as follows: REQ LSTOG LNO 06 LOO2 SDC SDU LO03 LO10 STR 00 9*7147305000 01 9*9142731750 02 NONE 03 ‘( Dial lists will be output. Speed Dial list will be output. Speed Dial list XX will be output. 09 rr TABLE14-2 Procedure - Print Speed Dial List Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response PROMPT ITEM is received, proceed as follows: USER ENTRY NOTE PSDL OK - DISK LOADING 1 REQ - EXECUTE - I REQ I I NOTES: 1. The following responses are possible: ALL = Outputs all Speed Dial List Data Blocks. SYST = Outputs System Speed Dial List Data Block. LSTXX = Outputs Station Speed Dial List XX Data Blocks. 2. = Ignore line entered. . a = Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. :c m: Exit program. Error Codes Program Error Code ERPST 00 Name: Print Speed Dial List (PSDL) Meaning The list number is out of ranae (0 - 50 is available). 1. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-315 FEBRUARY1992 CHAPTER TRAFFIC 1. Traffic 15 MEASUREMENT Measurement RPT command is given in response to REQ above. 30-Report will occur every 30 minutes, beginning at the time listed as STR (next prompt). 60-Same as above, but at 60-minute intervals. DATA Data Block (Table 15-1) 1 .Ol The Traffic Measurement Data Block (DTRF Program) defines the parameters that control the Traffic Measurement feature. Data is entered as follows: REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program has loaded. Four responses are possible: STT (Start Command)-Starts the recordkeeping and reporting activity when SCH = CMD. (STT must be entered after each RPT request.) RPT (Report Command)-A report will follow if record-keeping has been started with the SIT command (see Table 15-1 a for report format). OUT (Out Command)-Deletes record-keeping and reports. CHG (Change Command)-Establishes or alters the reporting parameters. The next prompt for CHG input will be: NOTE: Reports will continually be output at the specified time intervals unless 77Y is disabled (OFF). Record-keeping will continue, but only the last time interval will be saved and reported when the TTY is enabled. STFLDATE MMDDYY (Start Date)-Defines the start date for record-keeping and reporting, outputs current data, and gives an opportunity for a change. Enter: Start Date: MMDDYY or (no change). q STR.TIME time for current change. Enter: SYST. DATE MMDDYY (System Date)-Reports the date that is currently in memory and gives an opportunity for a change. Enter: New date: MMDDYY or (no change). HHMM (Start Time)-Defines the start record-keeping and reporting, outputs data, and gives an opportunity for a Start Time: HHMM or (no change). q RPT (Report SYST ATT0 A-l-T1 TGPOO q DOW (Day of Week)--Identifies the current day of the week for the system clock. Enter: SUN, MON, TUE, WED,THU, FRI, SAT, or (no change). TGPI 5 q Parameters): (System Data) (Attendant 0) (Attendant 1) (Trunk Group 00) (Trunk Group 15) Selects those parameters that are to be recorded (see Table 15lb). The current data (Y or N) is output for each parameter and an opportunity is given for a change. Enter: Y or N (followed by a for each parameter). SYST. TIME HHMMSS (System Time)--Reports the time that is currently in memory and gives an opportunity for a change. Enter: New time: HHMMSS (24-hour clock) or (no change). ’ ’ q q SCHXXX (Schedule of Reports)-Defines the schedule for reports; outputs the current data; and gives an opportunity for a change. Enter: CMD-Report will occur only when the 15-1 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-315 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE15-1 Procedure - Traffic Measurement Data Block Authorization ITEM Procedure must be completed. If in OK response is received, PROMPT I proceed as follows: I NOTE USER ENTRY I DTRF - DISK ,OADING - .+;s SlT, RPT, OUT, CHG MMDDYY or q 1 (MMDDYY) . .2 SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT (DOW) HHMMSS or q (HHMMSS) 3 4 Schedule I 8 Y or N (N) I ATT0 Y or N (N) 8 ATT1 Y or N (N) 8 TGPOO-TGP15 Y or N (N) 8 Default values are noted in parentheses NOTES: 1. SlT RPT 0. (continued) = = Start Commandused to initialize the program and to start the record-keeping repotting activity. Report Commandif the program had been startedpreviously, a repot? would follow. See Table 15 1a for format. (The RPT command stops record-keeping reporting activity. The STT command must be used to restart record-keeping reporting activity,) OUT = Out Command - used to stop reports. CHG = Change Command - used to alter reporting parameters. 2. The system will output the date in its memory (Month, Day, Year). Any entry (MMDDYY) will overwrite the existing data. A q = no change. q 3. Enter the day of the week: SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, or SAT. A = no change. 4. The system will output the time in its memory (Hour, Minute, Second). An entry (HHMMSS) will overwrite the existing data. A = no change. 5. Schedule of Reports: 30 = Report every 30 minutes beginning at the time listed as STR. DATE (Note 6) and STR. TIME (Note 7). 60 = Repot? every 60 minutes beginning at the time listed as STR.DATE (Note 6) and STR. TIME (Note7). 6. Date that record-keeping and reporting should start. The system will output the date in its memory (Month, Day, Year). An entry (MMDDYY) will overwrite the existing data. A = no change. 7. The time that record-keeping and reporting should start. The system will output the time in its memory (Hour and Minute). An entry (HHMM) will overwrite the existing data. A = no change. 8. Enter Y or N, followed by a to select the parameters to be reported (see Tab/e 15-lb). = Ignore line entered. = Backspace. = Stop printing and return to REQ. = Exit program. q q q q 15-2 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTIONZOO-255-315 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE154a TRAFFICMEASUREMENTREPORTFORMAT ITEM Authorization PROMPT Procedure USER ENTRY OK DTRF - DISK LOADING RPT REQ RPT FROM MM DD YY HH MM SS TO MM DD YY HH MM SS SYST I I I I ATT 1 I TRUNKS I 0000 WK TIM 0000 INC TRK 0000 INC TIM 0000 0 CALL 0000 LPS BSY 0000 l-l-A 0000 OVFL 0000 ATT 0 I I RCVR DLY I TGP 00* I ‘Trunk Groups 01 - 15 are reported in the same way as Group 00. 15-3 (SAME AS Al7 0) INC USE 0000 INC CALL 0000 O.G. USE 0000 O.G. CALL 0000 ATB 0000 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-315 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE15-1b TRAFFICMEASUREMENT PARAMETERS GROUP ITEM RECEIVED TYPE OF MEASUREMENT System DTMF Receiver Delay (3 sec.) Peg Count Attendant #0 Time in Service ccs Work Time ccs Incoming Trunk Calls Peg Count. Time Servicing Incoming Calls ccs Dial 1 Calls Peg Count All Loops Busy Peg Count Average Time to Answer SEC Overflow Peg Count Attendant #l (Same as Attendant #0) Trunks Group 00’ Incoming Usage ccs Incoming Calls Peg Count Outgoing Usage ccs Outgoing Calls Peg Count All Trunks Busv Pea Count . .-- *Trunk Groups 01 - 15 are reported in the same way as Group 00. TABLE15-I (continued) Error Codes Program Name: Traffic Management (DTRF) Error Code I Meaning I The program has already been started. Either the start time has been reached or STT was ERTRF 01 I entered oreviouslv fREQ = Sll7. I I I ERTRF 02 I RPT was entered in response to REQ, but the program has not been started (to correct start time ERTRF 03 I and date. enter SllX I Invalid response. SIT or RPS was entered in response to REQ, but the SCH entry is 30, 60, or NONE. I 15-4 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-316 FEBRUARY1992 CHAPTER 16 ALPHANUMERIC 1. Alphanumeric 16-1) MESSAGING Message Data REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program has loaded. The only response possible is CHG. DATA Block MSG (Message)-Assigns numeric messages. Enter: (Table 1.01 The Alphanumeric Message Data Block (DMSG Program) changes system messages that can be left on 6000-series electronic/l OOO-series digital LCD telephones (five messages are initialized). Initialized 1) The number of the message to be defined. Thesystem willautomaticallyenteraspace after the number. Messages are numbered 0 - 9. Following the message number and space, any existing message will be output. Type the new message (the existing message will be replaced). NONE deletes any existing message but does not add a new one. Messages: I 2 I CALL I I I 3 I BACK AT I 4 I RETURN ON the ten system alpha- 2) The available message characters are: 0 - 9, A - Z, [space], :, -, ?, +, /. Messages can be up to 16 characters in length. I TABLE 16-I Procedure - Alphanumeric Message Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response ITEM PROMPT is received, proceed as follows: USER ENTRY OK NOTE DMSG - DISK LOADING REQ I I *Q I Message CHG I Message Number (0 - 9) + [space] + Message or NONE I l&2 NOTES: 1. The system will output a space after the MSG number is entered, followed by an existing message (if no message exists, then this will remain blank) and another space. Enter the new message or NONE (to delete the message). 2. The characters available for messages are 0 - 9, A - Z, [space], :, -, ?, +, /. Stop printing and return to REQ. Error Codes Program 1 Error Code I ERMSGOO 1 ERMSG 01 Name: Alphanumeric Message Data Block (DMSG) Meaning Message is too long (maximum: 16). Message can only use: 0 - 9, A - Z, [space], :, -, ?, +, /. 16-l I I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-316 FEBRUARY1992 2. Print Alphanumeric (Table 16-2) Message Data program is loaded: Enter: One of the following Block ALL-The system 2.01 To use the Print Alphanumeric Message Data Block (PMSG Program): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PMSG (in response to the OK prompt). l When the REQ prompt is received after the commands: system will output all messages (0 - 9). MSGX-Message x=0-9. in the X will be output. TABLE16-2 Procedure Authorization Print Alphanumeric Message Data Block Procedure must be completed. If an OK response ITEM PROMPT is received, proceed as follows: NOTE USER ENTRY PMSG OK - DISK LOADING - I I NOTES: 1. The following ALL = MSG X = REQ I responses are possible: Outputs all messages. Outputs message X. Ignore line entered, Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. 16-2 I 1 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-317 FEBRUARY1992 CHAPTER 17 call will be routed to an attendant instead of the predefined answering position. This is designed in order to prevent an infinite looping of call routing from happening. ACD DATA 1. ACD Data Block (Table 17-1) OVQT (Overall Queue Timer)-Supervises how long an incoming ACD call is supposed to be placed in a first-in-first-out queue, before it is recalled to an attendant position in the DAY mode and UNA in the NITE mode, defined for the ACD group. There is a one-second resolution time. Enter: 0 - 600 (second), where 0 = minimum time-out (no time supervision). 600 = maximum time-out. 1.01 The ACD Data Block (DACM Program) assigns the ACD application to the PERCEPTION system. A maximum of 16 ACD groups can be assigned to each system. Data for this program is entered as follows: REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program loaded. Three responses are possible: NEW-To create a new Data Block. CHG-To alter an existing Data Block. OUT-To delete an existing Data Block. AGNO (ACD Group 16 ACD groups. Enter: 0 - 15. Number)-Assigns has ANPT (Announcement Pattern)-Provides announcements and music to queuing ACD calls after a predetermined time interval. The system can be programmed to provide flexible announcement patterns, which can be individually assigned to each ACD group. In an ACD application where an annoucement device is connected to a trunk port (TNNX), calls coming in via loop start trunks that are not answered by the ACD agents will not route to the announcement device. These calls will route to the attendant console or UNA. However, TIE, CSA, DID, and ground trunks have disconnect supervision that supports the announcement device hooked up to TNNX, thereby allowing unanswered ACD calls to route to the announcement device. ‘To program the Announcement Pattern, enter one or a combination of the following: one of the APNO (ACD Group Pilot Number)-Identifies the ACD Group pilot number. The system directs all incoming ACD calls to this pilot number. Enter: XXXX = 1-, 2-, 3-, or 4-digit ACD Group pilot number. AFSG (After-shift Group)-Indicates that the ACD group is in after-shift mode. In this mode, the system will route all incoming ACD calls to a predefined after-shift answering position. Each ACD group can be programmed with one aftershift answering position. To choose an eligible answering position, enter one of the following: ATT-Attendant Console. NNNN-Station DN, HuntGroup Pilot Number, or another ACD Group Pilot Number. LNNX, TNNX-Announcement Machine Port Number. NONE-UNA 1) When the system prompts Al (Announcement l), Enter: LNNX, TNNX, or NONE. LNNX and TNNX = Announcement Machine’s port number. NN = Station PCB number, X = Circuit number. NN = Trunk PCB number, X = Circuit number. NONE = End. Bell. NOTES: 7. When an ACD call attempts to overflow to an ACD group which is in after-shift mode, the call willstayat the originalACD queue. 2. /fan ACD call is forwarded from one aftershiftgroup toanotherafter-shiftgroup, the 2) At Ml (Music 1) prompt, Enter: MOH, SLT, or NONE. l MOH = Music-on-Hold. l SLT = Silence. l NONE = End. 17-1 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-317 FEBRUARY1992 3) At A2 (Announcement Enter: LNNX, TNNX, Enter: RBT = Overflow at the end of the time interval before Announcement 1 is connetted. Ml = Overflow at the end of Music 1 time interval. M2 = Overflow at the end of Music 2 time interval. M3 = Overflow at the end of Music 3 time .. interval. NONE = No overflow . NOTE: Continuouslook-aheadisprovided when there are no announcement ports. When announcement ports are programmed, lookahead occurs at the end of MOH. 2) prompt, or NONE. 4) At M2 (Music 2) prompt, Enter: MOH, SLT, or NONE. 5) At A3 (Announcement Enter: LNNX, TNNX, 3) prompt, or NONE. 6) At M3 (Music 3) prompt, Enter: MOH, SLT, or NONE. NOTE: The system will prompt you M3 unless NONE is entered. entered, the next prompt will A 1 through A3 is programmed, be NONE. It must be an AX with Al through When NONE is be REPD. When REPD cannot .., entry. OVFG (Overflow Group)-Designates an overflow destination for an ACD group. Enter: ATT, NNNN, UNA, LNNX/TNNX, or NONE l ATT = Attendant Console. l NNNN = Station DN, Master Distributed Hunt Group pilot number, or another ACD Group pilot number. l UNA = UNA bell. l LNNX/TNNX = Announcement Machine’s port number. l NONE = No overflow. REPD (Repeat Disposition)-Provides the system with the capability to repeat the announcement pattern. However, it is not necessary to repeat the whole pattern. For example, by entering A2 M3, the system can be programmed to just repeat Announcement 2 through Music 3 until a call departs from queue. By entering Al [space] M2, the system will repeat just Announcement 1 and M.usic 2 until a call departs from queue. Enter: AX or MX, AX MX, AX [space] MX (X = 1 - 3), or NONE. When overflowing to a station or trunk port, they CANNOT be the same ports that are used for the Announcement Patterns (prompts Al, A2, and A3). It must be a separate port. Criteria for trunk ports includes: l EAM and/or GRD signaling l Disconnect Supervision l Answer Supervision l First Party Release NOTE: When an AXentryis made, itmustbe followed by an MX entry (AX alone is not allowed). The MXentrymustbeprogrammedaseitherMOH or SL T. OVFD (Overflow Disposition)-Allows the ACD calls waiting in queue to be connected to one of the overflow destinations. The system periodically “looks ahead” so that calls will immediately be routed to the first-available overflow destination. (Any ACD group can be designated as an overflow group for any number of other ACD groups.) Each ACD group queue is associated with an overflow threshold that governs the disposition (timing) of calls to be overflowed. To program the overflow disposition (when to begin overflow of calls), DID trunk ports are not allowed overflow destinations. to be used as RBTT (Ring Back Tone Timer)-Indicates the length of time interval before the system connects queuing ACD calls to the first announcement. Enter: 0 - 120 (second). 17-2 ’ :. ’ PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-317 FEBRUARY 1992 MUTl (Music 1 Timer)-Indicates the connection time of queuing ACD calls to music source 1. Enter: 0 - 255 (second). MUT2 (Music 2 Timer)-indicates the connection time of queuing ACD calls to music source 2. Enter: 0 - 255 (second). MUT3 (Music 3 Timer)-Indicates the connection time of queuing ACD calls to music source 3. Enter: 0 - 255 (second). ALGE (Alarm Generation)-Enables the system to trigger an audible alarm to the supervisor position, when certain predefined thresholds (for example, queue size, queue waiting time) are exceeded. The alarm will remain on until the supervisor presses the m button. Enter: O,l, 2, or NONE. NOTE: One, or a combination of two of the following criteria can be selected to trigger the alarm: 0 = Queue size is greater than the number programmed in ANQO. 1 = Number of calls exceeding call waiting alarm timer 7 (CAT7) is greater than the number of calls programmed in ANQ 1, 2 = Number of calls exceeding call waiting alarm timer2 (CATZ) is greater than the number of calls programmed in ANQZ, ANQO (Alarm: Number of Queue O)-Indicates the queue size threshold that has to be exceeded before an alarm is triggered. Enter: Number of calls to determine queue size. CAT1 (Call Waiting Alarm Timer 1 )-Defines the call waiting timer 1 threshold that has to time out before an alarm is triggered (sets the timer for ANQl). Enter: 0 - 255 (second). ANQI (Alarm: Number of Queue I)-Indicates the queue size threshold, after call waiting timer 1 expires, that has to be exceeded to trigger an alarm. Enter: Number of calls to determine queue size. CAT2 (Call Waiting Alarm Timer 2)-Defines the call waiting timer 2 threshold that has to time out before an alarm is triggered (sets the timer for ANQ2). Enter: 0 - 600 (second). ANQ2 (Alarm: Number of Queue2)-Indicates the queue size threshold, after call waiting timer 2 expires, that has to be exceeded to trigger an alarm. Enter: Number of calls to determine queue size. NOTES: 1. CAT1 and ANQI 2. CAT2 and ANQ2 work together. work together. ALGT (Alarm Guard Timer)-Provides the system with the capability to NOT trigger a new alarm, until the alarm guard timer expires, when a current alarm is being sounded and processed at an ACD group supervisor position. Enter: 0 - 30 (minute). ASPS (Supervisor Password)-Defines a supervisor’s password used to log in to and log out of the ACD group for monitoring purposes. Enter: XXXX = 4-digit number. NOTE: The supervisor’s password long. must be four digits ACWT (After Call Work Time)-Indicates the length of time that an ACD agent is in After Call Work mode, after disconnecting from an ACD call. The agent position remains in this mode until the predefined After Call Work Time expires. During this time the agent position is not available for any incoming ACD calls. There is a one-second resolution time. Enter: 0 - 255 (second). AALN (ACD Agent Line Number)-Indicates an ACD agent’s line number, which is also assigned in the DEKT Data Block. Enter: XXX . . . XXX (XXX = 0 - 127) in response to the A prompt. XXX...XXX(XXX=O-127)inresponse to the D prompt. 17-3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-317 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE 17-1 Procedure-ACD Authorization Data Block Procedure must be completed. ITEM If an OK response is received, PROMPT proceed USER ENTRY OK as follows: NOTE DACM - DISK LOADING - MOH SLT NONE ACD Agent Line Number ACD/MIS Agent’s ID Number & Name AALN A D AAID A xxx xxx XXXX#MMMMMMMM XXXX#MMMMMMMM D xxxx 18 . .. xxx . .. xxx . .. 19 .. . xxxx (con tin uedl 17-4 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-317 FEBRUARY1992 NOTES: 1. A maximum of 16 ACD groups may be assigned to each system. 2. XXXX = I-, 2-, 3-, or 4-digit ACD Group pilot number. 3. The eligible answering positions are: ATT = Attendant Console. NNNN = Station DN, Hunt Group pilot number, or Another ACD Group pilot number. LNNX, TNNX = Announcement machine port number. NONE = UNA bell. 4. This is an overall queue timer. 5. LNNX and TNNX = Announcement machine’s port number. NN = Station PCB number, X = circuit number. X = circuit number. NN = Trunk PCB number, MOH = Music-on-Hold. SLT = Silence. NONE = End. 6. UnansweredACDcalls thatcomein via loopstarttrunks willnotroute toanannouncementdevice, if the device is connected to a trunk port (TNNX). These calls will route to the attendant console or UNA. Unanswered ACD calls that come in via TIE, CSA, DID, and ground trunks will route to the announcement device that is connected to TNNX, because these trunks have disconnect supervision that supports this connection. 7. If AZM3 is entered, the system repeats announcement A2 through music M3. 8. The following describes the Overflow Disposition: = At the end of the time interval, before Announcement I is connected. RBT MI = At the end of Music 1 time interval. M2 = At the end of Music 2 time interval. = At the end of Music 3 time interval. M3 9. The following describes the Overflow Group: A lT = Attendant Console. NNNN = Station DN, External DN, Master Distributed Hunt Group pilot number, or another ACD Group pilot number. UNA = UNA bell. LNNXITNNX = Station/Trunk Announcement Machine’s port number. NONE = No overflow. 10. The time interval before connecting the ACD call to the first announcement. 11. The connection time for the ACD call in queue to music source 1. 12. The connection time for the ACD call in queue to music source 2. 13. The connection time for the ACD call in queue to music source 3. 14. To trigger an alarm, one or a combination of two of the following criteria can be selected: 0 = Queue size is greater than the number entered here. 7 = Number of calls exceeding call waiting alarm timer 7 is grea ter than the number entered here. 2 = Number of calls exceeding call waiting alarm timer2 is grea ter than the number entered here. 15. New alarm will not be triggered until the alarm guard timer expires. 16. The Supervisor (Log-in) password is 4 digits long. 17. This is a time which an agent is not available for ACD calls. 18. XXX is an agent’s line number that is also assigned in the DEKT Data Block. 19. XXXX is an agent’s ID code (Maximum = 4 digits). MMMMMMMM is an agent’s name, which is up to 8 digits long. Ignore line entered. Stop printing and return to REQ. 17-5 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-317 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE 17-la ACD DATA BLOCK ALLOWABLE ENTRIES FOR ANNOUNCEMENTPORT, OVERFLOWAND AFTER-SHIFT DESTINATIONS 1Al A2 A3 1OVERFLOW 1AFTER SHIFT Al A2 A3 0 OVERFLOW 1 AFTER SHIFT1 Legend: TABLE 0 0 1 X 1 0 I X I X = Used 0 0 = Not Used 17-1 (continued) Error Codes Program Name: ACD Data Block (DACM) Error Code Meaning ERAMD 00 The group has already been assigned (REQ = NEW). ERAMD 01 The group is not assigned (REQ = CHG or OUT). ERAMD 02 The input data was erased because the program was aborted during a NEW data entry. ERAMD 03 The input data conflicts with an existing access code. ERAMD 04 The input data is not assigned. ERAMD 05 Invalid port number or the input trunk type is not allowed. ERAMD 06 The last announcement ERAMD 07 The after-shift group does not exist. ERAMD 08 The repeat pattern does not exist. ERAMD 09 The overflow disposition does not exist. ERAMD 10 The overflow group does not exist. ERAMD 11 The agent line is busy. ERAMD 12 The maximum number of agent line numbers has already been assigned (128). ERAMD 13 The maximum number of agent ID numbers has already been assigned (256). ERAMD 14 The input port has already been assigned to another kind of announcement ERAMD 15 The announcement ERAMD 16 The input data has already been assigned. ERAMD 17 The announcement port has already been assigned to its maximum number of appearances (16). ERAMD 18 The input data is the agents ID number. ERAMD 19 The input DN is the private CO’s DN. ERAMD 20 The input port is not assigned in DEKT or DTRK data block. ERAMD 21 The input port’s DN is not assigned. ERAMD 22 The input ACD pilot number has already been assigned to another ACD group’s “After-shift Group,” or “Overflow Destination.” ERAMD 23 The agent line number or agent’s ID number is not assigned in the group. ERAMD 24 The agent line number or agents ID number is currently logged in. pattern is not “Music.” port. port is busy. 17-6 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-317 FEBRUARY1992 2. Print ACD Data Block (Table 17-2) AAID (ACD/MlS Agent ID Number and Name)Indicates an ACD agent’s ID number (maximum = 4 digits) and name (maximum = 8 digits). Enter: XXXX#MMMMMMMM . . . XXXX#MMMM MMMM (in response to the A prompt). xxxx . . . XXXX (in response to the D prompt). 2.01 To use the Print ACD Program): l l NOTES: 1. XXXX = Agent’s ID, and MMMMMMMM = Agent’s name. 2. When deleting, only the agent’s ID number needs to be entered. Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PACM (in response to the OK prompt). After the program has loaded and the REQ prompt is received, enter one of the following commands: ALL-All ACD Group Data Block will be output. GRPXX-ACD IMPORTANT Data Block (PACM Group XX Data Blockwill be output. NOTE! The MIS programming procedures are described in detail in the PERCEPTlONe,, ACD/MIS Administrator’s Manual. TABLE17-2 Procedure-Print Authorization ACD Data Block Procedure ITEM must be completed. If an OK response PROMPT is received, proceed as follows: USER ENTRY OK NOTE PACM - DISK LOADING 1 REQ - EXECUTE - I I REQ 1 I NOTES: 7. The following responses are possible: ALL = All ACD Group Data Block will be output. GRPXX = ACD Group XX Data Block will be output. Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing snd return to REQ. Exit program. Error Codes Program Name: Print ACD Data Block (PACM) Error Code ERPAM 00 Meaning The input group number is out of range. 17-7 I PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-318 FEBRUARY 1992 CHAPTER 18 A (Account Codes to Add)-Defines the account codes. (The A prompt appears only if TYPE = ACTA.) Enter: I- - 12-digit Account Codes (spaces between them) depending on digit length, as defined in the ACL of DMDR. VERIFIABLE ACCOUNT CODES DATA 1. Verifiable Account Codes Data Block (Table 18-I) 1.01 If a station user is required (via the COS) to enter verifiable account codes, the Verifiable Account Codes Data Block (DVAC Program) enables the system to verify the account codes entered. The account code can be a 1 - - 12-digit code, and it is output via the SMDR port as part of the SMDR data. NOTE: DMDR’s ACL MUST be programmed before the Verifiable Account Codes in the DVAC program will be operable. Data for this program is entered as follows: NOTE: For ease of entry, Account Codes will automatically be distributed to the appropriate tables. TABLE NO. (Table Number)-Indicates the table number that the account codes are to be deleted from. (The TABLE NO. prompt appears only if TYPE = ACTD.) Enter: 0 - 14. ACT-(TABLE #) (Account Number)-The Table Number (from the Table Number indicated in TABLE NO. entry) of the account code that is to be deleted (see Table 18-la). REQ (Request)-Indicates that the program has loaded. CHG is the only possible response. NOTE: No entry to the ACTprompt is necessary. The system will print out the account codes from the entry at the TABLE NO. prompt. TYPE (Data Type)-Indicates the addition or deletion of verified account codes. Enter: ACTA (to add codes), or ACTD (to delete codes). D (Account Codes to Delete)-Defines the account codes (the D prompt appears only if TYPE = ACTD). Enter: The number associated with each account code to be deleted. ACL (Account Code Length)-Defines the length of the account code that is to be used, or indicates that no account code is to-be used. (The ACL prompt appears only if TYPE = ACTA.) NOTES: 1. The Account Code Length (ACL) is defined in the DMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Program. 2. No entry to the ACL prompt is possible here. The system will print out the information from the ACL prompt in the DMDR Program. 18-1 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-318 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE18-1 Procedure-Verifiable Authorization Account Codes Data Block Procedure must be completed. ITEM If an OK response PROMPT is received, proceed as follows: USER ENTRY NOTE DVAC OK - DISK LOADING CHG REQ Account Code Add I TYPE I ACTA I Account Code Length ACL No entry required 1 Account Codes to Add A 1 - 12-digit Account Codes 2 Account Code Delete TYPE ACTD Table Number TABLE Account Code Number o- 14 3 ACTX No entry required 4 D 1 - 4 digits 5 NO. (continued) NOTES: 1. No entry is allowed here. This will be the same information from the ACL prompt in the DMDR Program. 2. You may add more than one account code. If you add m&e than one account code, put a space between each. The length of the account code must match the length specified in the ACL prompt. 3. There is a maximum of 75 tab/e numbers. (Use P VAC: T5L ACL to identify which table a code is in.) 4. The system will print out the account codes that have a/ready been programmed in the fable entered in the TABLE NO. prompt. 5. Enter the corresponding number(s) of the account code(s) you wish to delete. = Ignore line entered. = Backspace. = Stop printing and return to REQ. = Exit program. TABLE18-la NUMBER OF VERIFIABLE ACCOUNTCODES ACL DIGIT LENGTH 12,ll 10,9 8,7 6,5 4 3 2 1 NUMBER OF CODES 500 600 750 1000 1500 1000 100 10 NUMBER OF CODES PER TABLE 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 10 TABLE NUMBERS o-9 o-11 o-14 o-19 o-14 o-9 0 0 USED 18-2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-318 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE18-l (continued) Error Codes Program Name: Verifiable Account Error Code I I Codes Data Block (DVAC) Meaning ERACT 00 The input number of digits is incorrect. Must conform with ACL. ERACT 01 The account code has already been assigned. ERACT 02 The maximum number of jlccount codes has already been assigned. ERACT 03 The inout table number is out of ranoe. ERACT 04 1 (REQ = OUT). The verifiable account code table number is out of range. ERACT 05 (REQ = OUT). The verifiable account code table number has already been deleted. ERACT 06 The account code conflicts with an existing account code. ERACT 07 The DVAC programmed is being accessed from more than one maintenance TTY, ATT, and/or ATT EKT). ERACT 08 The account code is not assigned. ERACT 09 1 The digit of the account code is “NONE.” 18-3 port (that is, PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-318 FEBRUARY 1992 2. Print Verifiable (Table 18-2) Account Codes Data Block TBL X-Table Number X will be output. TBL X Y-Table 2.01 To use the Print Verifiable Account Codes Data Block (PVAC Program): NOTES: 1. Account Code Length shows the length of the account code that is used, or indicates that no account codes are used. 2. TABLE #/Account Number indicates the accountcode (from the Table Number(s) indicated) that is being printed. Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: PVAC (in response to the OK prompt). After the program has loaded and the REQ prompt is received, enter one of the following commands: l l TBL ALL-All Numbers X and Y will be output, Table Numbers will be output. TABLE18-2 Procedure-Print . Verifiable Account Codes Data Block Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response is received, proceed as follows: ITEM PROMPT USER ENTRY NOTE PVAC OK - DISK LOADING - 1 REQ - EXECUTE REQ I NOTES: 1. The folio wing responses are possible: TBLALL = All Table Numbers will be output. TBLX = Table Number X will be output. TBLXY = Table Numbers X through Y will be output. 2. = Ignore line entered. . = Backspace. 8 Stop printing and return to REQ. :c mz Exit program. 18-4 1 /’ ., PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-319 JANUARY 1993 CHAPTER MAINTENANCE 19 Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1 or 2). Enter: DMYC (in response to the OK prompt). 0 When an REQ prompt is received after the program is loaded: Enter: CHK. l The system will respond with MYR CHK and the process will begin. l PROCEDURES 1. General 1 .Ol The Maintenance Procedures assist with the administration and maintenance of the system. NOTES: 1. This program MUST be run whenever the system isputinto the Lodging/Health Care mode of operation. 2. The memory check will delete all data relating to Lodging/Health Care telephones (i.e., Room Status, Message Waiting, and Message Registration). 3. To clear data after an initialization is performed on the system, run the DMYC Program, and then from the attendant console perform a CFD clear fi u m and MSG clear a b m. Then after 20 minutes, initialize the system, perform a DDMP and reload the system (power off and on). Be sure no additional call forwarding is set prior to the initialization and system reload. 1.02 Four programs are provided: l Back-up Memory Check Entry Procedure-DMYC 0 Data Dump-DDMP l Electronic or Digital Telephone/Attendant Console Test-TTRM l Peripheral Equipment Test-TPER. 1.03 The DDMP and lTRM Programs are available to users of Levels 1,2, and 3, while the DMYC and TPER Programs require Level 1 or 2 authorization. 2. Backup Memory (Table 19-1) Check Entry Procedure 2.01 The DMYC Program checks the system’s memory. To use the DMYC Program: TABLE19-1 Procedure Authorization Backup Memory Check Entry Procedure Procedure must be completed. If an OK response ITEM PROMPT is received, proceed USER ENTRY as follows: NOTE DMYC OK - DISK LOADING CHK REQ Memory Check Memory Checked Out OK Memory Check Failed mR 1 2 CHK DONE ERROR ?iDRS = XXXH COL = XXH NOTES: 1. Caution: Responding to this prompt will start the memory check and will delete all data relating to Lodging/Health Care telephones, (i.e., Room Status, Message Waiting, and Message Registration). ‘. The system is performing a memory check. Wait for the next prompt before pressing any buttons. Ignore line entered. Backspace. Stop printing and return to REQ. Exit program. 19-1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-319 JANUARY1993 l l l The system will print DONE when the memory check is complete. If the memory check fails, the system will respond with: ERROR ADRS = XXXH. COL = XXH. The system must be INITIALIZED after running this program. written on the disk, thereby replacing any previously-recorded data. 3.03 It is possible, via the System Data Block, to specify the DDMP Program as a daily routine and to cause the data to be recorded daily. This enables the speed dialing information that has been entered by the attendant console or station user to be captured on the disk. 3.04 This program is also useful for updating a spare disk. To use the DDMP Program manually (refer to Table 19-2): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: DDMP (in response to the OK prompt). l The system will respond with DPG and then the dumping process will begin. l The system will print DUN when the data transfer is complete. l No other input is required. 3. Data Dump Program (Table 19-2) 3.01 The DDMP Program transfers the contents of the system data memory to the disk for permanent storage. 3.02 Using this program has the same effect as responding Y” to the SAV prompt that is given when a data input program is exited. The current data that is then residing in system memory will be TABLE19-2 Procedure - Data Dump Program Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response is received, proceed as follows: ITEM PROMPT USER ENTRY OK NOTE DDMP Y or N DPG (Y/N) DUN 1 2&3 NOTES: 1. Enter Y to perform data dump. Enter N to abort. 2. Data dump is complete. Stop printing and return to REQ. 19-2 i: . c5%. -a*.-. PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTlON200-255-319 FEBRUARY1992 2) Attendant Console: l Press the LPK button 4. Electronic or Digital Telephone/Attendant Console Test (Tables 19-3 - 19-4) in order to obtain dial tone. 4.01 When the a test sequence Consoles and test is designed in a time-efficient ?TRM Program has been loaded, can be performed at the Attendant electronic/digital telephones. The to checkall functions of the terminals manner. l l l 4.02 To use the TITIM Program (refer to Tables 19-3 and 19-4): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1,2, or 3). Enter: TTRM (in response to the OK prompt). l REQ will be printed when the program has loaded. Dial iclfi (~~~~) on the dialpad. The system will respond by lighting all BLF LEDs. Operate the buttons and observe the responses in the sequence shown in Table 19-4. 3) When all electronic/digital telephones and console(s) have been tested, exit the program: Enter: m m. 4.03 Proceed to the electronic/digital telephone or console that is to be tested. The test is performed as follows: 1) Electronic/Digital Telephone: l Press the D button to obtain dial tone. l Dial p fii R ( aI@ on the dialpad. l The system will respond by lighting all electronic telephone LEDs. l Operate the buttons and observe the responses in the sequence shown in Table 19-3. 19-3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-319 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE19-3 Procedure - Electronic/Digital Authorization Procedure Telephone Test Procedure must be completed. ITEM If an OK response PROMPT is received, proceed as follows: USER ENTRY OK NOTE lTRM - DISK LOADING I REO NOTE: The program e~diuQI3 is now active. Proceed to the electronic/digital 4 1 m via the dialpad. Enter the following q ENTRY 1 ELECTRONICTELEPHONERESPONSE1 telephone to be tested, go off-hook, commands in sequence: ENTRY All LEDs = On Button 2 LED2=On(l Handset off-hook All LEDs = Flash (60 Hz) Button 3 LED3=On(2=Off) Handset on-hook All LEDs = Wink (120 Hz) Button 4 on ma button off 1 BIB button on1 m button on1 All LEDs = Off I Button 5 I =Off) LED4=On(3=Off) ILED5=On(4=Off) All LEDs = l-hold Button 6 LED6=On(5=Off) All LEDs = Off Button 7 LED7=On(6=Off) All LEDs = l-use Button 8 I LED8=On(7=Off) I Button 9 (LED9=On(8=Off) i --. : 3;. * i! ml button on All LEDs = Off m button off SPKR LED = On Button 10 LEDlO=On(g=Off) SPKR LED = Off Button 11 LED 11 =On(lO=Off) Dial 0 LEDO=On Button 12 LED 12 = On (11 = Off) Dial 1 LED 1 =On(O=Off) Button 13 LED 13=On(12=Off) Dial 8 LED2=On(l Button 14 LED 14 = On (13 = Off) Dial 1 LED3=On(2=Off) Button 15 LED 15 = On (14 = Off) Dial 1 LED4=On(3=Off) Button 16 LED 16=On(15=Off) Dial 1 LED5=On(4=Off) Button 17 LED 17 = On (16 = Off) Dial 0 LED6=On(5=Off) Button 18 LED 18=On(17=Off) Dial m Dial 1 I I =Off) LED7=On(6=Off) LED8=On(7=Off) and I ELECTRONICTELEPHONERESPONSE DiiOQ mbutton 1 IButton 19 I LED 19=On(18=Off) IHandset off-hook] Dial tone on handset (19 = Off) Dial 1 LED9=On(8=Off) Handset on-hook Dial tone through speaker2 Dial p All LEDs = On m button Ringing through speaker3 Dial 1 All LEDs = Off m button Override tone through speaker Button 0’ LEDO=On m button End of test, electronic/digital telephone idle Button 1 LED1 =On(O=Off) (continued) PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-319 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE19-3 (continued) NOTES: 1. The button strip test begins with the bottom button. 2. Check the bottom right-hand volume control on speakerphone electronic/digital telephones. 3. Check the upper right-hand volume control on speakerphone electronic/digital telephones. ignore line entered. Stop printing and return to REQ. 19-5 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-319 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE19-4 Procedure - Attendant Console Test Procedure Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an OK response is received, proceed as follows: ITEM PROMPT USER ENTRY NOTE -lTRM OK - DISK LOADING 1 REQ I I ENTRY I ~~~~~CONSOLE RESPONSE Piilii All BLF LEDs = On m: Associated LED = On, Others = Off m All BLF LEDs = Off mmsi* Associated LED = On, Others = Off Associated LED = On, Others = Off -m* -~ Associated LED = On, Others = Off m* Associated LED = On, Others = Off button Dial n I@izma* I ICI TIE & STAT RING Dial I ICI CO & STAT BSY = On, Others Dial 1 ICI WAT Dial i ICI FX & STAT DND = On, Others = Off m* Associated LED = On, Others = Off Dial 1 ICI INT & STAT RST = On, Others = Off m* Associated LED = On, Others = Off Dial 1 ICI RCL & STAT HNT = On, Others = Off W’ Associated LED = On, Others = Off ICI OPR & STAT VCT = On, Others = Off Associated LED = On, Others = Off Dial 0 I I & STAT = On FWD Dial 1 ICI TIM & STAT TLK Dial 1 ICI SER = On, Others Dial B ICI HLD = On, Others = On, Others = On, Others = Off = Off = Off Im* I SRC COS TGBl=On - Dial a TGB2=On - = Off, busy Dial a TGBO=On = Off Dial a = Off Associated LED = On, Others = Off Dial 1 All LEDs Associated LED = On, Others = Off Dial 1 Buzzer Associated LED = On, Others = Off m* MIN ALM m. Associated LED = On, Others = Off BE** MDR mEI* Associated LED = On, Others = Off w CW LED = On, Others All LEDs * = Button l = Off via speaker LED End of test, 1 ‘“1 - 12 **2 - 123 “3 tone via handset (check = On, Others volume control) = Off = On, Others Console DEST= = Off = Off = Night (con timed) * = BLF Indication 19-6 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-319 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE19-4(continued) NOTES: 1. The program is now active. Proceed to the Attendant Console to be tested, press an LPK button, and enter 1 fi i 4 B @ n via the dialpad. Enter the following commands in sequence: ignore line entered. q Stop printing and return to REQ. 19-7 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION200-255-319 FEBRUARY1992 5. Peripheral Equipment Test (Table 19-5) PCB), turns FALT LEDs off unless the other circuits are still disabled, and returns the REQ prompt. 5.01 The TPER Program is designed to aid in fault location by disabling and enabling various PCE3s and circuits. When a faulty circuit or PC6 has been located, it is left disabled until it can be replaced in order to prevent it from interfering with normal system operation. DSDSNNX-Disables DSS console circuit NNX (NN = PCB number; X = circuit number), lights the FALT LED relating to that circuit, and returns the REQ prompt. 5.02 It is also possible, with the TPER Program, to determine the busy/idle status of any station, trunk, or DTMF receiver port. To use the TPER Program (refer to Table 19-5): l Perform the Authorization Procedure (Level 1 or ENDSNNX-Enables DSS console circuit NNX (NN = PCB number; X = circuit number), turns FALT LEDs off if all circuits are enabled, and returns the REQ prompt. DSRCNNX-Disables DTMF receiver circuit 00X/ 01X if it is idle (ROO = basic cabinet /ROl = expansion cabinet; X = DTMF receiver circuit in that cabinet, 1 - 8), lights the FALT LED on the NPRU PCB relating to that circuit (FALT #l for circuits 1 & 2; FALT #2 for circuits 3 & 4; FALT #3 for circuits 5 & 6; and FALT #4 for circuits 7 & 8), and returns the REQ prompt. a l Enter: TPER (in response to the OK prompt). REQ will be printed when the program has loaded. Enter: One of the following commands: DSCDXXX-Disables PC6 XXX regardless of busy/ idle status (XXX = TXX, LXX, CXX, or RXX); lights PCB FALT LEDs, and returns the REQ prompt. ENRCNNX-Enables DTMF receiverOOX/Ol X (OO/ 01 = PCB number ROO; X = circuit number in that cabinet, 1 -.8), turns the FALT LED off unless the other circuit is still disabled, and returns the REQ prompt. DSTKNNX-Disables trunk NNX if it is idle (NN = trunk PCB number, i.e., TO1 = 01; X = circuit number on that PCB, i.e.,1 - 4), lights the FALT LED relating to that circuit (FALT #1 for circuits 1 & 2; FALT #2 for circuits 3 & 4), and returns the REQ prompt. DSCIXXX-Disables each circuit on the PCB as it becomes idle, lights the appropriate FALT LED as circuits are disabled, and returns the REQ prompt. DSLCNNX-Disables station circuit NNX if it is idle (NN = station PCB number, i.e., LO4 = 04; X = circuit number on that PCB, i.e., 1 - 8), lights the FALT LED relating to that circuit (FALT #l for circuits 1 - 4; FALT #2 for circuits 5 - 8), and returns the REQ prompt. LIPS-Prints out a list of all system ports (DTMF receivers, DSS consoles, stations, and trunks) that are idle at the time that the command is entered, and returns the REQ prompt when the printout is complete. ENCDXXX-Enables PCB XXX (XXX = TXX, LXX, CXX, or RXX), turns FALT LEDs off, and returns the REQ prompt. LBPS-Prints out a list of all system ports (DTMF receivers, DSS consoles, stations, and trunks) that are busy at the time that the command is entered, and returns the REQ prompt when the printout is complete. ENTKNNX-Enables trunk NNX (NN = trunk PCB number; X = circuit number on that PCB), turns FALT LEDs off unless other circuit is still disabled, and returns the REQ prompt. LDPS-Prints out a list of all system ports (DTMF receivers, DSS consoles, stations, and trunks) that are in a disabled state at the time that the command is entered, and returnsthe REQprompt when the printout is complete. ENLCNNX-Enables station line circuit NNX (NN = station PCB number; X = circuit number on that 19-8 ... GG ._-, PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-319 FEBRUARY1992 STLCNNX-Gives the status of station line circuit NNX (NN = station line PC6 number; X = circuit number on that PCB). The output format will be a combination of two items. (See Notes 1 and 2.) Station EKT ATT UNEQ UNAS Example: REQ l Type’ Status2 BSY DIS TTY DIS CBL DIS TLD NOTES: 1. Type: STLC002 CKT 2 EKT IDL 2. Status: Returns the REQ prompt when the printout is complete. SlTKNNX-Gives the status of trunk (NN = trunk PCB number; X = circuit that PCB). The output format will be tion of two items. (See Notes 1 and Trunk co FX WAT TIE CCSA UNEQ UNAS Example: REQ l output format will be IDL, BSY, DIS TTY, DIS TLD, UNEQ, UNAS. (See Notes 1 and 2.) Example: STRCOOl REQ CKT 1 IDL l Returns the REQ prompt when the printout is complete. Type’ circuit NNX number on a combina2.) Status* IDL BSY DIS l-f-Y DIS TLD UNEQ = No PCBin thatposition. UNAS = PCB is equipped but no data is assigned. IDL = Idle. BSY = Busy. D/S 77-Y = Manually disabled via 77-Y. DIS CBL = Electronic/digital telephone, port disabled by soft-ware, due to open cable. DIS TLD = Software disabled due to trafficioad (indicates faulty PCB). STCDXXX-Gives the status of all circuits on PCB XXX (XXX = PCB location LXX, CXX, TXX, or ROO/Ol ). Printout formats will be the same as for STLC, SlTK, and STRC commands, but will list all circuits on that PCB in the order of the circuit number. l Returns the REQ prompt when the printout is complete. ST-i-K001 CKT 1 TIE IDL CALL TNNX-Sets up a monitor link from Trunk NNX to the remote test center: l This command is used at a remote test center to establish an audio link between the system and the test center. The objective is to command the system to select a particular trunk (A) and to dial the number of a telephone at the test center. When the call is answered, a 440 Hz tone will be heard. l Once a monitor link has been established, other trunks can be tested. The trunk to be tested (B) is seized by the keyboard terminal command and then the test number (for example: time, weather, tone, etc.) to be dialed is entered via the terminal. The audio responses are monitored at the test center. Returns the REQ prompt when the printout is complete. STDSNNX-Gives the status of DSS circuit NNX (NN = PCB number; X = circuit number). The output format will be IDL, BSY, DIS TTY, DIS CBL, DIS TLD. (See Notes 1 and 2.) Example: REQ STDSOOi CKT 1 IDL l Returns the REQ prompt when the printout is complete. STRCNNX-Gives the status of DTMF receiver 00X/01X (OO/Ol = receiver PCB number ROO/ R01; X = circuit number in that cabinet). The 19-9 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-319 FEBRUARY 1992 l The that the will set-up sequence includes several steps are led by system prompts. Following entry CALL TNNX, the system prompts be as follows: WAIT-Indicates that the first command was received. A carriage return must be entered in order to advance the program. Enter: [9. STS TLK, WAIT, or OVR (Status)-Gives the status of the requested trunk. l STS TLK will be output if the trunk was idle and has now been seized. The program will automatically advance to the next prompt W). l STS WAIT indicates that the requested trunk is busy. The program will automatically return to the WAIT prompt. Enter: - to access the same trunk again or m to return to the REQ ‘9m! prompt. l STS OVR indicates that the requested trunk does not exist in the system. Enter: mato return to the REQ prompt. q DN (Directory Number)-The system is requesting the number of the,telephone to be called at the test center. Enter: DN followed by a . q STS TLK, DDL, or RLSA (Status)-Gives the status of the connection. l STS TLK will be output if the dialing is complete, and the program will automatically advance to the next prompt (TRK). l STS DDL indicates that the trunk was still dialing when was entered. Enter: to advance the program. l STS RLSA indicates that Trunk A was disconnected due to a malfunction or some outside influence, such as the distant end going on-hook on a ground start trunk. After printing STS RLSA, the program will automatically return to the REQ prompt. q q TRK (Trunk)-At this point, the monitor link to the test center (using Trunk A) has been established (a 440 Hz tone is heard when Trunk A is an- swered at the remote tem is requesting the tested. Enter: CALL TNNX the trunk to removed). test center), and the sysidentity of a trunk to be (TNNX = port number of be tested; 440 Hz tone WAIT-Indicates that the command was received. A carriage return must be entered to advance the program. Enter: . q STSTLK, BSY, OVR, or RLSA(Status)-Gives the status of the connection. l STS TLK will be output if the requested trunk was idle and has now been seized. The program will automatically advance to the next prompt (DN). l STS BSY indicates that the requested trunk is busy. The program will automatically return to the TRK prompt above in order to allow another trunk to be selected. l STS OVR indicates that the requested trunk does not exist in the system. The program will automatically return to the TRK prompt above to allow another trunk to be selected. l STS RLSA is output if the monitor link trunk (A) was disconnected due to a malfunction or some outside influence, such as the distant end going on-hook. After printing STS RLSA, the program will automatically return to the REQ prompt. DN (Directory Number)-The trunk undertest (6) has been seized and the system is requesting the number to be dialed (time, weather, tone, etc.). Enter: DN followed by a . q DDL (Dialing)-The system is dialing via Trunk 6. When dialing is complete, progress tones (ringing, etc.) will be heard over Trunk E3 via the monitor link Trunk A). When the test is complete, enter h - to release Trunk B and to return to the TRK prompt. Enter: [9. STS TLK, DDL, RLSA, or RLSB (Status)-Gives the status of the connection. 19-10 PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-319 FEBRUARY1992 q , 1,. , 0 STS TLK will be printed in response to a entered following the above dialing prompt. The released the trunk under test (B), therefore the output indicates the status of the monitor link (A). The program will automatically return to the TRK prompt in order to allow another trunk to be selected. STS DDL will be printed if a was entered before dialing was complete. This state is the same as DDL above, STS RLSA will be printed if the monitor link (A) is released due to a malfunction or some outside influence. The trunk under test (B) will also be released and the program will automatically return to the REQ prompt . STS RLSB will be printed if the trunk under test (Trunk B) is released due to a malfunction or some outside influence. The program will automatically return to the TRK prompt in order to allow another trunk to be selected. Example: Monitor link trunk (A) = T014. Test center DN = 730-5000. Test DN = 730-0002. Trunk under test (B) = T012. I PROMPT 1 USER ENTRY 1 q q 0 ...or... TABLE19-5 Procedure Authorization Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic Procedure Procedure must be completed. If an OK response ITEM PROMPT OK is received, as follows: USER ENTRY NOTE TPER - DISK LOADING I =Q NOTE: See Table 19-5a forpossible separate entries as required. proceed 1 (con timed) entries. The REQ prompt 19-11 will repeat following each test. Enter as many PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-319 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE19-5a TRUNKSTATUSENTRIES ENTRY DESCRIPTION RESPONSE DSCDNNN Disable PCB XXX immediately PCB disabled, FAULT DSTKNNX Disable Trunk TRK disabled, FALT LED on, REQ prompted DSLCNNX Disable Line Circuit Line disabled, FALT LED on, REQ prompted ENCDNNN Enable PCB XXX PCB enabled, FALT LEDs ENTKNNX Enable Trunk Trunk ENLCNNX Enable Line NNX’ DSDSNNX Disable DSS Circuit NNX’ DSS disabled, FALT LED ON, REQ prompted ENDSNNX Enable DSS Circuit NNX” DSS enabled, FALT LED off if all circuits DSRCNNX Disable RCVR NNX’ ENRCNNX Enable RCVR Circuit DSCIXXX Disable PCB XXX when LIPS NNX’ NNX’ NNX’ enabled, Station NNX’ idle LEDs on FALT off, REQ prompted LED off if all circuits line enabled, FALT are enabled, LED off if all circuits disabled, FALT LED ON, REQ prompted RCVR enabled, FALT LED off if all circuits when List all idle ports Idle ports = LNNX, TNNX, etc., REQ prompted LBPS List all busy ports Busy TNX, etc., REQ prompted LDPS List all disabled Disabled ports ports = LNNX, Type STLCNNX Status of Line Circuit NNX’ Type Sl-TKNNX Status Status etc., REQ of TRK NNX’ (Note prompted prompted (Note 1) 5OQl2500 EKT UNEQ UNAS Al-l(Note REQ on Status (Note 2) IDL, BSY DIS CBL DE -l-l-Y DIS TLD REQ prompted 1) Status IDL WAT Fx TIE co CCSA UNEQ UNAS Type STDSNNX TNNX, REQ prompted REQ prompted are enabled, Each port disabled ports = LNNX, LEDs are enabled, are enabled, RCVR idle, FALT REQ prompted (Note 2) BSY DIS l-l-Y DIS TLD REQ prompted 1) Status (Note 2) IDL, BSY DIS CBL DIS l-l-Y of DSS NNX’ DIS TLD l STRCNNX Status of RCVR 00X’ STCDXXX Status of PCB XXX NN = PCB number X = Circuit number NOTE: When requesting status, etc., of a universal port (U slots), Status = IDL, BSY, DIS TTY, DIS TLD, Circuit #1 = Same as STLC, STTK, STRC Circuit #2 = Same as STLC. SlTK, STRC Circuit #3 = Same as STLC, SlTK, STRC Circuit #4 = Same as STLC, STTK, STRC, the entty must 19-12 UNEQ, be as a line PCB (example: UNAS, REQ prompted REQ prompted PCB in slot U26-entry: (confinuec STCDLZG). PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-319 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE19-5a(continued) ENTRY DESCRIPTION CALL TNNX Sets up monitor link using TNNX RESPONSE SYSTEM USER ENTRY q WAIT STS TLK.. .or.. . NOTE 4 Automatic advance to DN Prompt q 5 STS OVR mm 6 DN mm 7 DDL El 8 Automatic advance to TRK prompt 9 Automatic return to REQ prompt 10 q 11 Call TNNX 12 STS WAIT...or... STS TLK...or... STS RLSA...or... STS DDL TRK (contimed) NOTES: 1. Type: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. IO. UNEQ = No PCB in that position. LJNAS = PCB equipped but no data is assigned. Status: IDL = Idle. BSY = Busy. DIS TTY = Manually disabled via TTY. DIS CBL = Electronic/digital telephone port disabled by software due to open cable. DIS TLD = Software disabled due to traffic load (indicates faulty PCB). = Ignore line entered. I = Backspace. B D = Stop printing and return to REQ. B m = Exit program. is required to advance program. B Requested trunk (A) is busy. Enterm to try again. Requested trunk (A) does not exist in the system. Enter-m m to return to the REQ prompt. Enter the test center DN followed by a. Allow time for completion of dialing and then enterm. Dialing is complete; program advances to TRK prompt. Trunk A (monitor link) has been released due to a malfunction or an outside influence, such as the distant end going on-hook (ground start). 19-13 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SECTION 200-255-319 FEBRUARY 1992 TABLE19-5a(continued) q 7 7. 12. 73. 14. 15. 16. 17. q Dialing was not complete when was entered. A second is required. Enter the port number (TNNX) of the trunk (B) to be tested. Requested trunk was idle and has been seized. Requested trunk (B) is busy. Requested trunk (B) does not exist in the system. Enter the DN that should be dialed by the trunk under test, followed by a , After the dialing is complete, the audio from the trunk under test will be heard via the monitor link. Enterm when the test is complete. 18. The test has ended. The program will automatically return to the TRKprompt to allow another trunk to be selected. 19. The trunk under test(B) was released due to a ma/function or outside influence, such as the distant endgoing on-hook (ground start). 20. [9 was entered while Trunk B was still dialing. (See Note 17.) q TABLE19-5 (continued) Error Codes Program Name: Peripheral Diagnostic Data Block (TPER) Error Code Meaning ERTPE 00 The PCB tvoe conflicts with customer data. ERTPE 01 A PCB is not equipped in that location (enable). ERTPE 02 The cable is open or the port is inhibited by heavy traffic (enable). ERTPE 03 The entered port is a maintenance ERTPE 04 No PCB is eauiooed ERTPE 05 The port is busy. ERTPE 06 The PCB number or electronic/digital ERTPE 07 The PCB type is not an NSTU or NEKWNDKU. ERTPE 08 The PCB type is not a trunk. ~~~ ERTPE 09 ~ -1 ~~The ~ PCB - tvoe terminal (enable). in that location (disable). telephone number is out of range. is not a DTMF receiver. I ERTPE 10 The entered PCB type is incorrect. ERTPE 11 No PCB is eauiooed in that location (inhibit). No PCB is eQIJiDPed in that location (REQ = CALL TNNX). ERTPE 13 I ERTPE 14 1 ~The~~entered ~~~~universal sort (slot) is uneauiooed 19-14 or unassianed. I PROGRAMMINGPROCEDURES SECTION200-255-319 FEBRUARY1992 TABLE19-6 DISKDRIVEOPERATIONERRORCODES Error Codes Program Name: Floppy Disk Drive Error Error Code Meaning ERFD 01 File is closed. ERFD 02 Read error. ERFD 03 Write error. ERFD 04 Directory is full. ERFD 05 Disk is full. I ERFD 06 1 I End-of-file error. ERFD 07 I 1 ERFD 08 I Incorrect version number. Disk drive is not readv. ERFD 09 File is write-protected. ERFD 10 File not found. ERFD 11 Volume not initialized. ERFD 12 File already exists. ERFD FF Other hardware is causina the error. 19-15 I PERCEPTIONea, LCFVTR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH1991 Perception& 63ex DIGITALHYBRIDPBX APPENDIX#2 LEASTCOSTROUTING(LCR) and TOLL RESTRICTION(TR) PROGRAMMINGGUIDE PERCEPTIONeh, LCR/TRPROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH1991 PERCEPTION,,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE TABLE OF CONTENTS PARAGRAPH 1. 2. 2.00 2.10 3. 3.00 4. 4.00 5. 5.00 6. 6.00 6.10 6.20 7. 7.00 SUBJECT INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................... Least Cost Routing (LCR) ............................................................................. Toll Restriction (TR) ....................................................................................... NUMBERING PLAN (North America) ............................................................... Description ..................................................................................................... SPECIAL COMMON CARRIER.. ...................................................................... Description ..................................................................................................... PROGRAMMING .............................................................................................. General .......................................................................................................... CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING FLOWCHART ...................................... PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES ......................................................................... General .......................................................................................................... Programming Example #I ............................................................................. PSYS Printout.. .............................................................................................. PACD Printout ............................................................................................... PCOS Printout ............................................................................................... PLCR (PAR) Printout.. ................................................................................... PLCR (ACTALL) Printout.. ............................................................................. Route Table #l Printout.. ............................................................................... Route Table #2 Printout.. ............................................................................... Route Table #15 Printout.. ............................................................................. Modify Digits Table Printout.. ......................................................................... PTOL (PAR) Printout ..................................................................................... Programming Example #2 ............................................................................. PSYS Printout.. .............................................................................................. PACD Printout ............................................................................................... PCOS Printout ............................................................................................... PLCR (PAR) Printout.. ................................................................................... PLCR (ACTALL) Printout.. ............................................................................. PLCR (AOCNOOi) Printout ........................................................................... Route Table #l Printout.. ............................................................................... Route Table #2 Printout.. ............................................................................... Route Table #3 Printout.. ............................................................................... Route Table #15 Printout.. ............................................................................. Modify Digits Table Printout ........................................................................... PTOL (PAR) Printout ..................................................................................... DTOL (CLS) - PTOL (CLSCNO) Restriction Class #0 Printout ..................... DTOL (CLS) - PTOL (CLSCNl) Restriction Class #1 Printout ..................... DTOL (CLS) - PTOL (CLSCN2) Restriction Class #2 Printout ..................... DTOL (CLS) - PTOL (CLSCN3) Restriction Class #3 Printout ..................... LOGIC ............................................................................................................... General .......................................................................................................... GENERAL LOGIC FLOWCHART ..................................................................... DETAILED LOGIC FLOWCHART ................................................................. PAGE 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 8 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 12 12 12 13 13 14 15 15 16 16 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 20 21 22 23 24 25 25 25 27 PERCEPTIONeh, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 1. INTRODUCTION 1 .Ol This document has two main purposes: a) to describe the Least Cost Routing (LCR) and Toll Restriction (TR) features, and b) to serve as a supplement to Section 200-255-300, System Programming, in order to guide the service technician in LCRflR programming. Various examples, tables, and flowcharts are provided to clarify feature explanations. assumes that the reader is a .02 This document familiar with PERCEPTIONekex programming procedures and the mnemonics used with the LCR and TR data entry utility programs. 2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2.00 Least Cost Routing (LCR) 2.01 Least Cost Routing causes the system to select the least expensive trunk available for that particular time of day. The station user simply dials an LCR access code and the required telephone number. LCR will then select the optimally-priced route and automatically delete and/or insert any necessary digits (for MCI, Sprint, etc.) by analyzing the dialed telephone number (including area code and, in some cases, office code). 2.02 The three variable time schedules per 24hour clock allow the end-user to take advantage of rate variations during these hours. The various routing combinations for the three time schedules are contained in 15 Route Tables. Each table is selected as a function of the dialed telephone number. 2.03 The LCR feature is compatible with and transparentto all other PERCEPTIONehex features. It is designed so that it is completely disabled until a simple parameter (LCR) is enabled in the System Data Block (DSYS Program). 2.04 If a Direct Trunk Access code (not the LCR access code) is dialed, the outgoing call is handled as a normal direct trunk access call without using LCR. 2.05 LCR Data Blocks are separated from all other Data Blocks. It is unnecessary to change a completed Data Block when adding the LCR feature to a system already in use, except to assign the LCR access code (DACD Program) or to enable LCR (DSYS Program). 2.06 There are three LCR classes (LCI , LC2, and LC3), which allow specific stations to be denied access to the most expensive routes. LC3 is the lowest class; LCl is the highest. LC3 routes are always selected first, no matter what class the station is allowed. If all LC3 routes are busy, and the calling station is allowed LC2, the system will try to select an LC2 route in the order programmed. If LCl is allowed, and all LC2 routes are busy, the system will try to select an LCI route. l The Class of Service Data Block indicates the LCR class of that particular Class of Service. l A warning tone is received by the station user if the last choice route is selected (if the WTA prompt, PAR table, DLCI Program, is programmed to Y). l If all the routes are busy, busy tone is received by the station user, who may then activate the Automatic Callback feature. The station will then be called when the first trunk in that station’s LCR class is idle. When the station answers the callback, the idle trunk will be seized and the telephone number will be automatically dialed out to the distant end. 2.07 All of the above logic and the remainder of the Least Cost Routing and Toll Restriction features are described, and can be followed step-by-step, in the Detailed Logic Flowchart. Thisflowchartcan be used as a fault finding procedure for customer data programming, and to answer questions regarding what will happen when certain parameters are programmed in a certain way. 2.10 Toll Restriction (TR) 2.11 The Toll Restriction (TR) program causes the system to restrict (or not restrict) specific stations from calling certain area codes and/or office codes. 2.12 Toll Restriction can be used for long distance toll restriction, for restriction in the local area (home area), or both. The TR class also decides whether PERCEPTIONea, LCWTR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 to restrict calls to the local central office operator, international calls, and/or long distance directory assistance. l 2.13 Eight different TR classes (CLS 0 w 7) can be programmed in the previously-described manner. +I+Also, CLS 8 restricts all I+ and a + calls. l 2.14 All stations programmed for TOL = NONE will have no restrictions. The TOL parameter (TR class number) is located in the DEKT, DSlT, and DTGP (TIECCSA Trunks) Programs. ,. - -.. t i;- .-1 TABLE A NORTHAMERICAN NUMBERING PLAN 2.15 Before a call via Least Cost Routing or Direct Trunk Access (DTA) is completed, the DTOL Program will decide whether or not the number being dialed is allowed. If not allowed, the originating station will receive overflow tone. If allowed, the call will be processed further. Area Code NO/l X Off ice Code NNX Subscriber xxxx X = any number from 0 - 9 N = any number from 2 - 9 O/l = number 0 or 1 2.16 All of the above logic and the remainder of the TOL parameter are described, and can be followed step-by-step, in the Detailed Logic Flowchart. No. I (Table A). 3.03 The following are exceptions to the rule: 1) Service Code (Nli): This is used for various special local services and, when programmed properly, is recognized only as a service code. In this case, the system will act immediately after this 3-digit number is completed. Example: Fpllow a call through the Logic Flowchati according to what is programmed in Example #2. 3. NUMBERING code for each telephone. The first digit of the area code must be a number between 2 and 9. The second digit must be a 1 or 0. The third digit may be any number between 0 and 9. The first two digits in the CO code must be any numbers between 2 and 9, except when interchangeable codes are used (then the second digit can be any number between 0 and 9). The third digit of the CO code on all four subscriber numbers may be any number between 0 w 9 PLAN (NORTH AMERICA) 2) 3.00 Description 3.01 All telephone systems in the USA and Can- ada use the North American Numbering Plan. All PERCEPTION,&,, LCR/TR features are based on this plan. 3.02 The routing codes for Direct Distant Dialing (DDD) within the North American Numbering Plan consist of two basic parts: 1) A 3-digit area code or Numbering Plan Area (NPA) code. Interchangeable Codes (ICC): In some areas, the second digit of the office code is allowed to be any number from 0 w9. Inthis case, the office code may look like an area code (if the second digit is 0 or 1). If so, the PERCEPTlONe or PERCEPTIONex looks for a DD prefix (1) to identify whether or not the next 3-digit number is an area code. When ICC is used, 0 + a 3-digit number is always an areacode. When ICC is not used, the system identifies the area code by looking at the second digit of the first 3-digit number (if this digit is 0 or 1, the number is an area code; if not, the number is an office code). 3) Inward WATS: This is a form of long distance service without a charge to the originating party. The area code is always 800. In PERCEPTIONeLex LCR, this type of call can be programmed (in the PAR table) as either a regular DDD call with an area code of 800, or as a toll free 800 call, routed via the 2) A 7-digit telephone number made up 0f.a 3-digit central office (CO) code and a 4-digit station number. NOTE: When used together, these ten digits comprise the network “‘address”or destination -2- -i ‘i ,‘ -_. PERCEPTION,&, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 local call route table (LCR). tion is completely transparent to the station user. 4) Long distance directory assistance (555): This 5. PROGRAMMING is a call using any area code (or no area code) plus 5551212. If allowed, this type of call is routed via the LDI route table, as indicated in the PAR table, or via the route table (DAC = N) to which this area code is assigned. 5.00 General 5.01 Customer data programming can be done in many different ways with the same results. The starting point and the particular order may differ according to personal preferences. As an example, one logical sequence for programming customer data is shown in the Customer Data Programming Flowchart. NOTE: When a DDD callis dialed, needed before the area cause the local operator to be connected. 4. SPECIAL COMMON CARRIER 5.02 For detailed information, see Programming Procedures, Section 200-255-300, in the PERCEPTIONekex Insfaallationand Maintenance manual, and the Logic paragraph in this LCR/TR programming guide (Paragraph 7). 4.00 Description 4.01 Dialing extra digits to access the Special Common Carrier (SPCC) trunks is not necessary if the LCR feature has been activated. The selection of SPCC trunks (like all other trunks) and the outpulsing of the extra digits (access code, authorization code, etc.), is accomplished automatically by the PERCEPTIONeLex LCR feature. This func- -3- PERCEPTIONeh, LCR/TRPROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH1991 CUSTOMER DATAPROGRAMMING FLOWCHART To 0 NO Pate 6 ------ 4 YES Assign an LCR accesscode (LCWDACD). ; Telecom environment miscellaneous parameters. and Comments: Assign area codes to respective route tables. - - - - - - - - - - Define parameters (PAR/DLCl). YES i AOC table NO is area code requires more than one route table. -4- NOTE: in any application where an SPCC is to be automatically dialed and accessed, LCR must be used. PERCEPTIONeb, LCR/TRPROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH1991 CUSTOMER DATAPROGRAMMING FLOWCHART (continued) List the office codes for the respective area codes that belong to a route table other than that shown in the ACT table (AOC/DLCl). INO one LCR class Deny the LCR class as required for the respective class of service (DCOS). Define the route tables for all the assigned ACT and AOC tables (RTB/DLC2). NOTE: Always complete the SCHB prompt even when schedule B is not used. I Modify digits as required (MDT/DLC2). PERCEPTIONek, LCR/TRPROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH1991 CUSTOMER DATAPROGRAMMING FLOWCHART (continued) From NO Comments: Absorb the SPCC authorization code _ _ _ - - I 1 Define *. AUTHl - * IT,,2 anator AL I paramebl ‘^../(s) (l’AH/U -. - ‘--v.I VI From -0 r A Page 4 NO toll restriction? NO LCR programmed? Assign a TR class restricted stations and TIE trunks (DSlT/DEKT/DTGP). Define each TR class used (CLSDTOL). -6- 4 Define the TOL arameters (PAWDTOL). PERCEPTION,k,, LCR/TRPROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH1991 CUSTOMER DATAPROGRAMMING FLOWCHART (continued) List all allowed area codes and home area off ice codes for each TR class that is used (CLSIDTOL). List the offfice codes for the area code with an opposite status (allowed/denied) to what is indicated by the appropriate CLS table (AOCIDTOL). From -7- LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 6. PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES d) No routing priority is used (i.e., the only LCR class is LCl). This is defined in the DCOS Program, by not denying any LCR class. The LCR access code is “9.” 6.00 General 6.01 Examples are given here to show how PERCEPTIONehex systems can be programmed for various system applications. It is assumed that your system has been programmed in all areas, except LCR and TR. Comments are shown on the right side of the TTY printouts. These comments are shown only once for the same prompt and are not repeated for every Data Block in the same programming example. e) The telecommunications environment is defined in the DLCl Program (TYPE = PAR). f) The selection of the Route Table number is accomplished in the Area Code Table. The Modify Digits Table number is selected in the Route Table. NOTE: Even when only one time schedule is used (ie., SCHA), Schedule 6 (SCHBprompt) must also be completed in fhe DLCZ Program. 6.02 The two examples show printouts using the Data Output mode (see equivalent Data Blocks for Data Input). 6.13 Toll Restriction: Toll restrictions or home area restrictions are not programmed in the example (TOL = NONE). However, theAUTH1 parameter is programmed to “05” on the PAR table, DTOL Program. This causes the 5-digit authorization code to be absorbed (not printed) when the SMDR prints the called number. IMPORTANT! These are examples only and may not be realistic applications for the area under discussion. 6.10 Programming Example #l 6.11 This is a very simple case, where only two trunk groups are used. In this case, there is no Least Cost Routing in the true sense, as this application has only one routing choice for the particular area code dialed. However, LCR recognizes the area code, selects the correct trunk group, and when required, automatically outpulses the codes for SPCC access and authorization. 6.12 Least Cost Routing a) In this case, the system is located in Orange County, California (NPA=714). b) For Least Cost Routing purposes, the outgoing trunk calls are divided into three different areas. 1) Route Table #1 = Local area (NPA = 714). 2) Route Table #2 = Los Angeles area (NPA = 213). 3) Route Table #I5 = Remainder of North America. c) One Special Common Carrier (SPCC) is used. An access code (730 0000) and an authorization code (87654) are used to access SPCC. -a- PERCEPTIONek, LCR/TRPROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH1991 COD OK REQ TOR DRT TEN ICPl ICP2 ICP3 LCR APG AAT APX LNl LN2 NT1 NT2 BLFl BLF2 OFLl OFL2 MC0 MC1 MMP REM RAC ACC * ACC # COT RNA AOF CFD HLD DPT PBT LLO 4CB SFS 3FA ilDR 3FS > COD OK PSYS PRT 0000 NONE Y OFL OFL OFL Y '------14 NONE NONE NONE NONE UNA UNA 3 2 NONE NONE ATT0 NONE 10 NONE #*2 NONE NONE 50 31 30 10 50 15 4 15 4 Y Y Y Y REQ ACB CBR CFD CFR PUD PUG HLD MMPl MMP2 OVR RND CWT SDU SDC SDS UNA CRG FLH PAGO PAGl PAG2 PAG3 PAG4 RTV MAL MCC DND DNC RAC LCR REQ PSYSPrintout -9- PACD PRT *7 **7 *9 **9 *6 *4 *3 11 12 *0 #7 #4 #3 ##3 #6 *1 #9 *5 15 16 17 18 19 **3 ##5 #5 #2 ##2 9+- LCR Access Code = 9 PERCEPTION,,, LCR/l-RPROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH1991 COD OK PCOS REQ PRT cos cos cos cos cos cos cos 0 NONE 1 NONE 2 TOO 3 NONE 4 NONE 5 NONE 6 NONE 7 NONE 8 NONE 9 NONE 10 NONE 11 NONE 12 NONE 13 NONE 14 NONE 15 NONE cos cos cos cos cos cos cos cos cos LCR class #I is allowed for COS 0 through COS 15 (since it is not specifically denied). REQ PCOSPrintout COD / OK PLCR 1 REQ PAR ICC OTO RTD WTA HAC TFC LCR svc DAC LDI DDP N 04 N N 714 Y 01 411 61i- 911 For detailed information, refer to the manual, PERCEPTION SectionegeX Programming Procedures 200-255-300, Chapter 12. Y 01 1 REQ PLCR(PAR)Printout -lO- PERCEPTION,,, LCWTR PROGRAMMINGGUIDE MARCH 1991 REQ PLCR ACTALL RN001 Home Area Code (Local Calls) are -- -- - routed according to Route Table #1. 7 14 l 213 a----- RN002 Calls to Area Code 213 are routed according to Route Table #2. RN003 NONE RN004 NONE RN005 NONE RN006 NONE RN007 NONE RN008 NONE RN009 NONE RN010 NONE RN011 NONE RN012 NONE All calls to these Area Codes are routed according to Route Table #15. RN013 NONE RN014 NONE RN015 200 210 301 311 401 411 501 511 601 611 701 711 802 812 902 912 201 211 302 312 402 412 502 512 602 612 702 712 803 813 903 913 202 212 303 313 403 413 503 513 603 613 703 713 804 814 904 914 203 214 304 314 404 414 504 514 604 614 704 715 805 815 905 915 204 215 305 315 405 415 505 515 605 615 705 716 806 816 906 916 205 216 306 316 406 416 506 516 606 616 706 717 807 817 907 917 206 217 307 317 407 417 507 517 607 617 708 718 808 818 908 918 REQ PLCR (ACTALL) Printout -ll- 207 218 308 318 408 418 508 518 608 618 708 719 809 819 909 919 208 219 309 319 409 419 509 519 609 619 709 800 810 900 910 209 300 310 400 410 500 510 600 I 610 700 710 801 811 901 911 I PERCEPTION,&, LCR/TRPROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH1991 RTOl RN001 RTl RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 00 01 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE SCHA LC3 LC2 LCl 0000 RTl NONE NONE 2400 a---- Schedule A used only in this application. SCHB LC3 LC2 LCl 2400 NONE NONE NONE 0000 SCHB prompt must be completed. SCHC LC3 LC2 LCl 0000 NONE NONE NONE + -- - l ---- Trunk Group 00, Modify Digits Table 0 1. 0000 REQ RouteTable#l Printout PLCR(RTOI) RT02 RT15 RN002 RN015 RTl RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 01 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 01 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE RTl RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 00 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 03 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE SCHA LC3 LC.2 LCl 0000 RTl NONE NONE 2400 SCHA LC3 LC2 LCl 0000 RTl NONE NONE 2400 SCHB LC3 LC2 LCl 2400 NONE NONE NONE 0000 SCHB LC3 LC2 LCl 2400 NONE NONE NONE 0000 SCHC LC3 LC2 LCl 0000 NONE NONE NONE 0000 SCHC LC3 LC2 LCl 0000 NONE NONE NONE 0000 REQ REQ RouteTable#2 Printout PLCR(RT02) RouteTable#15 Printout PLCR(RT15) -12- PERCEPTION,,,, LCRflR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 PLCR REQ MDT1 TN001 DLT ADD NONE +---jI-secondpause.1 REQ MDT3 TN003 DLT ADD *1 NONE "17300000"387654 : REQ Modify Digits Table Printout PLCR (MDT1 AND MDT3) NOTE: A 1-second pause is usually required when using Loop Start trunks, to allow the CO line enough time to attach a receiving register. This is usually not required for Ground Start trunks. COD OK PTOL REQ PAR HAC ICC SPCCl SPCC2 DDP AUTHl AUTH2 REQ 714 + -- - - - - - 'N 730-0000 +---NONE 1 1 o 5 .- _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ NONE These parameters are the same as in DL C I/PA R. These parameters are the same as in DMDR. Absorbs the S-digit authorization code, and prevents it from being printed (SMDR). PTOL (PAR) Printout -13- PERCEPTIONehex LCR/TR PROGRAMMINGGUIDE MARCH 1991 6.20 Programming 6.21 Least Example which is allowed #2 3) CLS 2 = Local/Metro, Illinois, Wisconsin, and Indiana calls allowed only, with one exception(714)730-XxXx (also allowed). Cost Routing a) In this case, the system is located in the Chicago area (NPA = 312). b) For Least Cost Routing purposes, the outgoing trunk calls are divided into four different areas. 1) Route Table #I = Local area (NPA = 312). 2) Route Table #2 = Metro area (NPA = 312). 3) Route Table #3 = Illinois. 4) Route Table #15 = Rest of North America. 4) CLS 3 = No restriction at all. Time = 7 p.m. (= 1900). Number dialed = (618)NNX-XXXX. Station Class of Service = COS 1. Station Toll Restriction (TR) class = CLS 2. 6.23 1) c) There 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) are five trunk groups: Trunk Group #0 = Local lines. Trunk Group #l = Metro lines. Trunk Group #2 = Illinois WATS lines. Trunk Group #3 = Local lines. Available to LCR class 1 only. Trunk Group #4 = WATS lines to all North America. d) One Special Common Carrier (SPCC) is used. An access code (730 0000) and an authorization code (65432) are used to access SPCC. e) Three LCR classes (routing priorities) in this application. 1) COS 0 = LCR class #l . 2) COS 1 = LCR class #2. 3) COS 2 = LCR class #3. Sequence of events: User pushes DN button. l Dial tone is received. 2) LCR access code 5 is dialed. l Dial tone is still received. 3) Digit 0 is dialed. l Dial tone is removed. 4) Area Code and Office Code are dialed, which in this case = (618)NNX (non-555 call). l No overflow tone received (this number is not restricted). 5) Station are used number (XXXX) is dialed. 6) Route Table #3 is selected. 7) At this time, all trunks in Trunk Group #2 are busy. Trunks in Trunk Group #0 are idle. f) Local calls are routed according to Route Table #I. This is defined by the Area Office Code Table #I (TNOOl). 9) Other Route Tables are addressed in the Area Code Tables 0 w 15. (pointed to be dialed. 8) Route3 (RT3) is selected and the SPCC signals sent out on Trunk Group #00 are: l-second pause, 730 0000,6-second pause, 654321618 NNX XXXX. to) 9) NOTE: No numbering relationship exists between the Area Code Tables and Area Office Code Tables, unless defined as such in the Area Office Code Table. If an SMDR is connected, the printout called number = l-61 8-NNX-XXXX. NOTE: This sequence in the Detailed 6.22 Toll Restriction: For toll restriction purposes, there are, in this case, four Restriction Class Tables used: 1) CLS 0 = Internal calls only. 2) CLS 1 = 312 Area Code (local and metro) calls only, with one exception-(71 4)730-XxXx, -14- can be followed Logic Flowchart. for the step-by-step PERCEPTION,~,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 PSYS REQ TOR DRT TEN ICPl ICP2 ICP3 LCR APG AAT APX LNl LN2 NT1 NT2 BLFl BLF2 OFLl MC0 MMP REM RAC ACC" ACC# COT RNA AOF CFD HLD DPT PBT LLO ACB HFS HFA MDR CFS PACD PRT 2300 DDMP N ATT ATT ATT Y --------j-1 14 NONE NONE NONE NONE UNA UNA REQ ACB CBR CFD CFR PUD PUG HLD MMPl MMP2 OVR RND CWT SDU SDC SDS UNA CRG FLH PAGO PAGl PAG2 PAG3 PAG4 RTV MAL MCC DND DNC RAC LCR 7 L ? NONE NONE 299 NONE #"2 NONE NONE 40 30 6 20 60 7 4 15 6 Y Y Y Y PRT *I **7 "9 ""9 "6 "4 *3 11 12 "0 #7 #4 #3 ##3 #6 *1 "2 *5 15 16 17 18 19 **3 #5 ##5 #2 ##2 **5 5+- LCR Access Code = 5 REQ PACD Printout NOTE: The LCR Program was not designed for tenant service; therefore, if both LCR and tenant service are desired, one of the following two choices must be made: a. LCR is shared by both tenants. b. LCR is used for one tenant, and Direct Trunk Access is used for the other tenant. REQ PSYS Printout -15- PERCEPTIeNeh,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 COD OK PCOS REQ PRT cos 0 NONE +------- LCR 1,2, and 3 allowed. cos 1 LCl +------- LCR 2, and 3 allowed. cos cos cos cos cos cos cos cos cos cos cos cos cos cos REQ 2 LCl LC2 +-------]&-zGq 3 NONE 4 NONE 5 NONE 6 NONE 7 NONE 8 NONE 9 NONE 10 NONE 11 NONE 12 NONE NOTE: 13 NONE DCOS is a deny list. 14 NONE 15 NONE PCOSPrintout > COD OK PLCR REQ PAR ICC OTO RTD WTA HAC TFC LCR svc DAC LDI DDP REQ .Y 06 Y Y 312 Y 01 411 Y 01 1 * 911 For detailed information, see the PERCEPTION ebeX Programming Procedures manual, Section 200-255-300, Chapter 12. 611 -16- PERCEPTION,,,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 ACTALL Local calls are routed according to Route Table #l (see AOCNOOl). RN001 NONE RN002 312 +---- 217 309 Metro area calls are routed according to Route Table #2. RN003 RN004 618 815 ‘----- NONE Calls to Illinois are routed according to Route Table #3. RN005 NONE RN006 NONE RN007 NONE RN008 NONE RN009 NONE RN010 NONE RN011 NONE RN012 NONE RN013 All calls to these Area Codes are routed according to Route Table 815. NONE RN014 NONE RN015 200 210 301 313 403 413 503 513 603 613 704 714 804 814 905 915 201 211 302 314 404 414 504 514 604 614 705 715 805 816 906 916 202 212 303 315 405 415 505 515 605 615 706 716 806 817 907 917 203 213 304 316 406 416 506 516 606 616 707 717 807 818 908 918 204 205 214 215 305 306 317 318 407 408 417 418 507 508 517 518 607 608 617 619 708 709 718 719 808 809 819 900 909 910 919 206 216 307 319 409 419 509 519 609 700 710 800 810 901 911 REQ PLCR (ACTALL) Printout -17- 207 208 218 219 308 310 400 401 410 411 500 501 510 511 600 601 610 611 701 702 711 712 801 802 811 812 902 903 912 913 209 300 311 402 412 502 512 602 612 703 713 803 813 904 914 PERCEPTIONeh, LCR/TR PROGRAMMINGGUIDE MARCH 1991 AOCNOOl TN001 AC RN0 oc 312 .---- 01 223 356 458 554 658 741 879 232 362 464 556 662 742 888 Local calls (Office Codes below) are routed according to Route Table 81 244 367 466 557 669 746 892 249 371 479 563 672 830 896 258 381 526 584 680 83-l 946 289 382 534 587 683 840 972 331 426 540 594 689 844 333 428 546 623 695 851 336 433 552 634 697 859 REQ PLCR (AOCNOOl)Printout RTOl RN001 RTl 00 01 + - - - - Trunk Group 00, Modify Digits Table 0 7. RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 03 NONE NONE NONE NONE 01 NONE NONE NONE NONE + - - - - Trunk Group 03, Modify Digits Table 0 1. SCHA LC3 LC2 LCl 0000 RTl NONE RT2 2400 SCHB LC3 LC2 LCl 2400 NONE NONE NONE 2400 SCHC LC3 LC2 LCl 2400 NONE NONE NONE 0000 REQ l ---- Schedule A only used in this application. + - - - - Route 2 can only be used by LCR class #l. + - - - - SCHB prompt must be completed. PEFiCEPTION,h,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 RT02 RN002 RTl RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 01 03 NONE NONE NONE NONE 01 01 NONE NONE NONE NONE SCHA LC3 LC2 LCl 0000 RTl NONE RT2 2400 SCHB LC3 LC2 LCi 2400 NONE NONE NONE 2400 SCHC LC3 LC2 LCl 2400 NONE NONE NONE 0000 REQ RouteTable #2 Printout PLCR(RT02) RT03 RN003 RTl RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 02 04 00 03 NONE NONE 01 01 02 02 NONE NONE SCHA LC3 LC2 LCl 0800 RTl RT2 RT3 RT4 1800 +- Schedule A = 8 a.m. to 6 p.m. SCHB LC3 LC2 LCl 1800 RTl RT3 RT2 RT4 0800 Schedule B = 6 p.m. to 8 a.m. SCHC LC3 LC2 LCl 0800 NONE NONE NONE 0800 +- REQ Route Table #3 Printout PLCR(RT03) -19- PERCEPTION,&,, LCf?/TRPROGRAMMINGGUIDE MARCH 1991 RT15 RN015 RTl RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 00 04 03 NONE NONE NONE 02 01 02 NONE NONE NONE SCHA LC3 LC2 LCl 0000 RTl RT2 RT3 2400 SCHB LC3 LC2 LCl 2400 NONE NONE NONE 2400 SCHC LC3 LC2 LCl 2400 NONE NONE NONE 0000 REQ MDT1 TN001 DLT ADD NONE *1 +--------- REQ MDT2 TN002 DLT ADD ~~~;00000*36543~-~~ I I -second pause. REQ Modify Digits Table Printout PLCR (MDT1 and MDTP) NOTE: A 1-second pause is usually required when using Loop Start trunks, to allow the CO line enough time to attach a receiving register. This is usually not required for Ground Start trunks. REQ Route Table #I5 Printout PLCR (RT15) COD OK PTOL REQ PAR HAC ICC SPCCl SPCC2 DDP AUTHl 312 .---rI I Y 730~0000 c I NONE J c1 05 4---- AUTH2 REQ NONE These parameters are the same as in DLCl/PAR. These parameters are the same as in DMDR. Absorbs the 5-digit authorization code, and prevents it from being printed (SMDR). t 1 PTOL (PAR) Printout -2o- PERCEPTION,B,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 CHG TYPE CNO OPR CLS 0 N INT N LDA ACT ACD OCT OCD *------- Operator calls not allowed. *------f------- N D International 1 calls not allowed. r 555 calls not allowed. D TYPE SAV N REQ > COD OK PTOL REQ CLSCNO ARC A NONE +---------I No Area Codes allowed. NONE No Office Codes (local) allowed. OFC A 4--------- REQ 1 (Internal calls only) DTDL (CLS) - PTDL (CLSCNO)Restriction Class #O Printout NOTE: Stations can be programmed for internal calls only by denying LC3 and DTA in the Class of Service Data Block (DCOS). However, this will not deny Operator/International/555 calls. To specifically allow/deny these calls, use the DTOL Data Block. -21- PERCEPTION,h,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMINGGUIDE MARCH 1991 > COD OK DTOL CHG CLS REQ TYPE CNO OPR INT LDA ACT ACD OCT OCD A TYPE SAV Ji N > COD OK PTOL REQ CLSCNl ARC A NONE OFC A 2009 2909 TN0 ARC CNO OFC 3809 4709 5609 6509 1409 8309 9209 02 714 1 2109 3009 3909 4809 5709 6609 7509 8409 9309 2209 3109 4009 4909 5809 6709 7609 8509 9409 2309 3209 4109 5009 5909 6809 7709 8609 9509 2409 3309 4209 5109 6009 6909 7809 8709 9609 2509 3409 4309 5209 6109 7009 7909 8809 9709 2609 3509 4409 5309 6209 7109 8009 8909 9809 2709 3609 4509 5409 6309 7209 8109 9009 9909 2809 3709 4609 5509 6409 7309 8209 9109 7300 REQ DTDL (CLS) - PTOL (CLSCNl) Restriction Class #1 Printout c -22- PERCEPTION,&,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 CNO OPR INT LDA ACT ACD OCT OCD A (See Note) TYPE SAV N > COD OK PTOL REQ CLSCN2 ARC A 217 815 219 309 312 317 414 608 618 715 812 OFC A TN0 ARC CNO OFC 2009 2909 3809 4709 5609 6509 7409 8309 9209 01 714 2109 3009 3909 4809 5709 6609 7509 8409 9309 2209 3109 4009 4909 5809 6709 7609 8509 9409 2309 3209 4109 5009 5909 6809 7709 8609 9509 2409 3309 4209 5109 6009 6909 7809 8709 9609 2509 3409 4309 5209 6109 7009 7909 8809 9709 2609 3509 4409 5309 6209 7109 8009 8909 9809 2709 3609 4509 5409 6309 7209 8109 9009 9909 2809 3709 4609 5509 6409 7309 8209 9109 L 7300 REQ Allows all calls to Illinois, Wisconsin, and Indiana, including local and metro calls. No other calls allowed, except (714) 730-XxXx. DTDL (CLS) - PTOL (CLSCN2) Restriction Class #2 Printout Note: The add/delete list is not shown here. Instead, the result of the programming is shown by using the PTOL Program. -23- PERCEPTION,&, LCR/lR PROGRAMMINGGUIDE MARCH 1991 COD OK DTOL REQ CHG TYPE CNO OPR INT LDA ACT ACD OCT OCD CLS 3 Y Y Y A c A TYPE SAV N > COD OK PTOL REQ CLSCN3 ARC A 200 210 300 310 400 410 500 510 600 610 7.0 0 710 800 810 900 910 OFC A REQ 2009 2909 3809 4709 5609 6509 7409 8309 9209 201 211 301 311 401 411 501 511 601 611 701 711 801 811 901 911 2109 3009 3909 4809 5709 6609 7509 8409 9309 202 212 302 312 402 412 502 512 602 612 702 712 802 812 902 912 203 213 303 313 403 413 503 513 603 613 703 713 803 813 903 913 2209 3109 4009 4909 5809 6709 7609 8509 9409 204 214 304 314 404 414 504 514 604 614 704 714 804 814 904 914 2309 3209 4109 5009 5909 6809 7709 8609 9509 205 215 305 315 405 415 505 515 605 615 705 715 805 815 905 915 2409 3309 4209 5109 6009 6909 7809 8709 9609 206 216 306 316 406 416 506 516 606 616 706 716 806 816 906 916 2509 3409 4309 5209 6109 7009 7909 8809 9709 207 217 307 317 407 417 507 517 607 617 707 717 807 817 907 917 2609 3509 4409 5309 6209 7109 8009 8909 9809 208 218 308 318 408 418 508 518 608 618 708 718 808 818 908 918 209 219 309 319 409 419 509 519 609 619 709 719 809 819 909 919 2709 3609 4509 5409 6309 7209 8109 9009 9909 There are no restrictions-treated TOL = NONE. OTOL (,CLS)- PTOL (CLSCNS)Restriction Class #3 Printout -24- 2809 3709 4609 5509 6409 7309 8209 9109 as if LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 7. LOGIC 7.00 General 7.01 The purpose of the General Logic Flowchart (which begins below) is to show the general flow for a typical LCR phone call, but without the details. 7.02 All of the LCR/TR logic, and the sequence in which the logic is processed by the CPU, are summarized in the Detailed Logic Flowchart. Use this flowchart to answer questions about how the system will act when programmed in a certain way. The flowchart may also be used as a fault finding aid for customer data. GENERAL LOGIC FLOWCHART Station user dials Start here for To// Restriction. NOTE: See To// Restriction classificafion table (DTOUCLS). See area/office code exception table (if programmed) for this area code NO office code an PERCEPTION,h,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 GENERALLOGICFLOWCHART(continued) From - NOTE: See DLCVAOC tables TN01 - 16. - - - - - NOTE: Least Cost Routing LCR access code was dialed. - - I Y YES I Select the route table number (RN0 XX) from the appro riate AOC ta I! le. See route table number selected - --- See modify digits table number _ --- indicated by the RTB. The route table selects an idle trunk according to time of day and station LCR i Digits are deleted and/or added to dialed number. Number is dialed and call progress tones are heard. A END -26- 1 \. .. PERGEPTIONeh,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILEDLOGICFLOWCHART Start here for Station user goes off-hook or presses DN button. NOTE: Non-LCR calls are not covered in this flowchart. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I NO 1 YES LCR note enabledreceive overflow tone--call cannot be completed. YES Dial tone removed for a short period and then returned. Dial tone removed. ) Station user dials the required telephone number. 4 -27- 7 PERCEPTION,b, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILED LOGICFLOWCHART(continued) From Al Page 27 c flowchart ignores DPT/PBJtimeouts. - - - YES t I Dial tone is removed (if not accomplished already). NO 1 YES To Pagt 3 -28- 29 PERCEPTION,&,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILEDLOGICFLOWCHART(continued) NO I timeout occurred NO (ES I I NO YES timeout occurred I NO YES Route table number LCR is selected (DLCVPAR). Receive overflow tone-call cannot be completed. PERCEPTION,h,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMINGGUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILEDLOGICFLOWCHART(continued) From NO Start here for International Calls. - ----_ YES YES I Route table number LCR is selected (DLWPAR). To -3o- PERCEPTIONeb,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILED LOGICFLOWCHART(continued) / / / Station continues user dialing YES number LCR is To -31- - / / / / / NOTE: Only the first 14 digits are used. Any digits after 14 are ignored. PERCEPTION,h, LCR/TR PROGRAMMINGGUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILEDLOGICFLOWCHART(continued) From To G Page 36 4 NO 0 NO . .- I NW YES (DEKT/DSTT)? Y I w / I. YES / the first three I YES NO l 1YES To To f 0 E Page 34 PagF, 35 + 0 I YES Route table number LDI is selected (DLWPAR). Receive overflow ton-all cannot be completed. c-4 END -32- n PERCEPTION,b,x LCR/TR PROGRAMMINGGUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILEDLOGICFLOWCHART(continued) NO (YES Receive overflow tone-call cannot be completed. 23 NOTE: Refer to the appropriate restriction class table (DTOUCLS)same as TOL number. 4 YES To END -33- PERCEPTION,~, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILED LOGICFLOWCHART(continued) Start here for - - - - - - NO YES i Go to the restriction I YES Route table number LCR is selected (DLCl/PAR). Receive overflow ton~all cannot be completed. END -34- way as an area code. PERCEPTION,~,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMINGGUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILED LOGICFLOWCHART(continued) From Go to area code table (DLCl/ACT) to select the route table number. r-l Select the route table number with area code = HAC (DLCVPAR). NOTE: This is a 7- or 1O-digit number. - - - -35- PERCEPTION,&,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMINGGUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILED LOGICFLOWCHART(continued) From Pag: 32 w--9-l IICIYG LV “CT _,_.-_ ” I the restriction test I.^ ---Icnnr =jrnn “ldl uu,, cur.. -,,- codes at this tirr e before advancin& I( ,,in , this flowchart. YES ! 1 YES NO ) Receive overflow tone-call cannot be completed. v To END Route table number LDI is selected in DLClIPAR. -36- PERCEPTION,h,x LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILEDLOGICFLOWCHART(continued) From From Start here for restricted test for regular DDD call or 800 WATS call. -. NO NOTE: An 800 WATS in this tab/e is treated as a regular call with an 800 area code. -- _- Go to the restriction class table (DTOU CLS) indicated by NO Route table number LCR is selected (DLCUPAR). I t _ code t aliowea.! NO included in the , 1 Receive overflow tone-call cannot be completed. -37- NOTE: See AOC tab/es O-31 forany office code exception to this area code for this particular TR c/ass number. PERCEPTION,h,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMINGGUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILED LOGICFLOWCHART(continued) From I Start here for Route Table number selection for a regular DDD call or an 800 WATS call (when TFC = N). I I - - ------i- 1 YES I YES Select the appropriate route table number (with dialed area code) from the area code table (DLCi/ACT). Select the route table number (RN0 XX) from To 2-Y -38- PERCEPTION,&,, LCRil-R PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILED LOGICFLOWCHART(continued) While referring to the actual time, select the time schedule (SCHA, SCHB, and SCHC) (DLC2IRTB). Y YES aLo.LI”I COS - -39- - I denied NOTE: Automatic Callback may be used here. PERCEPTION,h,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMINGGUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILEDLOGICFLOWCHART(continued) From From n Pa:,3 39 i, Working from left to right (LC3 line), test each RN0 for idle trunk conditions. Select the first idle RNO. LC2 = NONE? NO Working from left to right (LC2 line), test each RN0 for idle trunk conditions. Select the first idle RNO. To; / YES LCl = NONE? Working from left to right (LCl line), test each RN0 for idle trunk conditions. Select the first idle RNO. -4o- YES . PERCEPTIONeb,, LCR/TR PROGRAMMING GUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILEDLOGICFLOWCHART(continued) YES I Receive Seize a trunk in trunk group XX as indicated by the selected RN0 in the respective route table (DLC2MTB). To YES NOTE: Trunk line must be electricallyconnected to enable the warning tone. warning Station user chose not to seize the most expensive trunk. I -41- I PERCEPTION,h,x LCFVTRPROGRAMMINGGUIDE MARCH 1991 DETAILED LOGICFLOWCHART(continued) Add the digit/ pause(s) in front of the remaining number as indicated by ADD (DLWMDT). + NO ADD = NONE? Send the number and generated pause(s) over the trunk line. 23 END -4% NOTE: In most cases, it is recommended to add a l-second pause either alone or prior to any added digit(s). , PERCEPTION,,,, Tl/DS-1 DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE SEPTEMBER1991 Perceptionl, & ex Tl/DS-1 DIGITALTRUNKINTERFACE APPENDIX#3 PRODUCTFEATURES PREREQUISITES and PROCEDURES for INSTALLATION and TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHARTS PERCEPTIONeh,, Tl/DS-1 DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE SEPTEMBER1991 Tl/DS-1 PERCEPTIONeh,, DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE TABLE OF CONTENTS PARAGRAPH 1. 1 .oo 1.10 2. 3. 3.00 3.10 3.20 3.30 3.40 3.50 3.60 3.70 3.80 4 4.00 SUBJECT INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................. General Information ....................................................................................... Requirements ................................................................................................ NDTU CONFIGURATION ................................................................................. PREREQUISITES AND PROCEDURES FOR INSTALLATION ...................... General .......................................................................................................... Specific Switch Settings ................................................................................ Installing NDTU ............................................................................................. Connecting to Channel Service Unit .............................................................. Connecting to Another PBX Closer than 655 Feet ........................................ Front Panel LED Overview ............................................................................ Alarm and Status Conditions ......................................................................... Loop Back Procedure .................................................................................... Cabling .......................................................................................................... TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................................... General .......................................................................................................... AlTACHMENT A .............................................................................................. PAGE 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 6 6 7 7 8 9 IO 10 10 21 FIGURE LIST FIGURE 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 TITLE DS-1 CONNECTION TO DIGITAL NETWORK ................................................ DS-1 CONNECTION VIA CSU ......................................................................... DS-1 CONNECTION VIA CSU AND CHANNEL BANK ................................... NDTU PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD LAYOUT .................................................. DS-1 CONNECTION TO DIGITAL NETWORK ................................................ REQUIRED CONNECTORS FOR DS-1 CONNECTION AT DISTANCES OF LESS THAN 655 FEET (200 METERS) ........................................................ LED POSITIONS .............................................................................................. RED ALARM ..................................................................................................... YELLOW ALARM ............................................................................................. BLUE ALARM ................................................................................................... FALT LED ......................................................................................................... BSY LED ........................................................................................................... FLOWCHART SYMBOLS ................................................................................. PAGE 1 1 2 3 6 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 TABLE LIST TABLE 1 2 TITLE TRANSMIT EQUALIZER SETTING SWITCH .................................................. S3-NDTU SLOT POSITION .............................................................................. PAGE 4 4 PERCEPTIONeke, Tl/DS-1 DIGITALTRUNKINTERFACE SEPTEMBER1991 TABLE LIST (CONT) TABLE 3 4 TITLE SIGNALING TYPE SELECTION SWITCHES .. . .. .. . . .. . .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . TERMINAL SEQUENCE & DESIGNATIONS CONNECTOR NUMBERS J7/J501 (PERCEPTION,,), J15/J515 (PERCEPTION,) NDTU TOO/T08 . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . PAGE 5 11 CHART LIST CHART 1 2 3 4 5 TITLE HARDWARE VERIFICATION .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . . FAULT CLASSIFICATION .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . . ALARM FAULTS . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. . . .. . .. .. .. . HARDWARE FAULTS .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. . FALT LED .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . PAGE 12 13 15 16 17 ‘If 1 INTRODUCTION ‘I - .A ,>H,vI-/ PERCEPTION,~,, Tl/DS-1 SEPTEMBER1991 I .I3 Applications: 1) A TI/DS-1 interface (span) can be connected to the network, and can provide up to 24 (in units of 4) FX, DID, TIE, and Loop Start or Ground Start CO trunks in any combination. A CSU is required for this configuration (see Figure 1). I .OO General Information 1.01 TheTl/DS-1 interface (NDTU) PCBprovides PERCEPTIONeLex with a capacity of up to 24 digital circuits. Up to two NDTU PCBs may be placed in a PERCEPTIONeLex system, so that a maximum of 48 digital circuits may be placed in service. (Attachment A describes the Tl/DS-1 interface in greater detail.) The second NDTU PCB must be installed in the expansion cabinet. PERCEPTIONeaex 1.02 Each NDTU PCB can be programmed to activate 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, or 24 of the digital trunks. The remaining slots can be assigned to analog trunks, so that a mix of analog and digital trunks can be switched in the PERCEPTIONekex systems. This internal “fractionalized” use of the Tl/DS-1 interface is unique in the industry. I .I 0 Requirements 1.11 Span: Each PERCEPTIONe,exTl span requires the following configuration: l One NDTU PCB for each Tl span (Tl/DS-1 interface). l A customer-provided Channel Service Unit (CSU) for each span connected to the network, or for a span between PBXs that are more than 655 feet apart (see Attachment B for CSU information). l A 30 foot amphenol-type to DB15 connector cable (PBX-to-CSU cable) is provided with each NDTU. FIGURE I-DS-1 CONNECTIONTO DIGITAL NETWORK 2) A Tl span can also be used to connect digital TIE trunks (Type I or Type II) between PERCEPTIONeLex and another PBX, with either Tl equipment, or with an analog PBX using channel banks (see Figure 2). A CSU is. required at each PBX, if the distance between IMPORTANT NOTE: The maximum distance between PERCEPTION,, and the CSWDSU is 30 feet. Toshiba provides the proper cable for this connection with each NDTU PCB. Its installation is required forproperoperation. I .I2 System: Each PERCEPTIONehex system requires the following configuration: l One NTWU-3 PCB. l D.01, or higher level software. l A cable between NTWU-3 and the first NDTU. (The cable is provided with each NDTU.) FIGURE2-DS-1 CONNECTIONVIA CSU -l- PERCEPTION,~,, Tl/OS-1 SEPTEMBER1991 ANALOG PBX PERCEPTION,,,, NDTU MAXIMUM 30FT csu E&M (TYPE I OR II) I IF OVER 655 FT FIGURE3-DS-1 CONNECTIONVIA CSU AND CHANNEL BANK the PERCEPTIONehex system and the PBX exceeds 655 feet (see Figure 3). NOTE: CSUs are required if the distance PBXs is greater than 655 feet. J2, and J3. The Jl and J2 connectors are used to connect the board to the backplane. The J3 connector, through a coax clock cable, is used to provide the NTWU-3 PCB (Time Switch/ Control Unit PCB) with a clock signal to the NDTU. The coax cable is provided with the NDTU PCB. between 2 NDTU CONFIGURATION 2.00 The NDTU interface figuration: has the following 5) LEDs: There is a total of six LEDs located on the front panel of the NDTU PCB. The function of each LED is defined in Paragraph 3.51. con- 3 PREREQUISITES AND PROCEDURES FOR INSTALLATION 1) Printed Circuit Board Layout: The NDTU consists of two PCBs (host and subassembly). Figure 4 shows the layout of the switches, strapping options, and connectors on the host PCB, and the LEDs on the front panel attached to the host PCB. 3.00 General NOTE: Please refer to Chapter 4 in the Installation section of the PERCEPTIONe,ex Installation and Maintenance manual. 2) Switches: There is a total of 11 switches between the host PCB and the front panel of the NDTU. The function of each switch is defined in Paragraph 3.11. 3.01 The installation in two sections: of the DS-1 trunk is described 3) Straps: There is a total of eight strapping options on the host PCB. The function of each strapping option is defined in Paragraph 3.12. 1) In PERCEPTIONeLex, 4) Connectors: There is a total of three connectors on the host PCB, and they are labeled Jl, 2) From PERCEPTIONe,ex tootherequipment, such as a Channel Service Unit. See Paragraphs 3.30, 3.40, and Attachment B. -2- see Paragraph 3.20. PERCEPTIONeb,, T-l/IX-l SEPTEMBER1991 --------- I^ SUBASSEMBLY PCB FlGURE4-NDTU PRINTED CIRCUITBOARD LAYOUT 3.10 Specific Switch Settings 2) S2-Transmit Equalizer setting switch (distancefrom PERCEPTIONe&ex to another PBX if CSWDSU is not used). (See Table 1.) 3.11 The initial (normal) setting of the switches is shown by a l symbol. The upper case “S” indicates the switch, and the lower case “s” indicates the function setting on the switch. 1) Sl-Mode sl s2: : l l selection ON-Robbed OFF-Future IMPORTANT NOTE: The maximum distance between PERCEPTIONHex and the CSWDSU is 30 feet. Toshiba provides the proper cable for this connection with each NDTU PCB. Its installation is required forproper operation. switch: bit signaling operation (normal) 3) S3-NDTU slot position: The NDTU PCB can be positioned in slots TOO and T08, in the main or expansion cabinet, respectively. This switch turns on the digital trunks in increments of 4. To use all 24 digital trunks, S3-(sl w s6) must be ON. To activate 12 digital trunks, S3-(sl M s3) must be ON. (See Table 2.) ON-Zero Code Suppression (ZCS) OFF-Binary Eight Zero Suppression (B8ZS) NOTE: Must check and match other side. s3: l s4: ON-Future OFF-Normal operation operation ON-Digital OFF-Digital Not used -3- Trunk active Trunk disabled PERCEPTIONeh,, Tl/DS-1 SEPTEMBER1991 TABLE 1 TRANSMIT EQUALIZERSETTINGSWITCH SH&T MEDIUM o- 150ft 150s450ft LONG 450 - 6.55 ft sl ON OFF OFF s2 OFF ON OFF s3 OFF OFF ON s4 OFF ON OFF s5 OFF OFF ON s6 OFF OFF NOT USED ON OFF NOT USED OFF ON NOT USED s7 s8 CO (Loop Start) mode CO (Ground Start) mode DID (2-wire loop signaling) TIE line (4-wire E&M, type 11) Sl l ON EXPANSION TO8 CHANNELS l-4 1-4 l ON 5-8 5-8 l ON 9- 12 9 - 12 13 ew16 13 - 16 17 - 20 17-20 21 -24 21 -24 OFF OFF ON 2) TB3 and TB4-Operation mode: l l-2 3 Slave mode (normal operation) 1 2-3 Master mode (testing). (Only used in Digital Networking Configuration.) One PBX must be master, and the other(s) slave(s). 3) TB5 and TBG-Loop back option: 1-2 3 Loop back (testing) l 1 2-3 No loop back (normal operation) OFF s3 ON 1) TB1 and TB2-ROM type selection: l l-2 3 Normal operation (64 Kbit ROM) 1 2-3 Future (256 Kbit ROM) (See Note 1.) OFF s2 Second OFF ON 3.12 The straps are shown as TB(x). The x in TB(x) indicates the number. The l symbol indicates the strapping option present set-up. TABLE 2-S3-NDTU SLOT POSITION MAIN TOO CHANNELS First OFF ON OFF s4 l ON 4) TB7-Incoming voice pad option (see Note 2): l 1-2 3 Through (normal operation) pad (reduce sidetone or 1 2-3 2dB-8dB echo) OFF s5 l ON OFF s6 l ON 5) TB8-Outgoing voice pad option: l 1-2 3 Through (normal operation) 1 2-3 2dB pad (reduce sidetone or echo) OFF NOTE: E
Source Exif Data:File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Page Count : 368 Page Mode : UseOutlines Has XFA : No Mod Date : 2002:01:02 18:18:28-06:00 Producer : Photoshop PDF Plug-in 1.0 Creation Date : 1999:04:06 17:05:38Z Author : EZ Manuals Modify Date : 2002:01:02 18:18:28-06:00 Create Date : 1999:04:06 17:05:38Z Metadata Date : 2002:01:02 18:18:28-06:00 Creator : EZ Manuals Page Layout : SinglePageEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools